369 motor management relay - ingersoll rand...

LISTED

52TL

IND.CONT. EQ.

E83849

GE Multilin

215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario, Canada L6E 1B3

Tel: (905) 294-6222, 1-800-547-8629 (North America)Fax: (905) 201-2098

Internet: http://www.GEmultilin.com

369 Motor Management Relay

Instruction Manual

369 Revision: 2.5x

Manual P/N: 1601-0077-BK (GEK-106288G)

Copyright © 2006 GE Multilin

gGE Industrial Systems

ISO9001:2000GE MULT I L

I N

RE

GISTERED

GE Multilin's Quality Management System is registered to

ISO9001:2000

QMI # 005094UL # A3775

http://www.GEmultilin.com

GE Multilin 369 Motor Management Relay iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 1.1 ORDERING1.1.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW...................................................................................... 1-11.1.2 ORDERING........................................................................................................ 1-11.1.3 CONTACT INFORMATION................................................................................ 1-21.1.4 ACCESSORIES ................................................................................................. 1-21.1.5 FIRMWARE HISTORY....................................................................................... 1-21.1.6 PC PROGRAM (SOFTWARE) HISTORY.......................................................... 1-31.1.7 369 FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY.......................................................................... 1-41.1.8 RELAY LABEL DEFINITION.............................................................................. 1-6

2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 OVERVIEW2.1.1 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................... 2-12.1.2 METERED QUANTITIES ................................................................................... 2-12.1.3 PROTECTION FEATURES ............................................................................... 2-22.1.4 ADDITIONAL FEATURES ................................................................................. 2-3

2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS2.2.1 INPUTS .............................................................................................................. 2-42.2.2 OUTPUTS .......................................................................................................... 2-52.2.3 METERING ........................................................................................................ 2-62.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS.......................................................................................... 2-62.2.5 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ............................................................................... 2-72.2.6 MONITORING ELEMENTS ............................................................................... 2-92.2.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS ..................................................................................... 2-92.2.8 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................. 2-92.2.9 APPROVALS/CERTIFICATION......................................................................... 2-92.2.10 TYPE TEST STANDARDS .............................................................................. 2-102.2.11 PRODUCTION TESTS .................................................................................... 2-10

3. INSTALLATION 3.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION3.1.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION ......................................................................... 3-1

3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION3.2.1 369 TERMINAL LIST ......................................................................................... 3-23.2.2 269 TO 369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST ................................................... 3-33.2.3 MTM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST....................................................... 3-43.2.4 MPM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST....................................................... 3-43.2.5 TERMINAL LAYOUT.......................................................................................... 3-5

3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION3.3.1 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM ............................................................................ 3-63.3.2 TYPICAL WIRING.............................................................................................. 3-73.3.3 CONTROL POWER ........................................................................................... 3-73.3.4 PHASE CURRENT (CT) INPUTS ...................................................................... 3-73.3.5 GROUND CURRENT INPUTS .......................................................................... 3-83.3.6 ZERO SEQUENCE GROUND CT PLACEMENT .............................................. 3-83.3.7 PHASE VOLTAGE (VT/PT) INPUTS ................................................................. 3-93.3.8 BACKSPIN VOLTAGE INPUTS......................................................................... 3-93.3.9 RTD INPUTS.................................................................................................... 3-103.3.10 DIGITAL INPUTS ............................................................................................. 3-103.3.11 ANALOG OUTPUTS ........................................................................................ 3-113.3.12 REMOTE DISPLAY.......................................................................................... 3-113.3.13 OUTPUT RELAYS ........................................................................................... 3-123.3.14 RS485 COMMUNICATIONS............................................................................ 3-13

3.4 REMOTE RTD MODULE (RRTD)3.4.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION ....................................................................... 3-143.4.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ........................................................................ 3-15

3.5 CT INSTALLATION3.5.1 PHASE CT INSTALLATION............................................................................. 3-163.5.2 5 AMP GROUND CT INSTALLATION ............................................................. 3-173.5.3 HGF (50:0.025) GROUND CT INSTALLATION............................................... 3-18

iv 369 Motor Management Relay GE Multilin

TABLE OF CONTENTS

4. USER INTERFACES 4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE4.1.1 DISPLAY.............................................................................................................4-14.1.2 LED INDICATORS..............................................................................................4-14.1.3 RS232 PROGRAM PORT ..................................................................................4-14.1.4 KEYPAD .............................................................................................................4-24.1.5 SETPOINT ENTRY.............................................................................................4-2

4.2 ENERVISTA 369 SETUP INTERFACE4.2.1 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS...........................................4-34.2.2 INSTALLING ENERVISTA 369 SETUP .............................................................4-3

4.3 CONNECTING ENERVISTA 369 SETUP TO THE RELAY4.3.1 CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS..................................................4-54.3.2 USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE .......................................................4-64.3.3 CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS ...........................................4-64.3.4 CONNECTING TO THE RELAY.........................................................................4-7

4.4 WORKING WITH SETPOINTS AND SETPOINT FILES4.4.1 ENGAGING A DEVICE.......................................................................................4-94.4.2 ENTERING SETPOINTS....................................................................................4-94.4.3 FILE SUPPORT................................................................................................4-104.4.4 USING SETPOINTS FILES ..............................................................................4-10

4.5 UPGRADING RELAY FIRMWARE4.5.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................4-154.5.2 SAVING SETPOINTS TO A FILE.....................................................................4-154.5.3 LOADING NEW FIRMWARE............................................................................4-15

4.6 ADVANCED ENERVISTA 369 SETUP FEATURES4.6.1 TRIGGERED EVENTS .....................................................................................4-174.6.2 TRENDING .......................................................................................................4-174.6.3 WAVEFORM CAPTURE (TRACE MEMORY)..................................................4-184.6.4 PHASORS ........................................................................................................4-204.6.5 EVENT RECORDER ........................................................................................4-214.6.6 MODBUS USER MAP ......................................................................................4-224.6.7 VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES............................................................................4-22

4.7 USING ENERVISTA VIEWPOINT WITH THE 3694.7.1 PLUG AND PLAY EXAMPLE ...........................................................................4-23

5. SETPOINTS 5.1 OVERVIEW5.1.1 SETPOINTS MAIN MENU..................................................................................5-1

5.2 S1 369 SETUP5.2.1 SETPOINT ACCESS ..........................................................................................5-45.2.2 DISPLAY PREFERENCES.................................................................................5-45.2.3 369 COMMUNICATIONS ...................................................................................5-55.2.4 REAL TIME CLOCK ...........................................................................................5-75.2.5 WAVEFORM CAPTURE ....................................................................................5-75.2.6 EVENT RECORDS.............................................................................................5-85.2.7 MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD ................................................................................5-85.2.8 DEFAULT MESSAGES ......................................................................................5-85.2.9 CLEAR/PRESET DATA......................................................................................5-95.2.10 MODIFY OPTIONS...........................................................................................5-105.2.11 FACTORY SERVICE........................................................................................5-10

5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP5.3.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................5-115.3.2 CT/VT SETUP ..................................................................................................5-115.3.3 MONITORING SETUP .....................................................................................5-125.3.4 BLOCK FUNCTIONS........................................................................................5-165.3.5 OUTPUT RELAY SETUP .................................................................................5-175.3.6 CONTROL FUNCTIONS ..................................................................................5-18

5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION5.4.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................5-245.4.2 THERMAL MODEL...........................................................................................5-255.4.3 OVERLOAD CURVES......................................................................................5-26

GE Multilin 369 Motor Management Relay v

TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.4.4 OVERLOAD ALARM........................................................................................ 5-34

5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS5.5.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 5-355.5.2 SHORT CIRCUIT ............................................................................................. 5-355.5.3 MECHANICAL JAM ......................................................................................... 5-365.5.4 UNDERCURRENT........................................................................................... 5-375.5.5 CURRENT UNBALANCE................................................................................. 5-385.5.6 GROUND FAULT............................................................................................. 5-39

5.6 S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS5.6.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 5-415.6.2 ACCELERATION TRIP .................................................................................... 5-415.6.3 START INHIBITS ............................................................................................. 5-415.6.4 BACKSPIN DETECTION ................................................................................. 5-43

5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE5.7.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 5-445.7.2 LOCAL RTD PROTECTION ............................................................................ 5-445.7.3 REMOTE RTD PROTECTION......................................................................... 5-455.7.4 OPEN RTD ALARM ......................................................................................... 5-485.7.5 SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM................................................................... 5-485.7.6 LOSS OF RRTD COMMS ALARM .................................................................. 5-48

5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS5.8.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 5-495.8.2 UNDERVOLTAGE ........................................................................................... 5-495.8.3 OVERVOLTAGE .............................................................................................. 5-505.8.4 PHASE REVERSAL......................................................................................... 5-505.8.5 UNDERFREQUENCY...................................................................................... 5-515.8.6 OVERFREQUENCY ........................................................................................ 5-52

5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS5.9.1 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 5-535.9.2 LEAD POWER FACTOR ................................................................................. 5-545.9.3 LAG POWER FACTOR.................................................................................... 5-545.9.4 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER ....................................................................... 5-555.9.5 NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER ..................................................................... 5-565.9.6 UNDERPOWER............................................................................................... 5-565.9.7 REVERSE POWER ......................................................................................... 5-57

5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS5.10.1 DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTIONS ......................................................................... 5-585.10.2 SPARE SWITCH.............................................................................................. 5-605.10.3 EMERGENCY RESTART ................................................................................ 5-605.10.4 DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH ................................................................................ 5-615.10.5 SPEED SWITCH.............................................................................................. 5-615.10.6 REMOTE RESET............................................................................................. 5-61

5.11 S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS5.11.1 ANALOG OUTPUTS ........................................................................................ 5-62

5.12 S11 369 TESTING5.12.1 TEST OUTPUT RELAYS ................................................................................. 5-635.12.2 TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS.............................................................................. 5-63

6. ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU ........................................................................ 6-1

6.2 A1 STATUS6.2.1 MOTOR STATUS............................................................................................... 6-36.2.2 LAST TRIP DATA .............................................................................................. 6-36.2.3 DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES................................................................................ 6-46.2.4 START BLOCK STATUS ................................................................................... 6-46.2.5 DIGITAL INPUT STATUS .................................................................................. 6-56.2.6 OUTPUT RELAY STATUS ................................................................................ 6-56.2.7 REAL TIME CLOCK........................................................................................... 6-56.2.8 FIELDBUS SPECIFICATION STATUS.............................................................. 6-6

vi 369 Motor Management Relay GE Multilin

TABLE OF CONTENTS

6.3 A2 METERING DATA6.3.1 CURRENT METERING ......................................................................................6-76.3.2 VOLTAGE METERING.......................................................................................6-76.3.3 POWER METERING ..........................................................................................6-86.3.4 BACKSPIN METERING......................................................................................6-86.3.5 LOCAL RTD........................................................................................................6-96.3.6 REMOTE RTD ....................................................................................................6-96.3.7 OVERALL STATOR RTD ...................................................................................6-96.3.8 DEMAND METERING ......................................................................................6-106.3.9 PHASORS ........................................................................................................6-10

6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA6.4.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................6-126.4.2 MOTOR DATA..................................................................................................6-126.4.3 LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS.................................................................................6-136.4.4 REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS .............................................................................6-13

6.5 A4 STATISTICAL DATA6.5.1 TRIP COUNTERS ............................................................................................6-146.5.2 MOTOR STATISTICS.......................................................................................6-15

6.6 A5 EVENT RECORD6.6.1 EVENT RECORDS...........................................................................................6-16

6.7 A6 RELAY INFORMATION6.7.1 MODEL INFORMATION...................................................................................6-176.7.2 FIRMWARE VERSION .....................................................................................6-17

7. APPLICATIONS 7.1 269-369 COMPARISON7.1.1 369 AND 269PLUS COMPARISON ...................................................................7-1

7.2 369 FAQS7.2.1 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQS) ...................................................7-2

7.3 369 DOS AND DONT’S7.3.1 DOS AND DONT’S .............................................................................................7-5

7.4 CT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION7.4.1 CT SPECIFICATION ..........................................................................................7-77.4.2 CT SELECTION..................................................................................................7-7

7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE7.5.1 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE..............................................................................7-9

7.6 APPLICATIONS7.6.1 MOTOR STATUS DETECTION........................................................................7-137.6.2 SELECTION OF COOL TIME CONSTANTS....................................................7-147.6.3 THERMAL MODEL...........................................................................................7-157.6.4 RTD BIAS FEATURE .......................................................................................7-167.6.5 THERMAL CAPACITY USED CALCULATION.................................................7-177.6.6 START INHIBIT ................................................................................................7-187.6.7 TWO-PHASE CT CONFIGURATION ...............................................................7-207.6.8 GROUND FAULT DETECTION ON UNGROUNDED SYSTEMS....................7-217.6.9 RTD CIRCUITRY..............................................................................................7-227.6.10 REDUCED RTD LEAD NUMBER APPLICATION............................................7-237.6.11 TWO WIRE RTD LEAD COMPENSATION ......................................................7-247.6.12 AUTO TRANSFORMER STARTER WIRING...................................................7-24

8. TESTING 8.1 TEST SETUP8.1.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................8-18.1.2 SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP..........................................................8-1

8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING8.2.1 PHASE CURRENT ACCURACY TEST..............................................................8-28.2.2 VOLTAGE INPUT ACCURACY TEST................................................................8-28.2.3 GROUND (1 A / 5 A) ACCURACY TEST ...........................................................8-3

GE Multilin 369 Motor Management Relay vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

8.2.4 50:0.025 GROUND ACCURACY TEST............................................................. 8-38.2.5 RTD ACCURACY TEST .................................................................................... 8-48.2.6 DIGITAL INPUTS ............................................................................................... 8-58.2.7 ANALOG INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ................................................................... 8-58.2.8 OUTPUT RELAYS ............................................................................................. 8-6

8.3 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING8.3.1 OVERLOAD CURVE TEST ............................................................................... 8-78.3.2 POWER MEASUREMENT TEST ...................................................................... 8-78.3.3 VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL TEST............................................................... 8-88.3.4 SHORT CIRCUIT TEST..................................................................................... 8-8

9. COMMUNICATIONS 9.1 OVERVIEW9.1.1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE................................................................................ 9-19.1.2 PROFIBUS COMMUNICATIONS ...................................................................... 9-19.1.3 DEVICENET COMMUNICATIONS .................................................................... 9-19.1.4 MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS......................................................................... 9-29.1.5 MODBUS/TCP COMMUNICATIONS................................................................. 9-2

9.2 PROFIBUS-DP COMMUNICATIONS9.2.1 PROFIBUS COMMUNICATION OPTIONS ....................................................... 9-49.2.2 369 PROFIBUS-DP PARAMETERIZATION ...................................................... 9-49.2.3 369 PROFIBUS-DP CONFIGURATION ............................................................ 9-49.2.4 369 PROFIBUS-DP DIAGNOSTICS.................................................................. 9-8

9.3 PROFIBUS-DPV1 COMMUNICATIONS9.3.1 369 PROFIBUS-DPV1 PARAMETERIZATION................................................ 9-119.3.2 369 PROFIBUS CONFIGURATION................................................................. 9-119.3.3 369 PROFIBUS INPUT DATA ......................................................................... 9-129.3.4 369 PROFIBUS OUTPUT DATA ..................................................................... 9-139.3.5 369 PROFIBUS DIAGNOSTICS ...................................................................... 9-139.3.6 369 PROFIBUS-DPV1 ACYCLICAL COMMUNICATION ................................ 9-14

9.4 DEVICENET PROTOCOL9.4.1 DEVICENET COMMUNICATIONS .................................................................. 9-159.4.2 IDENTITY OBJECT (CLASS CODE 01H) ....................................................... 9-159.4.3 MESSAGE ROUTER (CLASS CODE 02H) ..................................................... 9-159.4.4 DEVICENET OBJECT (CLASS CODE 03H) ................................................... 9-169.4.5 ASSEMBLY OBJECT (CLASS CODE 04H) .................................................... 9-169.4.6 DEVICENET CONNECTION OBJECT (CLASS CODE 05H) .......................... 9-189.4.7 ACKNOWLEDGE HANDLER OBJECT (CLASS CODE 2BH)......................... 9-199.4.8 I/O DATA INPUT MAPPING OBJECT (CLASS CODE A0H)........................... 9-199.4.9 I/O DATA OUTPUT MAPPING OBJECT (CLASS CODE A1H)....................... 9-209.4.10 PARAMETER DATA INPUT MAPPING OBJECT (CLASS CODE B0H) ......... 9-219.4.11 DEVICENET DATA FORMATS ....................................................................... 9-27

9.5 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL9.5.1 DATA FRAME FORMAT AND DATA RATE .................................................... 9-309.5.2 DATA PACKET FORMAT ................................................................................ 9-309.5.3 ERROR CHECKING ........................................................................................ 9-309.5.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM...................................................................................... 9-319.5.5 TIMING............................................................................................................. 9-319.5.6 SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS ............................................................ 9-319.5.7 ERROR RESPONSES..................................................................................... 9-329.5.8 MODBUS COMMANDS ................................................................................... 9-33

9.6 MEMORY MAP9.6.1 MEMORY MAP INFORMATION ...................................................................... 9-349.6.2 USER DEFINABLE MEMORY MAP AREA ..................................................... 9-349.6.3 EVENT RECORDER........................................................................................ 9-349.6.4 WAVEFORM CAPTURE.................................................................................. 9-349.6.5 MODBUS MEMORY MAP ............................................................................... 9-359.6.6 FORMAT CODES ............................................................................................ 9-87

A. REVISIONS A.1 CHANGE NOTES

viii 369 Motor Management Relay GE Multilin

TABLE OF CONTENTS

A.1.1 REVISION HISTORY......................................................................................... A-1A.1.2 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BK....................................................................... A-1A.1.3 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BJ ....................................................................... A-1A.1.4 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BH ...................................................................... A-2A.1.5 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BG ...................................................................... A-2A.1.6 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BF....................................................................... A-2A.1.7 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BE....................................................................... A-2A.1.8 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BD ...................................................................... A-2A.1.9 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BC ...................................................................... A-2A.1.10 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BB....................................................................... A-3A.1.11 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BA....................................................................... A-3A.1.12 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-B9 ....................................................................... A-3A.1.13 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-B8 ....................................................................... A-3

A.2 WARRANTYA.2.1 WARRANTY INFORMATION ............................................................................ A-4

INDEX

GE Multilin 369 Motor Management Relay 1-1

1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 ORDERING

11 INTRODUCTION 1.1ORDERING 1.1.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW

The 369 Motor Management Relay is a digital relay that provides protection and monitoring for three phase motors andtheir associated mechanical systems. A unique feature of the 369 is its ability to ‘learn’ individual motor parameters and toadapt itself to each application. Values such as motor inrush current, cooling rates and acceleration time may be used toimprove the 369’s protective capabilities.

The 369 offers optimum motor protection where other relays cannot, by using the FlexCurve™ custom overload curve, orone of the fifteen standard curves.

The 369 has one RS232 front panel port and three RS485 rear ports. The Modbus RTU protocol is standard to all ports.Setpoints can be entered via the front keypad or by using the EnerVista 369 Setup software and a computer. Status, actualvalues and troubleshooting information are also available via the front panel display or via communications.

As an option, the 369 can individually monitor up to 12 RTDs. These can be from the stator, bearings, ambient or drivenequipment. The type of RTD used is software selectable. Optionally available as an accessory is the remote RTD modulewhich can be linked to the 369 via a fibre optic or RS485 connection.

The optional metering package provides VT inputs for voltage and power elements. It also provides metering of V, kW, kvar,kVA, PF, Hz, and MWhrs. Three additional user configurable analog outputs are included with this option along with oneanalog output included as part of the base unit.

The Back-Spin Detection (B) option enables the 369 to detect the flow reversal of a pump motor and enable timely and safemotor restarting. 369 options are available when ordering the relay or as upgrades to the relay in the field. Field upgradesare via an option enabling passcode available from GE Multilin, which is unique to each relay and option.

1.1.2 ORDERING

Select the basic model and the desired features from the selection guide below:

Notes: One Analog Output is available with the 369 base model. The other three Analog Outputs can beobtained by purchasing the metering or backspin options.The control power (HI or LO) must be specified with all orders. If a feature is not required, a 0 must beplaced in the order code. All order codes have 10 digits. The 369 is available in a non-drawout version only.

Examples: 369-HI-R-0-0-0-0 369 with HI voltage control power and 12 RTD inputs369-LO-0-M-0-0-0 369 relay with LO voltage control power and metering option

369369 | | | | | | Base unit (no RTD)

HI | | | | | 50-300 VDC / 40-265 VAC control powerLO | | | | | 20-60 VDC / 20-48 VAC control power

R | | | | Optional 12 RTD inputs (built-in)0 | | | | No optional RTD inputs

M | | | Optional metering packageB | | | Optional backspin detection (incl. metering)0 | | | No optional metering or backspin detection

F | | Optional Fiber Optic Port0 | | No optional Fiber Optic Port

E | Optional Modbus/TCP protocol interfaceP | Optional Profibus-DP protocol interface

P1 | Optional Profibus-DPV1 protocol interfaceD | Optional DeviceNet protocol interface0 | No optional protocol interfaces

H Harsh environment option0 No harsh environment option

1-2 369 Motor Management Relay GE Multilin

1.1 ORDERING 1 INTRODUCTION

11.1.3 CONTACT INFORMATION

GE Multilin contact information and call center for product support is shown below:

GE Multilin215 Anderson AvenueMarkham, OntarioCanada L6E 1B3

Telephone: 905-294-6222 or 1-800-547-8629 (North America), +34 94 485 88 00 (Europe)Fax: 905-201-2098 (North America), +34 94 485 88 45 (Europe)

E-mail: [email protected] Page: http://www.GEmultilin.com

1.1.4 ACCESSORIES

EnerVista 369 Setup software: Setup and monitoring software provided free with each relay.

RRTD: Remote RTD Module. Connects to the 369 via a fibre optic or RS485 connection. Allows remote meter-ing and programming for up to 12 RTDs.

F485: Communications converter between RS232 and RS485 / fibre optic. Interfaces a PC to the relay.

CT: 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 750, 1000 (1 A or 5 A secondaries)

HGF: Ground CTs (50:0.025) used for sensitive earth fault detection on high resistance grounded systems.

515: Blocking and test module. Provides effective trip blocking and relay isolation.

DEMO: Metal carry case in which 369 is mounted.

FPC15: Remote faceplate cable, 15'.

1.1.5 FIRMWARE HISTORY

Table 1–1: FIRMWARE HISTORY (SHEET 1 OF 2)FIRMWARE REVISION BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE RELEASE DATE53CMB110.000 Production Release June 14, 199953CMB111.000 Changes to Backspin Detection algorithm June 24, 199953CMB112.000 Changes to Backspin Detection algorithm July 2, 199953CMB120.000 Capability to work with the Remote RTD module October 15, 199953CMB130.000 Improvements to the Remote RTD communications January 3, 200053CMB140.000 Changes to Backspin Detection algorithm and improved RS232 communications March 27, 200053CMB145.000 Minor firmware changes June 9, 200053CMB160.000 Profibus protocol, waveform capture, phasor display, single analog output,

demand power and current, power consumptionOctober 12, 2000

53CMB161.000 Minor firmware changes October 19, 200053CMB162.000 Minor firmware changes November 30, 200053CMB170.000 Autorestart feature added February 9, 200153CMB180.000 Modbus/TCP feature added June 15, 200153CMB190.000 Number of Event Recorders increased to 250; Hottest Overall RTD value added November 23, 200153CMB201.000 Added Starter Failure, MWhrs as analog output parameter, and Motor Load

Averaging feature.April 16, 2004

53CMB210.000 Added support for variable frequency drives; minor changes to Modbus TCP. November 5, 200453CMB220.000 Implementation of DeviceNet protocol and starter operation monitor. April 11, 200553CMB230.000 Implemented Profibus DPV1, Force Outputs and Protection Blocking. September 19, 200553CMB240.000 Custom Curve enhancement, increase range from 0 to 32767 to 0 to 65534. November 21, 2005

http://www.GEmultilin.com



1

1.1.6 PC PROGRAM (SOFTWARE) HISTORY

53CMB250.000 Implementation of start control relay timer setting for reduced voltage starting, additional Modbus address added for starts/hour lockout time remaining, correction to date and time Broadcast command Modbus addresses, fix for latched resets with multiple local/remote assigned relays, fix for repeated “Motor Stopped” and “Motor Running” events.

April 28, 2006

Table 1–2: SOFTWARE HISTORYPC PROGRAM REVISION

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES RELEASE DATE

1.10 Production Release June 14, 19991.20 Capability to work with the Remote RTD module October 15, 19991.30 Capability to communicate effectively with version 1.30 firmware January 3, 20001.40 Changes made for new firmware release March 27, 20001.45 Changes made for new firmware release June 9, 20001.60 Profibus protocol, waveform capture, phasor display, single analog output,

demand power and current, power consumptionOctober 23, 2000

1.70 Changes made for new firmware release February 9, 20011.80 Changes made for new firmware release June 7, 20011.90 Changes made for new firmware release November 23, 20012.00 Changes made for new firmware release September 9, 20033.01 New features and enhancements August 16, 20043.11 Added support for firmware revision 2.1x November 16, 20043.20 Changes made for firmware revision 2.2x April 13, 20053.30 Changes made for firmware revision 2.3x September 19, 20053.40 Changes made for firmware revision 2.4x November 25, 20053.50 Changes made for firmware revision 2.5x May 15, 2006

Table 1–1: FIRMWARE HISTORY (SHEET 2 OF 2)FIRMWARE REVISION BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE RELEASE DATE



11.1.7 369 FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY

The front view for all 369 models is shown below, along with the rear view showing the Modbus/TCP port and the Profibusport. The rear view for models with the DeviceNet port is shown in the subsequent figure.

Figure 1–1: FRONT AND REAR VIEW840702BK.CDR

FIBER OPTIC DATA LINK ( F )For harsh enviroments and orhook up to RRTD

PROFIBUS-DP ( P )

MODBUS/TCP ( E )PROFIBUS-DPV1 ( P1 )

BACKSPIN DETECTION ( B )20mV to 480V RMS

3 x RS485 Ports3 Independent modbuschannels

1 ANALOG OUTPUT ( BASE UNIT )3 ANALOG OUTPUTS (M,B)

VOLTAGE INPUTS ( M )0-240V wye or delta VTconnections.

GROUND CT INPUTS5A, 1A and 50:0.25 taps

12 RTD INPUTS ( R )Field selectable type

CURRENT INPUTS3 Phase CT inputs5A, 1A, taps

CONTROL POWERHI: 50-300 VDC/40-265 VACLO: 20-60 VDC / 20-48 VAC

4 OUTPUT RELAYSProgrammable alarm and tripconditions activated byprogrammable setpoints,switch input, remotecommunication control

Customer AccessibleFuse

DIGITAL INPUTS

DISPLAY40 Character alpha-numericLCD display for viewingactual values, causesof alarms and trips, andprogramming setpoints

STATUS INDICATORSLEDs indicate if motor isbackspinning, RRTD isconnected, metering isenabled and com. status

HELP KEYHelp key can be pressed atany time to provide additionalinformation

COMPUTER INTERFACERS232 comm port for con-necting to a PC. Use fordownloading setpoints,monitoring, data collection &printing reports.

KEYPADUsed to select the displayof actual values, causes ofalarms, causes of trips, faultdiagnosis, and to programsetpoints

Rugged, corrosion andflame retardent case.

STATUS INDICATORS4 LEDs indicate when anoutput is activated. Whenan LED is lit, the cause ofthe output relay operationwill be shown on the display.

indicates that aself-diagnostic test failed.SERVICE LED



1

Figure 1–2: REAR VIEW (DEVICENET MODEL)840839A1.CDR

DeviceNetOption (D)



11.1.8 RELAY LABEL DEFINITION

1. The 369 order code at the time of leaving the factory.

2. The serial number of the 369.

3. The firmware installed at the factory. Note that this may no longer be the currently installed firmware as it may havebeen upgraded in the field. The current firmware revision can be checked in the actual values section of the 369.

4. Specifications for the output relay contacts.

5. Certifications the 369 conforms with or has been approved to.

6. Factory installed options. These are based on the order code. Note that the 369 may have had options upgraded in thefield. The actual values section of the 369 can be checked to verify this.

7. Control power ratings for the 369 as ordered. Based on the HI/LO rating from the order code.

8. Pollution degree.

9. Overvoltage category.

10. IP code.

11. Modification number for any factory-ordered mods.

12. Insulative voltage rating.

CEg

INPUT POWER:

MODEL: 369-HI-R-B-F-P-0

MAXIMUM CONTACT RATING250 VAC 8A RESISTIVE1/4 HP 125 VAC 1/2 HP 250 VAC

SERIAL No: M53B05000001

FIRMWARE: 53CMB220.000

POLLUTION DEGREE: 2 IP CODE: 50X

50-300 VDC40-265 VAC485mA MAX.50/60Hz or DC

MOD:

12 RTDs:

BACKSPIN

FIBER OPTIC PORT

PROFIBUS

OPTIONS

INSULATIVE VOLTAGE: 2

NONEOVERVOLTAGE CATAGORY: II

1

7

2

8

3

9

4

10 11

5 6

12840350A8.CDR

UL


2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 OVERVIEW

2

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1OVERVIEW 2.1.1 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS

Motor protection and management shall be provided by a digital relay. Protective functions shall include:

• phase overload standard curves (51)

• overload by custom programmable curve (51)

• I2t modeling (49)

• current unbalance / single phase detection (46)

• starts per hour and time between starts

• short circuit (50)

• ground fault (50G/50N 51G/51N)

• mechanical jam / stall

Optional functions shall include:

• under / overvoltage (27/59)

• phase reversal (47)

• underpower (37)

• power factor (55)

• stator / bearing overtemperature with twelve (12) inde-pendent RTD inputs (49/38)

• backspin detection

Management functions shall include:

• statistical data

• pre-trip data (last 40 events)

• ability to learn, display and integrate critical parame-ters to maximize motor protection

• a keypad with 40 character display

• flash memory

The relay shall be capable of displaying important metering functions, including phase voltages, kilowatts, kvars, power fac-tor, frequency and MWhr. In addition, undervoltage and low power factor alarm and trip levels shall be field programmable.The communications interface shall include one front RS232 port and three independent rear RS485 ports with supportingPC software, thus allowing easy setpoint programming, local retrieval of information and flexibility in communication withSCADA and engineering workstations.

2.1.2 METERED QUANTITIES

METERED QUANTITY UNITS OPTIONPhase Currents and Current Demand AmpsMotor Load × FLAUnbalance Current %Ground Current AmpsInput Switch Status Open / ClosedRelay Output Status (De) EnergizedRTD Temperature °C or °F RBackspin Frequency Hz BPhase/Line Voltages Volts MFrequency Hz MPower Factor lead / lag MReal Power and Real Power Demand Watts MReactive Power and Reactive Power Demand Vars MApparent Power and Apparent Power Demand VA MReal Power Consumption MWhrs MReactive Power Consumption/Generation ±Mvarhrs M


2.1 OVERVIEW 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2

2.1.3 PROTECTION FEATURES

ANSI/IEEE DEVICE

PROTECTION FEATURES OPTION TRIP ALARM BLOCKSTART

14 Speed Switch •27 Undervoltage M • • •37 Undercurrent / Underpower /M • •38 Bearing RTD R or RRTD • •46 Current Unbalance • •47 Voltage Phase Reversal M •49 Stator RTD R or RRTD • •50 Short Circuit & Backup •

50G/51G Ground Fault & Ground Fault Backup • •51 Overload • • •55 Power Factor M • •59 Overvoltage M • •66 Starts per Hour/Time Between Starts •74 Alarm •81 Over/Under Frequency M • •86 Lockout •87 Differential Switch •

General Switch • •Reactive Power M • •Thermal Capacity •Start Inhibit (thermal capacity available) •Restart Block (Backspin Timer) •Mechanical Jam • •Acceleration Timer •Ambient RTD R or RRTD • •Short/Low temp RTD R or RRTD •Broken/Open RTD R or RRTD •Loss of RRTD Communications RRTD •Trip Counter •Self Test/Service •Backspin Detection B •Current Demand •kW Demand M •kvar Demand M •kVA Demand M •Starter Failure •Reverse Power M •


2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1 OVERVIEW

2

2.1.4 ADDITIONAL FEATURES

Figure 2–1: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM

FEATURE OPTIONModbus/TCP protocol Ethernet interface EProfibus-DP rear communication port PProfibus-DPV1 rear communication port P1DeviceNet protocol interface DUser Definable Baud Rate (1200-19200)Flash Memory for easy firmware updatesFront RS232 communication portRear RS485 communication portRear fiber optic port FRTD type is user definable R or RRTD4 User Definable Analog Outputs(0 to 1 mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA)

M

Windows based PC program for setting up and monitoring

50G52

4 ISOLATEDANALOGOUTPUTS

METERINGV, W, Var, VA, PF, Hz

METERINGA, Celsius51 37

50

BACKUP

OPTIONAL METERING (M)

BUSVV

55

50

27 47 59

14

87

49 38

86

74

14

87

SPEED DEVICE

3

DIFFERENTIAL

INPUTS

RTDs

AMBIENT AIR

BREAKEROR FUSED

CONTACTOR

RS232

START

RS485RS485RS485

STATORBEARINGAMBIENT

840701B1.CDR

RELAY CONTACTS

AMBIENTSTATOR

BEARING

50G51G

4666


2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2

2.2TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSSpecifications are subject to change without notice.

2.2.1 INPUTS

CONTROL POWERLO range: DC: 20 to 60 V DC

AC: 20 to 48 V AC at 50/60 HzHI range: DC: 50 to 300 V DC

AC: 40 to 265 V AC at 50/60 HzPower: nominal: 20 VA; maximum: 65 VAHoldup: non-failsafe trip: 200 ms; failsafe trip: 100 ms

FUSET 3.15 A H 250 V (5 × 20 mm)Timelag high breaking capacity

PHASE CURRENT INPUTS (CT)CT input (rated): 1 A and 5 A secondaryCT primary: 1 to 5000 ARange:

for 50/60 Hz nominal frequency: 0.05 to 20 × CT primary ampsfor variable frequency: 0.1 to 20 × CT primary amps

Full Scale: 20 × CT primary amps or 65535 A maximumFrequency: 20 to 100 HzConversion: True RMS, 1.04 ms/sampleAccuracy:

at ≤ 2 × CT: ±0.5% of 2 × CT for 50/60 Hz nominal freq.±1.0% of 2 × CT for variable frequency (for sinusoidal waveforms)

at > 2 × CT: ±1.0% of 20 × CT for 50/60 Hz nominal freq.±3.0% of 12 × CT or less for variable fre-quency (for sinusoidal waveforms)

PHASE CT BURDEN

PHASE CT CURRENT WITHSTAND

DIGITAL / SWITCH INPUTSInputs: 6 optically isolatedInput type: Dry Contact (< 800 Ω)Function: Programmable

GROUND CURRENT INPUT (GF CT)CT Input (rated): 1 A/5 A secondary and 50:0.025CT Primary: 1 to 5000 A (1 A/5 A)Range: 0.1 to 1.0 × CT primary (1 A/5 A)

0.05 to 16.0 A (50:0.025)Full Scale: 1.0 × CT primary (1 A/5 A)

25 A (50:0.025)Frequency: 20 to 100 HzConversion: True RMS 1.04ms/sampleAccuracy at 50/60 Hz:

for 1 A/5 A: ±1.0% of full scale (1 A/5 A)for 50:0.025 ±0.07 A at <1 A

±0.20 A at <16 AAccuracy at variable frequency:

for 1 A tap: ±1.5% for 40 to 100 Hz±2.5% for 20 to 39 Hz

for 5 A tap: ±2% for 40 to 100 Hz±3% for 20 to 39 Hz

for 50:0.025: ±0.2 A at <1 A±0.6 A at <16 A

GROUND CT BURDEN

GROUND CT CURRENT WITHSTAND

PHASE/LINE VOLTAGE INPUT (VT) (Option M)VT ratio: 1.00 to 240.00:1 in steps of 0.01VT secondary: 240 V AC (full scale)Range: 0.05 to 1.00 × full scaleFrequency: 20 to 100 HzConversion: True RMS 1.04 ms/sampleAccuracy: ±2.5% of full scale for ≤ 200 V at 20 to 39 Hz

±1% of full scale for 12 to 240 V at > 40 HzBurden: >200 kΩMax. continuous: 280 V AC

PHASE CT INPUT (A) BURDENVA (Ω)

1 A 1 0.03 0.035 0.64 0.03

20 11.7 0.035 A 5 0.07 0.003

25 1.71 0.003100 31 0.003

PHASE CT WITHSTAND TIME 1 s 2 s continuous

1 A 100 × CT 40 × CT 3 × CT5 A 100 × CT 40 × CT 3 × CT

GROUND CT INPUT (A) BURDENVA (Ω)

1 A 1 0.04 0.0365 0.78 0.031

20 6.79 0.0175 A 5 0.07 0.003

25 1.72 0.003100 25 0.003

50:0.025 0.025 0.24 3840.1 2.61 2610.5 37.5 150

GROUND CT WITHSTAND TIME1 s 2 s continuous

1 A 100 × CT 40 × CT 3 × CT5 A 100 × CT 40 × CT 3 × CT50:0.025 10 A 5 A 150 mA


2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2

BSD INPUTS (Option B)Frequency: 1 to 120 HzDynamic BSD range: 20 mV to 480 V RMSAccuracy: ±0.02 HzBurden: >200 kΩ

RTD INPUTS (Option R)Wire Type: 3 wireSensor Type: 100 Ω platinum (DIN 43760), 100 Ω nickel,

120 Ω nickel, 10 Ω copperRTD sensing current: 3 mARange: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°FAccuracy: ±2°C or ±4°FLead resistance: 25 Ω max. per lead for Pt and Ni type;

3 Ω max. per lead for Cu typeIsolation: 36 Vpk

2.2.2 OUTPUTS

ANALOG OUTPUTS (Option M)

Accuracy: ±1% of full scaleIsolation: fully isolated active source

OUTPUT RELAYS

This equipment is suitable for use in Class 1, Div 2,Groups A, B, C, D or Non-Hazardous Locations only ifMOD502 is ordered.

Hazardous Location – Class 1, Div 2 output ratingapplies if MOD502 is ordered: 240 V, 3 A max, as perUL1604.

Explosion Hazard – Substitution of components mayimpair suitability for Class 1, Div 2.

Explosion Hazard – Do not disconnect equipmentunless power has been switched off or the area isknown to be Non-Hazardous.

PROGRAMMABLEOUTPUT 0 to 1 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mAMAX LOAD 2400 Ω 600 Ω 600 ΩMAX OUTPUT 1.01 mA 20.2 mA 20.2 mA

RESISTIVE LOAD (pf = 1)

INDUCTIVE LOAD (pf = 0.4)(L/R – 7ms)

RATED LOAD 8 A at 250 V AC8 A at 30 V DC

3.5 A at 250 V AC3.5 A at 30 V DC

CARRY CURRENT 8AMAX SWITCHING CAPACITY

2000 VA240 W

875 VA170 W

MAX SWITCHING V 380 V AC; 125 V DCMAX SWITCHING I 8 A 3.5 AOPERATE TIME <10 ms (5 ms typical)CONTACT MATERIAL silver alloy

NOTE

NOTE

WARNING

WARNING



2

2.2.3 METERING

POWER METERING (OPTION M) EVENT RECORDCapacity: last 250 eventsTriggers: trip, inhibit, power fail, alarms, self test,

waveform capture

WAVEFORM CAPTURELength: 3 buffers containing 16 cycles of all current

and voltage channelsTrigger position: 1 to 100% pre-trip to post-tripTrigger: trip, manually via communications or digital

input

2.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS

FRONT PORTType: RS232, non-isolatedBaud rate: 4800 to 19200Protocol: Modbus® RTU

BACK PORTS (3)Type: RS485Baud rate: 1200 to 19200Protocol: Modbus® RTU36V isolation (together)

PROFIBUS (Options P and P1)Type: RS485Baud rate: 1200 baud to 12 MbaudProtocol: Profibus-DP

Profibus-DPV1

MODBUS/TCP ETHERNET (Option E)Connector type: RJ45 adaptorProtocol: Modbus/TCP

DEVICENET (Option D)DeviceNet CONFORMANCE TESTED™

Connector type: 5-pin linear DeviceNet plug (phoenix type)Baud rate: 125, 250, and 500 kbpsProtocol: DeviceNet

FIBER OPTIC PORT (Option F)Optional use: RTD remote module hookupBaud rate: 1200 to 19200Protocol: Modbus® RTUFiber sizes: 50/125, 62.5/125, 100/140, and 200 μmEmitter fiber type: 820 nm LED, multimodeLink power budget:

Transmit power: –20 dBmReceived sensitivity: –30 dBmPower budget: 10 dB

Maximum optical input power: –7.6 dBmTypical link distance: 1.65 km

Typical link distance is based upon the following assump-tions for system loss. As actual losses vary between installations, the distance covered will vary.Connector loss: 2 dBFiber loss: 3 dB/kmSplice loss: One splice every 2 km at 0.05 dB loss/spliceSystem margin: 3 dB additional loss added to calculations to compensate for all other losses

PARAMETER ACCURACY(FULL SCALE)

RESOLUTION RANGE

kW ±2% 1 kW ±32000kvar ±2% 1 kvar ±32000kVA ±2% 1 kVA 0 to 65000kWh ±2% 1 kWh 0 to 999MWh ±2% 1 MWh 0 to 65535±kvarh ±2% 1 kvarh 0 to 999±Mvarh ±2% 1 Mvarh 0 to 65535Power Factor ±1% 0.01 –0.99 to 1.00Frequency ±0.02 Hz 0.01 Hz 20.00 to 100.00kW Demand ±2% 1 kW 0 to 32000kvar Demand ±2% 1 kvar 0 to 32000kVA Demand ±2% 1 kVA 0 to 65000Amp Demand ±2% 1 A 0 to 65535

NOTE



2

2.2.5 PROTECTION ELEMENTS

51 OVERLOAD/STALL/THERMAL MODELCurve Shape: 1 to 15 standard, customCurve Biasing: unbalance, temperature, hot/cold ratio,

cool time constantsPickup Level: 1.01 to 1.25 × FLAPickup Accuracy: as per phase current inputsDropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickupTiming Accuracy: ±100 ms or ±2% of total trip time

THERMAL CAPACITY ALARMPickup Level: 1 to 100% TC in steps of 1Pickup Accuracy: ±2%Dropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickupTiming Accuracy: ±100 ms

OVERLOAD ALARMPickup Level: 1.01 to 1.50 × FLA in steps of 0.01Pickup Accuracy: as per phase current inputsDropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickupTime Delay: 0.1 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1Timing Accuracy: ±100 ms or ±2% of total trip time

50 SHORT CIRCUITPickup Level: 2.0 to 20.0 × CT in steps of 0.1Pickup Accuracy: as per phase current inputsDropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickupTime Delay: 0 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01 sBackup Delay: 0.10 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01 sTiming Accuracy: +50 ms for delays <50 ms

±100 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time

MECHANICAL JAMPickup Level: 1.01 to 6.00 × FLA in steps of 0.01Pickup Accuracy: as per phase current inputsDropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickupTime Delay: 0.5 to 125.0 s in steps of 0.5Timing Accuracy: ±250 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time

37 UNDERCURRENTPickup Level: 0.10 to 0.99 × FLA in steps of 0.01Pickup Accuracy: as per phase current inputsDropout Level: 102 to 104% of pickupTime Delay: 1 to 255 s in steps of 1Start Delay: 0 to 15000 s in steps of 1Timing Accuracy: ±500 ms or ±0.5% of total time

46 UNBALANCEPickup Level: 4 to 30% in steps of 1Pickup Accuracy: ±2%Dropout Level: 1 to 2% below pickupTime Delay: 1 to 255 s in steps of 1Start Delay: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1Timing Accuracy: ±500 ms or ±0.5% of total time

50G/51G 50N/51N GROUND FAULTPickup Level: 0.10 to 1.00 × CT for 1 A/5 A CT

0.25 to 25.00 A for 50:0.025 CTPickup Accuracy: as per ground current inputsDropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickupTime Delay: 0 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01 sBackup Delay: 0.01 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01 sTiming Accuracy: +50 ms for delays <50 ms


ACCELERATION TRIPPickup Level: motor start conditionDropout Level: motor run, trip or stop conditionTime Delay: 1.0 to 250.0 s in steps of 0.1Timing Accuracy: ±100 ms or ±0.5% of total time

38/49 RTD and RRTD PROTECTIONPickup Level: 1 to 200°C or 34 to 392°FPickup Accuracy: ±2°C or ±4°FDropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickup above 80°CTime Delay: <5 s

OPEN RTD ALARMPickup Level: detection of an open RTDPickup Accuracy: >1000 ΩDropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickupTime Delay: <5 s

SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARMPickup Level: <–40°C or –40°FPickup Accuracy: ±2°C or ±4°FDropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickupTime Delay: <5 s

LOSS OF RRTD COMMS ALARMPickup Level: no communicationTime Delay: 2 to 5 s

27 UNDERVOLTAGEPickup Level: 0.50 to 0.99 × rated in steps of 0.01Pickup Accuracy: as per phase voltage inputsDropout Level: 102 to 104% of pickupTime Delay: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1Start Delay: separate level for start conditionsTiming Accuracy: +75 ms for delays <50 ms


59 OVERVOLTAGEPickup Level: 1.01 to 1.25 × rated in steps of 0.01Pickup Accuracy: as per phase voltage inputsDropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickupTime Delay: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1Timing Accuracy: ±100 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time

47 VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSALPickup Level: phase reversal detectedTime Delay: 500 to 700 ms



2

81 UNDERFREQUENCYPickup Level: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01Pickup Accuracy: ±0.02 HzDropout Level: 0.05 HzTime Delay: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1Start Delay: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1Timing Accuracy: ±100 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time

81 OVERFREQUENCYPickup Level: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01Pickup Accuracy: ±0.02 HzDropout Level: 0.05 HzTime Delay: 0.0-255.0 s in steps of 0.1Start Delay: 0-5000 s in steps of 1Timing Accuracy: ±100 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time

55 LEAD POWER FACTORPickup Level: 0.99 to 0.05 in steps of 0.01Pickup Accuracy: ±0.02Dropout Level: 0.01 of pickupTime Delay: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1Start Delay: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1Timing Accuracy: ±300 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time

55 LAG POWER FACTORPickup Level: 0.99 to 0.05 in steps of 0.01Pickup Accuracy: ±0.02Dropout Level: 0.01 of pickupTime Delay: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1Start Delay: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1Timing Accuracy: ±300 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time

POSITIVE REACTIVE POWERPickup Level: 1 to 25000 in steps of 1Pickup Accuracy: ±2%Dropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickupTime Delay: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1Start Delay: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1Timing Accuracy: ±300 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time

NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWERPickup Level: 1 to 25000 kvar in steps of 1Pickup Accuracy: ±2%Dropout Level: 96 to 98% of pickupTime Delay: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1Start Delay: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1Timing Accuracy: ±300 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time

37 UNDERPOWERPickup Level: 1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1Pickup Accuracy: ±2%Dropout Level: 102 to 104% of pickupTime Delay: 0.5 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.5Start Delay: 0 to 15000 s in steps of 1Timing Accuracy: ±300 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time

REVERSE POWERPickup Level: 1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1Pickup Accuracy: ±2%Dropout Level: 102 to 104% of pickupTime Delay: 0.5 to 30.0 s in steps of 0.5Start Delay: 0 to 50000 s in steps of 1Timing Accuracy: ±300 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time

87 DIFFERENTIAL SWITCHTime Delay: <200 ms

14 SPEED SWITCHTime Delay: 0.5 to 100.0 s in steps of 0.5Timing Accuracy: ±200 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time

GENERAL SWITCHTime Delay: 0.1 to 5000.0 s in steps of 0.1Start Delay: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1Timing Accuracy: ±200 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time

DIGITAL COUNTERPickup: on count equaling levelTime Delay: <200 ms

BACKSPIN DETECTIONDynamic BSD: 20 mV to 480 V RMSPickup Level: 3 to 300 Hz in steps of 1Dropout Level: 2 to 30 Hz in steps or 1Level Accuracy: ±0.02 HzTiming Accuracy: ±500 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time



2

2.2.6 MONITORING ELEMENTS

STARTER FAILUREPickup level: motor run condition when trippedDropout level: motor stopped conditionTime delay: 10 to 1000 ms in steps of 10Timing accuracy: ±100 ms

CURRENT DEMAND ALARMDemand period: 5 to 90 min. in steps of 1Pickup level: 0 to 65000 A in steps of 1Pickup accuracy: as per phase current inputsDropout level: 96 to 98% of pickupTime delay: <2 min.

kW DEMAND ALARMDemand period: 5 to 90 min. in steps of 1Pickup level: 1 to 50000 kW in steps of 1Pickup accuracy: ±2%Dropout level: 96 to 98% of pickupTime delay: <2 min.

kvar DEMAND ALARMDemand period: 5 to 90 min. in steps of 1Pickup level: 1 to 50000 kvar in steps of 1Pickup accuracy: ±2%Dropout level: 96 to 98% of pickupTime delay: <2 min.

kVA DEMAND ALARMDemand period: 5 to 90 min in steps of 1Pickup level: 1 to 50000 kVA in steps of 1Pickup accuracy: ±2%Dropout level: 96 to 98% of pickupTime delay: <2 min.

TRIP COUNTERPickup: on count equaling levelTime delay: <200 ms

2.2.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS

REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTTransition Level: 25 to 300% FLA in steps of 1Transition Time: 1 to 250 sec. in steps of 1Transition Control: Current, Timer, Current and Timer

2.2.8 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

AMBIENT TEMPERATUREOperating Range: –40°C to +60°CStorage Range: –40°C to +80°C

NOTE: For 369 units with the Profibus, Modbus/TCP, or DeviceNetoption the operating and storage ranges are as follows:

Operating Range: +5°C to +60°CStorage Range: +5°C to +80°C

HUMIDITYUp to 95% non condensing

DUST/MOISTUREIP50

VENTILATIONNo special ventilation required as long as ambient temperatureremains within specifications. Ventilation may be required in enclo-sures exposed to direct sunlight.

OVERVOLTAGE CATEGORY II

CLEANINGMay be cleaned with a damp cloth.

The 369 must be powered up at least once per year to prevent deterioration of electrolytic capacitors.

2.2.9 APPROVALS/CERTIFICATION

ISO: Designed and manufactured to an ISO9001 registered process.

UL: E83849 UL listed for the USA and CanadaCE: Conforms to EN 55011/CISPR 11, EN50082-

2, IEC 947-1, 1010-1DeviceNet CONFORMANCE TESTED™

NOTE



2

2.2.10 TYPE TEST STANDARDS

SURGE WITHSTAND CAPABILITYANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Oscillatory (2.5 kV/1 MHz)ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Fast Rise (5 kV/10 ns) IEC / EN 61000-4-4, Level 4

INSULATION RESISTANCEIEC / EN 60255-5

IMPULSE TESTIEC / EN 60255-5 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH:ANSI/IEEE C37.90IEC / EN 60255-5CSA C22.2 No.14

ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGEEN 61000-4-2, Level 2IEC 60255-22-2 Level 2

SURGE IMMUNITYIEC 1000-4-5, EN 61000-4-5IEC 60255-22-5

CURRENT WITHSTANDANSI/IEEE C37.90IEC 60255-6

RFIANSI/IEEE C37.90.2, 35 V/mEN 61000-4-3 10V/mCONDUCTED IMMUNITY:IEC 1000-4-6IEC 60255-22-6

CONDUCTED/RADIATED EMISSIONSEN 55011 (IEC CISPR 11)

TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY WITH ACCURACYANSI/IEEE C37.90IEC 60255-6IEC 60068-2-38 Part 2

VIBRATIONIEC 60255-21-1 Class 1IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1

VOLTAGE DEVIATIONIEC 1000-4-11 / EN 61000-4-11

MAGNETIC FIELD IMMUNITYIEC 1000-4-8 / EN61000-4-8

2.2.11 PRODUCTION TESTS

DIELECTRIC STRENGTHAll high voltage inputs at 2 kV AC for 1 minute

BURN IN8 hours at 60°C sampling plan

CALIBRATION AND FUNCTIONALITY100% hardware functionality tested100% calibration of all metered quantities


3 INSTALLATION 3.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

3

3 INSTALLATION 3.1MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 3.1.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

The 369 is contained in a compact plastic housing with the keypad, display, communication port, and indicators/targets onthe front panel. The unit should be positioned so the display and keypad are accessible. To mount the relay, make cutoutand drill mounting holes as shown below. Mounting hardware (bolts and washers) is provided with the relay. Although therelay is internally shielded to minimize noise pickup and interference, it should be mounted away from high current conduc-tors or sources of strong magnetic fields.

Figure 3–1: PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS

Figure 3–2: SPLIT MOUNTING DIMENSIONS


3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION 3 INSTALLATION

3

3.2TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION 3.2.1 369 TERMINAL LIST

TERMINAL WIRING CONNECTION1 RTD1 +2 RTD1 –3 RTD1 COMPENSATION4 RTD1 SHIELD5 RTD2 +6 RTD2 –7 RTD2 COMPENSATION8 RTD2 SHIELD9 RTD3 +

10 RTD3 –11 RTD3 COMPENSATION12 RTD3 SHIELD13 RTD4 +14 RTD4 –15 RTD4 COMPENSATION16 RTD4 SHIELD17 RTD5 +18 RTD5 –19 RTD5 COMPENSATION20 RTD5 SHIELD21 RTD6 +22 RTD6 –23 RTD6 COMPENSATION24 RTD6 SHIELD25 RTD7 +26 RTD7 –27 RTD7 COMPENSATION28 RTD7 SHIELD29 RTD8 +30 RTD8 –31 RTD8 COMPENSATION32 RTD8 SHIELD33 RTD9 +34 RTD9 –35 RTD9 COMPENSATION36 RTD9 SHIELD37 RTD10 +38 RTD10 –39 RTD10 COMPENSATION40 RTD10 SHIELD41 RTD11 +42 RTD11 –43 RTD11 COMPENSATION44 RTD11 SHIELD45 RTD12 +46 RTD12 –47 RTD12 COMPENSATION48 RTD12 SHIELD51 SPARE SW52 SPARE SW COMMON53 DIFFERENTIAL INPUT SW54 DIFFERENTIAL INPUT SW COMMON55 SPEED SW56 SPEED SW COMMON57 ACCESS SW58 ACCESS SW COMMON

59 EMERGENCY RESTART SW60 EMERGENCY RESTART SW COMMON61 EXTERNAL RESET SW62 EXTERNAL RESET SW COMMON71 COMM1 RS485 +72 COMM1 RS485 –73 COMM1 SHIELD74 COMM2 RS485 +75 COMM2 RS485 –76 COMM2 SHIELD77 COMM3 RS485 +78 COMM3 RS485 –79 COMM3 SHIELD80 ANALOG OUT 181 ANALOG OUT 282 ANALOG OUT 383 ANALOG OUT 484 ANALOG COM85 ANALOG SHIELD90 BACKSPIN VOLTAGE91 BACKSPIN NEUTRAL92 PHASE A CURRENT 5A93 PHASE A CURRENT 1A94 PHASE A COMMON95 PHASE B CURRENT 5A96 PHASE B CURRENT 1A97 PHASE B COMMON98 PHASE C CURRENT 5A99 PHASE C CURRENT 1A

100 PHASE C COMMON101 NEUT/GND CURRENT 50:0.025A102 NEUT/GND CURRENT 1A103 NEUT/GND CURRENT 5A104 NEUT/GND COMMON105 PHASE A VOLTAGE106 PHASE A NEUTRAL107 PHASE B VOLTAGE108 PHASE B NEUTRAL109 PHASE C VOLTAGE110 PHASE C NEUTRAL111 TRIP NC112 TRIP COMMON113 TRIP NO114 ALARM NC115 ALARM COMMON116 ALARM NO117 AUX1 NC118 AUX1 COMMON119 AUX1 NO120 AUX2 NC121 AUX2 COMMON122 AUX2 NO123 POWER FILTER GROUND124 POWER LINE125 POWER NEUTRAL126 POWER SAFETY

TERMINAL WIRING CONNECTION


3 INSTALLATION 3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION

3

3.2.2 269 TO 369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST

269 WIRING CONNECTION 3691 RTD1 + 1

2 RTD1 COMPENSATION 3

3 RTD1 – 2

4 RTD1 SHIELD 4

5 RTD2 + 5


7 RTD2 – 6

8 RTD2 SHIELD 8

9 RTD3 + 9


11 RTD3 – 10

12 RTD3 SHIELD 12

71 RTD4 + 13


69 RTD4 – 14

68 RTD4 SHIELD 16

67 RTD5 + 17


65 RTD5 – 18

64 RTD5 SHIELD 20

63 RTD6 + 21


61 RTD6 – 22

60 RTD6 SHIELD 24

13 RTD7 + 25


15 RTD7 – 26

16 RTD7 SHIELD 28

17 RTD8 + 29


19 RTD8 – 30

20 RTD8 SHIELD 32

21 RTD9 + 33


23 RTD9 – 34

24 RTD9 SHIELD 36

25 RTD10 + 37


27 RTD10 – 38

28 RTD10 SHIELD 40

44 SPARE SW 51

45 SPARE SW COMMON 52

48 DIFFERENTIAL INPUT SW 53

49 DIFFERENTIAL INPUT SW COMMON 54

50 SPEED SW 55

51 SPEED SW COMMON 56

52 ACCESS SW 57

53 ACCESS SW COMMON 58

54 EMERGENCY RESTART SW 59

55 EMERGENCY RESTART SW COM 60

56 EXTERNAL RESET SW 61

57 EXTERNAL RESET SW COMMON 62

47 COMM1 RS485 + 71

46 COMM1 RS485 – 72

88 COMM1 SHIELD 73

59 ANALOG OUT 1 80

58 ANALOG COMMON 84

83 PHASE A CURRENT 1A 93

82 PHASE A COMMON 94


80 PHASE B CURRENT 1A 96

79 PHASE B COMMON 97


77 PHASE C CURRENT 1A 99

76 PHASE C COMMON 100


73 NEUTRAL/GROUND COMMON 104

72 NEUTRAL/GROUND CURRENT 5A 103

74 NEUT/GND CURRENT 50:0.025A 101

29 TRIP NC 111

30 TRIP COMMON 112

31 TRIP NO 113

32 ALARM NC 114

33 ALARM COMMON 115

34 ALARM NO 116

35 AUX1 NC 117

36 AUX1 COMMON 118

37 AUX1 NO 119

38 AUX2 NC 120

39 AUX2 COMMON 121

40 AUX2 NO 122

42 POWER FILTER GROUND 123

41 POWER LINE 124

43 POWER NEUTRAL 125

Terminals not available on the 36984 MTM B+ N/A

85 MTM A– N/A

269 WIRING CONNECTION 369


3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION 3 INSTALLATION

3

3.2.3 MTM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST

3.2.4 MPM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST

MTM WIRING CONNECTION 3691 POWER FILTER GROUND 123

2 PHASE A VOLTAGE 105

3 PHASE B VOLTAGE 107


5 PHASE C VOLTAGE 109

6 PHASE A COM 94



9 PHASE B COM 97



12 PHASE C COM 100



15 COMM1 RS485 + 71

16 COMM1 RS485 – 72

17 COMM1 SHIELD 73

18 ANALOG OUT 1 80

19 ANALOG OUT1 COM 84

20 ANALOG OUT 2 81

21 ANALOG OUT 2 COM 84

22 ANALOG OUT 3 82


24 ANALOG OUT 4 83


26 ANALOG SHIELD 85

27 ALARM NC 114

28 ALARM COM 115

29 ALARM NO 116

31 SPARE SW 51

32 SPARE SW COM 52

34 POWER LINE 124

35 POWER NEUTRAL 125

Terminals not available on the 369:30 PULSE OUTPUT (P/O) N/A

33 SW.B N/A

MTM WIRING CONNECTION 369

MPM WIRING CONNECTION 3691 PHASE A VOLTAGE 105


3 PHASE C VOLTAGE 109

4 PHASE NEUTRAL 108

5 POWER FILTER GROUND 123

6 POWER SAFETY 126

7 POWER NEUTRAL 125

8 POWER LINE 124



11 PHASE A COM 94



14 PHASE B COM 97



17 PHASE C COM 100

28 ANALOG OUT 1 80

27 ANALOG OUT 2 81

26 ANALOG OUT 3 82

25 ANALOG OUT 4 83

24 ANALOG COM 84

21 ANALOG SHIELD 85

43 ALARM NC 114

44 ALARM COM 115

45 ALARM NO 116

46 COMM1 SHIELD 73

47 COMM1 RS485 – 72

48 COMM1 RS485 + 71

Terminals not available on the 36931 SWITCH INPUT 1 N/A

32 SWITCH INPUT 2 N/A

33 SWITCH COM N/A

MPM WIRING CONNECTION 369


3 INSTALLATION 3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION

3

3.2.5 TERMINAL LAYOUT

Figure 3–3: TERMINAL LAYOUT840720B3.CDR

111

4836

3534

3332

31

3029

28

2726

25

4746

4544

43

4241

40

3938

37

112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126

5152

53

5455

56

5758

59

6061

62

91

90

242312

1110

98

7

65

4

32

1

22

21

2019

1817

16

15

1413

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

100

101

102 104

105 106

107

108

109

110103

71

Comm

Analog

Output

Spare

73747576

777879

808182

83848586

72

RTD Digital Inputs

RTD


3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 3 INSTALLATION

3

3.3ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 3.3.1 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

Figure 3–4: TYPICAL WIRING

369Motor ManagementRelay

GROUNDBUS

840700BF.CDR

DB-9(front)

STATORWINDING 1

METER

load

PLC

SCADA

RS485PF +Watts

cpm-

ShieldShield

-

STATORWINDING 2

STATORWINDING 3

STATORWINDING 4

STATORWINDING 5

STATORWINDING 6

MOTORBEARING 1

MOTORBEARING 2

PUMPBEARING 1

PUMPBEARING 2

PUMPCASE

AMBIENT

369

TXDTXDRXDRXD

SGND SGND

COMPUTER

25 PINCONNECTOR

9 PINCONNECTOR

(5 Amp CT)

TwistedPair

CONTROLPOWER

380VAC/125VDC

NOTERELAY CONTACTS SHOWN

WITHCONTROL POWER REMOVED

RTD1

ST CONNECTION

50/125 uM FIBER62.5/125 uM FIBER100/140 uM FIBER

PC

RTD12

A

B

C

L

N

C(B)

A

B(C)

HGF-CT

MOTOR

VA VN VB VN VC VN

VOLTAGE INPUTS

105 108106 109107 110

CURRENT INPUTSWITH METERING OPTION (M)

Neut/Gnd Back Spin

Option (B)

COM 50:0.025A5A VN1A

102 104 103 101OPTIONAL

9091

CHANNEL 1

OP

TIO

N ( R

)

CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 3

REMOTERTD

MODULE

RS485 RS485 RS485 FIBER

71 74 7773 76 7972 75 78

8281

83

4

12

16

20

24

28

32

36

40

44

48

8

3

11

15

19

23

27

31

35

39

43

47

7

2

10

14

18

22

26

30

34

38

42

46

6

1

9

13

17

21

25

29

33

37

41

45

5

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

shld.

shld.shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

5

9

4 3 2 1

8 7 6

shld.

SHLD SHLD SHLD Tx Rx

1

3

4

AN

ALO

GO

UT

PU

TS

OP

TIO

N(M

,B)

RTD1

RTD3

RTD4

RTD5

RTD6

RTD7

RTD8

RTD9

RTD10

RTD11

RTD12

RTD2

SPARE

DIFFERENTIALRELAY

RTDALARM

SELF TESTALARM

ALARM

KEYSWITCHOR JUMPER

SPEED SWITCH

DIFFERENTIALRELAY

SPEEDSWITCH

ACCESSSWITCH

EMERGENCYRESTART

EXTERNALRESET

DIG

ITA

L IN

PU

TS

51

59

61

52

60

62

535455565758

111

126125124123

112113114115116117118119120121122

OU

TP

UT

RE

LAY

S

TRIP

ALARM

AUX. 1

AUX. 2

FILTER GROUNDLINE +

NEUTRAL -SAFETY GROUNDC

ON

TR

OL

PO

WE

R

CR

369 PCPROGRAM

87

14

OPTION (F)

11 8

22 3

66 6

44 20

88 5

33 2

77 4

55 7

99 22

R

Profibus (option P or P1)Modbus/TCP (option E)

GE Multilin

5A 5A1A

Phase A Phase CPhase B

COM 1A COM 5A COM1A

92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

8584Com-

shld.

802

V-

CA

N_L

SH

IELD

CA

N_H

V+

DeviceNetOption (D)


3 INSTALLATION 3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

3

3.3.2 TYPICAL WIRING

The 369 can be connected to cover a broad range of applications and wiring will vary depending upon the user’s protectionscheme. This section will cover most of the typical 369 interconnections.

In this section, the terminals have been logically grouped together for explanatory purposes. A typical wiring diagram forthe 369 is shown above in Figure 3–4: Typical Wiring on page 3–6 and the terminal arrangement has been detailed in Fig-ure 3–3: TERMINAL LAYOUT on page 3–5. For further information on applications not covered here, refer to Chapter 7:Applications or contact the factory for further information.

Hazard may result if the product is not used for intended purposes. This equipment can only be servicedby trained personnel.

3.3.3 CONTROL POWER

VERIFY THAT THE CONTROL POWER SUPPLIED TO THE RELAY IS WITHIN THE RANGE COVERED BYTHE ORDERED 369 RELAY’S CONTROL POWER.

The 369 has a built-in switchmode supply. It can operate with either AC or DC voltage applied to it.

Extensive filtering and transient protection has been incorporated into the 369 to ensure reliable operation in harsh indus-trial environments. Transient energy is removed from the relay and conducted to ground via the ground terminal. This termi-nal must be connected to the cubicle ground bus using a 10 AWG wire or a ground braid. Do not daisy-chain grounds withother relays or devices. Each should have its own connection to the ground bus.

The internal supply is protected via a 3.15 A slo-blo fuse that is accessible for replacement. If it must be replaced ensurethat it is replaced with a fuse of equal size (see FUSE on page 2–4).

3.3.4 PHASE CURRENT (CT) INPUTS

The 369 requires one CT for each of the three motor phase currents to be input into the relay. There are no internal groundconnections for the CT inputs. Refer to Chapter 7: Applications for information on two CT connections.

The phase CTs should be chosen such that the FLA of the motor being protected is no less than 50% of the rated CT pri-mary. Ideally, to ensure maximum accuracy and resolution, the CTs should be chosen such that the FLA is 100% of CT pri-mary or slightly less. The maximum CT primary is 5000 A.

The 369 will measure 0.05 to 20 × CT primary rated current. The CTs chosen must be capable of driving the 369 burden(see specifications) during normal and fault conditions to ensure correct operation. See Section 7.4: CT Specification andSelection on page 7–7 for information on calculating total burden and CT rating.

For the correct operation of many protective elements, the phase sequence and CT polarity is critical. Ensure that the con-vention illustrated in Figure 3–4: Typical Wiring on page 3–6 is followed.

Table 3–1: 369 POWER SUPPLY RANGES369 POWER SUPPLY AC RANGE DC RANGEHI 40 to 265 V 50 to 300 VLO 20 to 48 V 20 to 60 V

WARNING

CAUTION



3

3.3.5 GROUND CURRENT INPUTS

The 369 has an isolating transformer with separate 1 A, 5 A, and sensitive HGF (50:0.025) ground terminals. Only oneground terminal type can be used at a time. There are no internal ground connections on the ground current inputs.

The maximum ground CT primary for the 1 A and 5 A taps is 5000 A. Alternatively the sensitive ground input, 50:0.025, canbe used to detect ground current on high resistance grounded systems.

The ground CT connection can either be a zero sequence (core balance) installation or a residual connection. Note thatonly 1 A and 5 A secondary CTs may be used for the residual connection. A typical residual connection is illustrated inbelow. The zero-sequence connection is shown in the typical wiring diagram. The zero-sequence connection is recom-mended. Unequal saturation of CTs, CT mismatch, size and location of motor, resistance of the power system, motor coresaturation density, etc. may cause false readings in the residually connected ground fault circuit.

Figure 3–5: TYPICAL RESIDUAL CONNECTION

3.3.6 ZERO SEQUENCE GROUND CT PLACEMENT

The exact placement of a zero sequence CT to properly detect ground fault current is shown below. If the CT is placed overa shielded cable, capacitive coupling of phase current into the cable shield during motor starts may be detected as groundcurrent unless the shield wire is also passed through the CT window. Twisted pair cabling on the zero sequence CT is rec-ommended.

Figure 3–6: ZERO SEQUENCE CT

840710B1.CDR

A

B

C

RESIDUAL CURRENTCONNECTION

CURRENT INPUTS

Phase A Neut/GndPhase CPhase B

93 94 92 96 97 95 99 100 98 102 104 103 101

1A 1ACOM 5A COM 50:0.025ACOM 5A 1A 5A 5ACOM 1A



3

3.3.7 PHASE VOLTAGE (VT/PT) INPUTS

The 369 has three channels for AC voltage inputs each with an internal isolating transformer. There are no internal fuses orground connections on these inputs. The maximum VT ratio is 240:1. These inputs are only enabled when the meteringoption (M) is ordered.

The 369 accepts either open delta or wye connected VTs (see the figure below). The voltage channels are connected wyeinternally, which means that the jumper shown on the delta connection between the phase B input and the VT neutral termi-nals must be installed.

Polarity and phase sequence for the VTs is critical for correct power and rotation measurement and should be verifiedbefore starting the motor. As long as the polarity markings on the primary and secondary windings of the VT are aligned,there is no phase shift. The markings can be aligned on either side of the VT. VTs are typically mounted upstream of themotor breaker or contactor. Typically, a 1 A fuse is used to protect the voltage inputs.

Figure 3–7: WYE/DELTA CONNECTION

3.3.8 BACKSPIN VOLTAGE INPUTS

The Backspin voltage input is only operational if the optional backspin detection (B) feature has been purchased for therelay. This input allows the 369 to sense whether the motor is spinning after the primary power has been removed (breakeror contactor opened).

These inputs must be supplied by a separate VT mounted downstream (motor side) of the breaker or contactor. The correctwiring is illustrated below.

Figure 3–8: BACKSPIN VOLTAGE WIRING

840713A4.CDR

VA VAVN VNVB VBVN VNVC VCVN VN

VOLTAGE INPUTS

WYE VT CONNECTION DELTA VT CONNECTION

VOLTAGE INPUTSWITH METERING OPTION (M) WITH METERING OPTION (M)

105 105

A A

B B

C C

107 107109 109106 106108 108110 110

91

A

CB

N VBACKSPIN

90

840731A2.CDR

VOLTAGE ON MOTOR SIDEOF BREAKER MAY BE - OR - N

Tx M



3

3.3.9 RTD INPUTS

The 369 can monitor up to 12 RTD inputs for Stator, Bearing, Ambient, or Other temperature applications. The type of eachRTD is field programmable as: 100 ohm Platinum (DIN 43760), 100 ohm Nickel, 120 ohm Nickel, or 10 ohm Copper. RTDsmust be the three wire type. There are no provisions for the connection of thermistors.

The 369 RTD circuitry compensates for lead resistance, provided that each of the three leads is the same length. Leadresistance should not exceed 25 ohms per lead for platinum and nickel type RTDs or 3 ohms per lead for Copper typeRTDs.

Shielded cable should be used to prevent noise pickup in industrial environments. RTD cables should be kept close togrounded metal casings and avoid areas of high electromagnetic or radio interference. RTD leads should not be run adja-cent to or in the same conduit as high current carrying wires.

The shield connection terminal of the RTD is grounded in the 369 and should not be connected to ground at the motor oranywhere else to prevent noise pickup from circulating currents.

If 10 ohm Copper RTDs are used special care should be taken to keep the lead resistance as low as possible to maintainaccurate readings.

Figure 3–9: RTD INPUTS

3.3.10 DIGITAL INPUTS

DO NOT CONNECT LIVE CIRCUITS TO THE 369 DIGITAL INPUTS. THEY ARE DESIGNED FOR DRY CON-TACT CONNECTIONS ONLY.

Other than the ACCESS switch input the other 5 digital inputs are programmable. These programmable digital inputs havedefault settings to match the functions of the 269Plus switch inputs (differential, speed, emergency restart, remote resetand spare). However in addition to their default settings they can also be programmed for use as generic inputs to set uptrips and alarms or for monitoring purposes based on external contact inputs.

A twisted pair of wires should be used for digital input connections.

4

Com

ShieldShield

Hot

Compensation

Return

12

1

2

3

SAFETY GROUND

RT

DS

EN

SIN

G

RT

D#1

369 RELAYMOTOR

STARTERMOTOR3 WIRE SHIELDED CABLE

RTDTERMINALSIN MOTORSTARTER

RTD TERMINALSAT MOTOR

Maximum total lead resistance25 ohms (Platinum & Nickel RTDs)3 ohms (Copper RTDs)

Route cable in separate conduit fromcurrent carrying conductors

RTD INMOTORSTATORORBEARING

840717A2.CDR

CAUTION



3

3.3.11 ANALOG OUTPUTS

The 369 provides 1 analog current output channel as part of the base unit and 3 additional analog outputs with the meteringoption (M). These outputs are field programmable to a full-scale range of either 0 to 1 mA (into a maximum 2.4 kΩ imped-ance) and 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA (into a maximum 600 Ω impedance).

As shown in the typical wiring diagram (Figure 3–4: Typical Wiring on page 3–6), these outputs share one common return.Polarity of these outputs must be observed for proper operation.

Shielded cable should be used for connections, with only one end of the shield grounded, to minimize noise effects. Theanalog output circuitry is isolated. Transorbs limit this isolation to ±36 V with respect to the 369 safety ground.

If an analog voltage output is required, a burden resistor must be connected across the input of the SCADA or measuringdevice (see the figure below). Ignoring the input impedance of the input,

(EQ 3.1)

For 0-1 mA, for example, if 5 V full scale is required to correspond to 1 mA

(EQ 3.2)

For 4-20 mA, this resistor would be

(EQ 3.3)

Figure 3–10: ANALOG OUTPUT VOLTAGE CONNECTION

3.3.12 REMOTE DISPLAY

The 369 display can be separated and mounted remotely up to 15 feet away from the main relay. No separate source ofcontrol power is required for the display module. A 15 feet standard shielded network cable is used to make the connectionbetween the display module and the main relay. A recommended and tested cable is available from GE Multilin. The cableshould be wired as far away as possible from high current or voltage carrying cables or other sources of electrical noise.

In addition the display module must be grounded if mounted remotely. A ground screw is provided on the back of the dis-play module to facilitate this. A 12 AWG wire is recommended and should be connected to the same ground bus as themain relay unit.

The 369 relay will still function and protect the motor without the display connected.

RLOADVFULL SCALE

IMAX----------------------------------=

RLOADVFULL SCALE

IMAX---------------------------------- 5 V

0.001 A--------------------- 5000 Ω= = =

RLOADVFULL SCALE

IMAX---------------------------------- 5 V

0.020 A--------------------- 250 Ω= = =

840714A3.CDR

80SCADA

ORPLCOR

METERINGDEVICE

V +

V -

R

Com-

Shield

Ana

log

Out

puts

82

84

81

83

85

1

2

3

4



3

3.3.13 OUTPUT RELAYS

The 369 provides four (4) form C output relays. They are labeled Trip, Aux 1, Aux 2, and Alarm. Each relay has normallyopen (NO) and normally closed (NC) contacts and can switch up to 8 A at either 250 V AC or 30 V DC with a resistive load.The NO or NC state is determined by the ‘no power’ state of the relay outputs.

All four output relays may be programmed for fail-safe or non-fail-safe operation. When in fail-safe mode, output relay acti-vation or a loss of control power will cause the contacts to go to their power down state.

For example:

• A fail-safe NO contact closes when the 369 is powered up (if no prior unreset trip conditions) and will open when acti-vated (tripped) or when the 369 loses control power.

• A non-fail-safe NO contact remains open when the 369 is powered up (unless a prior unreset trip condition) and willclose only when activated (tripped). If control power is lost while the output relay is activated (NO contacts closed) theNO contacts will open.

Thus, in order to cause a trip on loss of control power to the 369, the Trip relay should be programmed as fail-safe. See thefigure below for typical wiring of contactors and breakers for fail-safe and non-fail-safe operation. Output relays remainlatched after activation if the fault condition persists or the protection element has been programmed as latched. Thismeans that once this relay has been activated it remains in the active state until the 369 is manually reset.

The Trip relay cannot be reset if a timed lockout is in effect. Lockout time will be adhered to regardless of whether controlpower is present or not. The relay contacts may be reset if motor conditions allow, by pressing the RESET key, using theREMOTE RESET switch or via communications. The Emergency Restart feature overrides all features to reset the 369.

The rear of the 369 relay shows output relay contacts in their power down state.

In locations where system voltage disturbances cause voltage levels to dip below the control power rangelisted in specifications, any relay contact programmed as fail-safe may change state. Therefore, in anyapplication where the ‘process’ is more critical than the motor, it is recommended that the trip relay con-tacts be programmed as non-fail-safe. If, however, the motor is more critical than the ‘process’ then pro-gram the trip contacts as fail-safe.

Figure 3–11: HOOKUP / FAIL AND NON-FAILSAFE MODES

WARNING

840716A4.CDR



3

3.3.14 RS485 COMMUNICATIONS

Three independent two-wire RS485 ports are provided. If option (F), the fiber optic port, is installed and used, the COMM 3RS485 port may not be used. The RS485 ports are isolated as a group.

Up to 32 369s (or other devices) can be daisy-chained together on a single serial communication channel without exceed-ing the driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. Commercially available repeatersmay also be used to increase the number of relays on a single channel to a maximum of 254. Note that there may only beone master device per serial communication link.

Connections should be made using shielded twisted pair cables (typically 24 AWG). Suitable cables should have a charac-teristic impedance of 120 ohms (e.g. Belden #9841) and total wire length should not exceed 4000 ft. Commercially avail-able repeaters can be used to extend transmission distances.

Voltage differences between remote ends of the communication link are not uncommon. For this reason, surge protectiondevices are internally installed across all RS485 terminals. Internally, an isolated power supply with an optocoupled datainterface is used to prevent noise coupling. The source computer/PLC/SCADA system should have similar transient protec-tion devices installed, either internally or externally, to ensure maximum reliability.

To ensure that all devices in a daisy-chain are at the same potential, it is imperative that the common ter-minals of each RS485 port are tied together and grounded in one location only, at the master. Failure todo so may result in intermittent or failed communications.

Correct polarity is also essential. 369 relays must be wired with all ‘+’ terminals connected together, and all ‘–’terminals connected together. Each relay must be daisy-chained to the next one. Avoid star or stub connected configura-tions. The last device at each end of the daisy-chain should be terminated with a 120 ohm ¼ watt resistor in series with a1 nF capacitor across the ‘+’ and ‘–’ terminals. Observing these guidelines will result in a reliable communication systemthat is immune to system transients.

Figure 3–12: RS485 WIRING

CAUTION


3.4 REMOTE RTD MODULE (RRTD) 3 INSTALLATION

3

3.4REMOTE RTD MODULE (RRTD) 3.4.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

The optional remote RTD module is designed to be mounted near the motor. This eliminates the need for multiple RTDcables to run back from the motor which may be in a remote location to the switchgear. Although the module is internallyshielded to minimize noise pickup and interference, it should be mounted away from high current conductors or sources ofstrong magnetic fields.

The remote RTD module physical dimensions and mounting (drill diagram) are shown below. Mounting hardware (bolts andwashers) and instructions are provided with the module.

Figure 3–13: REMOTE RTD DIMENSIONS

Figure 3–14: REMOTE RTD REAR VIEW

FIBER OPTIC DATA LINK (F)For harsh environments

DIGITAL INPUTS(IO)

Communications(3)-RS485 Com Ports

ANALOG OUTPUT(IO)

813701A4.CDR

CONTROL POWERHI: 50-300VDC/40-265VACLO: 20-60VDC/20-48VAC

Customer Accessiblefuse

12 RTD INPUTSfield selectable type

4 OUTPUT RELAYS (IO)Programmable alarm andtrip conditions activatedby programmable setpoints,digital inputs and remotecommunication control.


3 INSTALLATION 3.4 REMOTE RTD MODULE (RRTD)

3

3.4.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

Figure 3–15: REMOTE RTD MODULE

369Motor Management Relay

g

g

813703A5.CDR

FIBERRxTx

STATORWINDING 1

STATORWINDING 2

STATORWINDING 3

STATORWINDING 4

STATORWINDING 5

STATORWINDING 6

MOTORBEARING 1

MOTORBEARING 2

PUMPBEARING 1

PUMPBEARING 2

PUMPCASE

AMBIENT

4

12

16

20

24

28

32

36

40

44

48

8

3

11

15

19

23

27

31

35

39

43

47

7

2

10

14

18

22

26

30

34

38

42

46

6

1

9

13

17

21

25

29

33

37

41

45

5

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

shld.

shld.shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

RTD1

RTD3

RTD4

RTD5

RTD6

RTD7

RTD8

RTD9

RTD10

RTD11

RTD12

RTD2

GROUNDBUS

METER

HottestStator

RTD1

RTD2

PLC

SCADA

RS485

+

cpm-

Shield

Shield

-

CONTROLPOWER

380VAC / 125VDC

L

N

CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 3


71 74 7773 76 7972 75 78

80

82

8485

81

83Com-

shld.


1

2

3

4

AN

ALO

GO

UT

PU

TS

OP

TIO

N (

IO)

RTD HIALARM

SELF TESTALARM

ALARM

RTD trip

FlowValue

PressureValue

111

126125124123

112113114115116117118119120121122

OU

TP

UT

RE

LAY

S O

PT

ION

(IO

)

TRIP

ALARM

AUX. 1

AUX. 2

FILTER GROUNDLINE +


ON

TR

OL

PO

WE

R

WITH OPTION (F)

INPUT 1

INPUT 3

INPUT 6

INPUT 2

INPUT 4

INPUT 5

DIG

ITA

L IN

PU

TS

OP

TIO

N (

IO) 51

59

61

52

60

62

535455565758

GE Multilin

GE Multilin

RRTD

Remote RTD Module


3.5 CT INSTALLATION 3 INSTALLATION

3

3.5CT INSTALLATION 3.5.1 PHASE CT INSTALLATION

Figure 3–16: PHASE CT INSTALLATION


3 INSTALLATION 3.5 CT INSTALLATION

3

3.5.2 5 AMP GROUND CT INSTALLATION

Figure 3–17: 5 A GROUND CT INSTALLATION


3.5 CT INSTALLATION 3 INSTALLATION

3

3.5.3 HGF (50:0.025) GROUND CT INSTALLATION

Figure 3–18: HGF (50:0.025) GROUND CT INSTALLATION, 3" AND 5" WINDOW

Figure 3–19: HGF (50:0.025) GROUND CT INSTALLATION, 8" WINDOW

GE Power Management


4 USER INTERFACES 4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

4

4 USER INTERFACES 4.1FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.1.1 DISPLAY

All messages are displayed on a 40-character LCD display to make them visible under poor lighting conditions and fromvarious viewing angles. Messages are displayed in plain English and do not require the aid of an instruction manual fordeciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to user defined status mes-sages. Any trip, alarm, or start inhibit will automatically override the default messages and appear on the display.

Contrast Adjustment and Lamp Test: Press the [HELP] key for 2 seconds to initiate lamp test. The contrast can also beadjusted now as required. Use the [VALUE] up and down keys to adjust the contrast. Press the [ENTER] key to save theadjustment when completed.

4.1.2 LED INDICATORS

There are ten LED indicators, as follows:

• TRIP Trip relay has operated (energized)

• ALARM Alarm relay has operated (energized)

• AUX 1 Auxiliary relay has operated (energized)

• AUX 2 Auxiliary relay has operated (energized)

• SERVICE Relay in need of technical service.

• BSD Relay has detected a backspin condition on a stopped motor

• RRTD RRTD module communication indication

• METERING 369 has option M or B installed

• COM 1 Channel 1 RS485 communication indication

• COM 2 Channel 2 RS485 communication indication

Figure 4–1: LED INDICATORS

4.1.3 RS232 PROGRAM PORT

This port is intended for connection to a portable PC. Setpoint files may be created at any location and downloaded throughthis port using the EnerVista 369 Setup software. Local interrogation of Setpoints and Actual Values is also possible. Newfirmware may be downloaded to the 369 flash memory through this port. Upgrading of the relay firmware does not require ahardware EPROM change.

TRIP BSD

ALARM RRTD

AUX 1AUX 1 METERING

AUX 2AUX 2 COM 1COM 1

SERVICE COM 2COM 2


4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4 USER INTERFACES

4

4.1.4 KEYPAD

The 369 messages are organized into pages under the main headings, Setpoints and Actual Values. The [SETPOINTS]key is used to navigate through the page headers of the programmable parameters. The [ACTUAL VALUES] key is used tonavigate through the page headers of the measured parameters.

Each page is broken down further into logical subgroups of messages. The [PAGE] up and down keys may be used to nav-igate through the subgroups.

• [SETPOINTS]: This key may be used to navigate through the page headers of the programmable parameters. Alter-nately, one can press this key followed by using the Page Up / Page Down keys.

• [ACTUAL VALUES]: This key is used to navigate through the page headers of the measured parameters. Alternately,one can scroll through the pages by pressing the Actual Values key followed by using the Page Up / Page Down keys.

• [PAGE]: The Page Up/ Page Down keys may be used to scroll through page headers for both Setpoints and ActualValues.

• [LINE]: Once the required page is found, the Line Up/ Line Down keys may be used to scroll through the sub-headings.

• [VALUE]: The Value Up and Value Down keys are used to scroll through variables in the Setpoint programming mode.It will increment and decrement numerical Setpoint values, or alter yes/no options.

• [RESET]: The reset key may be used to reset a trip or latched alarm, provided it has been activated by selecting thelocal reset.

• [ENTER] The key is dual purpose. It is used to enter the subgroups or store altered setpoint values.

• [CLEAR] The key is also dual purpose. It may be used to exit the subgroups or to return an altered setpoint to its origi-nal value before it has been stored.

• [HELP]: The help key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages; such as the Setpoint range,etc.

To enter setpoints, select the desired page header. Then press the [LINE UP] / [LINE DOWN] keys to scroll through thepage and find the desired subgroup. Once the desired subgroup is found, press the [VALUE UP] / [VALUE DOWN] keys toadjust the setpoints. Press the [ENTER] key to save the setpoint or the [CLEAR] key to revert back to the old setpoint.

4.1.5 SETPOINT ENTRY

In order to store any setpoints, Terminals 57 and 58 (access terminals) must be shorted (a key switch may be used forsecurity). There is also a Setpoint Passcode feature that may be enabled to restrict access to setpoints. The passcodemust be entered to allow the changing of setpoint values. A passcode of 0 effectively turns off the passcode feature andonly the access jumper is required for changing setpoints.

If no key is pressed for 30 minutes, access to setpoint values will be restricted until the passcode is entered again. To pre-vent setpoint access before the 30 minutes expires, the unit may be turned off and back on, the access jumper may beremoved, or the SETPOINT ACCESS setpoint may be changed to Restricted. The passcode cannot be entered until termi-nals 57 and 58 (access terminals) are shorted.

Setpoint changes take effect immediately, even when motor is running. It is not recommended, however, to change set-points while the motor is running as any mistake could cause a nuisance trip.

Refer to Section 5.2.1: Setpoint Access on page 5–4 for a detailed description of the setpoint access procedure.


4 USER INTERFACES 4.2 ENERVISTA 369 SETUP INTERFACE

4

4.2ENERVISTA 369 SETUP INTERFACE 4.2.1 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

The following minimum requirements must be met for the EnerVista 369 Setup software to operate on your computer.

• Pentium class or higher processor (Pentium II 300 MHz or better recommended)

• Microsoft Windows 95, 98, 98SE, ME, NT 4.0 (SP4 or higher), 2000, XP

• 64 MB of RAM (256 MB recommended)

• Minimum of 50 MB hard disk space (200 MB recommended)

If EnerVista 369 Setup is currently installed, note the path and directory name. It may be required during upgrading.

The EnerVista 369 Setup software is included on the GE enerVista CD that accompanied the 369. The software may alsobe downloaded from the GE Multilin website at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.

4.2.2 INSTALLING ENERVISTA 369 SETUP

After ensuring these minimum requirements, use the following procedure to install the EnerVista 369 Setup software fromthe enclosed GE enerVista CD.

1. Insert the GE enerVista CD into your CD-ROM drive.

2. Click the Install Now button and follow the installation instructions to install the no-charge enerVista software on thelocal PC.

3. When installation is complete, start the enerVista Launchpad application.

4. Click the IED Setup section of the Launch Pad window.

5. In the enerVista LaunchPad window, click the Add Product button and select the “369 Motor Management Relay” asshown below. Select the “Web” option to ensure the most recent software release, or select “CD” if you do not have aweb connection, then click the Add Now button to list software items for the 369.

http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin


4.2 ENERVISTA 369 SETUP INTERFACE 4 USER INTERFACES

4

6. enerVista Launchpad will obtain the installation program from the Web or CD. Once the download is complete, double-click the installation program to install the EnerVista 369 Setup software.

7. The program will request the user to create a backup 3.5" floppy-disk set. If this is desired, click on the Start Copyingbutton; otherwise, click on the CONTINUE WITH 369 INSTALLATION button.

8. Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the EnerVista 369 Setup software will be installed.

9. Click on Next to begin the installation. The files will be installed in the directory indicated and the installation programwill automatically create icons and add EnerVista 369 Setup software to the Windows start menu.

10. Click Finish to end the installation. The 369 device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the enerVista Launch-pad window, as shown below.


4 USER INTERFACES 4.3 CONNECTING ENERVISTA 369 SETUP TO THE RELAY

4

4.3CONNECTING ENERVISTA 369 SETUP TO THE RELAY 4.3.1 CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

Before starting, verify that the serial cable is properly connected to either the RS232 port on the front panel of the device(for RS232 communications) or to the RS485 terminals on the back of the device (for RS485 communications).

This example demonstrates an RS232 connection. For RS485 communications, the GE Multilin F485 converter will berequired. Refer to the F485 manual for additional details. To configure the relay for Ethernet communications, see Configur-ing Ethernet Communications on page 4–6.

1. Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista 369 Setup software (available from the GE enerVista CD). See theprevious section for the installation procedure.

2. Click on the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site.

3. Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along withthe display order of devices defined for the site. In this example, we will use “Substation 1” as the site name. Click theOK button when complete.

4. The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista 369 Setup window.

5. Click the Add Device button to define the new device.

6. Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description (optional) of the site.

7. Select “Serial” from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must beentered for proper RS232 functionality.

• Enter the slave address and COM port values (from the S1 369 SETUP 369 COMMUNICATIONS menu) in theSlave Address and COM Port fields.

• Enter the physical communications parameters (baud rate and parity settings) in their respective fields.

8. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the 369 device and upload the order code. If an communications erroroccurs, ensure that the 369 serial communications values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay settingvalues.

9. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (orOnline window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista 369 Setup window.

The 369 Site Device has now been configured for serial communications. Proceed to Connecting to the Relay on page 4–7to begin communications.


4.3 CONNECTING ENERVISTA 369 SETUP TO THE RELAY 4 USER INTERFACES

4

4.3.2 USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE

The Quick Connect button can be used to establish a fast connection through the front panel RS232 port of a 369 relay.The following window will appear when the Quick Connect button is pressed:

As indicated by the window, the Quick Connect feature quickly connects the EnerVista 369 Setup software to a 369 frontport with the following settings: 9600 baud, no parity, 8 bits, 1 stop bit. Select the PC communications port connected to therelay and press the Connect button.

The EnerVista 369 Setup software will display a window indicating the status of communications with the relay. When con-nected, a new Site called “Quick Connect” will appear in the Site List window. The properties of this new site cannot bechanged.

The 369 Site Device has now been configured via the Quick Connect feature for serial communications. Proceed to Con-necting to the Relay on page 4–7 to begin communications.

4.3.3 CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS

Before starting, verify that the Ethernet cable is properly connected to the MultiNET device, and that the MultiNET has beenconfigured and properly connected to the relay. Refer to the MultiNET manual for additional details on configuring the Multi-NET to work with the 369.

1. Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista 369 Setup software (available from the GE enerVista CD). See theprevious section for the installation procedure.

2. Click on the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site.

3. Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along withthe display order of devices defined for the site. In this example, we will use “Substation 2” as the site name. Click theOK button when complete.

4. The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista 369 Setup window.



4 USER INTERFACES 4.3 CONNECTING ENERVISTA 369 SETUP TO THE RELAY

4


7. Select “Ethernet” from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must beentered for proper Ethernet functionality.

• Enter the IP address assigned to the MultiNET adapter.

• Enter the slave address and Modbus port values (from the S1 369 SETUP 369 COMMUNICATIONS menu) in theSlave Address and Modbus Port fields.

8. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the 369 device and upload the order code. If an communications erroroccurs, ensure that the 369 Ethernet communications values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay andMultiNET setting values.

9. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (orOnline window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista 369 Setup window.

The 369 Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to the following section to begin com-munications.

4.3.4 CONNECTING TO THE RELAY

Now that the communications parameters have been properly configured, the user can easily connect to the relay.

1. Expand the Site list by double clicking on the site name or clicking on the «+» box to list the available devices for thegiven site (for example, in the “Substation 1” site shown below).

2. Desired device trees can be expanded by clicking the «+» box. The following list of headers is shown for each device:

• Device Definitions

• Settings

• Actual Values

• Commands

• Communications


4.3 CONNECTING ENERVISTA 369 SETUP TO THE RELAY 4 USER INTERFACES

4

3. Expand the Settings > Relay Setup list item and double click on Front Panel to open the Front Panel settings windowas shown below:

Figure 4–2: MAIN WINDOW AFTER CONNECTION

4. The Front Panel settings window will open with a corresponding status indicator on the lower left of the EnerVista 369Setup window.

5. If the status indicator is red, verify that the serial or Ethernet cable is properly connected to the relay, and that the relayhas been properly configured for communications (steps described earlier).

The Front Panel settings can now be edited, printed, or changed according to user specifications. Other setpoint and com-mands windows can be displayed and edited in a similar manner. Actual values windows are also available for display.These windows can be locked, arranged, and resized at will.

Refer to the EnerVista 369 Setup Help File for additional information about the using the software.

-Expand the Site List by doubleclicking or by selecting the [+] box

Communications Status IndicatorGreen = OK, Red = No Comms

NOTE


4 USER INTERFACES 4.4 WORKING WITH SETPOINTS AND SETPOINT FILES

4

4.4WORKING WITH SETPOINTS AND SETPOINT FILES 4.4.1 ENGAGING A DEVICE

The EnerVista 369 Setup software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to directly communicate with a 369 relay.Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any num-ber of relays selected from the SR or UR product series.

4.4.2 ENTERING SETPOINTS

The System Setup page will be used as an example to illustrate the entering of setpoints. In this example, we will be chang-ing the current sensing setpoints.

1. Establish communications with the relay.

2. Select the Setpoint > S2 System Setup > CT/VT Setup menu item. This can be selected from the device setpointtree or the main window menu bar.

3. Select the PHASE CT PRIMARY setpoint by clicking anywhere in the parameter box. This will display three arrows: twoto increment/decrement the value and another to launch the numerical calculator.

4. Clicking the arrow at the end of the box displays a numerical keypad interface that allows the user to enter a valuewithin the setpoint range displayed near the top of the keypad:

Click Accept to exit from the keypad and keep the new value. Click on Cancel to exit from the keypad and retain theold value.


4.4 WORKING WITH SETPOINTS AND SETPOINT FILES 4 USER INTERFACES

4

5. For setpoints requiring non-numerical pre-set values (e.g. GROUND CT TYPE above), clicking anywhere within the set-point value box displays a drop-down selection menu arrow. Select the desired value from this list.

6. For setpoints requiring an alphanumeric text string (e.g. message scratchpad messages), the value may be entereddirectly within the setpoint value box.

7. Click on Save to save the values into the 369, then click OK to accept any changes and exit the window. Otherwise,click Restore to retain previous values and exit.

4.4.3 FILE SUPPORT

Opening any EnerVista 369 Setup file will automatically launch the application or provide focus to the already opened appli-cation. If the file is a settings file (has a ‘369’ extension) which had been removed from the Settings List tree menu, it will beadded back to the Settings List tree.

New files will be automatically added to the tree, which is sorted alphabetically with respect to settings file names.

4.4.4 USING SETPOINTS FILES

a) OVERVIEW

The EnerVista 369 Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings:

• In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays.

• Directly modifying relay settings while connected to a communicating relay, then saving the settings when complete.

• Creating/editing settings files while connected to a communicating relay, then saving them to the relay when complete.

Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to thefollowing categories of relay settings:

• Device Definition

• Product Setup

• System Setup

• Grouped Elements

• Control Elements

• Inputs/Outputs

• Testing

Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.

The EnerVista 369 Setup software displays relay setpoints with the same hierarchy as the front panel display. For specificdetails on setpoints, refer to Chapter 5.

b) DOWNLOADING AND SAVING SETPOINTS FILES

Setpoints must be saved to a file on the local PC before performing any firmware upgrades. Saving setpoints is also highlyrecommended before making any setpoint changes or creating new setpoint files.



4

The EnerVista 369 Setup window, setpoint files are accessed in the Settings List control bar window or the Files Window.Use the following procedure to download and save setpoint files to a local PC.

1. Ensure that the site and corresponding device(s) have been properly defined and configured as shown in ConnectingEnerVista 369 Setup to the Relay on page 4–5.

2. Select the desired device from the site list.

3. Select the File > Read Settings from Device menu item to obtain settings information from the device.

4. After a few seconds of data retrieval, the software will request the name and destination path of the setpoint file. Thecorresponding file extension will be automatically assigned. Press Save to complete the process. A new entry will beadded to the tree, in the File pane, showing path and file name for the setpoint file.

c) ADDING SETPOINTS FILES TO THE ENVIRONMENT

The EnerVista 369 Setup software provides the capability to review and manage a large group of setpoint files. Use the fol-lowing procedure to add a new or existing file to the list.

1. In the files pane, right-click on ‘Files’ and select the Add Existing Setting File item as shown:

2. The Open dialog box will appear, prompting the user to select a previously saved setpoint file. As for any otherMicrosoft Windows® application, browse for the file to be added then click Open. The new file and complete path willbe added to the file list.

d) CREATING A NEW SETPOINT FILE

The EnerVista 369 Setup software allows the user to create new setpoint files independent of a connected device. Thesecan be uploaded to a relay at a later date. The following procedure illustrates how to create new setpoint files.

3. In the File pane, right click on ‘File’ and select the New Settings File item. The EnerVista 369 Setup software displaysthe following box will appear, allowing for the configuration of the setpoint file for the correct firmware version. It is



4

important to define the correct firmware version to ensure that setpoints not available in a particular version are notdownloaded into the relay.

4. Select the firmware version.

5. For future reference, enter some useful information in the Description box to facilitate the identification of the deviceand the purpose of the file.

6. Enter any installed options (metering/backspin and Profibus), as well as the slave addresses of any remote RTDs.

7. To select a file name and path for the new file, click the button beside the Enter File Name box.

8. Select the file name and path to store the file, or select any displayed file name to update an existing file. All 369 set-point files should have the extension ‘369’ (for example, ‘motor1.369’).

9. Click Save and OK to complete the process. Once this step is completed, the new file, with a complete path, will beadded to the EnerVista 369 Setup software environment.

e) UPGRADING SETPOINT FILES TO A NEW REVISION

It is often necessary to upgrade the revision code for a previously saved setpoint file after the 369 firmware has beenupgraded (for example, this is required for firmware upgrades). This is illustrated in the following procedure.

1. Establish communications with the 369 relay.

2. Select the Actual > A5 Product Info menu item and record the Software Revision identifier of the relay firmware.

3. Load the setpoint file to be upgraded into the EnerVista 369 Setup environment as described in Adding Setpoints Filesto the Environment on page 4–11.

4. In the File pane, select the saved setpoint file.

5. From the main window menu bar, select the File > Properties menu item and note the File Version of the setpoint file.If this version (e.g. 5.00 shown below) is different than the Software Revision code noted in step 2, select a New FileVersion that matches the Software Revision code from the pull-down menu.

For example, if the firmware revision is 27I600A4.000 (software revision 6.00) and the current setpoint file revision is5.00, change the setpoint file revision to “6.0X”.



4

6. When complete, click Convert to convert the setpoint file to the desired revision. A dialog box will request confirmation.See Loading Setpoints from a File on page 4–14 for instructions on loading this setpoint file into the 369.

f) PRINTING SETPOINTS AND ACTUAL VALUES

The EnerVista 369 Setup software allows the user to print partial or complete lists of setpoints and actual values. Use thefollowing procedure to print a list of setpoints:

1. Select a previously saved setpoints file in the File pane or establish communications with a 369 device.

2. From the main window, select the File > Print Settings menu item.

3. The Print/Export Options dialog box will appear. Select Settings in the upper section and select either Include AllFeatures (for a complete list) or Include Only Enabled Features (for a list of only those features which are currentlyused) in the filtering section and click OK.

4. The process for File > Print Preview Settings is identical to the steps above.

Setpoints lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired file (in the file list) or device (in the devicelist) and selecting the Print Device Information or Print Settings File options.

A complete list of actual values can also be printed from a connected device with the following procedure:

1. Establish communications with the desired 369 device.

2. From the main window, select the File > Print Settings menu item.

Select the desired setpoint version

from this menu. The 6.0x indicates

versions 6.00, 6.01, 6.02, etc.

Enter any special comments

about the setpoint file here.



4

3. The Print/Export Options dialog box will appear. Select Actual Values in the upper section and select either IncludeAll Features (for a complete list) or Include Only Enabled Features (for a list of only those features which are cur-rently used) in the filtering section and click OK.

Actual values lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired device (in the device list) and select-ing the Print Device Information option.

g) LOADING SETPOINTS FROM A FILE

An error message will occur when attempting to download a setpoint file with a revision number that does notmatch the relay firmware. If the firmware has been upgraded since saving the setpoint file, see Upgrading SetpointFiles to a New Revision on page 4–12 for instructions on changing the revision number of a setpoint file.

The following procedure illustrates how to load setpoints from a file. Before loading a setpoints file, it must first be added tothe EnerVista 369 Setup environment as described in Adding Setpoints Files to the Environment on page 4–11.

1. Select the previously saved setpoints file from the File pane of the EnerVista 369 Setup software main window.

2. Select the File > Properties menu item and verify that the corresponding file is fully compatible with the hardware andfirmware version of the target relay. If the versions are not identical, see Upgrading Setpoint Files to a New Revision onpage 4–12 for details on changing the setpoints file version.

3. Right-click on the selected file and select the Write Settings to Device item.

4. Select the target relay from the list of devices shown and click Send. If there is an incompatibility, an error will occur: Ifthere are no incompatibilities between the target device and the settings file, the data will be transferred to the relay. Anindication of the percentage completed will be shown in the bottom of the main window.

WARNING


4 USER INTERFACES 4.5 UPGRADING RELAY FIRMWARE

4

4.5UPGRADING RELAY FIRMWARE 4.5.1 DESCRIPTION

To upgrade the 369 firmware, follow the procedures listed in this section. Upon successful completion of this procedure, the369 will have new firmware installed with the original setpoints.

The latest firmware files are available from the GE Multilin website at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.

4.5.2 SAVING SETPOINTS TO A FILE

Before upgrading firmware, it is very important to save the current 369 settings to a file on your PC. After the firmware hasbeen upgraded, it will be necessary to load this file back into the 369.

Refer to Downloading and Saving Setpoints Files on page 4–10 for details on saving relay setpoints to a file.

4.5.3 LOADING NEW FIRMWARE

Loading new firmware into the 369 flash memory is accomplished as follows:

1. Connect the relay to the local PC and save the setpoints to a file as shown in Downloading and Saving Setpoints Fileson page 4–10.

2. Select the Communications > Update Firmware menu item.

3. The following warning message will appear. Select Yes to proceed or No the cancel the process. Do not proceedunless you have saved the current setpoints.

4. The EnerVista 369 Setup software will request the new firmware file. Locate the firmware file to load into the 369. Thefirmware filename has the following format:

5. The EnerVista 369 Setup software automatically lists all filenames beginning with ‘53’. Select the appropriate file andclick OK to continue.

6. The software will prompt with another Upload Firmware Warning window. This will be the final chance to cancel thefirmware upgrade before the flash memory is erased. Click Yes to continue or No to cancel the upgrade.

7. The EnerVista 369 Setup software now prepares the 369 to receive the new firmware file. The 369 will display a mes-sage indicating that it is in Upload Mode. While the file is being loaded into the 369, a status box appears indicatinghow much of the new firmware file has been transferred and how much is remaining, as well as the upgrade status.The entire transfer process takes approximately five minutes.

8. The EnerVista 369 Setup software will notify the user when the 369 has finished loading the file. Carefully read any dis-played messages and click OK to return the main screen.

Cycling power to the relay is highly recommended after a firmware upgrade.

53 CMB 250 . 000

Modification Number (000 = none)

Firmware Version (250 = 2.50)

Internal Identifier

Product code (53 = 369)

NOTE

http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin


4.5 UPGRADING RELAY FIRMWARE 4 USER INTERFACES

4

After successfully updating the 369 firmware, the relay will not be in service and will require setpoint programming. To com-municate with the relay, the following settings will have to me manually programmed.

SLAVE ADDRESSBAUD RATEPARITY (if applicable)

When communications is established, the saved setpoints must be reloaded back into the relay. See Loading Setpointsfrom a File on page 4–14 for details.

Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default values,min/max values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firmware.

The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified. The EEPROMDATA ERROR message displayed after upgrading/downgrading the firmware is a resettable, self-test message intended toinform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware. This message does not signal anyproblems when appearing after firmware upgrades.


4 USER INTERFACES 4.6 ADVANCED ENERVISTA 369 SETUP FEATURES

4

4.6ADVANCED ENERVISTA 369 SETUP FEATURES 4.6.1 TRIGGERED EVENTS

While the interface is in either on-line or off-line mode, data generated by triggered specified parameters can be viewed andanalyzed via one of the following features:

• Event Recorder: The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 250 events, listed in chronolog-ical order from most recent to the oldest.

• Oscillography: The oscillography waveform traces and digital states provide a visual display of power system andrelay operation data captured during specific triggered events.

4.6.2 TRENDING

Trending from the 369 is accomplished via EnerVista 369 Setup. Many different parameters can be trended and graphed atsampling periods from 1 second up to 1 hour. The parameters which can be trended by EnerVista 369 Setup are:

• Currents/Voltages: phase currents A/B/C; average phase current; motor load; current unbalance; ground current; andvoltages Vab, Vbc, Vca Van, Vbn and Vcn

• Power: power factor; real power (kW); reactive power (kvar); Apparent Power (kVA); positive watthours; positive var-hours; and negative varhours

• Temperature: Hottest Stator RTD; RTDs 1 through 12; and RRTDs 1 through 12

• Other: thermal capacity used and system frequency

1. To use the Trending function, run the EnerVista 369 Setup software and establish communications with a connected369 unit. Select the Actual > Trending menu item to open the Trending window.

Figure 4–3: TRENDING VIEW

TRENDING SELECTION

Select the desired graphsto view.

BUTTONS

Print, Setup (to edit Graph Attributes)Zoom In, Zoom Out

CURSOR LINES

To move lines, move mouse pointerover the cursor line. Click and hold theleft mouse button and drag the cursorline to the new location

MODE SELECT

Select one of these buttons to viewCursor Line 1, Cursor Line 2, orDelta (difference) values for the graph

WAVEFORM

The trended datafrom the 369 relay


4.6 ADVANCED ENERVISTA 369 SETUP FEATURES 4 USER INTERFACES

4

2. Program the parameters to display by selecting them from the pull down menus.

3. Select the Sample Rate and select RUN to begin the trending sampling.

4. The trended values can be printed using Print Trending Graph button.

5. The Trending File Setup button can be used to write the graph data to a file in a standard spreadsheet format. Ensurethat the Write Trended Data to File box is checked, and that the Sample Rate is at a minimum of 5 seconds. Set thefile capacity limit to the amount of memory available for trended data.

4.6.3 WAVEFORM CAPTURE (TRACE MEMORY)

The EnerVista 369 Setup software can be used to capture waveforms (or view trace memory) from the 369 relay at theinstance of a trip. A maximum of 16 cycles can be captured and the trigger point can be adjusted to anywhere within the setcycles. The last three waveform events are viewable.

The following waveforms can be captured:

• Phase A, B, and C currents (Ia, Ib, and Ic)

• Ground and current (Ig)

• Phase A-N, B-N, and C-N voltages (Van, Vbn, and Vcn) if wye-connectedPhase A-B and C-B (Vab and Vcb) if open-delta connected

• Digital data for output relays and contact input states.

1. With the EnerVista 369 Setup software running and communications established, select the Actual > Waveform Cap-ture menu item to open the waveform capture setup window:

Click on Trigger Waveform to trigger a waveform capture.

The waveform file numbering starts with the number zero in the 369; therefore, the maximum trigger number willalways be one less then the total number triggers available.

2. Click on the Save to File button to save the selected waveform to the local PC. A new window will appear requestingfor file name and path.

The file is saved as a COMTRADE File, with the extension ‘CFG’. In addition to the COMTRADE file, two other files aresaved. One is a CSV (comma delimited values) file, which can be viewed and manipulated with compatible third-partysoftware. The other file is a DAT File, required by the COMTRADE file for proper display of waveforms.

To view a previously saved COMTRADE File, click the Open button and select the corresponding COMTRADE File.

Number of available files

Files to be saved or viewed Save waveform to a file



4

3. To view the captured waveforms, click the Launch Viewer button. A detailed Waveform Capture window will appear asshown below:

Figure 4–4: WAVEFORM CAPTURE WINDOW ATTRIBUTES

4. The red vertical line indicates the trigger point of the relay.

5. The date and time of the trip is displayed at the top left corner of the window. To match the captured waveform with theevent that triggered it, make note of the time and date shown in the graph. Then, find the event that matches the sametime and date in the event recorder. The event record will provide additional information on the cause and the systemconditions at the time of the event. Additional information on how to download and save events is shown in EventRecorder on page 4–21.

Display graph valuesat the correspondingcursor line. Cursorlines are identified bytheir colors.

CURSOR

LINES

To move lines locate the mouse pointerover the cursor line then click and dragthe cursor to the new location.

DELTA

Indicates time differencebetween the two cursor lines

TRIGGER LINE

Indicates thepoint in time forthe trigger

TRIGGER TIME & DATE

Display the time & date of theTrigger

CURSOR LINE POSITION

Indicate the cursor line positionin time



4

4.6.4 PHASORS

The EnerVista 369 Setup software can be used to view the phasor diagram of three-phase currents and voltages. The pha-sors are for: Phase Voltages Va, Vb, and Vc; Phase Currents Ia, Ib, and Ic.

1. With the EnerVista 369 Setup software running and communications established, open the Actual Values > MeteringData window, then click on the Phasors tab.

2. The EnerVista 369 Setup software will display the following window:

3. Press the “View” button to display the following window:

4. The 369 Motor Management Relay was designed to display lagging angles. Therefore, if a system condition wouldcause the current to lead the voltage by 45°, the 369 relay will display such angle as 315° Lag instead of 45° Lead.

When the currents and voltages measured by the relay are zero, the angles displayed by the relay andthose shown by the EnerVista 369 Setup software are not fixed values.

VOLTAGE VECTORS

Assigned to Phasor

Set 1, Graph 1

CURRENT VECTORS

Assigned to Phasor

Set 2, Graph 2

CURRENT LEVEL

Displays the value

and angle of the

current phasor

VOLTAGE LEVEL

Displays the value

and the angle of

the voltage phasors

WARNING



4

4.6.5 EVENT RECORDER

The 369 event recorder can be viewed through the EnerVista 369 Setup software. The event recorder stores generator andsystem information each time an event occurs (e.g. breaker failure). Although the 369 currently supports 250 event records,the EnerVista 369 Setup software will only allow retrieval of the latest 200 events. Event 200 is the most recent event andEvent 001 is the oldest event. Event 001 is overwritten whenever a new event occurs. Refer to Event Records on page 6–16 for additional information on the event recorder.

Use the following procedure to view the event recorder with EnerVista 369 Setup:

1. With EnerVista 369 Setup running and communications established, select the Actual > A5 Event Recorder item fromthe main menu. This displays the Event Recorder window indicating the list of recorded events, with the most currentevent displayed first.

2. To view detailed information for a given event and the system information at the moment of the event occurrence,change the event number on the Select Event box.

EVENT LISTING

Lists the last 128 events

with the most recent

displayed at top of list.

CLEAR EVENTS

Click the Clear

Events button to

clear the event list

from memory.

SAVE EVENTS

Click the Save Events

button to save the event

record to the PC as a

CSV file.

EVENT DATA

System information as

measured by the relay

at the instant of the

event occurrence.

EVENT NUMBER

The event data information

is related to the event number

shown here.



4

4.6.6 MODBUS USER MAP

The EnerVista 369 Setup software provides a means to program the 369 User Map (Modbus addresses 0180h to 01FCh).Refer to User Definable Memory Map Area on page 9–34 for additional information on the User Map.

1. Select a connected device in EnerVista 369 Setup.

2. Select the Setpoint > User Map menu item to open the following window.

3. The above window allows the desired addresses to be written to User Map locations. The User Map values that corre-spond to these addresses are then displayed.

4.6.7 VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES

You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measured parameters. From the main window menu bar,selecting Actual Values opens a window with tabs, each tab containing data in accordance to the following list:

• Motor Status: Motor, Last Trip, Alarm Status, Start Inhibit, Local DI Status, Local Relay Outputs, and Real Time Clock

• Metering Data: Currents, Voltages, Power, Backspin, Local RTDs, Demand, Phasor, and RRTDs 1 to 4

• Learned Data: Motor Learned Data, Local RTD Maximums, RRTD 1 to 4 Maximums

• Statistical Data: Trip Counters and Motor Statistics

• Product Information: Revision Codes and Calibration Dates

Selecting an actual values window also opens the actual values tree from the corresponding device in the site list and high-lights the current location in the hierarchy.

For complete details on actual values, refer to Chapter 6.

To view a separate window for each group of actual values, select the desired item from the tree, and double click with theleft mouse button. Each group will be opened on a separate tab. The windows can be re-arranged to maximize data view-ing as shown in the following figure (showing actual current, voltage, and power values tiled in the same window):


4 USER INTERFACES 4.7 USING ENERVISTA VIEWPOINT WITH THE 369

4

4.7USING ENERVISTA VIEWPOINT WITH THE 369 4.7.1 PLUG AND PLAY EXAMPLE

EnerVista Viewpoint is an optional software package that puts critical 369 information onto any PC with plug-and-play sim-plicity. EnerVista Viewpoint connects instantly to the 369 via serial, ethernet or modem and automatically generatesdetailed overview, metering, power, demand, energy and analysis screens. Installing EnerVista Launchpad (see previoussection) allows the user to install a fifteen-day trial version of enerVista Viewpoint. After the fifteen day trial period you willneed to purchase a license to continue using enerVista Viewpoint. Information on license pricing can be found at http://www.enerVista.com.

1. Install the EnerVista Viewpoint software from the GE enerVista CD.

2. Ensure that the 369 device has been properly configured for either serial or Ethernet communications (see previoussections for details).

3. Click the Viewpoint window in EnerVista to log into EnerVista Viewpoint. At this point, you will be required to provide alogin and password if you have not already done so.

Figure 4–5: ENERVISTA VIEWPOINT MAIN WINDOW

4. Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window, then click the Add Site button to define a new site.

5. Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along withthe display order of devices defined for the site. Click the OK button when complete. The new site will appear in theupper-left list in the EnerVista 369 Setup window.



8. Select the appropriate communications interface (Ethernet or Serial) and fill in the required information for the 369.See Connecting EnerVista 369 Setup to the Relay on page 4–5 for details.

http://www.enerVista.com



4.7 USING ENERVISTA VIEWPOINT WITH THE 369 4 USER INTERFACES

4

Figure 4–6: DEVICE SETUP SCREEN (EXAMPLE)

9. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the 369 device and upload the order code. If an communications erroroccurs, ensure that communications values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay setting values.

10. Click OK when complete.

11. From the EnerVista main window, select the IED Dashboard item to open the Plug and Play IED dashboard. An iconfor the 369 will be shown.

Figure 4–7: ‘PLUG AND PLAY’ DASHBOARD


4 USER INTERFACES 4.7 USING ENERVISTA VIEWPOINT WITH THE 369

4

12. Click the Dashboard button below the 369 icon to view the device information. We have now successfully accessedour 369 through EnerVista Viewpoint.

Figure 4–8: ENERVISTA PLUG AND PLAY SCREENS (EXAMPLE)

For additional information on EnerVista viewpoint, please visit the EnerVista website at http://www.EnerVista.com.



4.7 USING ENERVISTA VIEWPOINT WITH THE 369 4 USER INTERFACES

4


5 SETPOINTS 5.1 OVERVIEW

5

5 SETPOINTS 5.1OVERVIEW 5.1.1 SETPOINTS MAIN MENU

S1 SETPOINTS369 SETUP

SETPOINT ACCESSSee page 5–4.

DISPLAY PREFERENCESSee page 5–4.

369 COMMUNICATIONSSee page 5–5.

REAL TIME CLOCKSee page 5–7.

WAVEFORM CAPTURESee page 5–7.

EVENT RECORDSSee page 5–8.

MESSAGE SCRATCHPADSee page 5–8.

DEFAULT MESSAGESSee page 5–8.

CLEAR/PRESET DATASee page 5–9.

MODIFY OPTIONSSee page 5–10.

FACTORY SERVICESee page 5–10.

S2 SETPOINTSSYSTEM SETUP

CT/VT SETUPSee page 5–11.

MONITORING SETUPSee page 5–12.

BLOCK FUNCTIONSSee page 5–16.

OUTPUT RELAY SETUPSee page 5–17.

CONTROL FUNCTIONSSee page 5–18.

S3 SETPOINTSOVERLOAD PROTECTION

THERMAL MODELSee page 5–25.

OVERLOAD CURVESSee page 5–26.

OVERLOAD ALARMSee page 5–34.


5.1 OVERVIEW 5 SETPOINTS

5

S4 SETPOINTSCURRENT ELEMENTS

SHORT CIRCUITSee page 5–35.

MECHANICAL JAMSee page 5–36.

UNDERCURRENTSee page 5–37.

CURRENT UNBALANCESee page 5–38.

GROUND FAULTSee page 5–39.

S5 SETPOINTSMOTOR START/INHIBITS

ACCELERATION TRIPSee page 5–41.

START INHIBITSee page 5–41.

BACKSPIN DETECTIONSee page 5–43.

S6 SETPOINTSRTD TEMPERATURE

LOCAL RTD PROTECTIONSee page 5–44.

REMOTE RTD PROTECTNSee page 5–45.

OPEN RTD ALARMSee page 5–48.

SHORT/LOW RTD ALARMSee page 5–48.

LOSS OF RRTD COMMSSee page 5–48.

S7 SETPOINTSVOLTAGE ELEMENTS

UNDERVOLTAGESee page 5–49.

OVERVOLTAGESee page 5–50.

PHASE REVERSALSee page 5–50.

UNDERFREQUENCYSee page 5–51.

OVERFREQUENCYSee page 5–52.


5 SETPOINTS 5.1 OVERVIEW

5

S8 SETPOINTSPOWER ELEMENTS

LEAD POWER FACTORSee page 5–54.

LAG POWER FACTORSee page 5–54.

POSITIVE REACTIVEPOWER (kvar)

See page 5–55.

NEGATIVE REACTIVEPOWER (kvar)

See page 5–56.

UNDERPOWERSee page 5–56.

REVERSE POWERSee page 5–57.

S9 SETPOINTSDIGITAL INPUTS

SPARE SWITCHSee page 5–60.

EMERGENCY RESTARTSee page 5–60.

DIFFERENTIALSee page 5–61.

SPEED SWITCHSee page 5–61.

REMOTE RESETSee page 5–61.

S10 SETPOINTSANALOG OUTPUTS

ANALOG OUTPUT 1See page 5–62.

ANALOG OUTPUT 2

ANALOG OUTPUT 3

ANALOG OUTPUT 4

S11 SETPOINTS369 TESTING

TEST OUTPUT RELAYSSee page 5–63.

TEST ANALOG OUTPUTSSee page 5–63.


5.2 S1 369 SETUP 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.2S1 369 SETUP 5.2.1 SETPOINT ACCESS

PATH: S1 369 SETUP SETPOINT ACCESS

There are two levels of access security: “Read Only” and “Read & Write”. The access terminals (57 and 58) must beshorted to gain read/write access via the front panel. The FRONT PANEL ACCESS setpoint indicates the access level basedon the condition of the access switch. If set to “Read Only”, setpoints and actual values may be viewed but, not changed. Ifset to “Read & Write”, actual values may be viewed and setpoints changed and stored.

Communication access can be changed with EnerVista 369 Setup via the Setpoint > S1 Setup menu. An access tab isshown only when communicating with the relay. To set a password, click the Change Password button, then enter and ver-ify the new passcode. After a passcode is entered, setpoint access changes to “Read Only”. When setpoints are changedthrough EnerVista 369 Setup during read-only access, the passcode must be entered to store the new setpoint. To allowextended write access, click Allow Write Access and enter the passcode. To return the access level to read-only, clickRestrict Write Access. Access automatically reverts to read-only after 30 minutes of inactivity or if control power is cycled.

If the access level is Read/Write, write access to setpoints is automatic and a 0 password need not be entered. If the pass-word is not known, consult the factory service department with the ENCRYPTED COMM PASSCODE value to be decoded.

5.2.2 DISPLAY PREFERENCES

PATH: S1 369 SETUP DISPLAY PREFERENCES

If no keys are pressed for the time defined by the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT, the 369 automatically displays a series ofdefault messages. This time can be modified to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough during programmingor reading of actual values. Each default message remains on the screen for the default message cycle time.

The contrast of the LCD display can be changed for different lighting conditions. If the display is unreadable (dark or light)press the [HELP] key for 2 seconds. This will put the relay in manual contrast adjustment mode. Use the value up or downkeys to adjust the contrast level. Press the [ENTER] key when complete.

Flash messages are status, warning, error or information messages displayed for several seconds in response to certainkey presses during setpoint programming. These messages override any normal messages. The duration of a flash mes-sage on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.

Temperatures may be displayed in either Celsius or Fahrenheit degrees. RTD setpoints are programmed in Celsius only.

The energy units for watthours and varhours can be viewed in either “Mega” (MWh or Mvarh) or “Kilo” (kWh or kvarh) units.Both registers accumulate energy regardless of the preference set.

SETPOINT ACCESS FRONT PANEL ACCESS:Read & Write

Range: Read Only, Read & Write

COMM ACCESSRead & Write

Range: Read Only, Read & Write

ENCRYPTED COMMPASSCODE: AIKFBAIK

Range: 8 alphabetic characters

DISPLAY PREFERENCES DEFAULT MESSAGECYCLE TIME: 20 s

Range: 5 to 100 s in steps of 1

DEFAULT MESSAGETIMEOUT: 300 s


CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT:145

Range: 1 to 254Display darkens as number is increased.

FLASH MESSAGEDURATION: 2s


TEMPERATURE DISPLAY:Celsius

Range: Celsius, FahrenheitShown if option R installed or RRTD added

ENERGY UNIT DISPLAY:Mega

Range: Mega, KiloShown only if option M or B installed


5 SETPOINTS 5.2 S1 369 SETUP

5

5.2.3 369 COMMUNICATIONS

PATH: S1 369 SETUP 369 COMMUNICATIONS

369 COMMUNICATIONS SLAVE ADDRESS:254

Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1

COMPUTER RS232BAUD RATE: 19200 Baud

Range: 4800, 9600, 19200

COMPUTER RS232PARITY: None

Range: None, Odd, Even

CHANNEL 1 RS485BAUD RATE: 19200 Baud

Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

CHANNEL 1 RS485PARITY: None


CHANNEL 2: RS485BAUD RATE: 19200 Baud

Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

CHANNEL 2: RS485PARITY: None


CHANNEL 3APPLICATION: Modbus

Range: Modbus, RRTD

CHANNEL 3CONNECTION: RS485

Range: RS485, Fiber.Only shown if option F is installed.

CHANNEL 3 RS485BAUD RATE: 19200 Baud

Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

CHANNEL 3 RS485PARITY: None


RRTD #1 ADDRESS:RRTD not available

Range: 0 to 254 in steps of 1 or RRTD not available







PROFIBUS ADDRESS:125

Range: 1 to 126 in steps of 1Only in models with Profibus (Option P or P1)

PROFIBUS CYCLIC INDATA: Default Map

Range: 0 (use Default Input Data Map) to 110 registersOnly in models with Profibus-DPV1 (option P1)

RESET PROFIBUS COMMSINTERFACE: No

Range: No, YesOnly in models with Profibus (Option P or P1)

IP ADDRESS OCTET 1:127

Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1Shown only with Modbus/TCP (Option E)





5

The 369 is equipped with four independent serial ports. The RS232 port is for local use and responds regardless of the pro-grammed slave address; the rear RS485 communication ports are addressed. If an RRTD module is used in conjunctionwith the 369, channel 3 must be used for communication between the two devices and the CHANNEL 3 APPLICATION set-point must be set to “RRTD” (note that the corresponding RRTD setting must be set to “Modbus”). A fiber optic port (optionF) may be ordered for channel 3. If the channel 3 fiber optic port is used, the channel 3 RS485 connection is disabled.

The RS232 port may be connected to a personal computer running EnerVista 369 Setup. This may be used for download-ing and uploading setpoints files, viewing actual values, and upgrading the 369 firmware. See Section 4.2: EnerVista 369Setup Interface on page 4–3 for details on using EnerVista 369 Setup.

The RS485 ports support a subset of the Modbus RTU protocol. Each port must have a unique address between 1 and254. Address 0 is the broadcast address listened to by all relays. Addresses need not be sequential; however, no twodevices can have the same address. Generally, each addition to the link uses the next higher address, starting at 1. A max-imum of 32 devices can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC, or PC using the RS485 ports. A repeater may beused to allow more than 32 relays on a single link.

Either Profibus-DP or Profibus-DPV1 communications are supported with the optional Profibus protocol interface (option Por P1). The bus address of the Profibus-DP/V1 node is set with the PROFIBUS ADDRESS setpoint, with an address rangefrom 1 to 126. Address 126 is used only for commissioning purposes and should not be used to exchange user data. TheRESET PROFIBUS COMMS INTERFACE setpoint command resets the Profibus module. This allows the Profibus module tobe reset if the Profibus module stops communicating with the Profibus master, without having to shut down the motor andcycle power to the relay.

The Modbus/TCP protocol is also supported with the optional Modbus/TCP protocol interface (option E). For more informa-tion, refer to Section 9.1.4: Modbus Communications on page 9–2.





SUBNET MASK OCTET 1:255








GATEWAY ADD. OCTET 1:127








DEVICENET MAC ID:63

Range: 0 to 63 in steps of 1Shown only with DeviceNet (Option D)

DEVICENET BAUD RATE:125 kbps

Range: 125, 250, 500 kbpsShown only with DeviceNet (Option D)



5

The DeviceNet protocol is supported with the optional DeviceNet communication interface (option D), and is certified asODVA DeviceNet CONFORMANCE TESTED™. The DEVICENET MAC ID sets the MAC ID with a range from 0 to 63. TheDEVICENET BAUD RATE selects a baud rate of 125, 250, or 500 kbps. DeviceNet communications must be stopped beforechanging DeviceNet setpoints. There will be a delay of 5 to 6 seconds for the new DeviceNet settings to take effect.

5.2.4 REAL TIME CLOCK

PATH: S1 369 SETUP REAL TIME CLOCK

The time/date stamp is used to track events for diagnostic purposes. The date and time are preset but may be changedmanually. A battery backed internal clock runs continuously even when power is off. It has the same accuracy as an elec-tronic watch approximately ±1 minute per month. It may be periodically corrected either manually through the keypad or viathe clock update command over the serial link using EnerVista 369 Setup.

Enter the current date using two digits for the month and day, and four digits for the year. For example, enter September 1,2005 as “09 01 2005". If entered from the keypad, the new date takes effect the moment [ENTER] is pressed. Set the timeby using two digits for the hour (in 24 hour time), minutes, and seconds. If entered from the keypad, the new time takeseffect the moment the [ENTER] key is pressed.

If the serial communication link is used, then all the relays can keep time in synchronization with each other. A new clocktime is pre-loaded into the memory map via the communications port by a remote computer to each relay connected on thecommunications channel. The computer broadcasts (address 0) a “set clock” command to all relays. Then all relays in thesystem begin timing at the exact same instant. There can be up to 100 ms of delay in receiving serial commands so theclock time in each relay is ±100 ms, ± the absolute clock accuracy, in the PLC or PC (see Chapter 9: Communications forinformation on programming the time and synchronizing commands.)

5.2.5 WAVEFORM CAPTURE

PATH: S1 369 SETUP WAVEFORM CAPTURE

Waveform capture records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as contextual information at the pointof trigger. These records are triggered by trip functions, digital input set to capture or via the EnerVista 369 Setup software.Multiple waveforms are captured simultaneously for each record: Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Va, Vb, and Vc.

The trigger position is programmable as a percent of the total buffer size (e.g. 10%, 50%, etc.). The trigger position deter-mines the number of pre- and post-fault cycles to divide the record. The relay sampling rate is 16 samples per cycle.

REAL TIME CLOCK SET MONTH [1...12]:09


SET DAY [1...31]:01


SET YEAR[1998...2097]:2005


SET HOUR [0...23]:00


SET MINUTE [0...59]:00


SET SECOND [0...59]:00


WAVEFORM CAPTURE TRIGGER POSITION:50 %

Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1



5

5.2.6 EVENT RECORDS

PATH: S1 369 SETUP EVENT RECORDS

See 6.6.1 Event Records on page 6–16 for details on viewing the event recorder.

5.2.7 MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD

PATH: S1 369 SETUP MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD

Five 40-character message screens can be programmed. These messages may be notes that pertain to the 369 installa-tion. This can be useful for reminding operators of certain tasks.

5.2.8 DEFAULT MESSAGES

PATH: S1 369 SETUP DEFAULT MESSAGES

EVENT RECORDS MOTOR RUNNINGEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

MOTOR STOPPEDEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD Text 1 Range: 2 x 20 alphanumeric characters

Text 2 Range: 2 x 20 alphanumeric characters




DEFAULT MESSAGES DEFAULT TO CURRENTMETERING: No

Range: Yes, No

DEFAULT TO MOTORLOAD: No

Range: Yes, No

DEFAULT TO DELTAVOLTAGE METERING: No

Range: Yes, NoOnly shown if option M installed

DEFAULT TO POWERFACTOR: No


DEFAULT TO POSITIVEWATTHOURS: No


DEFAULT TO REALPOWER: No


DEFAULT TO REACTIVEPOWER: No


DEFAULT TO HOTTESTSTATOR RTD: No

Range: Yes, No. Only shown if option R or RRTD isinstalled. Indicates stator no. local to 369 only.



5

The 369 displays a series of default messages. These default messages appear after the value for the DEFAULT MESSAGECYCLE TIME expires and there are no active trips, alarms or start inhibits. See Section 5.2.2: Display Preferences on page5–4 for details on setting time delays and message durations. The default messages can be selected from the list aboveincluding the five user definable messages from the message scratchpad.

5.2.9 CLEAR/PRESET DATA

PATH: S1 369 SETUP CLEAR/PRESET DATA

DEFAULT TO TEXTMESSAGE 1: No

Range: Yes, No


Range: Yes, No


Range: Yes, No


Range: Yes, No


Range: Yes, No

DEFAULT TO HOTTESTSTATOR RTD TEMP: No

Range: Yes, No

DEFAULT TO UNBALANCEBIASED MTR LOAD: No

Range: Yes, No. Shown only if unbalance biasing isenabled in the Thermal Model.

CLEAR/PRESET DATA CLEAR ALL DATA:No

Range: No, Yes

CLEAR LAST TRIPDATA: No

Range: No, Yes

CLEAR TRIPCOUNTERS: No

Range: No, Yes

CLEAR EVENTRECORD: No

Range: No, YesClears all 250 events

CLEAR RTDMAXIMUMS: No

Range: No, Yes

CLEAR PEAK DEMANDDATA: No

Range: No, Yes

CLEAR MOTORDATA: No

Range: No, Yes. Clears learned motor data, last startingcurrent, last starting thermal capacity, lastacceleration time, and motor statistics.

CLEAR ENERGY DATA:NO

Range: No, Yes

PRESET MWh:0

Range: 0 to 65535 MWh in steps of 1Can be preset or cleared by storing 0

PRESET POSITIVEMvarh: 0

Range: 0 to 65535 Mvarh in steps of 1Can be preset or cleared by storing 0

PRESET NEGATIVEMvarh: 0

Range: 0 to 65535 Mvarh in steps of 1Can be preset or cleared by storing 0



5

These commands may be used to clear various historical data. This is useful on new installations or to preset informationon existing installations where new equipment has been installed. The PRESET DIGITAL COUNTER setpoint appears only ifone of the digital inputs has been configured as a digital input counter.

Presetting the energy data is only available for “Mega” units. When these are preset, the corresponding “Kilo” data will bepreset to zero.

5.2.10 MODIFY OPTIONS

PATH: S1 369 SETUP MODIFY OPTIONS

This page allows the user to modify relay options directly from the front keypad.

5.2.11 FACTORY SERVICE

PATH: S1 369 SETUP FACTORY SERVICE

This page is for use by GE Multilin personnel for testing and calibration purposes

PRESET DIGITALCOUNTER: 0

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1Can be preset or cleared by storing 0

MODIFY OPTIONS ENABLE LOCAL RTD?Yes

Range: No, Yes

METERING/BACKSPIN:Metering

Range: No, Metering, Backspin

ENABLE FIBER OPTIC?No

Range: No, Yes

ENABLE ETHERNET?No

Range: No, Yes

ENABLE PROFIBUS-DP?No

Range: No, Yes

ENABLE PROFIBUS-DPV1?No

Range: No, Yes

ENABLE DEVICENET?No

Range: No, Yes

ENABLE HARSH ENV.?No

Range: No, Yes

ENTER PASSCODE: Range: Press the [ENTER] key to begin text editing

MODIFY OPTIONS?No

Range: No, Yes

FACTORY SERVICE FACTORY SERVICEPASSCODE: 0

Range: 0 to 65535


5 SETPOINTS 5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP

5

5.3S2 SYSTEM SETUP 5.3.1 DESCRIPTION

The system setup setpoints are critical to the operation of the 369 protective and metering features and elements. Mostprotective elements are based on the information input for the CT/VT Setup and Output Relay Setup. Additional monitoringalarms and control functions of the relay are also set here.

5.3.2 CT/VT SETUP

PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP CT/VT SETUP

• PHASE CT PRIMARY: Enter the phase CT primary here. The phase CT secondary (1 A or 5A) is determined by termi-nal connection to the 369. The phase CT should be chosen such that the motor FLA is between 50% and 100% of thephase CT primary. Ideally the motor FLA should be as close to 100% of phase CT primary as possible, never more.The phase CT class or type should also be chosen such that the CT can handle the maximum potential fault currentwith the attached burden without having its output saturate. Information on how to determine this if required is availablein Section 7.4: CT Specification and Selection on page 7–7.

• MOTOR FLA: The motor FLA (full load amps or full load current) must be entered. This value may be taken from themotor nameplate or motor data sheets.

• GROUND CT TYPE and GROUND CT PRIMARY: The GROUND CT TYPE and GROUND CT PRIMARY (if 5 A or 1 Asecondary) must be entered here. For high resistance grounded systems, sensitive ground detection is possible withthe 50:0.025 CT. On solidly or low resistance grounded systems where fault current can be quite high, a 1 A or 5 A CTshould be used for either zero-sequence (core balance) or residual ground sensing. If a residual connection is usedwith the phase CTs, the phase CT primary must also be entered for the ground CT primary. As with the phase CTs thetype of ground CT should be chosen to handle all potential fault levels without saturating.

• VT CONNECTION TYPE, VT RATIO, and MOTOR RATED VOLTAGE: These voltage related setpoints are visibleonly if the 369 has metering installed.

The manner in which the voltage transformers are connected must be entered here or none if VTs are not used. TheVT turns ratio must be chosen such that the secondary voltage of the VTs is between 1 and 240 V when the primary isat motor nameplate voltage. All voltage protection features are programmed as a percent of motor nameplate or ratedvoltage which represents the rated motor design voltage line to line.

For example: If the motor nameplate voltage is 4160 V and the VTs are 4160/120 open-delta, program VT CONNEC-TION TYPE to “Open Delta”, VT RATIO to “34.67:1”, and MOTOR RATED VOLTAGE to “4160 V”.

CT/VT SETUP PHASE CT PRIMARY:500


MOTOR FLA:10


GROUND CT TYPE:5

Range: None, 5A secondary, 1A secondary, 50:0.025

GROUND CT PRIMARY:100

Range: 1 to 5000 in steps of 1Only shown for 5A and 1A secondary CT

VT CONNECTION TYPE:None

Range: None, Open Delta, WyeOnly shown if option M or B installed

VT RATIO:35:1

Range: 1.00:1 to 240.00:1Not shown if VT Connection Type set to None

MOTOR RATED VOLTAGE:4160

Range: 100 to 20000 in steps of 1Not shown if VT Connection Type set to None

NOMINAL FREQUENCY:60 Hz

Range: 50 Hz, 60 Hz, Variable

SYSTEM PHASESEQUENCE: ABC

Range: ABC, ACBNot shown if VT Connection Type set to None


5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP 5 SETPOINTS

5

• NOMINAL FREQUENCY: Enter the nominal system frequency here.

The 369 has variable frequency functionality when the NOMINAL FREQUENCY is set to “Variable”. All of the elementsfunction in the same manner with the exception of the voltage and power elements, which work properly if the voltagewaveform is approximately sinusoidal. When using a pulse width modulate drive, and an unfiltered voltage waveform ispresent, the unit will not be able to accurately measure voltage, but an approximately sinusoidal current waveform canbe measured accurately. If the NOMINAL FREQUENCY is set to “Variable”, the filtering algorithm could increase the tripand alarm times for the undervoltage and underfrequency elements by up to 270 ms. If the level exceeds the thresholdby a significant amount, trip and alarm times will decrease until they match the programmed delay. The exceptions tothis increased time are the short circuit and ground fault elements, which will trip as per specification.

Note that when the NOMINAL FREQUENCY setting is “Variable”, the element pickup levels and timing are based on themeasured values of the 369.

Frequency is normally determined from the Va voltage input. If however this voltage drops below the minimum voltagethreshold the Ia current input will be used.

• SYSTEM PHASE SEQUENCE: If the phase sequence for a given system is ACB rather than the standard ABC thephase sequence may be changed. This setpoint allows the 369 to properly calculate phase reversal and power quanti-ties and is only visible if the 369 has metering installed.

5.3.3 MONITORING SETUP

a) MAIN MENU

PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP MONITORING SETUP

MONITORING SETUP TRIP COUNTERSee below.

STARTER FAILURESee page 5–13.

CURRENT DEMANDSee page 5–14.

kW DEMANDSee page 5–14.

kvar DEMANDSee page 5–14.

kVA DEMANDSee page 5–14.

SELF TEST MODESee page 5–15.



5

b) TRIP COUNTER

PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP MONITORING SETUP TRIP COUNTER

When the Trip Counter is enabled and the alarm pickup level is reached, an alarm will occur. To reset the alarm the tripcounter must be cleared (see Section 5.2.9: Clear/Preset Data on page 5–9 for details) or the pickup level increased andthe reset key pressed (if a latched alarm).

The trip counter alarm can be used to monitor and alarm when a predefined number of trips occur. This would then promptthe operator or supervisor to investigate the causes of the trips that have occurred. Details of individual trip counters can befound in the Motor Statistics section of Actual Values page 4 (see Section 6.5.2: Motor Statistics on page 6–15).

c) STARTER FAILURE

PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP MONITORING SETUP STARTER FAILURE

If the Starter Failure alarm feature is enabled, any time the 369 initiates a trip, the 369 will monitor the Starter Status input (ifassigned to “Spare Switch” in S9 DIGITAL INPUTS) and the motor current. If the starter status contacts do not change stateor motor current does not drop to zero after the programmed time delay, an alarm will occur. The time delay should beslightly longer than the breaker or contactor operating time. In the event that an alarm does occur, and Breaker was chosenas the starter type, the alarm will be Breaker Failure. If on the other hand, Contactor was chosen for starter type, the alarmwill be Welded Contactor.

TRIP COUNTER TRIP COUNTERALARM: Off

Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched

ASSIGN ALARMRELAYS: Alarm

Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations ofthem

ALARM PICKUP LEVEL:25 Trips


TRIP COUNTER ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

STARTER FAILURE STARTER FAILUREALARM: Off


STARTER TYPE:Breaker

Range: Breaker, Contactor

ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:Alarm


STARTER FAILUREDELAY: 100 ms

Range: 10 to 1000 ms in steps of 10

STARTER FAILUREALARM EVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off



5

d) DEMAND

PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP MONITORING SETUP CURRENT DEMAND

CURRENT DEMAND CURRENT DEMANDPERIOD: 15 min

Range: 5 to 90 min in steps of 1

CURRENT DEMANDALARM: Off




CURRENT DEMAND ALARMLIMIT: 100 A

Range: 0 to 65000 A in steps of 1

CURRENT DEMAND ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

kW DEMAND kW DEMANDPERIOD: 15 min


kW DEMANDALARM: Off




kW DEMAND ALARMLIMIT: 100 kW

Range: 1 to 50000 kW in steps of 1

kW DEMAND ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

kvar DEMAND kvar DEMANDPERIOD: 15 min

Range: 5 to 90 min. in steps of 1

kvar DEMANDALARM: Off




kvar DEMAND ALARMLIMIT: 100 kvar

Range: 1 to 50000 kvar in steps of 1

kvar DEMAND ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

kVA DEMAND kVA DEMANDPERIOD: 15 min


kVA DEMANDALARM: Off




kVA DEMAND ALARMLIMIT: 100 kVA

Range: 1 to 50000 kVA in steps of 1

kVA DEMAND ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off



5

The 369 can measure the demand of the motor for several parameters (current, kW, kvar, kVA). The demand values maybe of interest for energy management programs where processes may be altered or scheduled to reduce overall demandon a feeder. An alarm will occur if the limit of any of the enabled demand elements is reached.

Demand is calculated in the following manner. Every minute, an average magnitude is calculated for current, +kW, +kvar,and kVA based on samples taken every 5 seconds. These values are stored in a FIFO (First In, First Out buffer). The sizeof the buffer is determined by the period selected for the setpoint. The average value of the buffer contents is calculatedand stored as the new demand value every minute. Demand for real and reactive power is only positive quantities (+kWand +kvar).

(EQ 5.1)

where: N = programmed demand period in minutes and n = time in minutes.

Figure 5–1: ROLLING DEMAND (15 MINUTE WINDOW)

e) SELF-TEST RELAY ASSIGNMENT

PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP MONITORING SETUP SELF TEST MODE

The 369 performs self-diagnostics of the hardware circuitry. The relay programmed as the Self-Test relay activates upon afailure of any self-diagnostic tests.

SELF TEST MODE ASSIGN SERVICE RELAY:None

Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations ofthese

DEMAND 1N---- Average n( )

n 1=

N

∑=

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

t=0 t+10 t+20 t+30 t+40 t+50 t+60 t+70 t+80 t+90 t+100

TIME



5

5.3.4 BLOCK FUNCTIONS

PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP BLOCK FUNCTIONS

The block functions feature allows the user to block any of the protection functions through the following methods:

1. Modbus command 20.

2. Profibus-DPV1 acyclical communication (refer to Chapter 9 for additional details).

3. Modbus setpoints.

4. The front panel interface.

The protection functions that can be blocked are indicated by ANSI/IEEE device number in the table below.

Blocking a protection function is essentially the same as disabling it. If the protection function is blocked and a situationoccurs where it would have been activated (if enabled), no indication will be given and no events are recorded. If the pro-tection function has picked up and/or is timing out, the internal timers will be reset to zero.

If the LOG BLOCKING EVENTS setpoint is enabled, an event will be stored indicating when a function changes from beingblocked to unblocked, or vice versa.

BLOCK FUNCTIONS LOG BLOCKING EVENTS:Disabled

Range: Enabled, Disabled

BLOCK UC/UPWR (37)Not Blocked

Block Undercurrent and UnderpowerRange: Blocked, Not Blocked

BLOCK CURR UNBAL (46)Not Blocked

Block Current UnbalanceRange: Blocked, Not Blocked

BLOCK INC SEQ (48)Not Blocked

Block Incomplete SequenceRange: Blocked, Not Blocked

BLOCK THERM MOD (49)Not Blocked

Block Thermal ModelRange: Blocked, Not Blocked

BLOCK SHORT CCT (50)Not Blocked

Block Short Circuit and BackupRange: Blocked, Not Blocked

BLOCK O/L ALARM (51)Not Blocked

Block Overload AlarmRange: Blocked, Not Blocked

BLOCK GND FLT (51G)Not Blocked

Block Ground FaultRange: Blocked, Not Blocked

BLOCK STARTS/HR (66)Not Blocked

Block Starts Per Hour and Time Between StartsRange: Blocked, Not Blocked

DEVICE DESCRIPTION37 Undercurrent/underpower46 Current unbalance48 Incomplete sequence49 Thermal model50 Short circuit and backup51 Overload alarm51G Ground fault66 Starts per hour / time between starts



5

5.3.5 OUTPUT RELAY SETUP

PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP OUTPUT RELAY SETUP

A latched relay (caused by a protective elements alarm or trip) may be reset at any time, providing that the condition thatcaused the relay operation is no longer present. Unlatched elements will automatically reset when the condition thatcaused them has cleared. Reset location is defined in the following table.

The TRIP OPERATION, AUX1 OPERATION, AUX2 OPERATION, and ALARM OPERATION setpoints allow the choice of relayoutput operation to fail-safe or non-failsafe. Relay latchcode however, is defined individually for each protective element.

Failsafe operation causes the output relay to be energized in its normal state and de-energized when activated by a protec-tion element. A failsafe relay will also change state (if not already activated by a protection element) when control power isremoved from the 369. Conversely a non-failsafe relay is de-energized in its normal non-activated state and will not changestate when control power is removed from the 369 (if not already activated by a protection element).

The choice of failsafe or non-failsafe operation is usually determined by the motor’s application. In situations where the pro-cess is more critical than the motor, non-failsafe operation is typically programmed. In situations where the motor is morecritical than the process, failsafe operation is programmed.

OUTPUT RELAY SETUP TRIP RELAY RESETMODE: All Resets

Range: All Resets, Remote Only, Local Only

TRIP RELAYOPERATION: FS

Range: FS (=failsafe), NFS (=non-failsafe)

AUX1 RELAY RESETMODE: All Resets


AUX1 RELAYOPERATION: NFS


AUX2 RELAY RESETMODE: All Resets


AUX2 RELAYOPERATION: NFS


ALARM RELAY RESETMODE: All Resets


ALARM RELAYOPERATION: NFS

Range: FS (failsafe), NFS (=non-failsafe)

RESET MODE RESET PERFORMED VIAAll Resets keypad, digital input, communicationsRemote Only digital input, communicationsLocal Only keypad



5

5.3.6 CONTROL FUNCTIONS

a) MAIN MENU

PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP CONTROL FUNCTIONS

b) SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONTROL

PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP CONTROL FUNCTIONS SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONTROL

If enabled, the motor can be remotely started and stopped via Modbus® communications. Refer to the Modbus ProtocolReference Guide (available from the Modbus website at http://www.modbus.org) for details on sending commands (Func-tion Code 5). When a Stop command is sent the Trip relay will activate for 1 second to complete the trip coil circuit for abreaker application or break the coil circuit for a contactor application. When a Start command is issued the relay assignedfor starting control will activate for 1 second to complete the close coil circuit for a breaker application or complete the coilcircuit for a contactor application.

The Serial Communication Control functions can also be used to reset the relay and activate a waveform capture. Refer tothe Modbus Protocol Reference Guide (available from the Modbus website at http://www.modbus.org) for more information.

c) REDUCED VOLTAGE START TIMER

PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP CONTROL FUNCTIONS REDUCED VOLTAGE

CONTROL FUNCTIONS SERIAL COMMUNICATIONCONTROL

See below.

REDUCED VOLTAGESee page 5–18.

AUTORESTARTSee page 5–20.

FORCE OUTPUT RELAYSSee page 5–23.

SERIAL COMMUNICATIONCONTROL

SERIAL COM CONTROLCONTROL - Off

Range: On, Off

ASSIGN STARTCONTROL RELAYS: Aux1

Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations ofthem

REDUCED VOLTAGE REDUCED VOLTAGECONTROL: Off

Range: On, Off

ASSIGN START CONTROLRELAYS: None

Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, Alarm & Aux1, Alarm &Aux2, Aux1 & Aux2, Alarm & Aux1 & Aux2

START CONTROL RELAYTIMER: 1.0 s

Range: 1.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.5

TRANSITION ON:Current Only

Range: Current Only, Current or Timer, Current andTimer

REDUCED VOLTAGESTART LEVEL: 100%FLA

Range: 25 to 300% FLA in steps of 1

REDUCED VOLTAGESTART TIMER: 200 s


ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS:Trip

Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, Trip & Aux1, Trip & Aux2,Aux1 & Aux2, Trip & Aux1&Aux2

http://www.modbus.org

http://www.modbus.org



5

The 369 is capable of controlling the transition of a reduced voltage starter from reduced to full voltage. That transition maybe based on “Current Only”, “Current and Timer”, or “Current or Timer” (whichever comes first). When the 369 measuresthe transition of no motor current to some value of motor current, a 'Start' is assumed to be occurring (typically current willrise quickly to a value in excess of FLA, e.g. 3 x FLA). At this point, the REDUCED VOLTAGE START TIMER will be initializedwith the programmed value in seconds.

• If "Current Only" is selected, when the motor current falls below the programmed Transition Level, transition will be ini-tiated by activating the assigned output relay for the time programmed in the START CONTROL RELAY TIMER setpoint.If the timer expires before that transition is initiated, an Incomplete Sequence Trip will occur activating the assigned triprelay(s).

• If "Current or Timer" is selected, when the motor current falls below the programmed Transition Level, transition will beinitiated by activating the assigned output relay for the time programmed in the START CONTROL RELAY TIMER set-point. If the timer expires before that transition is initiated, the transition will be initiated regardless.

• If “Current and Timer” is selected, when the motor current falls below the programmed Transition Level and the timerexpires, transition will be initiated by activating the assigned output relay for the time programmed in the START CON-TROL RELAY TIMER setpoint. If the timer expires before current falls below the Transition Level, an IncompleteSequence Trip will occur activating the assigned trip relay(s).

Figure 5–2: REDUCED VOLTAGE START CONTACTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT

Figure 5–3: REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING CURRENT CHARACTERISTIC

If this feature is used, the Starter Status Switch input must be either from a common control contact or a parallelcombination of Auxiliary ‘a’ contacts or a series combination of Auxiliary ‘b’ contacts from the reduced voltage con-tactor and the full voltage contactor. Once transition is initiated, the 369 will assume the motor is still running for atleast 2 seconds. This will prevent the 369 from recognizing an additional start if motor current goes to zero duringan open transition.

CC1

CC2

369BLOCK TRIP

STOPSTART

369Aux

CC1 SEAL-IN

REDUCED VOLTAGECONTACTOR

CC2 SEAL-IN

When the current falls below the transitionlevel and/or the timer expires, the auxiliary relay

activates for the time programmed inthe setpointSTART CONTROL RELAY TIMER

motorcurrent(% FLA)

Transitionlevel

FLA

3 × FLA

Transition time

signifiesOpen Transition

time

840836A1.CDR

NOTE



5

Figure 5–4: REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTER AUXILIARY A/B STATUS INPUTS

d) AUTORESTART

PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP CONTROL FUNCTIONS AUTORESTART

The 369 can be configured to automatically restart the motor after it tripped on system or process related disturbances,such as an undervoltage or an overload. This feature is useful in remote unmanned pumping applications. Before usingautorestart, the feature must be enabled, the required restart time after a trip programmed, and an output contact config-ured to initiate the autorestart by closing the circuit breaker or contactor. This output contact can also be wired with OR logicin the start circuit of the motor.

To prevent the possibility of closing onto a fault upon autorestarting, this feature is not allowed for all trips. The 369 neverattempts an autorestart after Short Circuit or Ground Fault trips. Furthermore, only one autorestart is attempted after anOverload trip, provided that Single Shot Restart is enabled, which allows a single restart attempt. The thermal capacity iscleared to prevent another overload trip during this start and if the 369 trips again (second time) on Overload the autore-starting is aborted. Any normal manual starting will probably be inhibited, (lockout time) allowing the motor to cool (thermalcapacity to decay) before permitting another start.

The trip relay should reset before closing the auto-restart contact to allow the breaker or contactor to close. This is done byprogramming S2 SYSTEM SETUP OUPUT RELAY SETUP TRIP RESET MODE to “Remote Only” or “All Resets”. Theclose contact selection is enabled by setting the S2 SYSTEM SETUP CONTROL FUNCTIONS SERIAL COMMUNICA-TION CONTROL SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONTROL setpoint to “On” and selecting the desired output contact.

AUTORESTART AUTORESTART ENABLED:No

Range: Yes, No

TOTAL RESTARTS:1


RESTARTDELAY: 0 s


PROGRESSIVEDELAY: 0 s


HOLDDELAY: 0 s


BUS VALID ENABLED:No

Range: Yes, No

BUS VALID LEVEL:100%

Range: 15 to 100% of Motor Rated Voltage in steps of 1

AUTORESTART ATTEMPTEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

AUTORESTART SUCCESSEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

AUTORESTART ABORTEDEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

51

52

51

52



5

The 369 follows the logic shown in Figure 5–5: AUTORESTART LOGIC on page 5–22 to determine restart conditions. Thetotal autorestart delay comprises the sum of three delays: Restart Delay, Progressive Delay, and Hold Delay. If any of theseare not required, the autorestart delay can be set to zero.

Total Delay = Restart Delay + (auto-restarts number x Progressive Delay) + Hold Delay

The Restart Delay controls the basic auto-restart time and the timer start when the motor tripped. The Progressive Delayincreases each consecutive auto-restart delay with its set amount. For example, assume that Restart Delay, ProgressiveDelay, and Hold Delay are 1, 3, and 0 seconds respectively. Therefore the fifth autorestart waiting time is:

1 sec. + 5th auto-restart × 3 sec. + 0 sec. = 1 sec. + 5 x 3 sec. = 16 sec.

The number of autorestarts is limited by the TOTAL RESTARTS setting to a maximum of 65000. Once this is exceeded, the369 blocks further autorestarts until it is reset, either manually or remotely. This limit does not affect normal starting. Pleasenote that 65000 autorestarts implies the motor has been tripped that many times and inspection or maintenance is probablydue. The vendor's suggested number of circuit breaker or contactor operations before maintenance can affect this setting.

The Hold Delay sequentially staggers auto-restarts for multiple motors on a bus. For example, if four motors on a bus havesettings of 60, 120, 180, and 240 seconds, respectively, it is advantageous, after a common fault that trips all four motors,to autorestart at 60 second intervals to minimize voltage sag and overloading

The presence of healthy bus voltage prior to the auto-restart can be verified by enabling the Bus Valid feature. The BUSVALID LEVEL setting is the voltage level below which autorestart is not to be attempted. The 369 checks the BUS VALIDLEVEL just before the autorestart to allow the bus voltage to recover. This setpoint is only available if the Metering Option(M) or Backspin Option (B) is enabled.

Five different types of “Autorestart Aborted” events have been provided to help in troubleshooting. The following flowchartshows the logic flow of the Autorestart algorithm. Each type of Autorestart Aborted event and where it occurs within thelogic flow is indicated in this diagram. For example, if an “Autorestart Aborted1” event is recorded in the event recorder, thelogic diagram immediately indicates that the abort cause was the number of restart attempts being more than the MAXIMUMNUMBER OF RESTARTS setpoint.



5

Figure 5–5: AUTORESTART LOGIC

Motor Running

Trip

AutoRestart

Enabled

Yes

Yes

No

No

Reset Attempt Yes

No

Restart Attempts

> Max Restarts

Setting

Abort Restart

No

Change Trip Contact

State

Cause of Trip NOT

Short Circuit or

Ground Fault

Yes

No

Cause of Trip =

Thermal Overload

One Shot Restart On

Overload Enabled

Yes

Abort Restart

Overload Restart

Second Attempt on

No

Abort Restart and load

Overload Start Inhibit

Timer

Yes

Autorestart_Delay =

(Restart Attempts x

Progressive Timer Delay)+

Restart Delay +

Hold Timer Delay

Yes

Close Start Relay

AutoRestart Delay

Active

Any Trip Active

or Bus Invalid

Yes

No

Bus Valid Enabled

No

Yes

No

No

Any Trip Active Abort Restart

No

Yes

Autorestart Aborted 1

EventYes


Event


Event


Event


Event

Yes

No



5

e) FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS

PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP CONTROL FUNCTIONS FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS

The force output relays function allows the user to energize and de-energize output relays via remote communications(Modbus or Profibus-DVP1).

To allow the forcing of relay states, the ASSIGN COMMS FORCE RELAY setting must be programmed. Only relays assignedunder this setpoint can be forced through Modbus or Profibus-DPV1 communications.

Commands can be sent to energize or de-energize any of the four output relays. A bit value of “1” for the correspondingrelay will energize that relay; a bit value of “0” will de-energize that relay.

The COM FORCE O/P TYPE setting for each relay determines whether it remains latched in the state sent through the com-mand, or whether it operates for a duration programmed in the associated PULSED OP DWELL TIME setting. If COM FORCEO/P TYPE is “Latched”, the relay remains energized until a value of “0” for the relay has been sent through the command. IfCOM FORCE O/P TYPE is “Pulsed” and a command is sent to energize the output relay while a pulse dwell timer from a pre-vious command has not yet timed to zero, then the timer will reset back to the value of the corresponding PULSED OPDWELL TIME setpoint and start counting down from this value.

If a relay state is programmed as “Latched” and forced through the force output relays function, the only way to de-energizeit is through another serial command or by cycling power to the 369.

For safety reasons, if any of the relays in the S11 TESTING TEST OUTPUT RELAYS section are programmed to anyvalue other than “Disabled” (i.e. energized or de-energized), then the force relays functionality through Modbus andProfibus-DPV1 will be disabled.

FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS ASSIGN COMMS FORCERELAYS: None

Range: None, Trip, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinationsof these.

TRIP COM FORCE O/PTYPE: Latched

Range: Latched, Pulsed

TRIP PULSED OP DWELLTIME: 0.5 s

Range: 0.5 to 5000.0 s in steps of 0.1. Only seen if theTRIP COM FORCE O/P TYPE is “Pulsed”.

ALARM COM FORCE O/PTYPE: Latched


ALARM PULSED OP DWELLTIME: 0.5 s

Range: 0.5 to 5000.0 s in steps of 0.1. Only seen if theALARM COM FORCE O/P TYPE is “Pulsed”.

AUX1 COM FORCE O/PTYPE: Latched


AUX1 PULSED OP DWELLTIME: 0.5 s

Range: 0.5 to 5000.0 s in steps of 0.1. Only seen if theAUX1 COM FORCE O/P TYPE is “Pulsed”.

AUX2 COM FORCE O/PTYPE: Latched


AUX2 PULSED OP DWELLTIME: 0.5 s

Range: 0.5 to 5000.0 s in steps of 0.1. Only seen if theAUX2 COM FORCE O/P TYPE is “Pulsed”.

NOTE


5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.4S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION 5.4.1 DESCRIPTION

Heat is one of the principle enemies of motor life. When a motor is specified, the purchaser communicates to the manufac-turer what the loading conditions, duty cycle, environment and pertinent information about the driven load such as startingtorque. The manufacturer then provides a stock motor or builds a motor that should have a reasonable life under those con-ditions. The purchaser should request all safe stall, acceleration and running thermal limits for all motors they receive inorder to effectively program the 369.

Motor thermal limits are dictated by the design of the stator and the rotor. Motors have three modes of operation: lockedrotor or stall (rotor is not turning), acceleration (rotor is coming up to speed), and running (rotor turns at near synchronousspeed). Heating occurs in the motor during each of these conditions in very distinct ways. Typically, during motor starting,locked rotor, and acceleration conditions, the motor is rotor limited. That is, the rotor approaches its thermal limit before thestator. Under locked rotor conditions, voltage is induced in the rotor at line frequency, 50 or 60 Hz. This voltage causes acurrent to flow in the rotor, also at line frequency, and the heat generated (I2R) is a function of the effective rotor resistance.At 50/60 Hz, the rotor cage reactance causes the current to flow at the outer edges of the rotor bars. The effective resis-tance of the rotor is therefore at a maximum during a locked rotor condition as is rotor heating. When the motor is runningat rated speed, the voltage induced in the rotor is at a low frequency (approximately 1 Hz) and therefore, the effective resis-tance of the rotor is reduced quite dramatically. During running overloads, the motor thermal limit is typically dictated by sta-tor parameters. Some special motors might be all stator or all rotor limited. During acceleration, the dynamic nature of themotor slip dictates that rotor impedance is also dynamic, and a third overload thermal limit characteristic is necessary.

Typical thermal limit curves are shown below. The motor starting characteristic is shown for a high inertia load at 80% volt-age. If the motor started quicker, the distinct characteristics of the thermal limit curves would not be required and the run-ning overload curve would be joined with locked rotor safe stall times to produce a single overload curve.

Figure 5–6: TYPICAL TIME-CURRENT AND THERMAL LIMIT CURVES (ANSI/IEEE C37.96)

1

10

8

6

4

2

100

80

60

40

20

200

300

400

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 % CURRENT

TIM

E-S

EC

ON

DS

HIGHINERTIAMOTOR RUNNING OVERLOAD

A

G

B

C

A,B,AND C ARE THEACCELERATION THERMAL LIMITCURVES AT 100%, 90%, AND80%VOLTAGE, REPECTIVELY

E,F, AND G ARE THESAFE STALL THERMAL LIMITTIMES AT 100%, 90%, AND80%VOLTAGE, REPECTIVELY

E

F

806827A1.CDR


5 SETPOINTS 5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION

5

5.4.2 THERMAL MODEL

PATH: S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION THERMAL MODEL

The primary protective function of the 369 is the thermal model. It consists of five key elements: the overload curve andpickup level, unbalance biasing, motor cooling time constants, and temperature biasing based on Hot/Cold motor informa-tion and measured stator RTD temperature.

The 369 integrates both stator and rotor heating into one model. Motor heating is reflected in the THERMAL CAPACITYUSED actual value. If stopped for a long period of time, the motor will be at ambient temperature and THERMAL CAPACITYUSED should be zero. If the motor is in overload, a trip will occur once the thermal capacity used reaches 100%. Insulationdoes not immediately melt when a motor’s thermal limit is exceeded. Rather, the rate of insulation degradation reaches apoint where the motor life will be significantly reduced if the condition persists. The thermal capacity used alarm may beused as a warning of an impending overload trip.

THERMAL MODEL OVERLOAD PICKUPLEVEL: 1.01 x FLA

Range: 1.01 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01

THERMAL CAPACITYALARM: Off


ASSIGN TC ALARMRELAYS: Alarm


TC ALARM LEVEL:75 % Used


THERMAL CAPACITYALARM EVENTS: No

Range: No, Yes

ASSIGN TC TRIPRELAYS: Trip

Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations of them(TC trip always on and latched)

ENABLE UNBALANCEBIAS OF TC: Off

Range: On, Off

UNBALANCE BIASK FACTOR: Learned

Range: Learned, 1 to 29 in steps of 1Only shown if UNBALANCE BIAS is enabled

HOT/COLD SAFE STALLRATIO: 1.00


ENABLE LEARNED COOLTIME: No

Range: No, Yes

RUNNING COOL TIMECONSTANT: 15 min.

Range: 1 to 500 min. in steps of 1Not shown if LEARNED COOL TIME is enabled

STOPPED COOL TIMECONSTANT: 30 min.

Range: 1 to 500 min. in steps of 1Not shown if Learned Cool time is enabled

ENABLE RTD BIASING:No

Range: No, Yes

RTD BIAS MINIMUM:40 °C

Range: 1 to RTD BIAS MID POINTOnly shown if RTD BIASING is enabled

RTD BIAS MID POINT:120 °C

Range: RTD BIAS MINIMUM to MAXIMUMOnly shown if RTD BIASING is enabled

RTD BIAS MAXIMUM:155 °C

Range: RTD BIAS MID POINT to 200Only shown if RTD BIASING is enabled

MOTOR LOAD AVERAGINGINTERVAL: 3 cycles

Range: 3 to 60 cycles in steps of 3



5

The 369 thermal model can be modified to allow compensation for motors used to drive cyclic loads, such as a reciprocat-ing compressor. The MOTOR LOAD AVERAGING INTERVAL setting allows the user to dampen the effects of these loads asthey relate to the overall interpretation of the motor thermal characteristics. The load cycle can be determined using the 369waveform capture feature or through external equipment. The size of the load cycle is then entered into the MOTOR LOADAVERAGING INTERVAL setpoint. The 369 uses this value to average the motor load, as applied to the thermal model, overthe duration of the load cycle. The result is a damping effect applied to the thermal model. The setting is entered in steps of3 to correspond with the run rate of the 369 thermal model. For load cycles not evenly divisible by 3, enter a value equal tothe next multiple of 3 for the MOTOR LOAD AVERAGING INTERVAL.

Motor load averaging may increase trip/alarm times by 16.7 ms for every additional cycle averaged greaterthan 3.

5.4.3 OVERLOAD CURVES

a) SETTINGS

PATH: S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION OVERLOAD CURVE

OVERLOAD CURVE SELECT CURVE STYLE:Standard

Range: Standard, Custom

STANDARD OVERLOADCURVE NUMBER: 4

Range: 1 to 15 in steps of 1Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Standard

TIME TO TRIP AT1.01xFLA: 17415s

Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom

TIME TO TRIP AT1.05xFLA: 3415 s
























WARNING



5

b) STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVE:

The overload curve accounts for motor heating during stall, acceleration, and running in both the stator and the rotor. TheOVERLOAD PICKUP setpoint dictates where the running overload curve begins as the motor enters an overload condition.This is useful for service factor motors as it allows the pickup level to be defined. The curve is effectively cut off at currentvalues below this pickup.

Motor thermal limits consist of three distinct parts based on the three conditions of operation, locked rotor or stall, accelera-tion, and running overload. Each of these curves may be provided for both a hot motor and a cold motor. A hot motor isdefined as one that has been running for a period of time at full load such that the stator and rotor temperatures have set-tled at their rated temperature. A cold motor is defined as a motor that has been stopped for a period of time such that thestator and rotor temperatures have settled at ambient temperature. For most motors, the distinct characteristics of themotor thermal limits are formed into one smooth homogeneous curve. Sometimes only a safe stall time is provided. This is



























TIME TO TRIP AT8.00xFLA: 6 S










5

acceptable if the motor has been designed conservatively and can easily perform its required duty without infringing on thethermal limit. In this case, the protection can be conservative and process integrity is not compromised. If a motor has beendesigned very close to its thermal limits when operated as required, then the distinct characteristics of the thermal limitsbecome important.

The 369 overload curve can take one of two formats: Standard or Custom Curve. Regardless of which curve style isselected, the 369 will retain thermal memory in the form of a register called THERMAL CAPACITY USED. This register isupdated every 100 ms using the following equation:

(EQ 5.2)

where: time_to_trip = time taken from the overload curve at Ieq as a function of FLA.

The overload protection curve should always be set slightly lower than the thermal limits provided by the manufacturer. Thiswill ensure that the motor is tripped before the thermal limit is reached.

If the motor starting times are well within the safe stall times, it is recommended that the 369 Standard Overload Curves beused. The standard overload curves are a series of 15 curves with a common curve shape based on typical motor thermallimit curves (see Figure 5–7: 369 STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVES on page 5–28 and Figure 5–7: 369 STANDARDOVERLOAD CURVES on page 5–28).

Figure 5–7: 369 STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVES

TCusedt TCusedt 100 ms–100 ms

time_to_trip------------------------------- 100%×+=

x1

x15

100000

10000

1000

100

10

1.00

0.10 1.00

MULTIPLE OF FULL LOAD AMPS

TIME

INSE

COND

S

10 100 1000

840719A1.CDR



5

Above 8.0 x Pickup, the trip time for 8.0 is used. This prevents the overload curve from acting as an instan-taneous element.

The Standard Overload Curves equation is:

(EQ 5.3)

Table 5–1: 369 STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVESPICKUPLEVEL(× FLA)

STANDARD CURVE MULTIPLIERS× 1 × 2 × 3 × 4 × 5 × 6 × 7 × 8 × 9 × 10 × 11 × 12 × 13 × 14 × 15

1.01 4353.6 8707.2 13061 17414 21768 26122 30475 34829 39183 43536 47890 52243 56597 60951 65304

1.05 853.71 1707.4 2561.1 3414.9 4268.6 5122.3 5976.0 6829.7 7683.4 8537.1 9390.8 10245 11098 11952 12806

1.10 416.68 833.36 1250.0 1666.7 2083.4 2500.1 2916.8 3333.5 3750.1 4166.8 4583.5 5000.2 5416.9 5833.6 6250.2

1.20 198.86 397.72 596.58 795.44 994.30 1193.2 1392.0 1590.9 1789.7 1988.6 2187.5 2386.3 2585.2 2784.1 2982.9

1.30 126.80 253.61 380.41 507.22 634.02 760.82 887.63 1014.4 1141.2 1268.0 1394.8 1521.6 1648.5 1775.3 1902.1

1.40 91.14 182.27 273.41 364.55 455.68 546.82 637.96 729.09 820.23 911.37 1002.5 1093.6 1184.8 1275.9 1367.0

1.50 69.99 139.98 209.97 279.96 349.95 419.94 489.93 559.92 629.91 699.90 769.89 839.88 909.87 979.86 1049.9

1.75 42.41 84.83 127.24 169.66 212.07 254.49 296.90 339.32 381.73 392.15 466.56 508.98 551.39 593.81 636.22

2.00 29.16 58.32 87.47 116.63 145.79 174.95 204.11 233.26 262.42 291.58 320.74 349.90 379.05 408.21 437.37

2.25 21.53 43.06 64.59 86.12 107.65 129.18 150.72 172.25 193.78 215.31 236.84 258.37 279.90 301.43 322.96

2.50 16.66 33.32 49.98 66.64 83.30 99.96 116.62 133.28 149.94 166.60 183.26 199.92 216.58 233.24 249.90

2.75 13.33 26.65 39.98 53.31 66.64 79.96 93.29 106.62 119.95 133.27 146.60 159.93 173.25 186.58 199.91

3.00 10.93 21.86 32.80 43.73 54.66 65.59 76.52 87.46 98.39 109.32 120.25 131.19 142.12 153.05 163.98

3.25 9.15 18.29 27.44 36.58 45.73 54.87 64.02 73.16 82.31 91.46 100.60 109.75 118.89 128.04 137.18

3.50 7.77 15.55 23.32 31.09 38.87 46.64 54.41 62.19 69.96 77.73 85.51 93.28 101.05 108.83 116.60

3.75 6.69 13.39 20.08 26.78 33.47 40.17 46.86 53.56 60.25 66.95 73.64 80.34 87.03 93.73 100.42

4.00 5.83 11.66 17.49 23.32 29.15 34.98 40.81 46.64 52.47 58.30 64.13 69.96 75.79 81.62 87.45

4.25 5.12 10.25 15.37 20.50 25.62 30.75 35.87 41.00 46.12 51.25 56.37 61.50 66.62 71.75 76.87

4.50 4.54 9.08 13.63 18.17 22.71 27.25 31.80 36.34 40.88 45.42 49.97 54.51 59.05 63.59 68.14

4.75 4.06 8.11 12.17 16.22 20.28 24.33 28.39 32.44 36.50 40.55 44.61 48.66 52.72 56.77 60.83

5.00 3.64 7.29 10.93 14.57 18.22 21.86 25.50 29.15 32.79 36.43 40.08 43.72 47.36 51.01 54.65

5.50 2.99 5.98 8.97 11.96 14.95 17.94 20.93 23.91 26.90 29.89 32.88 35.87 38.86 41.85 44.84

6.00 2.50 5.00 7.49 9.99 12.49 14.99 17.49 19.99 22.48 24.98 27.48 29.98 32.48 34.97 37.47

6.50 2.12 4.24 6.36 8.48 10.60 12.72 14.84 16.96 19.08 21.20 23.32 25.44 27.55 29.67 31.79

7.00 1.82 3.64 5.46 7.29 9.11 10.93 12.75 14.57 16.39 18.21 20.04 21.86 23.68 25.50 27.32

7.50 1.58 3.16 4.75 6.33 7.91 9.49 11.08 12.66 14.24 15.82 17.41 18.99 20.57 22.15 23.74

8.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82

10.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82

15.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82

20.00 1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.10 12.49 13.88 15.27 16.65 18.04 19.43 20.82

NOTE

time_to_tripcurve_multiplier 2.2116623×

0.02530337 pickup 1–( )2× 0.05054758 pickup 1–( )×+----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------=



5

c) CUSTOM OVERLOAD CURVE:

If the motor starting current begins to infringe on the thermal damage curves, it may be necessary to use a custom curve toensure successful starting without compromising motor protection. Furthermore, the characteristics of the starting thermaldamage curve (locked rotor and acceleration) and the running thermal damage curves may not fit together very smoothly.In this instance, it may be necessary to use a custom curve to tailor protection to the motor thermal limits so the motor maybe started successfully and used to its full potential without compromising protection. The distinct parts of the thermal limitcurves now become more critical. For these conditions, it is recommended that the 369 custom curve thermal model beused. The custom overload curve of the 369 allows the user to program their own curve by entering trip times for 30 pre-determined current levels. The 369 smooths the areas between these points to make the protection curve.

It can be seen below that if the running overload thermal limit curve were smoothed into one curve with the locked rotoroverload curve, the motor could not start at 80% line voltage. A custom curve is required.

Figure 5–8: CUSTOM CURVE EXAMPLE

During the interval of discontinuity, the longer of the two trip times is used to reduce the chance of nui-sance tripping during motor starts.

MULTIPLE OF FULL LOAD CURRENT SETPOINT

TIM

ETO

TRIP

INSEC

ON

DS

0.1

1.0

10

100

1000

10000

0.5

1

10

10

0

10

00

840730A2.CDR

6500 HP, 13800 VOLT INDUCED DRAFT FAN MOTOR

TYPICAL CUSTOM CURVE

1

2

3

4

5

2

3

4

5

1 PROGRAMMED CUSTOM CURVE

RUNNING SAFETIME (STATOR LIMIT)

ACCELERATION SAFETIME (ROTOR LIMIT)

MOTOR CURRENT @ 100% VOLTAGE

MOTOR CURRENT @ 80% VOLTAGE

g GE Power Management

NOTE



5

d) UNBALANCE BIAS

Unbalanced phase currents cause additional rotor heating not accounted for by electromechanical relays and may not beaccounted for in some electronic protective relays. When the motor is running, the rotor rotates in the direction of the posi-tive-sequence current at near synchronous speed. Negative-sequence current, having a phase rotation opposite to thepositive sequence current, and hence, opposite to the rotor rotation, generates a rotor voltage that produces a substantialrotor current. This induced current has a frequency approximately twice the line frequency: 100 Hz for a 50 Hz system,120 Hz for a 60 Hz system. Skin effect in the rotor bars at this frequency causes a significant increase in rotor resistance,and therefore a significant increase in rotor heating. This extra heating is not accounted for in the motor manufacturer ther-mal limit curves, since these curves assume positive-sequence currents only from a perfectly balanced supply and motordesign.

The 369 measures the percentage unbalance for the phase currents. The thermal model may be biased to reflect the addi-tional heating caused by negative-sequence current, present during an unbalance when the motor is running. This is doneby creating an equivalent motor heating current that takes into account the unbalanced current effect along with the aver-age phase current. This current is calculated as follows:

(EQ 5.4)

where: Ieq = equivalent unbalance biased heating currentIavg = average RMS phase current measuredUB% = unbalance percentage measured (100% = 1, 50% = 0.5, etc.)k = unbalance bias k factor

The figure on the left shows motor derating as a function of voltage unbalance as recommended by the American organiza-tion NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association). Assuming a typical induction motor with an inrush of 6 × FLAand a negative sequence impedance of 0.167, voltage unbalances of 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5% equal current unbalances of 6, 12,18, 24, and 30% respectively. Based on this assumption, the figure on the right below illustrates the amount of motor derat-ing for different values of k entered for the setpoint UNBALANCE BIAS K FACTOR. Note that the curve for k = 8 is almostidentical to the NEMA derating curve.

Figure 5–9: MEDIUM MOTOR DERATING FACTOR DUE TO UNBALANCED VOLTAGE

If a k value of 0 is entered, the unbalance biasing is defeated and the overload curve will time out against the measured perunit motor current. The k value may be calculated as:

(EQ 5.5)

The 369 can also learn the unbalance bias k factor. It is recommended that the learned k factor not be enabled until themotor has had at least five successful starts. The calculation of the learned k factor is as follows:

(EQ 5.6)

IeqIavg 1 k UB%( )× 2+

FLA------------------------------------------------------=

0.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.90

0.95

1.00

1.05

0 1 2 3 4 5

PERCENT VOLTAGE UNBALANCE

DE

RAT

ING

FAC

TOR

k=2

k=4

k=6

k=8

k=100.70

0.75

0.80

0.85

0.90

0.95

1.00

1.05

0 1 2 3 4 5

PERCENT VOLTAGE UNBALANCE

DE

RAT

ING

FAC

TOR

NEMA GE MULTILIN

k 175ILR2----------= (typical estimate); k 230

ILR2----------= (conservative estimate), where ILR is the per unit locked rotor current

k 175ILSC FLA⁄( )2---------------------------------= where ILSC learned start current, FLA Full Load Amps setpoint= =



5

e) MOTOR COOLING

The thermal capacity used quantity is reduced in an exponential manner when the motor is stopped or current is below theoverload pickup setpoint. This reduction simulates motor cooling. The motor cooling time constants should be entered forboth the stopped and running cases. A stopped motor will normally cool significantly slower than a running motor. Note thatthe cool time constant is one fifth the total cool time from 100% thermal capacity used down to 0% thermal capacity used.

The 369 can learn and estimate the stopped and running cool time constants for a motor. Calculation of a cool time con-stant is performed whenever the motor state transitions from starting to running or from running to stopped. The learnedcool times are based on the cooling rate of the hottest stator RTD, the hot/cold ratio, the ambient temperature (40 if noambient RTD), the measured motor load and the programmed service factor or overload pickup. Learned values shouldonly be enabled for motors that have been started, stopped and run at least five times.

Note that any learned cool time constants are mainly based on stator RTD information. Cool time, for starting, is typically arotor limit. The use of stator RTDs can only render an approximation. The learned values should only be used if the real val-ues are not available from the motor manufacturer. Motor cooling is calculated using the following formulas:

(EQ 5.7)

(EQ 5.8)

where: TCused = thermal capacity usedTCused_start = TC used value caused by overload conditionTCused_end = TC used value set by the hot/cold curve ratio when motor is running = '0' when motor is stopped.t = time in minutes

= cool time constant (running or stopped)Ieq = equivalent motor heating currentoverload_pickup = overload pickup setpoint as a multiple of FLAhot/cold = hot/cold curve ratio

f) HOT/COLD CURVE RATIO

The motor manufacturer will sometimes provide thermal limit information for a hot/cold motor. The 369 thermal model willadapt for these conditions if the Hot/Cold Curve Ratio is programmed. The value entered for this setpoint dictates the levelof thermal capacity used that the relay will settle at for levels of current that are below the Overload Pickup Level. When themotor is running at a level that is below the Overload Pickup Level, the thermal capacity used will rise or fall to a valuebased on the average phase current and the entered Hot/Cold Curve Ratio. Thermal capacity used will either rise at a fixedrate of 5% per minute or fall as dictated by the running cool time constant.

(EQ 5.9)

where: TCused_end = Thermal Capacity Used if Iper_unit remains steady stateIeq = equivalent motor heating currenthot/cold = HOT/COLD CURVE RATIO setpoint

The hot/cold curve ratio may be determined from the thermal limit curves if provided or the hot and cold safe stall times.Simply divide the hot safe stall time by the cold safe stall time. If hot and cold times are not provided, there can be no differ-entiation and the hot/cold curve ratio should be entered as 1.00.

TCused TCused_start TCused_end–( ) e t– τ⁄( )⋅ TCused_end+=

TCused_end Ieq 1 hotcold-----------–⎝ ⎠

⎛ ⎞ 100%××=

τ

TCused_end Ieq 1 hotcold-----------–⎝ ⎠

⎛ ⎞ 100%××=



5

Figure 5–10: THERMAL MODEL COOLING

g) RTD BIAS

The 369 thermal replica operates as a complete and independent model. The thermal overload curves however, are basedsolely on measured current, assuming a normal 40°C ambient and normal motor cooling. If there is an unusually high ambi-ent temperature, or if motor cooling is blocked, motor temperature will increase. If the motor stator has embedded RTDs,the 369 RTD bias feature should be used to correct the thermal model.

The RTD bias feature is a two part curve constructed using three points. If the maximum stator RTD temperature is belowthe RTD Bias Minimum setpoint (typically 40°C), no biasing occurs. If the maximum stator RTD temperature is above theRTD Bias Maximum setpoint (typically at the stator insulation rating or slightly higher), then the thermal memory is fullybiased and thermal capacity is forced to 100% used. At values in between, the present thermal capacity used created bythe overload curve and other elements of the thermal model is compared to the RTD Bias thermal capacity used from theRTD Bias curve. If the RTD Bias thermal capacity used value is higher, then that value is used from that point onward. TheRTD Bias Center point should be set at the rated running temperature of the motor. The 369 will automatically determinethe thermal capacity used value for the center point using the HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO setpoint.

(EQ 5.10)

At temperatures less than the RTD_Bias_Center temperature,

(EQ 5.11)

At temperatures greater than the RTD_Bias_Center temperature,

808705A2.CDR

0

25

50

75

100

0 30 60 90 120 150 180

Time in Minutes

Th

erm

al

Cap

acit

yU

sed

Cool Time Constant= 15 min

TCused_start= 85%

Hot/Cold Ratio= 80%

Ieq/Overload Pickup= 100%

0

25

50

75

100

0 30 60 90 120 150 180

Time in Minutes

Th

erm

al

Cap

acit

yU

sed

Cool Time Constant= 15 min

TCused_start= 85%

Hot/Cold Ratio= 80%

Ieq/Overload Pickup= 80%

0

25

50

75

100

0 30 60 90 120 150 180

Time in Minutes

Th

erm

al

Cap

acit

yU

sed Cool Time Constant= 30 min

TCused_start= 85%

Hot/Cold Ratio= 80%

Motor Stopped after running Rated Load

TCused_end= 0%

0

25

50

75

100

0 30 60 90 120 150 180

Time in Minutes

Th

erm

al

Cap

acit

yU

sed Cool Time Constant= 30 min

TCused_start= 100%

Hot/Cold Ratio= 80%

Motor Overload

TCused_end= 0%

MOTOR TRIPPED

100% LOAD

MOTOR STOPPED

80% LOAD

TCused@RTD_Bias_Center 1 hotcold-----------–⎝ ⎠

⎛ ⎞ 100%×=

RTD_Bias_TCusedTactual Tmin–Tcenter Tmin–------------------------------------ TCused@RTD_Bias_Center×=



5

(EQ 5.12)

where: RTD_Bias_TCused = TC used due to hottest stator RTDTactual = Actual present temperature of hottest stator RTDTmin = RTD Bias minimum setpoint (ambient temperature)Tcenter = RTD Bias center setpoint (motor running temperature)Tmax = RTD Bias max setpoint (winding insulation rating temperature)TCused@RTD_Bias_Center = TC used defined by HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO setpoint

In simple terms, the RTD bias feature is real feedback of measured stator temperature. This feedback acts as correction ofthe thermal model for unforeseen situations. Since RTDs are relatively slow to respond, RTD biasing is good for correctionand slow motor heating. The rest of the thermal model is required during starting and heavy overload conditions whenmotor heating is relatively fast.

It should be noted that the RTD bias feature alone cannot create a trip. If the RTD bias feature forces the thermal capacityused to 100%, the motor current must be above the overload pickup before an overload trip occurs. Presumably, the motorwould trip on programmed stator RTD temperature setpoint at that time.

Figure 5–11: RTD BIAS CURVE

5.4.4 OVERLOAD ALARM

PATH: S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION OVERLOAD ALARM

An overload alarm will occur only when the motor is running and the current rises above the programmed OVERLOADALARM LEVEL. The overload alarm is disabled during a start. An application of an unlatched overload alarm is to signal aPLC that controls the load on the motor, whenever the motor is too heavily loaded.

OVERLOAD ALARM OVERLOADALARM: Off


OVERLOAD ALARMLEVEL: 1.01 x FLA


ASSIGN O/L ALARMRELAYS: Alarm

Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations

OVERLOAD ALARMDELAY: 1 s

Range: 0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1

OVERLOAD ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

RTD_Bias_TCusedTactual Tcenter–Tmax Tcenter–----------------------------------------- 100 TCused@RTD_Bias_Center–( )× TCused@RTD_Bias_Center+=

Maximum Stator RTD Temperature

Th

erm

al C

apac

ity

Use

d

0

20

40

60

80

100

-50 0 50 100 150 200 250

RTD Bias Maximum

RTD Bias Center PointRTD Bias Minimum

Hot/Cold = 0.85

Rated Temperature=130 C

Insulation Rating=155 C


5 SETPOINTS 5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS

5

5.5S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS 5.5.1 DESCRIPTION

These elements deal with functions that are based on the current readings of the 369 from the external phase and/orground CTs. All models of the 369 include these features.

5.5.2 SHORT CIRCUIT

PATH: S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS SHORT CIRCUIT

Care must be taken when turning on this feature. If the interrupting device (contactor or circuit breaker) isnot rated to break the fault current, this feature should be disabled. Alternatively, this feature may beassigned to an auxiliary relay and connected such that it trips an upstream device that is capable of break-ing the fault current.

Once the magnitude of either phase A, B, or C exceeds the Pickup Level × Phase CT Primary for a period of time specifiedby the delay, a trip will occur. Note the delay is in addition to the 45 ms instantaneous operate time.

There is also a backup trip feature that can be enabled. The backup delay should be greater than the short circuit delayplus the breaker clearing time. If a short circuit trip occurs with the backup on, and the phase current to the motor persistsfor a period of time that exceeds the backup delay, a second backup trip will occur. It is intended that this second trip beassigned to Aux1 or Aux2 which would be dedicated as an upstream breaker trip relay.

Various situations (e.g. charging a long line to the motor or power factor correction capacitors) may cause transient inrushcurrents during motor starting that may exceed the Short Circuit Pickup level for a very short period of time. The Short Cir-cuit time delay is adjustable in 10 ms increments. The delay can be fine tuned to an application such that it still respondsvery fast, but rides through normal operational disturbances. Normally, the Phase Short Circuit time delay will be set asquick as possible, 0 ms. Time may have to be increased if nuisance tripping occurs.

When a motor starts, the starting current (typically 6 × FLA for an induction motor) has an asymmetrical component. Thisasymmetrical current may cause one phase to see as much as 1.6 times the normal RMS starting current. If the short cir-cuit level was set at 1.25 times the symmetrical starting current, it is probable that there would be nuisance trips duringmotor starting. As a rule of thumb the short circuit protection is typically set to at least 1.6 times the symmetrical startingcurrent value. This allows the motor to start without nuisance tripping.

Both the main Short Circuit delay and the backup delay start timing when the current exceeds the Short CircuitPickup level.

SHORT CIRCUIT SHORT CIRCUITTRIP: Off

Range: 50/60 Hz Nominal: Off, Latched, UnlatchedVariable: Off, Latched

ASSIGN S/C TRIPRELAYS: Trip

Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them

SHORT CIRCUIT TRIPLEVEL: 10.0 x CT

Range: 2.0 to 20.0 x CT in steps of 0.1

ADD S/C TRIPDELAY: 0.00 s

Range: 0 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.010 = Instantaneous

SHORT CIRCUIT TRIPBACKUP: Off


ASSIGN S/C BACKUPRELAYS: Aux1

Range: None, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them

ADD S/C BACKUP TRIPDELAY: 0.20 s

Range: 0 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.010 = Instantaneous

NOTE

NOTE


5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.5.3 MECHANICAL JAM

PATH: S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS MECHANICAL JAM

After a motor start, once the magnitude of any one of either phase A, B, or C exceeds the Trip/Alarm Pickup Level × FLA fora period of time specified by the Delay, a Trip/Alarm will occur. This feature may be used to indicate a stall condition whenrunning. Not only does it protect the motor by taking it off-line quicker than the thermal model (overload curve), it may alsoprevent or limit damage to the driven equipment that may occur if motor starting torque persists on jammed or brokenequipment.

The level for the Mechanical Jam Trip should be set higher than motor loading during normal operations, but lower than themotor stall level. Normally the delay would be set to the minimum time delay, or set such that no nuisance trips occur due tomomentary load fluctuations.

MECHANICAL JAM MECHANICAL JAMALARM: Off




MECHANICAL JAM ALARMLEVEL: 1.50 x FLA

Range: 1.01 to 6.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01

MECHANICAL JAM ALARMDELAY: 1.0 s


MECHANICAL JAM ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

MECHANICAL JAMTRIP: Off




MECHANICAL JAM TRIPLEVEL: 1.50 x FLA


MECHANICAL JAM TRIPDELAY: 1.0 s




5

5.5.4 UNDERCURRENT

PATH: S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS UNDERCURRENT

If enabled, once the magnitude of either phase A, B or C falls below the pickup level × FLA for a period of time specified bythe Delay, a trip or alarm will occur. The undercurrent element is an indication of loss of load to the motor. Thus, the pickuplevel should be set lower than motor loading levels during normal operations. The undercurrent element is active when themotor is starting or running.

The undercurrent element can be blocked upon the initiation of a motor start for a period of time specified by the U/C BlockFrom Start setpoint (e.g. this block may be used to allow pumps to build up head before the undercurrent element trips). Avalue of 0 means undercurrent protection is immediately enabled upon motor starting (no block). If a value other than 0 isentered, the feature will be disabled from the time a start is detected until the time entered expires.

APPLICATION EXAMPLE:

If a pump is cooled by the liquid it pumps, loss of load may cause the pump to overheat. Undercurrent protection shouldthus be enabled. If the motor loading should never fall below 0.75 × FLA, even for short durations, the Undercurrent Trippickup could be set to 0.70 and the Undercurrent Alarm to 0.75. If the pump is always started loaded, the block from startfeature should be disabled (programmed as 0).

Time delay is typically set as quick as possible, 1 second.

UNDERCURRENT BLOCK UNDERCURRENTFROM START: 0 s


UNDERCURRENTALARM: Off


ASSIGN U/C ALARMRELAYS: Alarm


UNDERCURRENT ALARMLEVEL: 0.70 x FLA


UNDERCURRENT ALARMDELAY: 1 s


UNDERCURRENT ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

UNDERCURRENTTRIP: Off


ASSIGN U/C TRIPRELAYS: Trip


UNDERCURRENT TRIPLEVEL: 0.70 x FLA


UNDERCURRENT TRIPDELAY: 1 s




5

5.5.5 CURRENT UNBALANCE

PATH: S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS CURRENT UNBALANCE

Unbalanced three phase supply voltages are a major cause of induction motor thermal damage. Causes of unbalance caninclude: increased resistance in one phase due to a pitted or faulty contactor, loose connections, unequal tap settings in atransformer, non-uniformly distributed three phase loads, or varying single phase loads within a plant. The most seriouscase of unbalance is single phasing – that is, the complete loss of one phase. This can be caused by a utility supply prob-lem or a blown fuse in one phase and can seriously damage a three phase motor. A single phase trip will occur in 2 sec-onds if the Unbalance trip is on and the level exceeds 30%. A single phase trip will also activate in 2 seconds if the MotorLoad is above 30% and at least one of the phase currents is zero. Single phasing protection is disabled if the UnbalanceTrip is turned Off.

During balanced conditions in the stator, current in each motor phase is equal, and the rotor current is just sufficient to pro-vide the turning torque. When the stator currents are unbalanced, a much higher current is induced into the rotor due to itslower impedance to the negative sequence current component present. This current is at twice the power supply frequencyand produces a torque in the opposite direction to the desired motor output. Usually the increase in stator current is smalland timed overcurrent protection takes a long time to trip. However, the much higher induced rotor current can cause exten-sive rotor damage in a short period of time. Motors can tolerate different levels of current unbalance depending on the rotordesign and heat dissipation characteristics.

To prevent nuisance trips/alarms on lightly loaded motors when a much larger unbalance level will not damage the rotor,the unbalance protection will automatically be defeated if the average motor current is less than 30% of the full load current(IFLA) setting. Unbalance is calculated as follows:

(EQ 5.13)

where: Iavg = average phase current,Imax = current in a phase with maximum deviation from Iavg,IFLA = motor full load amps setting

CURRENT UNBALANCE BLOCK UNBALANCE FROMSTART: 0 s


CURRENT UNBALANCEALARM: Off


ASSIGN U/B ALARMRELAYS: Alarm


UNBALANCE ALARMLEVEL: 15 %


UNBALANCE ALARMDELAY: 1 s


UNBALANCE ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

CURRENT UNBALANCETRIP: Off


ASSIGN U/B TRIPRELAYS: Trip


UNBALANCE TRIPLEVEL: 20 %


UNBALANCE TRIPDELAY: 1 s


If Iavg IFLA, Unbalance≥Imax Iavg–

Iavg----------------------------- 100×= If Iavg IFLA, Unbalance<

Imax Iavg–IFLA

----------------------------- 100×=



5

Unbalance protection is recommended at all times. When setting the unbalance pickup level, it should be noted that a 1%voltage unbalance typically translates into a 6% current unbalance. Therefore, in order to prevent nuisance trips or alarms,the pickup level should not be set too low. Also, since short term unbalances are common, a reasonable delay should beset to avoid nuisance trips or alarms. It is recommended that the unbalance thermal bias feature be used to bias the Ther-mal Model to account for rotor heating that may be caused by cyclic short term unbalances.

5.5.6 GROUND FAULT

PATH: S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS GROUND FAULT

Once the magnitude of ground current exceeds the Pickup Level for a period of time specified by the Delay, a trip and/oralarm will occur. There is also a backup trip feature that can be enabled. If the backup is On, and a Ground Fault trip hasinitiated, and the ground current persists for a period of time that exceeds the backup delay, a second ‘backup’ trip willoccur. It is intended that this second trip be assigned to Aux1 or Aux2 which would be dedicated as an upstream breakertrip relay. The Ground Fault Trip Backup delay must be set to a time longer than the breaker clearing time.

Care must be taken when turning On this feature. If the interrupting device (contactor or circuit breaker) isnot rated to break ground fault current (low resistance or solidly grounded systems), the feature should bedisabled. Alternately, the feature may be assigned to an auxiliary relay and connected such that it trips anupstream device that is capable of breaking the fault current.

GROUND FAULT GROUND FAULTALARM: Off


ASSIGN G/F ALARMRELAYS: Alarm


GROUND FAULT ALARMLEVEL: 0.10 x CT

Range: 0.10 to 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.01Only shown if G/F CT is 1A or 5A

GROUND FAULT ALARMLEVEL: 0.25 A

Range: 0.25 to 25.00 A in steps of 0.01Only shown if G/F CT is 50:0.025

GROUND FAULT ALARMDELAY: 0.00 s

Range: 0.00 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01s

GROUND FAULT ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: On, Off

GROUND FAULTTRIP: Off


ASSIGN GF TRIPRELAYS: Trip


GROUND FAULT TRIPLEVEL: 0.20 x CT

Range: 0.10 to 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.01Only shown if Ground Fault CT is 1A or 5A

GROUND FAULT TRIPLEVEL: 0.25 A

Range: 0.25 to 25.00 A in steps of 0.01Only shown if Ground Fault CT is 50:0.025

GROUND FAULT TRIPDELAY: 0.00 s

Range: 0 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01

GROUND FAULT TRIPBACKUP: Off


ASSIGN G/F BACKUPRELAYS: Aux2

Range: None, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them

G/F TRIP BACKUPDELAY: 0.20 s


NOTE



5

Various situations (e.g. contactor bounce) may cause transient ground currents during motor starting that may exceed theGround Fault Pickup levels for a very short period of time. The delay can be fine tuned to an application such that it stillresponds very fast, but rides through normal operational disturbances. Normally, the Ground Fault time delays will be set asquick as possible, 0 ms. Time may have to be increased if nuisance tripping occurs.

Special care must be taken when the ground input is wired to the phase CTs in a residual connection. When a motor starts,the starting current (typically 6 × FLA for an induction motor) has an asymmetrical component. This asymmetrical currentmay cause one phase to see as much as 1.6 times the normal RMS starting current. This momentary DC component willcause each of the phase CTs to react differently and the net current into the ground input of the 369 will not be negligible. A20 ms block of the ground fault elements when the motor starts enables the 369 to ride through this momentary ground cur-rent signal.

Both the main Ground Fault delay and the backup delay start timing when the Ground Fault current exceeds thepickup level.

NOTE


5 SETPOINTS 5.6 S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS

5

5.6S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS 5.6.1 DESCRIPTION

These setpoints deal with those functions that prevent the motor from restarting once stopped until a set condition clearsand/or a set time expires. None of these functions will trip a motor that is already running.

5.6.2 ACCELERATION TRIP

PATH: S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS ACCELERATION TRIP

The 369 Thermal Model is designed to protect the motor under both starting and overload conditions. The AccelerationTimer trip feature may be used in addition to that protection. If for example, the motor should always start in 2 seconds, butthe safe stall time is 8 seconds, there is no point letting the motor remain in a stall condition for 7 or 8 seconds when thethermal model would take it off line. Furthermore, the starting torque applied to the driven equipment for that period of timecould cause severe damage.

If enabled, the Acceleration Timer trip element will function as follows: A motor start is assumed to be occurring when the369 measures the transition of no motor current to some value of motor current. Typically current will rise quickly to a valuein excess of FLA (e.g. 6 x FLA). At this point, the Acceleration Timer will be initialized with the entered value in seconds. Ifthe current does not fall below the overload curve pickup level before the timer expires, an acceleration trip will occur. If theacceleration time of the motor is variable, this feature should be set just beyond the longest acceleration time.

Some motor soft starters may allow current to ramp up slowly while others may limit current to less thanFull Load Amps throughout the start. In these cases, as a generic relay that must protect all motors, the 369cannot differentiate between a motor that has a slow ramp up time and one that has completed a start andgone into an overload condition. Therefore, if the motor current does not rise to greater than full load within1 second on start, the acceleration timer feature is ignored. In any case, the motor is still protected by theoverload curve.

5.6.3 START INHIBITS

PATH: S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS START INHIBITS

The start inhibit setpoints are individually described below.

ACCELERATION TRIP ACCELERATIONTRIP: Off




ACCELERATION TIMEFROM START: 10.0 s


START INHIBITS ENABLE SINGLE SHOTRESTART: No

Range: No, Yes

ENABLESTART INHIBIT: No

Range: No, Yes

MAX STARTS/HOURPERMISSIBLE: Off

Range: 1 to 5 in steps of 1, Off (0)

TIME BETWEEN STARTSPERMISSIBLE: Off

Range: 1 to 500 min. in steps of 1, Off (0)

RESTART BLOCK:Off

Range: 1 to 50000 s in steps of 1, Off (0)

ASSIGN BLOCK RELAY:Trip & Aux2

Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations

NOTE


5.6 S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS 5 SETPOINTS

5

• ENABLE SINGLE SHOT RESTART: Enabling this feature will allow the motor to be restarted immediately after anoverload trip has occurred. To accomplish this, a reset will cause the 369 to decrease the accumulated thermal capac-ity to zero. However, if a second overload trip occurs within one hour of the first, another immediate restart will not bepermitted. The displayed lockout time must then be allowed to expire before the motor can be started.

• ENABLE START INHIBIT: The Start Inhibit feature is intended to help prevent tripping of the motor during a start ifthere is insufficient thermal capacity for a start. The average value of thermal capacity used from the last five success-ful starts is multiplied by 1.25 and stored as thermal capacity used on start. This 25% margin is used to ensure that amotor start will be successful. If the number is greater than 100%, 100% is stored as thermal capacity used on start. Asuccessful motor start is one in which phase current rises from 0 to greater than overload pickup and then, after accel-eration, falls below the overload curve pickup level. If the Start Inhibit feature is enabled, each time the motor isstopped, the amount of thermal capacity available (100% – Thermal Capacity Used) is compared to the THERMALCAPACITY USED ON START. If the thermal capacity available does not exceed the THERMAL CAPACITY USED ONSTART, or is not equal to 100%, the Start Inhibit will become active until there is sufficient thermal capacity. When aninhibit occurs, the lockout time will be equal to the time required for the motor to cool to an acceptable temperature fora start. This time will be a function of the COOL TIME CONSTANT STOPPED programmed. If this feature is turned Off,thermal capacity used must reduce to 15% before an overload lockout resets. This feature should be turned off if theload varies for different starts.

• MAX STARTS/HOUR PERMISSIBLE: A motor start is assumed to be occurring when the 369 measures the transitionof no motor current to some value of motor current. At this point, one of the Starts/Hour timers is loaded with 60 min-utes. Even unsuccessful start attempts will be logged as starts for this feature. Once the motor is stopped, the numberof starts within the past hour is compared to the number of starts allowable. If the two are the same, an inhibit willoccur. If an inhibit occurs, the lockout time will be equal to one hour less the longest time elapsed since a start withinthe past hour. An Emergency restart will clear the oldest start time remaining.

• TIME BETWEEN STARTS PERMISSIBLE: A motor start is assumed to be occurring when the 369 measures the tran-sition of no motor current to some value of motor current. At this point, the Time Between Starts timer is loaded with theentered time. Even unsuccessful start attempts will be logged as starts for this feature. Once the motor is stopped, ifthe time elapsed since the most recent start is less than the TIME BETWEEN STARTS PERMISSIBLE setpoint, an inhibitwill occur. If an inhibit occurs, the lockout time will be equal to the time elapsed since the most recent start subtractedfrom the TIME BETWEEN STARTS PERMISSIBLE setpoint.

• RESTART BLOCK: Restart Block may be used to ensure that a certain amount of time passes between stopping amotor and restarting that motor. This timer feature may be very useful for some process applications or motor consid-erations. If a motor is on a down-hole pump, after the motor stops, the liquid may fall back down the pipe and spin therotor backwards. It would be very undesirable to start the motor at this time. In another scenario, a motor may be driv-ing a very high inertia load. Once the supply to the motor is disconnected, the rotor may continue to turn for a longperiod of time as it decelerates. The motor has now become a generator and applying supply voltage out of phase mayresult in catastrophic failure.

• ASSIGN BLOCK RELAY: The relay(s) assigned here will be used for all blocking/inhibit elements in this section. Theassigned relay will activate only when the motor is stopped. When a block/inhibit condition times out or is cleared, theassigned relay will automatically reset itself.

NOTES FOR ALL INHIBITS AND BLOCKS:

1. In the event of control power loss, all lockout times will be saved. Elapsed time will be recorded and decremented fromthe inhibit times whether control power is applied or not. Upon control power being re-established to the 369, allremaining inhibits (have not time out) will be re-activated.

2. If the motor is started while an inhibit is active an event titled ‘Start while Blocked’ will be recorded.


5 SETPOINTS 5.6 S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS

5

5.6.4 BACKSPIN DETECTION

PATH: S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS BACKSPIN DETECTION

Immediately after the motor is stopped, backspin detection commences and a backspin start inhibit is activated to preventthe motor from being restarted. The backspin frequency is sensed through the BSD voltage input. If the measured fre-quency is below the programmed MINIMUM PERMISSIBLE FREQUENCY, the backspin start inhibit will be removed. The timefor the motor to reach the MINIMUM PERMISSIBLE FREQUENCY is calculated throughout the backspin state. If the BSD fre-quency signal is lost prior to reaching the Minimum Permissible Frequency, the inhibit remains active until the predictiontime has expired. The calculated Prediction Time and the Backspin State can be viewed in Section 6.3.4 Backspin Meteringon page 6–8.

APPLICATION:

Backspin protection is typically used on down hole pump motors which can be located several kilometers underground.Check valves are often used to prevent flow reversal when the pump stops. Very often however, the flow reverses due tofaulty or non existent check valves, causing the pump impeller to rotate the motor in the reverse direction. Starting themotor during this period of reverse rotation (back-spinning) may result in motor damage. Backspin detection ensures thatthe motor can only be started when the motor has slowed to within acceptable limits. Without backspin detection a longtime delay had to be used as a start permissive to ensure the motor had slowed to a safe speed.

These setpoints are only visible when option B has been installed.

BACKSPIN DETECTION ENABLE BACKSPINSTART INHIBIT: No

Range: No, YesOnly shown if B option installed

MINIMUM PERMISSIBLEFREQUENCY: 0.00 Hz

Range: 0 to 9.99 Hz in steps of 0.01Shown only if backspin start inhibit is enabled

PREDICTION ALGORITHMEnabled

Range: Disabled, EnabledShown only if backspin start inhibit is enabled

ASSIGN BSD RELAY:Aux2

Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinationsSeen only if backspin start inhibit is enabled

NUM OF MOTOR POLES:2

Range: 2 to 16 in steps of 2Shown only if backspin start inhibit is enabled

NOTE


5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.7S6 RTD TEMPERATURE 5.7.1 DESCRIPTION

These setpoints deal with the RTD overtemperature elements of the 369. The Local RTD Protection setpoints will only beseen if the 369 has option R installed. The Remote RTD Protection setpoints will only be seen if the 369 has the RRTDaccessory enabled. Both can be enabled and used at the same time and have the same functionality.

5.7.2 LOCAL RTD PROTECTION

PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE LOCAL RTD PROTECTION LOCAL RTD 1(12)

The above setpoints will only be shown if the RTD 1(12) APPLICATION setpoint is other than “None”

LOCAL RTD 1 RTD 1 APPLICATION:None

Range: None, Stator, Bearing, Ambient, Other

RTD 1 TYPE:100 Ohm Platinum

Range 10 Ohm Copper, 100 Ohm Nickel, 120 OhmNickel, 100 Ohm Platinum.

RTD 1 NAME:RTD 1

Range: 8 alphanumeric characters

RTD 1 ALARM:Off


RTD 1 ALARM RELAYS:Alarm


RTD 1 ALARMLEVEL: 130°C

Range: 1 to 200°C or 34 to 392°F in steps of 1

RTD 1 HI ALARM:Off


RTD 1 HI ALARMRELAYS: Aux1


RTD 1 HI ALARMLEVEL: 130°C


RECORD RTD 1 ALARMSAS EVENTS: No

Range: No, Yes

RTD 1 TRIP:Off


RTD 1 TRIP RELAYS:Trip


RTD 1 TRIPLEVEL: 130°C


ENABLE RTD 1 TRIPVOTING: Off

Range: Off, RTD 1 to RTD12, All Stator

NOTE


5 SETPOINTS 5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE

5

5.7.3 REMOTE RTD PROTECTION

a) MAIN MENU

PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE REMOTE RTD PROTECTN REMOTE RTD MODULE 1(4)

These setpoints are applicable for units with a GE Multilin Remote RTD module.

REMOTE RTD MODULE 1 RRTD 1 ADDRESS:1


RRTD 1 RTD1See page 5–46.

RRTD 1 RTD2

RRTD 1 RTD12

RRTD 1 OPEN RTDALARM: Off

Range: Off, On



RRTD 1 OPEN RTDEVENTS: No

Range: No, Yes

RRTD 1 SHORT/LOW RTDALARM: Off

Range: Off, On



RRTD 1 SHORT/LOW RTDEVENTS: No

Range: No, Yes



5

b) REMOTE RTD 1(12)

PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE REMOTE RTD PROTECTN REMOTE RTD MODULE 1(4) RRTD 1 RTD 1(12)

• RTD 1(12) APPLICATION: Each individual RTD may be assigned an application. A setting of “None” turns an individ-ual RTD off. Only RTDs with the application set to “Stator” are used for RTD biasing of the thermal model. If an RTDapplication is set to “Ambient”, then its is used in calculating the learned cool time of the motor.

• RTD 1(12) TYPE: Each RTD is individually assigned the RTD type it is connected to. Multiple types may be used witha single 369.

• RTD 1(12) NAME: Each RTD may have 8 character name assigned to it. This name is used in alarm and trip mes-sages.

• RTD 1(12) ALARM, RTD 1(12) HI ALARM, and RTD 1(12) TRIP: Each RTD can be programmed for separate Alarm,Hi Alarm and Trip levels and relays. Trips are automatically stored as events. Alarms and Hi Alarms are stored asevents only if the Record Alarms as Events setpoint for that RTD is set to Yes.

• RTD 1(12) TRIP VOTING: This feature provides added RTD trip reliability in situations where malfunction and nui-sance tripping is common. If enabled, the RTD trips only if the RTD (or RTDs) to be voted with are also above their triplevel. For example, if RTD 1 is set to vote with All Stator RTDs, the 369 will only trip if RTD 1 is above its trip level andany one of the other stator RTDs is also above its own trip level. RTD voting is typically only used on Stator RTDs andtypically done between adjacent RTDs to detect hot spots.

REMOTE RTD MODULE 1 RTD 1 APPLICATION:None

Range: None, Stator, Bearing, Ambient, Other

RRTD 1 RTD1 TYPE:100 Ohm Platinum

Range: 10 Ohm Copper, 100 Ohm Nickel, 120 OhmNickel, 100 Ohm Platinum

RRTD 1 RTD1 NAME:RRTD1

Range: 8 character alphanumeric. Seen only if RRTD 1APPLICATION is other than “None”

RRTD 1 RTD1 ALARM:Off

Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched. Seen only if RRTD 1APPLICATION is other than “None”

RRTD 1 RTD1 ALARMRELAYS: Alarm

Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations. Seenonly if RRTD 1 APPLICATION is not “None”

RRTD 1 RTD1 ALARMLEVEL: 130 °C

Range: 1 to 200°C or 34 to 392°F in steps of 1. Seen onlyif RRTD 1 APPLICATION is other than “None”

RRTD 1 RTD1 HI ALARM:Off

Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched. Seen only if RRTD 1APPLICATION is other than “None”.

RRTD1 RTD1 HI ALARMRELAY: Aux1

Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations. Seenonly if RRTD 1 APPLICATION is not “None”.

RRTD 1 RTD1 HI ALARMLEVEL: 130 °C

Range: 1 to 200°C or 34 to 392°F in steps of 1. Seen onlyif RRTD 1 APPLICATION is other than “None”.

RRTD 1 RTD1 ALARMSAS EVENTS: No

Range: No, Yes. Seen only if RRTD 1 APPLICATION isother than “None”.

RRTD 1 RTD1 TRIP:Off

Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched. Seen only if RRTD 1APPLICATION is other than “None”.

RRTD 1 RTD1 TRIPRELAYS: Trip

Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations. Seenonly if RRTD 1 APPLICATION is not “None”.

RRTD 1 RTD1 TRIPLEVEL: 130 °C

Range: 1 to 200°C or 34 to 392°F in steps of 1. Seen onlyif RRTD 1 APPLICATION is other than “None”.

RRTD 1 RTD1 TRIPVOTING: Off

Range: Off, RRTD 1 to 12, All Stator. Seen only if RRTD1 APPLICATION is other than “None”


5 SETPOINTS 5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE

5

Stator RTDs can detect heating due to non overload (current) conditions such as blocked or inadequate cooling and venti-lation or high ambient temperature as well as heating due to overload conditions. Bearing or other RTDs can detect over-heating of bearings or auxiliary equipment.

Table 5–2: RTD RESISTANCE TO TEMPERATURETEMPERATURE RTD RESISTANCE (IN OHMS)°C °F 100 Ohm Pt

DIN 43760120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm Ni 10 Ohm Cu

–40 –40 84.27 92.76 79.13 7.49–30 –22 88.22 99.41 84.15 7.88–20 –4 92.16 106.15 89.23 8.26–10 14 96.09 113.00 94.58 8.65

0 32 100.00 120.00 100.0 9.0410 50 103.90 127.17 105.6 9.4220 68 107.79 134.52 111.2 9.8130 86 111.67 142.06 117.1 10.1940 104 115.54 149.79 123.0 10.5850 122 119.39 157.74 129.1 10.9760 140 123.24 165.90 135.3 11.3570 158 127.07 174.25 141.7 11.7480 176 130.89 182.84 148.3 12.1290 194 134.70 191.64 154.9 12.51

100 212 138.50 200.64 161.8 12.90110 230 142.29 209.85 168.8 13.28120 248 146.06 219.29 176.0 13.67130 266 149.82 228.96 183.3 14.06140 284 153.58 238.85 190.9 14.44150 302 157.32 248.95 198.7 14.83160 320 161.04 259.30 206.6 15.22170 338 164.76 269.91 214.8 15.61180 356 168.47 280.77 223.2 16.00190 374 172.46 291.96 231.6 16.39200 392 175.84 303.46 240.0 16.78



5

5.7.4 OPEN RTD ALARM

PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE OPEN LOCAL RTD ALARM

The 369 has an Open RTD Sensor Alarm. This alarm will look at all RTDs that have been assigned an application otherthan “None” and determine if an RTD connection has been broken. When a broken sensor is detected, the assigned outputrelay will operate and a message will appear on the display identifying the RTD that is broken. It is recommended that if thisfeature is used, the alarm be programmed as latched so that intermittent RTDs are detected and corrective action may betaken.

5.7.5 SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM

PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE SHORT/LOW RTD ALARM

The 369 has an RTD Short/Low Temperature alarm. This function tracks all RTDs that have an application other than“None” to determine if an RTD has either a short or a very low temperature (less than –40°C). When a short/low tempera-ture is detected, the assigned output relay will operate and a message will appear on the display identifying the RTD thatcaused the alarm. It is recommended that if this feature is used, the alarm be programmed as latched so that intermittentRTDs are detected and corrective action may be taken.

5.7.6 LOSS OF RRTD COMMS ALARM

PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE LOSS OF RRTD COMMS

The 369, if connected to a RRTD module, will monitor communications between them. If for some reason communicationsis lost or interrupted the 369 can issue an alarm indicating the failure. This feature is useful to ensure that the remote RTDsare continuously being monitored.

OPEN LOCAL RTD ALARM OPEN LOCAL RTDALARM: Off




OPEN RTD ALARMEVENTS: No

Range: No, Yes

SHORT/LOW RTD ALARM SHORT/LOW TEMP RTDALARM: Off




SHORT/LOW TEMP ALARMEVENTS: No

Range: No, Yes

LOSS OF RRTD COMMS LOSS OF RRTD COMMSALARM: OFF




LOSS OF RRTD COMMSEVENTS: No

Range: No, Yes


5 SETPOINTS 5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

5

5.8S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS 5.8.1 DESCRIPTION

These elements are not used by the 369 unless the M or B option is installed and the VT CONNECTION TYPE setpoint (seeSection 5.3.2: CT/VT Setup on page 5–11) is set to something other than “None”.

5.8.2 UNDERVOLTAGE

PATH: S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS UNDERVOLTAGE

If enabled, an undervoltage trip or alarm occurs once the magnitude of either Vab, Vbc, or Vca falls below the runningpickup level while running or the starting pickup level while starting, for a period of time specified by the alarm or trip delay(pickup levels are multiples of motor nameplate voltage).

An undervoltage on a running motor with a constant load results in increased current. The relay thermal model typicallypicks up this condition and provides adequate protection. However, this setpoint may be used in conjunction with time delayto provide additional protection that may be programmed for advance warning by tripping.

The U/V ACTIVE IF MOTOR STOPPED setpoint may be used to prevent nuisance alarms or trips when the motor is stopped.If "No" is programmed the undervoltage element will be blocked from operating whenever the motor is stopped (no phasecurrent and starter status indicates breaker or contactor open). If the load is high inertia, it may be desirable to ensure thatthe motor is tripped off line or prevented from starting in the event of a total loss or decrease in line voltage. Programming"Yes" for the block setpoint will ensure that the motor is tripped and may be restarted only after the bus is re-energized.

A typical application of this feature is with an undervoltage of significant proportion that persists while starting a synchro-nous motor which may prevent it from coming up to rated speed within the rated time. This undervoltage may be an indica-tion of a system fault. To protect a synchronous motor from being restarted while out of step it may be necessary to useundervoltage to take the motor offline before a reclose is attempted.

UNDERVOLTAGE U/V ACTIVE IF MOTORSTOPPED: No

Range: No, Yes

UNDERVOLTAGEALARM: Off



Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations

STARTING U/V ALARMPICKUP: 0.85xRATED

Range: 0.50 to 0.99 x RATED in steps of 0.01

RUNNING U/V ALARMPICKUP: 0.85xRATED


UNDERVOLTAGE ALARMDELAY: 3.0 S


UNDERVOLTAGE ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On

UNDERVOLTAGETRIP: Off



Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations

STARTING U/V TRIPPICKUP: 0.80xRATED


RUNNING U/V TRIPPICKUP: 0.80xRATED


UNDERVOLTAGE TRIPDELAY: 1.0s



5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.8.3 OVERVOLTAGE

PATH: S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS OVERVOLTAGE

If enabled, once the magnitude of either Vab, Vbc, or Vca rises above the Pickup Level for a period of time specified by theDelay, a trip or alarm will occur (pickup levels are multiples of motor nameplate voltage).

An overvoltage on running motor with a constant load will result in decreased current. However, iron and copper lossesincrease, causing an increase in motor temperature. The current overload relay will not pickup this condition and provideadequate protection. Therefore, the overvoltage element may be useful for protecting the motor in the event of a sustainedovervoltage condition.

The Undervoltage and Overvoltage alarms and trips are activated based upon the phase to phase voltageregardless of the VT connection type.

5.8.4 PHASE REVERSAL

PATH: S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS PHASE REVERSAL

The 369 can detect the phase rotation of the three phase voltage. If the phase reversal feature is turned on when all 3phase voltages are greater than 50% motor nameplate voltage and the phase rotation of the three phase voltages is not thesame as the setpoint, a trip and block start will occur in 500 ms to 700 ms.

OVERVOLTAGE OVERVOLTAGEALARM: Off




OVERVOLTAGE ALARMPICKUP: 1.05xRATED


OVERVOLTAGE ALARMDELAY: 3.0s


OVERVOLTAGE ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On

OVERVOLTAGETRIP: Off




OVERVOLTAGE TRIPPICKUP: 1.10xRATED


OVERVOLTAGE TRIPDELAY: 1.0s


PHASE REVERSAL PHASE REVERSALTRIP: Off




NOTE


5 SETPOINTS 5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

5

5.8.5 UNDERFREQUENCY

PATH: S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS UNDERFREQUENCY

Once the frequency of the phase AN or AB voltage (depending on wye or delta connection) falls below the underfrequencypickup level, a trip or alarm will occur.

This feature may be useful for load shedding applications on large motors. It could also be used to load shed an entirefeeder if the trip was assigned to an upstream breaker. Underfrequency can also be used to detect loss of power to a syn-chronous motor. Due to motor generation, sustained voltage may prevent quick detection of power loss. Therefore, toquickly detect the loss of system power, the decaying frequency of the generated voltage as the motor slows can be used.

The Underfrequency element is not active when the motor is stopped.

UNDERFREQUENCY BLOCK UNDERFREQUENCYFROM START:


UNDERFREQUENCYALARM: Off




UNDERFREQUENCY ALARMLEVEL: 59.50 Hz

Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01

UNDERFREQUENCY ALARMDELAY: 1.0s


UNDERFREQUENCY ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On

UNDERFREQUENCYTRIP: Off




UNDERFREQUENCY TRIPLEVEL: 59.50 Hz


UNDERFREQUENCY TRIPDELAY: 1.0s



5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.8.6 OVERFREQUENCY

PATH: S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS OVERFREQUENCY

Once the frequency of the phase AN or AB voltage (depending on wye or delta connection) rises above the overfrequencypickup level, a trip or alarm will occur.

This feature may be useful for load shedding applications on large motors. It could also be used to load shed an entirefeeder if the trip was assigned to an upstream breaker.

The Overfrequency element is not active when the motor is stopped.

OVERFREQUENCY BLOCK OVERFREQUENCYFROM START: 1 s


OVERFREQUENCYALARM: Off




OVERFREQUENCY ALARMLEVEL: 60.50 Hz


OVERFREQUENCY ALARMDELAY: 1.0s


OVERFREQUENCY ALARMEVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On

OVERFREQUENCYTRIP: Off




OVERFREQUENCY TRIPLEVEL: 60.50 Hz


OVERFREQUENCY TRIPDELAY: 1.0s



5 SETPOINTS 5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS

5

5.9S8 POWER ELEMENTS 5.9.1 DESCRIPTION

These protective elements rely on CTs and VTs being installed and setpoints programmed. The power elements are onlyused if the 369 has option M or B installed. By convention, an induction motor consumes Watts and vars. This condition isdisplayed on the 369 as +Watts and +vars. A synchronous motor can consume Watts and vars or consume Watts and gen-erate vars. These conditions are displayed on the 369 as +Watts, +vars, and +Watts, –vars respectively.

Figure 5–12: POWER MEASUREMENT CONVENTIONS

I1

I2

I3

I4

^

^

^

^


5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.9.2 LEAD POWER FACTOR

PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS LEAD POWER FACTOR

If the 369 is applied on a synchronous motor, it is desirable not to trip or alarm on power factor until the field has beenapplied. Therefore, this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field is applied. From that pointforward, the power factor trip and alarm elements will be active. Once the power factor is less than the lead level, for thespecified delay, a trip or alarm will occur indicating a lead condition.

The lead power factor alarm can be used to detect over-excitation or loss of load.

5.9.3 LAG POWER FACTOR

PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS LAG POWER FACTOR

LEAD POWER FACTOR BLOCK LEAD PFFROM START: 1 s


LEAD POWER FACTORALARM: Off




LEAD POWER FACTORALARM LEVEL: 0.30


LEAD POWER FACTORALARM DELAY: 1.0s


LEAD POWER FACTORALARM EVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On

LEAD POWER FACTORTRIP: Off




LEAD POWER FACTORTRIP LEVEL: 0.30


LEAD POWER FACTORTRIP DELAY: 1.0s


LAG POWER FACTOR BLOCK LAG PFFROM START: 1 s


LAG POWER FACTORALARM: Off




LAG POWER FACTORALARM LEVEL: 0.85


LAG POWER FACTORALARM DELAY: 1.0s


LAG POWER FACTORALARM EVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On



5

If the 369 is applied on a synchronous motor, it is desirable not to trip or alarm on power factor until the field has beenapplied. Therefore, this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field is applied. From that pointforward, the power factor trip and alarm elements will be active. Once the power factor is less than the lag level, for thespecified delay, a trip or alarm will occur indicating lag condition.

The power factor alarm can be used to detect loss of excitation and out of step for a synchronous motor.

5.9.4 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER

PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER

If the 369 is applied on a synchronous motor, it is desirable not to trip or alarm on kvar until the field has been applied.Therefore, this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field is applied. From that point forward,the kvar trip and alarm elements will be active. Once the kvar level exceeds the positive level, for the specified delay, a tripor alarm will occur indicating a positive kvar condition. The reactive power alarm can be used to detect loss of excitationand out of step.

LAG POWER FACTORTRIP: Off




LAG POWER FACTORTRIP LEVEL: 0.80


LAG POWER FACTORTRIP DELAY: 1.0s


POSITIVE REACTIVEPOWER (kvar)

BLOCK +kvar ELEMENTFROM START: 1 s


POSITIVE kvarALARM: Off




POSITIVE kvar ALARMLEVEL: 10 kvar


POSITIVE kvarALARM DELAY: 1.0 s


POSITIVE kvarALARM EVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On

POSITIVE kvarTRIP:




POSITIVE kvar TRIPLEVEL: 25 kvar


POSITIVE kvarTRIP DELAY: 1.0 s



5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.9.5 NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER

PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER

When using the 369 on a synchronous motor, it is desirable not to trip or alarm on kvar until the field has been applied. Assuch, this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field is applied. From that point forward, thekvar trip and alarm elements will be active. Once the kvar level exceeds the negative level for the specified delay, a trip oralarm occurs, indicating a negative kvar condition. The reactive power alarm can be used to detect overexcitation or loss ofload.

5.9.6 UNDERPOWER

PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS UNDERPOWER

NEGATIVE REACTIVEPOWER (kvar)

BLOCK -kvar ELEMENTFROM START: 1 s


NEGATIVE kvarALARM: Off




NEGATIVE kvar ALARMLEVEL: 10 kvar


NEGATIVE kvarALARM DELAY: 1.0 s


NEGATIVE kvarALARM EVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On

NEGATIVE kvarTRIP: Off




NEGATIVE kvar TRIPLEVEL: 25 kvar


NEGATIVE kvarTRIP DELAY: 1.0s


UNDERPOWER BLOCK UNDERPOWERFROM START: 1 s


UNDERPOWERALARM: Off




UNDERPOWER ALARMLEVEL: 2 kW


UNDERPOWERALARM DELAY: 1 s


UNDERPOWERALARM EVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On

UNDERPOWERTRIP: Off




5

If enabled, a trip or alarm occurs when the magnitude of three-phase total real power falls below the pickup level for aperiod of time specified by the delay. The underpower element is active only when the motor is running and will be blockedupon the initiation of a motor start for a period of time defined by the BLOCK UNDERPOWER FROM START setpoint (e.g. thisblock may be used to allow pumps to build up head before the underpower element trips or alarms). A value of 0 means thefeature is not blocked from start; otherwise the feature is disabled when the motor is stopped and also from the time a startis detected until the time entered expires. The pickup level should be set lower than motor loading during normal opera-tions.

Underpower may be used to detect loss of load conditions. Loss of load conditions will not always cause a significant lossof current. Power is a more accurate representation of loading and may be used for more sensitive detection of load loss orpump cavitation. This may be especially useful for detecting process related problems.

5.9.7 REVERSE POWER

PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS REVERSE POWER

If enabled, once the magnitude of three-phase total real power exceeds the pickup level in the reverse direction (negativekW) for a period of time specified by the delay, a trip or alarm will occur.

The minimum power measurement magnitude is determined by the phase CT minimum of 5% rated CT pri-mary. If the reverse power level is set below this, a trip or alarm will only occur once the phase currentexceeds the 5% cutoff.



UNDERPOWER TRIPLEVEL: 1 kW


UNDERPOWERTRIP DELAY: 1 s


REVERSE POWER BLOCK REVERSE POWERFROM START: 1 s


REVERSE POWERALARM: Off



Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combination

REVERSE POWER ALARMLEVEL: 1 kW


REVERSE POWERALARM DELAY: 1.0 s


REVERSE POWERALARM EVENTS: Off

Range: Off, On

REVERSE POWERTRIP: Off




REVERSE POWER TRIPLEVEL: 1 kW


REVERSE POWERTRIP DELAY: 1.0 s

Range: 0.5 to 30 s in steps of 0.5

NOTE


5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.10S9 DIGITAL INPUTS 5.10.1 DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTIONS

a) DESCRIPTION

Any of the digital inputs may be selected and programmed as a separate General Switch, Digital Counter, or WaveformCapture Input. The xxxxx term in the following menus refers to the configurable switch input function – either the SpareSwitch, Emergency Restart, Differential Switch, Speed Switch, or Remote Reset inputs described in the following sections.

b) GENERAL

The above selections will be shown if the in the corresponding menu if SPARE SW FUNCTION, EMERGENCY FUNCTION, DIFFSW FUNCTION, or SPEED SW FUNCTION setpoints are set to “General”. Refer to the individual sections for Spare Switch,Emergency Restart, Differential Switch, Speed Switch, or Remote Reset below for additional function-specific setpoints.

xxxxx SW FUNCTION:General

GENERAL SWITCHNAME: General

Range: 12 character alphanumericOnly seen if function is selected as General

MESSAGEGENERAL SWITCHTYPE: NO

Range: NO (normally open), NC (normally closed)Only seen if function is selected as General

MESSAGEBLOCK INPUT FROMSTART: 0 s

Range: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1Only seen if function is selected as General

MESSAGEGENERAL SWITCHALARM: Off

Range: Off, Latched, UnlatchedOnly seen if function is selected as General

MESSAGEASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:Alarm

Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinationsOnly seen if function is selected as General

MESSAGEGENERAL SWITCHALARM DELAY: 5.0 s

Range: 0.1 to 5000.0 s in steps of 0.1Only seen if function is selected as General

MESSAGERECORD ALARMS ASEVENTS: No

Range: No, YesOnly seen if function is selected as General

MESSAGEGENERAL SWITCHTRIP: Off

Range: Off, Latched, UnlatchedOnly seen if function is selected as General

MESSAGEASSIGN TRIP RELAYS:Trip

Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinationsOnly seen if function is selected as General

MESSAGEGENERAL SWITCHTRIP DELAY: 5.0 s

Range: 0.1 to 5000.0 s in steps of 0.1Only seen if function is selected as General


5 SETPOINTS 5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS

5

c) DIGITAL COUNTER

The above selections will be shown if the SPARE SW FUNCTION, EMERGENCY FUNCTION, DIFF SW FUNCTION, or SPEED SWFUNCTION setpoints are set to “Digital Counter”. Refer to the individual sections for Spare Switch, Emergency Restart, Dif-ferential Switch, Speed Switch, or Remote Reset below for additional function-specific setpoints.

Only one digital input may be selected as a digital counter at a time. User defined units and counter name may be definedand these will appear on all counter related actual value and alarm messages. To clear a digital counter alarm, the alarmlevel must be increased or the counter must be cleared or preset to a lower value.

d) WAVEFORM CAPTURE

The Waveform Capture setting for the digital inputs allows the 369 to capture a waveform upon command (contact closure).The captured waveforms can then be displayed via the EnerVista 369 Setup program.

e) DEVICENET CONTROL

This function is available for the DeviceNet option only. The digital input set with the DeviceNet control function and theswitch status closed allows motor start, motor stop, and fault reset commands through DeviceNet communications.

xxxxx SW FUNCTION:Digital Counter

COUNTERNAME: Counter

Range: 8 character alphanumericOnly seen if function is Digital Counter

MESSAGECOUNTERUNITS: Units

Range: 6 character alphanumericOnly seen if function is Digital Counter

MESSAGECOUNTERTYPE: Increment

Range: Increment, DecrementOnly seen if function is Digital Counter

MESSAGEDIGITAL COUNTERALARM: Off

Range: Off, Latched, UnlatchedOnly seen if function is Digital Counter

MESSAGEASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:Alarm

Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations.Only seen if function is Digital Counter

MESSAGECOUNTER ALARM LEVEL:100

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1Only seen if function is Digital Counter

MESSAGERECORD ALARMS ASEVENTS: No

Range: No, YesOnly seen if function is Digital Counter


5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.10.2 SPARE SWITCH

PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS SPARE SWITCH

See Section 5.10.1: Digital Input Functions on page 5–58 for an explanation of the spare switch functions.

In addition to regular selections, the Spare Switch may be used as a starter status contact input. An auxiliary ‘52a’ type con-tact follows the state of the main contactor or breaker and an auxiliary ‘52b’ type contact is in the opposite state. This fea-ture is recommended for use on all motors. It is essential for proper operation of start inhibits (i.e., starts/hour, time betweenstarts, start inhibit, restart block, backspin start inhibit), especially when the motor may be run lightly or unloaded.

A motor stop condition is detected when the current falls below 5% of CT. When SPARE SWITCH is programmed as “StarterStatus”, motor stop conditions are detected when the current falls below 5% of CT and the breaker is open. Enabling theStarter Status and wiring the breaker contactor to the Spare Switch eliminates nuisance lockouts initiated by the 369 if themotor (synchronous or induction) is running unloaded or idling, and if the STARTS/HOUR, TIME BETWEEN STARTS, STARTINHIBIT, RESTART BLOCK, and BACKSPIN START INHIBIT are programmed.

In addition, there may be applications where current is briefly present after the breaker is opened on a motor stop (forexample, discharge from power factor correction capacitors). In such a case, the 369 will detect this current as an addi-tional start. To prevent this from occurring, the STARTER OPERATION MONITOR DELAY setpoint is used. If this setpoint isprogrammed to any value other than “OFF”, a motor start is logged only if current above 5% of the CT is present and thebreaker is closed (for an “52a” type contact). If the breaker is open (for an “52a” type contact) and the current above 5% ofCT is present for longer than the STARTER OPERATION MONITOR DELAY time, then a trip or alarm will occur (according tothe relay settings). If the trip relay is assigned under the ASSIGN RELAYS setpoint, then a trip will occur and a trip event willbe recorded; otherwise, an alarm will occur and an alarm event recorded. If the STARTER OPERATION MONITOR DELAY is“OFF”, this functionality will be disabled.

The Access switch is predefined and is non programmable.

5.10.3 EMERGENCY RESTART

PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS EMERGENCY RESTART

See Section 5.10.1: Digital Input Functions on page 5–58 for an explanation of the emergency restart functions. In additionto the normal selections, the Emergency Restart Switch may be used as a emergency restart input to the 369 to overrideprotection for the motor.

When the emergency restart switch is closed all trip and alarm functions are reset. Thermal capacity used is set to zero andall protective elements are disabled until the switch is opened. Starts per hour are also reduced by one each time the switchis closed.

SPARE SWITCH SPARE SW FUNCTION:Off

Range: Off, Starter Status, General, Digital Counter,Waveform Capture, DeviceNet Control

MESSAGESTARTER AUX CONTACTTYPE: 52a

Range: 52a, 52bOnly seen if FUNCTION is "Starter Status"

MESSAGESTARTER OPERATIONMONITOR DELAY: 3 s

Range: OFF, 0 to 60 s in steps of 1Only seen if FUNCTION is “Starter Status”

MESSAGESTARTER OPERATIONTYPE: Off

Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched. Only seen if SPARE SWFUNCTION is “Starter Status” and STARTEROPERATION MONITOR DELAY is not “OFF”

MESSAGEASSIGN RELAYS:None

Range: None, Trip, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations.Only seen if SPARE SW FUNCTION is “StarterStatus” and STARTER OPERATION MONITORDELAY is not “Off”.

EMERGENCY RESTART EMERGENCY FUNCTION:Emergency Restart

Range: Off, Emergency Restart, General, Digital Counter,Waveform Capture, DeviceNet Control

NOTE


5 SETPOINTS 5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS

5

5.10.4 DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH

PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH

See Section 5.10.1: Digital Input Functions on page 5–58 for an explanation of differential switch functions. In addition tothe normal selections, the Differential Switch may be used as a contact input for a separate external 86 (differential trip)relay. Contact closure will cause the 369 relay to issue a differential trip.

5.10.5 SPEED SWITCH

PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS SPEED SWITCH

See Section 5.10.1: Digital Input Functions on page 5–58 for an explanation of speed switch functions. In addition to thenormal selections, the Speed Switch may be used as an input for an external speed switch. This allows the 369 to utilize aspeed device for locked rotor protection. During a motor start, if no contact closure occurs within the programmed timedelay, a trip will occur. The speed input must be opened for a speed switch trip to be reset.

5.10.6 REMOTE RESET

PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS REMOTE RESET

See the following section for an explanation of remote reset functions. In addition to the normal selections, the RemoteReset may be used as a contact input to reset the relay.

DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH DIFF SW FUNCTION:Differential Switch

Range: Off, Differential Switch, General, Digital Counter,Waveform Capture, DeviceNet Control

DIFF SW TRIP RELAY:Trip

Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinationsOnly seen if FUNCTION is "Differential Switch".

SPEED SWITCH SPEED SW FUNCTION:Speed Switch

Range: Off, Speed Switch, General, Digital Counter,Waveform Capture, DeviceNet Control

SPEED SWITCH TIMEDELAY: 2.0s

Range: 0.5 to 100.0s in steps of 0.5Only seen if FUNCTION is "Speed Switch"

SPEED SW TRIP RELAY:Trip

Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinationsOnly seen if FUNCTION is "Speed Switch"

REMOTE RESET REMOTE SW FUNCTION:Remote Reset

Range: Off, Remote Reset, General, Digital Counter,Waveform Capture, DeviceNet Control


5.11 S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS 5 SETPOINTS

5

5.11S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS 5.11.1 ANALOG OUTPUTS

PATH: S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS ANALOG OUTPUT 1(4)

The analog output parameters are indicated in the following table:

ANALOG OUTPUT 1 ANALOG OUTPUT 1:DISABLED

Range: Disabled, Enabled

ANALOG OUTPUT 1RANGE: 0-1 mA

Range: 0–1mA, 0–20 mA, 4–20 mA

ANALOG OUTPUT 1:Phase A Current

Range: See Analog Output selection table

ANALOG OUTPUT 1MIN: 0 A


ANALOG OUTPUT 1MAX: 100 A


Table 5–3: ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETERSPARAMETER NAME RANGE /UNITS STEP DEFAULT

MINIMUM MAXIMUMPhase A Current 0 to 65535 A 1 0 100Phase B Current 0 to 65535 A 1 0 100Phase C Current 0 to 65535 A 1 0 100Avg. Phase Current 0 to 65535 A 1 0 100AB Line Voltage 0 to 65000 V 1 3200 4500BC Line Voltage 0 to 65000 V 1 3200 4500CA Line Voltage 0 to 65000 V 1 3200 4500Avg. Line Voltage 0 to 65000 V 1 3200 4500Phase AN Voltage 0 to 65000 V 1 1900 2500Phase BN Voltage 0 to 65000 V 1 1900 2500Phase CN Voltage 0 to 65000 V 1 1900 2500Avg. Phase Voltage 0 to 65000 V 1 1900 2500Hottest Stator RTD –40 to +200°C or –40 to +392°F 1 0 200RTD #1 to 12 –40 to +200°C or –40 to +392°F 1 –40 200Power Factor –0.99 to 1.00 0.01 0.01 0.80Reactive Power –32000 to 32000 kvar 1 0 750Real Power –32000 to 32000 kW 1 0 1000Apparent Power 0 to 65000 kVA 1 0 1250Thermal Capacity Used 0 to 100% 1 0 100Relay Lockout Time 0 to 999 minutes 1 0 150Motor Load 0.00 to 20.00 x FLA 0.01 0.00 1.25MWhrs 0 to 65535 MWhrs 1 0 65535


5 SETPOINTS 5.12 S11 369 TESTING

5

5.12S11 369 TESTING 5.12.1 TEST OUTPUT RELAYS

PATH: S11 369 TESTING TEST OUTPUT RELAYS

The Test Output Relay feature provides a method of performing checks on all relay contact outputs. This feature is notmeant for control purposes during operation of the motor. For control purposes, the force output relays functionality (refer toForce Output Relays on page 5–23) is used.

The forced state, if enabled (energized or de-energized), forces the selected relay into the programmed state for as long asthe programmed duration. After the programmed duration expires, the forced state will return to disabled and relay opera-tion will return to normal. If the duration is programmed as Static, the forced state will remain in effect until changed or dis-abled. If control power to the 369 is interrupted, any forced relay condition will be removed.

When the relays in this feature are programmed to any value other than “Disabled”, the In Service LED on the front panelwill turn on. The provides notification that the relay is not currently operating in a normal condition.

5.12.2 TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS

PATH: S11 369 TESTING TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS

The Test Analog Output setpoints may be used during startup or testing to verify that the analog outputs are functioning cor-rectly. It may also be used when the motor is running to give manual or communication control of an analog output. Forcingan analog output overrides its normal functionality.

When the Force Analog Outputs Function is enabled, the output will reflect the forced value as a percentage of the range 4to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA, or 0 to 1 mA. Selecting Off will place the analog output channels back in service, reflecting theparameters programmed to each.

TEST OUTPUT RELAYS FORCE TRIP RELAY:Disabled

Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized

FORCE TRIP RELAYDURATION: Static

Range: Static, 1 to 300 s in steps of 1

FORCE AUX1 RELAY:Disabled


FORCE AUX1 RELAYDURATION: Static


FORCE AUX2 RELAY:Disabled


FORCE AUX2 RELAY:DURATION: Static


FORCE ALARM RELAY:Disabled


FORCE ALARM RELAYDURATION: Static


TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS FORCE ANALOGOUTPUT 1: Off

Range: Off, 1 to 100% in steps of 1

FORCE ANALOGOUTPUT 2: Off







5.12 S11 369 TESTING 5 SETPOINTS

5


6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 OVERVIEW

6

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1OVERVIEW 6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU

A1 ACTUAL VALUESSTATUS

MOTOR STATUSSee page 6–3.

LAST TRIP DATASee page 6–3.

DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGESSee page 6–4.

START BLOCK STATUSSee page 6–4.

DIGITAL INPUT STATUSSee page 6–5.

OUTPUT RELAY STATUSSee page 6–5.

REAL TIME CLOCKSee page 6–5.

FIELDBUS SPEC STATUSSee page 6–6.

A2 ACTUAL VALUESMETERING DATA

CURRENT METERINGSee page 6–7.

VOLTAGE METERINGSee page 6–7.

POWER METERINGSee page 6–8.

BACKSPIN METERINGSee page 6–8.

LOCAL RTDSee page 6–9.

REMOTE RTDSee page 6–9.

OVERALL STATOR RTDSee page 6–9.

DEMAND METERINGSee page 6–10.

PHASORSSee page 6–10.


6.1 OVERVIEW 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

A3 ACTUAL VALUESLEARNED DATA

MOTOR DATASee page 6–12.

LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMSSee page 6–13.

REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMSSee page 6–13.

A4 ACTUAL VALUESSTATISTICAL DATA

TRIP COUNTERSSee page 6–14.

MOTOR STATISTICSSee page 6–15.

A5 ACTUAL VALUESEVENT RECORD

EVENT: 250See page 6–16.

EVENT: 249

EVENT: 2

EVENT: 1

A6 ACTUAL VALUESRELAY INFORMATION

MODEL INFORMATIONSee page 6–17.

FIRMWARE VERSIONSee page 6–17.


6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2 A1 STATUS

6

6.2A1 STATUS 6.2.1 MOTOR STATUS

PATH: A1 STATUS MOTOR STATUS

These messages describe the status of the motor at the current point in time. The Motor Status message indicates the cur-rent state of the motor.

The Motor Thermal Capacity Used message indicates the current level which is used by the overload and cooling algo-rithms. The Estimated Trip Time On Overload is only active for the Overload motor status.

6.2.2 LAST TRIP DATA

PATH: A1 STATUS LAST TRIP DATA

MOTOR STATUS MOTOR STATUS:Stopped

Range: Stopped, Starting, Running, Overload, Tripped

MOTOR THERMALCAPACITY USED: 0%


ESTIMATED TRIP TIMEON OVERLOAD: Never

Range: Never, 0 to 65500 s in steps of 1

MOTOR STATE DEFINITIONStopped phase current = 0 A and starter status input = breaker/contactor openStarting motor previously stopped and phase current has gone from 0 to > FLARunning FLA > phase current > 0 or starter status input = breaker/contactor closed and motor was previously runningOverload motor previously running and phase current now > FLATripped a trip has been issued and not cleared

LAST TRIP DATA CAUSE OF LAST TRIP:No Trip to date

Range: No Trip to Date, cause of trip

LAST TRIPTIME: 00:00:00

Range: hour: min: seconds

LAST TRIPDATE: Sep 01 2005

Range: month day year

A: 0 B: 0C: 0 A Pretrip


MOTOR LOADPretrip 0.00 x FLA


CURRENT UNBALANCEPretrip: 0%


GROUND CURRENTPretrip: 0.0 Amps

Range: 0.0 to 5000.0 Amps in steps of 0.1

HOTTEST STATOR RTDRTD#1 0°C Pretrip

Range: –40 to +200 °C in steps of 1Only shown if a STATOR RTD is programmed

Vab: 0 Vbc: 0Vca: 0 V Pretrip

Range: 0 to 20000 in steps of 1Only shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed

Van: 0 Vbn: 0Vcn: 0 V Pretrip

Range: 0 to 20000 in steps of 1Only shown if VT CONNECTION is "Wye"


6.2 A1 STATUS 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

Immediately prior to a trip, the 369 takes a snapshot of the metered parameters along with the cause of trip and the dateand time and stores this as pre-trip values. This allows for ease of troubleshooting when a trip occurs. Instantaneous tripson starting (< 50 ms) may not allow all values to be captured. These values are overwritten when the next trip occurs. Theevent record shows details of the last 40 events including trips.

6.2.3 DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES

PATH: A1 STATUS DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES

Any active trips or alarms may be viewed here. If there is more than one active trip or alarm, using the Line Up and Downkeys will cycle through all the active alarm messages. If the Line Up and Down keys are not pressed, the active messageswill automatically cycle. The current level causing the alarm is displayed along with the alarm name.

6.2.4 START BLOCK STATUS

PATH: A1 STATUS START BLOCK STATUS

• OVERLOAD LOCKOUT TIMER: Determined from the thermal model, this is the remaining amount of time left beforethe thermal capacity available will be sufficient to allow another start and the start inhibit will be removed.

• START INHIBIT TIMER: If enabled this timer will indicate the remaining time for the Thermal Capacity to reduce to alevel to allow for a safe start according to the Start Inhibit setpoints.

• STARTS/HOUR TIMER: If enabled this display will indicate the number of starts within the last hour by showing thetime remaining in each. The oldest start will be on the left. Once the time of one start reaches 0, it is no longer consid-ered a start within the hour and is removed from the display and any remaining starts are shifted over to the left.

• TIME BETWEEN STARTS TIMER: If enabled this timer will indicate the remaining time from the last start before thestart inhibit will be removed and another start may be attempted. This time is measure from the beginning of the lastmotor start.

• RESTART BLOCK TIMER: If enabled this display will reflect the amount of time since the last motor stop before thestart block will be removed and another start may be attempted.

SYSTEM FREQUENCYPretrip: 0.00 Hz

Range: 0.00, 15.00 to 120.00 in steps of 0.01Only shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed

0 kW 0 kVA0 kvar Pretrip

Range: –50000 to +50000 in steps of 1Only shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed

POWER FACTORPretrip: 1.00

Range: 0.00 lag to 1 to 0.00 leadOnly shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed

DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES No Trips or Alarmsare Active

Range: No Trips or Alarms are Active, active alarmname and level, active trip name

START BLOCK STATUS OVERLOAD LOCKOUTTIMER: None


START INHIBITTIMER: None


STARTS/HOUR TIMERS:0 0 0 0 0 min


TIME BETWEEN STARTSTIMER: None


RESTART BLOCK TIMER:None



6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2 A1 STATUS

6

6.2.5 DIGITAL INPUT STATUS

PATH: A1 STATUS DIGITAL INPUT STATUS

The present state of the digital inputs will be displayed here.

6.2.6 OUTPUT RELAY STATUS

PATH: A1 STATUS OUTPUT RELAY STATUS

The present state of the output relays will be displayed here. Energized indicates that the NO contacts are now closed andthe NC contacts are now open. De-energized indicates that the NO contacts are now open and the NC contacts are nowclosed.

6.2.7 REAL TIME CLOCK

PATH: A1 STATUS REAL TIME CLOCK

The date and time from the 369 real time clock may be viewed here.

DIGITAL INPUT STATUS EMERGENCY RESTART:Open

Range: Open, ClosedNote: Programmed input name displayed

DIFFERENTIAL RELAY:Open


SPEED SWITCH:Open


RESET:Open


ACCESS:Open


SPARE:Open


OUTPUT RELAY STATUS TRIP: De–energized Range: Energized, De–energized

ALARM: De–energized Range: Energized, De–energized

AUX 1: De–energized Range: Energized, De–energized

AUX 2: De–energized Range: Energized, De–energized

REAL TIME CLOCK DATE: 09/30/2005TIME: 00:00:00

Range: month/day/year, hour: minute: second


6.2 A1 STATUS 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

6.2.8 FIELDBUS SPECIFICATION STATUS

PATH: A1 STATUS FIELDBUS SPEC STATUS

When the device is on the non-connected bus, the NETWORK STATUS message will continually cycle between“Power Off/Not Online” and “Online/Connected”.

FIELDBUS SPEC STATUS EXPLICIT STATUS:Nonexistent

Range: Nonexistent, Configuring, Established,Timed Out, Deleted

IO POLLED STATUS:Nonexistent

Range: Nonexistent, Configuring, Established,Timed Out, Deleted

NETWORK STATUS:Power Off/Not Online

Range: Power Off/Not Online, Online/Connected,Link Failure

NOTE


6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3 A2 METERING DATA

6

6.3A2 METERING DATA 6.3.1 CURRENT METERING

PATH: A2 METERING DATA CURRENT METERING

All measured current values are displayed here. Note that the unbalance level is de-rated below FLA. See the unbalancesetpoints in Section 5.4.2 Thermal Model on page 5–25 for more details.

6.3.2 VOLTAGE METERING

PATH: A2 METERING DATA VOLTAGE METERING

Measured voltage parameters will be displayed here. These displays are only visible if option M or B has been installed.

CURRENT METERING A: 0 B: 0C: 0 Amps


AVERAGE PHASECURRENT: 0 Amps


MOTOR LOAD:0.00 X FLA


CURRENT UNBALANCE:0%


U/B BIASED MOTORLOAD: 0.00 x FLA

Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01. Only visibleif unbalance biasing is enabled in thermal model.

GROUND CURRENT:0.0 Amps

Range: 0 to 6553.5 A in steps of 0.1 (for 1A/5A CT)0.00 to 25.00 A in steps of 0.01 (for50:0.025 A CT)

VOLTAGE METERING Vab: 0 Vbc: 0Vca: 0 V RMS φ-φ

Range: 0 to 65535 V in steps of 1Only shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed

AVERAGE LINEVOLTAGE: 0 V

Range: 0 to 65535 V in steps of 1Only shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed

Va: 0 Vb: 0Vc: 0 V RMS φ-N

Range: 0 to 65535 V in steps of 1Only shown if a Wye connection programmed

AVERAGE PHASEVOLTAGE: 0 V

Range: 0 to 65535 V in steps of 1Only shown if a Wye connection programmed

SYSTEM FREQUENCY:0.00 Hz

Range: 0.00, 15.00 to 120.00 Hz in steps of 0.01


6.3 A2 METERING DATA 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

6.3.3 POWER METERING

PATH: A2 METERING DATA POWER METERING

These actual values are only shown if the VT CONNECTION TYPE setpoint has been programmed (i.e., is not set to “None”).The values for three phase power metering, consumption and generation are displayed here. The energy values displayedhere will be in units of MWh/Mvarh or kWh/kvarh, depending on the S1 369 SETUP DISPLAY PREFERENCES ENERGYUNIT DISPLAY setpoint. The energy registers will roll over to zero and continue accumulating once their respective maxi-mums have been reached. The MWh/Mvarh registers will continue accumulating after their corresponding kWh/kvarh regis-ters have rolled over.

These displays are only visible if option M or B has been installed.

6.3.4 BACKSPIN METERING

PATH: A2 METERING DATA BACKSPIN METERING

Backspin metering parameters are displayed here. These values are shown if option B has been installed and the ENABLEBACKSPIN START INHIBIT setting is “Yes”.

POWER METERING POWER FACTOR:1.00

Range: 0.00 to 1.00 lag or lead

REAL POWER:0 kW

Range: –32000 to 32000 kW in steps of 1

REAL POWER:0 hp

Range: 0 to 42912 hp in steps of 1

REACTIVE POWER:0 kvar

Range: –32000 to 32000 kvar in steps of 1

APPARENT POWER:0 kVA

Range: 0 to 65000 kVA in steps of 1

POSITIVE WATTHOURS:0 MWh

Range: 0 to 65535 MWh or 0 to 999 kWh in steps of 1

POSITIVE VARHOURS:0 Mvarh

Range: 0 to 65535 Mvarh or 0 to 999 kvarh in steps of 1

NEGATIVE VARHOURS:0 Mvarh

Range: 0 to 65535 Mvarh or 0 to 999 kvarh in steps of 1

BACKSPIN METERING BACKSPIN FREQUENCY:Low Signal

Range: Low Signal, 1 to 120 Hz in steps of 0.01Only shown if option B installed and enabled.

BACKSPIN DETECTIONSTATE: No_BSD_Running

Range: Motor Running, No Backspin, Slowdown,Acceleration, Backspinning, Prediction, Soon toRestart. Seen only if Backspin Start Inhibit isenabled

BACKSPIN PREDICTIONTIMER:30 s

Range: 0 to 50000 s in steps of 1.Shown only if Backspin Start Inhibit is enabledand predication timer is enabled.



6

6.3.5 LOCAL RTD

PATH: A2 METERING DATA LOCAL RTD

The temperature level of all 12 internal RTDs are displayed here if the 369 has option R enabled. The programmed name ofeach RTD (if changed from the default) appears as the first line of each message. These displays are only visible if optionR has been installed.

6.3.6 REMOTE RTD

PATH: A2 METERING DATA REMOTE RTD REMOTE RTD MODULE 1(4)

The temperature level of all 12 remote RTDs will be displayed here if programmed and connected to a RRTD module. Thename of each RRTD (if changed from the default) will appear as the first line of each message. These displays are only vis-ible if option R has been installed.

If communications with the RRTD module is lost, the RRTD MODULE COMMUNICATIONS LOST message will be displayed.

6.3.7 OVERALL STATOR RTD

PATH: A2 METERING DATA OVERALL STATOR RTD

LOCAL RTD HOTTEST STATOR RTDNUMBER: 1

Range: None, 1 to 12 in steps of 1

HOTTEST STATOR RTDTEMPERATURE: 40°C

Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°FNo RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD

RTD #1TEMPERATURE: 40°C






REMOTE RTD MODULE 1 MOD 1 HOTTEST STATORNUMBER: 0

Range: None, 1 to 12 in steps of 1

MOD 1 HOTTEST STATORTEMPERATURE: 40°C


RRTD 1 RTD #1TEMPERATURE: 40°C






OVERALL STATOR RTD HOTTEST OVERALLSTATOR TEMP: 70°C


HOTTEST STATOR RTD:Local 369 RTD#: 4

Range: No RTD, Local 369, RRTD#1 to RRTD#4 (forRTD Name), 1 to 12 in steps of 1 (for RTD #)


6.3 A2 METERING DATA 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

6.3.8 DEMAND METERING

PATH: A2 METERING DATA DEMAND METERING

The values for current and power demand are displayed here. Peak demand information can be cleared using theCLEAR PEAK DEMAND command located in S1 369 SETUP CLEAR/PRESET DATA. Demand is only shown for positive real(kW) and reactive (kvar) powers. Only the current demand will be visible if options M or B are not installed.

6.3.9 PHASORS

PATH: A2 METERING DATA PHASORS

All angles shown are with respect to the reference phasor. The reference phasor is based on the VT connection type. In theevent that option M has not been installed, Van for Wye is 0 V, or Vab for Delta is 0 V, Ia will be used as the reference phasor.

DEMAND METERING CURRENTDEMAND: 0 Amps


REAL POWERDEMAND: 0 kW

Range: 0 to 32000 kW in steps of 1Only shown if VT CONNECTION programmed

REACTIVE POWERDEMAND: 0 kvar

Range: 0 to 32000 kvar in steps of 1Only shown if VT CONNECTION programmed

APPARENT POWERDEMAND: 0 kVA

Range: 0 to 65000 kVA in steps of 1Only shown if VT CONNECTION programmed

PEAK CURRENTDEMAND: 0 Amps


PEAK REAL POWERDEMAND: 0 kW

Range: 0 to 32000 kW in steps of 1Only shown if VT CONNECTION programmed

PEAK REACTIVE POWERDEMAND: 0 kvar

Range: 0 to 32000 kvar in steps of 1Only shown if VT CONNECTION programmed

PEAK APPARENT POWERDEMAND: 0 kVA

Range: 0 to 65000 kVA in steps of 1Only shown if VT CONNECTION programmed

PHASORS Ia PHASOR:0 Degrees Lag

Range: 0 to 359 degrees in steps of 1

Ib PHASOR:0 Degrees Lag


Ic PHASOR:0 Degrees Lag


Va PHASOR:0 Degrees Lag

Range: 0 to 359 degrees in steps of 1Only shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed

Vb PHASOR:0 Degrees Lag


Vc PHASOR:0 Degrees Lag


Reference Phasor VT Connection TypeIa None

Van Wye

Vab Delta



6

Note that the phasor display is not intended to be used as a protective metering element. Its prime purpose is to diagnoseerrors in wiring connections.

To aid in wiring, the following tables can be used to determine if VTs and CTs are on the correct phase and their polarity iscorrect. Problems arising from incorrect wiring are extremely high unbalance levels (CTs), erroneous power readings (CTsand VTs), or phase reversal trips (VTs). To correct wiring, simply start the motor and record the phasors. Using the followingtables along with the recorded phasors, system rotation, VT connection type, and motor power factor, the correct phasorscan be determined. Note that Va (Vab if delta) is always assumed to be 0° and is the reference for all angle measurements.

Common problems include: Phase currents 180° from proper location (CT polarity reversed)Phase currents or voltages 120° or 240° out (CT/VT on wrong phase)

Table 6–1: THREE PHASE WYE VT CONNECTIONABC

ROTATION72.5°

= 0.3 PF LAG45°

= 0.7 PF LAG0°

= 1.00 PF–45°

= 0.7 PF LEAD–72.5°

= 0.2 PF LEADVa 0 0° lag 0° lag 0° lag 0Vb 120 120 120 120 120Vc 240 240 240 240 240Ia 75 45 0 315 285Ib 195 165 120 75 45Ic 315 285 240 195 165

kW + + + + +kvar + + 0 – –kVA + + + (= kW) + +

ACBROTATION

72.5°= 0.3 PF LAG

45°= 0.7 PF LAG

0°= 1.00 PF

–45°= 0.7 PF LEAD

–72.5°= 0.2 PF LEAD

Va 0 0° lag 0° lag 0° lag 0Vb 240 240 240 240 240Vc 120 120 120 120 120Ia 75 45 0 315 285Ib 315 285 240 195 165Ic 195 165 120 75 45

kW + + + + +kvar + + 0 – –kVA + + + (= kW) + +

Table 6–2: THREE PHASE OPEN DELTA VT CONNECTIONABC

ROTATION72.5°

= 0.3 PF LAG45°

= 0.7 PF LAG0°

= 1.00 PF–45°

= 0.7 PF LEAD–72.5°

= 0.3 PF LEADVa 0 0° 0° 0° 0Vb ---- ---- ---- ---- ----Vc 300 300 300 300 300Ia 100 75 30 345 320Ib 220 195 150 105 80Ic 340 315 270 225 200

kW + + + + +kvar + + 0 – –kVA + + + (= kW) + +

ACBROTATION

72.5°= 0.3 PF LAG

45°= 0.7 PF LAG

0°= 1.00 PF

–45°= 0.7 PF LEAD

–72.5°= 0.3 PF LEAD

Va 0 0° 0° 0° 0Vb ---- ---- ---- ---- ----Vc 60 60 60 60 60Ia 45 15 330 285 260Ib 285 255 210 165 140Ic 165 135 90 45 20

kW + + + + +kvar + + 0 – –kVA + + + (= kW) + +


6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

6.4A3 LEARNED DATA 6.4.1 DESCRIPTION

This page contains the data the 369 learns to adapt itself to the motor protected.

6.4.2 MOTOR DATA

PATH: A3 LEARNED DATA MOTOR DATA

The learned values for acceleration time and starting current are the average of the individual values acquired for the lastfive successful starts. The value for starting current is used when learned k factor is enabled.

The learned value for starting capacity is the amount of thermal capacity required for a start determined by the 369 from thelast five successful motor starts. The last five learned start capacities are averaged and a 25% safety margin factored in.This guarantees enough thermal capacity available to start the motor. The Start Inhibit feature, when enabled, uses thisvalue in determining lockout time.

The learned cool time constants and unbalance k factor are displayed here. The learned value is the average of the last fivemeasured constants. These learned cool time constants are used only when the ENABLE LEARNED COOL TIMES thermalmodel setpoint is "Yes". The learned unbalance k factor is the average of the last five calculated k factors. The learned kfactor is only used when unbalance biasing of thermal capacity is set on and to learned.

Note that learned values are calculated even when features requiring them are turned off. The learned features should notbe used until at least five successful motor starts and stops have occurred.

Starting capacity, starting current, and acceleration time values are displayed for the last start. The average motor loadwhile running is also displayed here. The motor load is averaged over a 15 minute sliding window.

Clearing motor data (see Section 5.2.9: Clear/Preset Data on page 5–9) resets these values to their default settings.

MOTOR DATA LEARNED ACCELERATIONTIME: 0.0 s


LEARNED STARTINGCURRENT: 0 A


LEARNED STARTINGCAPACITY: 85%


LEARNED RUNNING COOLTIME CONST.: 0 min


LEARNED STOPPED COOLTIME CONST.: 0 min


LAST STARTINGCURRENT: 0 A


LAST STARTINGCAPACITY: 85%

Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1%

LAST ACCELERATIONTIME: 0.0 s


AVERAGE MOTOR LOADLEARNED: 0.00 X FLA


LEARNED UNBALANCE kFACTOR: 0



6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA

6

6.4.3 LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS

PATH: A3 LEARNED DATA LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS

The maximum temperature level of all 12 internal RTDs will be displayed here if the 369 has option R enabled. The pro-grammed name of each RTD (if changed from the default) will appear as the first line of each message.

These displays are only visible if option R has been installed and RTDs have been programmed.

6.4.4 REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS

PATH: A3 LEARNED DATA REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS RRTD #1(4)

The maximum temperature level of the 12 remote RTDs for each RRTD will be displayed here if the 369 has been pro-grammed and connected to a RRTD module. The programmed name of each RTD (if changed from the default) will appearas the first line of each message. If an RRTD module is connected and no RRTDs are programmed, the display reads NORRTDS PROGRAMMED when an attempt is made to enter this actual values page.

LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS RTD #1 MAXIMUMTEMPERATURE: 40°C


RTD #2 MAXIMUMTEMPERATURE: 40°C






RRTD #1 RTD #1 MAXIMUMTEMPERATURE: 40°C









6.5 A4 STATISTICAL DATA 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

6.5A4 STATISTICAL DATA 6.5.1 TRIP COUNTERS

PATH: A4 STATISTICAL DATA TRIP COUNTERS

TRIP COUNTERS TOTAL NUMBER OFTRIPS: 0


INCOMPLETE SEQUENCETRIPS: 0


SWITCHTRIPS: 0


OVERLOADTRIPS: 0


SHORT CIRCUITTRIPS: 0


MECHANICAL JAMTRIPS: 0


UNDERCURRENTTRIPS: 0


CURRENT UNBALANCETRIPS: 0


SINGLE PHASETRIPS: 0


GROUND FAULTTRIPS: 0


ACCELERATIONTRIPS: 0


STATOR RTDTRIPS: 0


BEARING RTDTRIPS: 0


OTHER RTDTRIPS: 0


AMBIENT RTDTRIPS: 0


UNDERVOLTAGETRIPS: 0


OVERVOLTAGETRIPS: 0


PHASE REVERSALTRIPS: 0


UNDERFREQUENCYTRIPS: 0


OVERFREQUENCYTRIPS: 0



6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.5 A4 STATISTICAL DATA

6

The number of trips by type is displayed here. When the total reaches 50000, the counter resets to 0 on the next trip andcontinues counting. This information can be cleared with the setpoints in the CLEAR/PRESET DATA section of setpointspage one. The date the counters are cleared will be recorded.

6.5.2 MOTOR STATISTICS

PATH: A4 STATISTICAL DATA MOTOR STATISTICS

These values display the number of motor starts and emergency restarts. This information is useful for troubleshooting amotor failure or in understanding the history and use of a motor for maintenance purposes. When any of these countersreaches 50000, they are automatically reset to 0.

The MOTOR RUNNING HOURS indicates the elapsed time since the 369 determined the motor to be in a running state (cur-rent applied and/or starter status indicating contactor/breaker closed). The NUMBER OF MOTOR STARTS, NUMBER OFEMERGENCY RESTARTS, and MOTOR RUNNING HOURS counters can be cleared with the S1 369 SETUP CLEAR/PRESETDATA CLEAR MOTOR DATA setpoint.

The digital counter will be displayed when one of the digital inputs has been set up as a digital counter. The digital countercan be cleared with the S1 369 SETUP CLEAR/PRESET DATA PRESET DIGITAL COUNTER setpoint. When the digitalcounter has exceeded 65535, it will automatically be reset by the 369 relay to 0.

LEAD POWER FACTORTRIPS: 0


LAG POWER FACTORTRIPS: 0


POSITIVE REACTIVETRIPS: 0


NEGATIVE REACTIVETRIPS: 0


UNDERPOWERTRIPS: 0


REVERSE POWERTRIPS: 0


TRIP COUNTERS LASTCLEARED: 09/01/2005


MOTOR STATISTICS NUMBER OF MOTORSTARTS: 0


NUMBER OF EMERGENCYRESTARTS: 0


MOTOR RUNNING HOURS:0 hrs


AUTORESTART STARTATTEMPTS: 0


TIME TO AUTORESTART:0


COUNTER:0 Units

Range: 0 to 65535 Units in steps of 1Shown if Counter set to a digital input


6.6 A5 EVENT RECORD 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6

6.6A5 EVENT RECORD 6.6.1 EVENT RECORDS

PATH: A5 EVENT RECORD EVENT 01

A breakdown of the last 250 events is available here along with the cause of the event and the date and time. All trips auto-matically trigger an event. Alarms only trigger an event if turned on for that alarm. Loss or application of control power, ser-vice alarm and emergency restart opening and closing also triggers an event. After 250 events have been recorded, theoldest one is removed when a new one is added. The event record may be cleared in the setpoints page 1, clear/presetdata, clear event record section.

EVENT 01 TIME OF EVENT 0100:00:00:00

Time: hours / minutes / seconds / hundreds of seconds

DATE OF EVENT 01Sep. 01, 2005

Date: month / day / year

A: 0 B: 0C: 0 A E: 01


MOTOR LOAD0.00 X FLA E: 01


CURRENT UNBALANCE:0% E: 01


GROUND CURRENT:0.0 Amps E: 01

Range: 0.0 to 5000.0 A steps of 0.1 (1A/5A CT)0.00 to 25.00 A steps of 0.01 (50: 0.025 A CT)

HOTTEST STATORRTD 1: 0°C E: 01

Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F,No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD

Vab: 0 Vbc: 0Vca: 0 V E: 01

Range: 0 to 20000 V in steps of 1Only shown if VT CONNECTION is "Delta"

Van: 0 Vbn: 0Vcn: 0 V E: 01

Range: 0 to 20000 V in steps of 1Only shown if VT CONNECTION is "Wye"

SYSTEM FREQUENCY:0.00 Hz E: 01

Range: 0.00, 15.00 to 120 Hz in steps of 1Only shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed

0 kW 0 kVA0 kvar E: 01

Range: –50000 to +50000 in steps of 1Only shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed

POWER FACTOR:1.00 E: 01

Range: 0.00 lag to 1 to 0.00 leadOnly shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed


6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.7 A6 RELAY INFORMATION

6

6.7A6 RELAY INFORMATION 6.7.1 MODEL INFORMATION

PATH: A6 RELAY INFORMATION MODEL INFORMATION

The relay model and manufacturing information may be viewed here. The last calibration date is the date the relay was lastcalibrated at GE Multilin.

6.7.2 FIRMWARE VERSION

PATH: A6 RELAY INFORMATION FIRMWARE VERSION

This information reflects the revisions of the software currently running in the 369. This information should be noted andrecorded before calling for technical support or service.

MODEL INFORMATION SERIAL NUMBER:MXXXXXXXX

Range: See Autolabel for details

INSTALLED OPTIONS:369-HI-R-M-0-0-0

Range: 369 HI/LO, R/0, M/B/0, F/0, P/P1/E/D/0, H/0

MANUFACTUREDATE: Sep. 01 2005

Range: month/day/year

LAST CALIBRATIONDATE: Sep. 01 2005

Range: month/day/year

FIRMWARE VERSION FIRMWARE REVISION:250

BUILD DATE & TIME:Apr 12, 2006 13:55:42

BOOT REVISION:100

ANYBUS CARD SOFTWAREREVISION: 112

Note: Only shown with the Profibus (P or P1), Modbus/TCP (E), and DeviceNet (D) options.


6.7 A6 RELAY INFORMATION 6 ACTUAL VALUES

6


7 APPLICATIONS 7.1 269-369 COMPARISON

7

7 APPLICATIONS 7.1269-369 COMPARISON 7.1.1 369 AND 269PLUS COMPARISON

Table 7–1: COMPARISON BETWEEN 369 AND 269PLUS369 269PlusAll options can be turned on or added in the field Must be returned for option change or add other devices Current and optional voltage inputs are included on all relays Current inputs only. Must use additional meter device to obtain

voltage and power measurements. Optional 12 RTDs with an additional 12 RTDs available with the RRTD. All RTDs are individually configured(100P, 100N, 120N, 10C)

10 RTDs not programmable, must be specified at time of order.

Fully programmable digital inputs No programmable digital inputs4 programmable analog outputs assignable to 33 parameters 1 Analog output programmable for 5 parameters1 RS232 (19.2K baud), 3 RS485 (1200 TO 19.2K baud programmable) communication ports. Also Optional profibus port and optional fiber optics port

1 RS485 Communication port (2400 baud maximum)

Flash memory firmware upgrade thru PC software and comm port EPROM must be replaced to change firmwareEVENT RECORDER: time and date stamp last 250 events. Records all trips and selectable alarms

Displays cause of last trip and last event

OSCILLOGRAPHY: up to 64 cycles at 16 samples/cycle for last event(s)

N/A

Programmable text message(s) N/ABackspin frequency detection and backspin timer Backspin timerStarter failure indication N/AMeasures up to 20 x CT at 16 samples/cycle Measures up to 12 x CT at 12 samples/cycle15 standard overload curves 8 standard overload curvesRemote display is standard Remote display with mod


7.2 369 FAQS 7 APPLICATIONS

7

7.2369 FAQS 7.2.1 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQS)

1. What is the difference between Firmware and Software?

Firmware is the program running inside the relay, which is responsible for all relay protection and control elements.Software is the program running on the PC, which is used to communicate with the relay and provide relay controlremotely in a user friendly format.

2. How can I obtain copies of the latest manual and PC software?

I need it now!: via the GE Multilin website at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin

I guess I can wait: fax a request to the GE Multilin Literature department at (905) 201-2113

3. Cannot communicate through the front port (RS232).

Check the following settings:

• Communication Port (COM1, COM2, COM3 etc.) on PC or PLC

• Parity settings must match between the relay and the master (PC or PLC)

• Baud rate setting on the master (PC or PLC) must match RS232 baud rate on the 369 relay.

• Cable has to be a straight through cable, do not use null modem cables where pin 2 and 3 are transposed

• Check the pin outs of RS232 cable (TX - pin 2, RX - pin 3, GND - pin 5)

4. Cannot communicate with RS485.

Check the following settings:

• Communication Port (COM1, COM2, COM3 etc.) on PC or PLC

• Parity settings must match between the relay and the master (PC or PLC)

• Baud rate must match between the relay and the master

• Slave address polled must match between the relay and the master

• Is terminating filter circuit present?

• Are you communicating in half duplex? (369 communicates in half duplex mode only)

• Is wiring correct? (“+” wire should go to “+” terminal of the relay, and “–” goes to “–” terminal)

• Is the RS485 cable shield grounded? (shielding diminishes noise from external EM radiation)

Check the appropriate communication port LED on the relay. The LED should be solidly lit when communicating prop-erly. The LED will blink on and off when the relay has communication difficulties and the LED will be off if no activitydetected on communication lines.

5. Can the 4 wire RS485 (full duplex) be used with 369?

No, the 369 communicates in 2-wire half duplex mode only. However, there are commercial RS485 converters that willconvert a 4 wire to a 2 wire system.

6. Cannot store setpoint into the relay.

Check and ensure the ACCESS switch is shorted, and check for any PASSCODE restrictions.

7. The 369 relay displays incorrect power reading, yet the power system is balanced. What could be the possiblereasons?

It is highly possible that the secondary wiring to the relay is not correct. Incorrect power can be read when any of the A,B, or C phases are swapped, a CT or VT is wired backwards, or the relay is programmed as ABC sequence when thepower system is actually ACB and vice versa. The easiest way to verify is to check the voltage and the current phasorreadings on the 369 relay and ensure that each respective voltage and current angles match.

8. What are the merits of a residual ground fault connection versus a core balance connection?

The use of a zero sequence (core balance) CT to detect ground current is recommended over the G/F residual con-nection. This is especially true at motor starting. During across-the-line starting of large motors, care must be taken toprevent the high inrush current from operating the ground element of the 369. This is especially true when using theresidual connection of 2 or 3 CTs.


7 APPLICATIONS 7.2 369 FAQS

7

In a residual connection, the unequal saturation of the current transformers, size and location of motor, size of powersystem, resistance in the power system from the source to the motor, type of iron used in the motor core & saturationdensity, and residual flux levels may all contribute to the production of a false residual current in the secondary or relaycircuit. The common practice in medium and high voltage systems is to use low resistance grounding. By using the“doughnut CT” scheme, such systems offer the advantages of speed and reliability without much concern for startingcurrent, fault contribution by the motor, or false residual current.

When a zero sequence CT is used, a voltage is generated in the secondary winding only when zero sequence currentis flowing in the primary leads. Since virtually all motors have their neutrals ungrounded, no zero sequence current canflow in the motor leads unless there is a ground fault on the motor side.

9. Can I send a 269 setpoint file to a 369 relay?

Yes. Using the 369PC software, a 269 setpoint file can be sent to the 369. Note that any settings/features not in the269 setpoint file are set to default values on the 369. All setpoints should be confirmed before operating the relay.

10. Can I use an 86 lockout on the 369?

Yes, but if an external 86 lockout device is used and connected to the 369, ensure the 369 is reset prior to attemptingto reset the lockout switch. If the 369 is still tripped, it will immediately re-trip the lockout switch. Also, if the lockoutswitch is held reset, the high current draw of the switch coil may cause damage to itself and/or the 369 output relay.

11. Can I assign more than one output relay to be blocked when using Start Inhibits?

Yes, but keep in mind that if two output relays are wired in series to inhibit a start it is possible that another elementcould be programmed to control one or both of the relays. If this is happening and the other element is programmedwith a longer delay time, this will make it seem as if the Start Inhibit is not working properly when in fact, it is.

12. Can I name a digital input?

Yes. By configuring the digital input as "General" a menu will appear that will allow naming.

13. Can I apply an external voltage to the digital inputs on the 369?

No. The 369 uses an internal voltage to operate the digital inputs. Applying an external voltage may cause damage tothe internal circuitry.

14. No display, no characters on the display but there is a backlight.

Check the contrast using the help button. Press and hold the help button for 2 seconds. When all the LED’s are illumi-nated press the value up key to darken the contrast or value down key to lighten the contrast. When the desired con-trast is selected press the enter key to accept the change.

15. Can I upload setpoint files from previous versions to the latest version of firmware?

Yes, with the exception of setpoint files from versions 1.10 and 1.12. Unfortunately these setpoint files must be rewrit-ten, as they are not compatible.

16. What method does the 369 use to calculate current unbalance?

The 369 uses the NEMA method. Previous revisions of the 369 manual have incorrectly included a functional test thatmeasured the ratio of negative sequence current to positive sequence current. The NEMA method is as follows:

If Iavg ≥ IFLA, then

where: Iavg = average phase currentImax = current in a phase with maximum derivation from IavgIFLA = motor full load amps setting

If Iavg < IFLA, then

To prevent nuisance trips/alarms on lightly loaded motors when a much larger unbalance level will not damage therotor, the unbalance protection will automatically be defeated if the average motor current is less than 30% of the fullload current (IFLA) setting.

17. I need to update the options for my 369/RRTD in the field, can I do this?

Yes. All options of the 369/RRTD can be turned on or added in the field. To do this contact the factory.

UnbalanceImax Iavg–

Iavg-------------------------- 100×=

UnbalanceImax Iavg–

IFLA-------------------------- 100×=


7.2 369 FAQS 7 APPLICATIONS

7

18. Can I test my output relays?

Yes, but keep in mind that the output relays cannot be forced into a different state while the motor is running.

19. Is the communication interface for Profibus RS232 or RS485?

It is RS485. The 9-pin connector on the rear of the 369 is the connector used by the manufacturer of the Profibus cardand although it is a DB-9, the electrical interface is RS485.

20. Can I use the options enabler code to upgrade my 369 in the field to get the Profibus option?

Yes, but keep in mind that there is a Profibus card that is required and is not installed in units that were not orderedfrom the factory with the Profibus option.

21. Can the 369 be used as a remote unit, similar to the 269 remote?

Yes. Every 369 can be used as remote. When ordering the 369, an external 15 foot cable must be ordered.

22. Can the RRTD module be used as a standalone unit?

Yes. The RRTD unit with the IO option, has 4 output relays, 6 digital inputs and 4 analog outputs. With this option theRRTD can provide temperature protection.

23. Why is there a filter ground and a safety ground connection? Why are they separate?

The safety ground ensures operator safety with regards to hazardous shocks; the filter ground protects the internalelectronic circuitry from transient noise.

These two grounds are separated for hi-pot (dielectric strength) testing purposes. Both grounds should be tied to theground bus external to the relay.


7 APPLICATIONS 7.3 369 DOS AND DONT’S

7

7.3369 DOS AND DONT’S 7.3.1 DOS AND DONT’S

a) DOS

Always check the power supply rating before applying power to the relay

Applying voltage greater than the maximum rating to the power supply (e.g. 120 V AC to the low-voltage rated powersupply) could result in component damage to the relay's power supply. This will result in the unit no longer being ableto power up.

Ensure that the 369 nominal phase current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary rating and the connections of theconnected CTs

Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or inadequate protection.

Ensure that the source CT and VT polarity match the relay CT and VT polarity

Polarity of the Phase CTs is critical for power measurement, and residual ground current detection (if used). Polarity ofthe VTs is critical for correct power measurement and voltage phase reversal operation.

Properly ground the 369

Connect both the Filter Ground (terminal 123) and Safety Ground (terminal 126) of the 369 directly to the mainGROUND BUS. The benefits of proper grounding of the 369 are numerous, e.g,

• Elimination of nuisance tripping

• Elimination of internal hardware failures

• Reliable operation of the relay

• Higher MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures)

• It is recommended that a tinned copper braided shielding and bonding cable be used. A Belden 8660 cable orequivalent should be used as a minimum to connect the relay directly to the ground bus.

Grounding of Phase and Ground CTs

All Phase and Ground CTs must be grounded. The potential difference between the CT's ground and the ground busshould be minimal (ideally zero).

It is highly recommended that the two CT leads be twisted together to minimize noise pickup, especially when thehighly sensitive 50:0.025 Ground CT sensor is used.

RTDs

Consult the application notes of the 369 Instruction Manual for the full description of the 369 RTD circuitry and the dif-ferent RTD wiring schemes acceptable for proper operation. However, for best results the following recommendationsshould be adhered to:

a) Use a 3 wire twisted, shielded cable to connect the RTDs from the motor to the 369. The shields should be con-nected to the proper terminals on the back of the 369.

b) RTD shields are internally connected to the 369 ground (terminal #126) and must not be grounded anywhere else.c) RTD signals can be characterized as very small, sensitive signals. Therefore, cables carrying RTD signals should

be routed as far away as possible from power carrying cables such as power supply and CT cables.d) If after wiring the RTD leads to the 369, the RTD temperature displayed by the Relay is zero, then check for the

following conditions:1. Shorted RTD2. RTD hot and compensation leads are reversed, i.e. hot lead in compensation terminal and compensation lead

in hot terminal.

RS485 Communications Port

The 369 can provide direct or remote communications (via a modem). An RS232 to RS485 converter is used to tie it toa PC/PLC or DCS system. The 369 uses the Modicon MODBUS® RTU protocol (functions 03, 04, and 16) to interfacewith PCs, PLCs, and DCS systems.


7.3 369 DOS AND DONT’S 7 APPLICATIONS

7

RS485 communications was chosen to be used with the 369 because it allows communications over long distances ofup to 4000 ft. However, care must be taken for it to operate properly and trouble free. The recommendations listedbelow must be followed to obtain reliable communications:

a) A twisted, shielded pair (preferably a 24 gauge Belden 9841 type or 120 equivalent) must be used and routedaway from power carrying cables, such as power supply and CT cables.

b) No more than 32 devices can co-exist on the same link. If however, more than 32 devices should be daisy chainedtogether, a REPEATER must be used. Note that a repeater is just another RS232 to RS485 converter device. Theshields of all 369 units should also be daisy chained together and grounded at the MASTER (PC/PLC) only. Thisis due to the fact that if shields are grounded at different points, a potential difference between grounds might existresulting in placing one or more of the transceiver chips (chip used for communications) in an unknown state, i.e.not receiving nor sending. The corresponding 369 communications might be erroneous, intermittent or unsuccess-ful.

c) Two sets of 120 ohm/ 0.5 W resistor and 1 nF / 50 V capacitor in series must be used (value matches the charac-teristic impedance of the line). One set at the 369 end, connected between the positive and negative terminals(#46 & #47 on 369) and the second at the other end of the communications link. This is to prevent reflections andringing on the line. If a different value resistor is used, it runs the risk of over loading the line and communicationsmight be erroneous, intermittent or totally unsuccessful.

d) It is highly recommended that connection from the 369 communication terminals be made directly to the interfac-ing Master Device (PC/PLC/DCS), without the use of stub lengths and/or terminal blocks. This is also to minimizeringing and reflections on the line.

b) DON'TS

Don’t apply direct voltage to the Digital Inputs.

There are 6 switch inputs (Spare Input; Differential Input; Speed Switch; Access; Emergency Restart; External Reset)that are designed for dry contact connections only. Applying direct voltage to the inputs, it may result in componentdamage to the digital input circuitry.

Grounding of the RTDs should not be done in two places.

When grounding at the 369, only one Return lead need be grounded as all are hard-wired together internally. No errorwill be introduced into the RTD reading by grounding in this manner.

Running more than one RTD Return lead back will cause significant errors as two or more parallel paths for returnhave been created.

Don’t reset an 86 Lockout switch before resetting the 369.

If an external 86 lockout device is used and connected to the 369, ensure that the 369 is reset prior to attempting toreset the lockout switch. If the 369 is still tripped, it will immediately re-trip the lockout switch. Also if the lockout switchis held reset, the high current draw of the lockout switch coil may cause damage to itself and/or the 369 output relay.


7 APPLICATIONS 7.4 CT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION

7

7.4CT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION 7.4.1 CT SPECIFICATION

a) 369 CT WITHSTAND

Withstand is important when the phase or ground CT has the capability of driving a large amount of current into the inter-posing CTs in the relay. This typically occurs on retrofit installations when the CTs are not sized to the burden of the relay.Electronic relays typically have low burdens (mΩ), while the older electromechanical relays have typically high burdens(1 Ω).

For high current ground faults, the system will be either low resistance or solidly grounded. The limiting factor that deter-mines the ground fault current that can flow in these types of systems is the source capacity. Withstand is not important forground fault on high resistance grounded systems. On these systems, a resistor makes the connection from source toground at the source (generator, transformer). The resistor value is chosen so that in the event of a ground fault, the currentthat flows is limited to a low value, typically 5, 10, or 20 A.

Since the potential for very large faults exists (ground faults on high resistance grounded systems excluded), the fault mustbe cleared as quickly as possible. It is therefore recommended that the time delay for short circuit and high ground faults beset to instantaneous. Then the duration for which the 369 CTs subjected to high withstand will be less than 250 ms (369reaction time is less than 50ms + breaker clearing time).

Care must be taken to ensure that the interrupting device is capable of interrupting the potential fault. Ifnot, some other method of interrupting the fault should be used, and the feature in question should be dis-abled (e.g. a fused contactor relies on fuses to interrupt large faults).

The 369 CTs were subjected to high currents for 1 second bursts. The CTs were capable of handling 500 A (500 A relatesto a 100 times the CT primary rating). If the time duration required is less than 1 second, the withstand level will increase.

b) CT SIZE AND SATURATION

The rating (as per ANSI/IEEE C57.13.1) for relaying class CTs may be given in a format such as: 2.5C100, 10T200, T1OO,10C50, or C200. The number preceding the letter represents the maximum ratio correction; no number in this positionimplies that the CT accuracy remains within a 10% ratio correction from 0 to 20 times rating.

The letter is an indication of the CT type:

• A 'C' (formerly L) represents a CT with a low leakage flux in the core where there is no appreciable effect on the ratiowhen used within the limits dictated by the class and rating. The 'C' stands for calculated; the actual ratio correctionshould be different from the calculated ratio correction by no more than 1%. A 'C' type CT is typically a bushing, win-dow, or bar type CT with uniformly distributed windings.

• A 'T' (formerly H) represents a CT with a high leakage flux in the core where there is significant effect on CT perfor-mance. The 'T' stands for test; since the ratio correction is unpredictable, it is to be determined by test. A 'T' type CT istypically primary wound with unevenly distributed windings. The subsequent number specifies the secondary termi-nal voltage that may be delivered by the full winding at 20 times rated secondary current without exceeding the ratiocorrection specified by the first number of the rating. (Example: a 10C100 can develop 100 V at 20 × 5 A, therefore anappropriate external burden would be 1 Ω or less to allow 20 times rated secondary current with less than 10% ratiocorrection.) Note that the voltage rating is at the secondary terminals of the CT and the internal voltage drop across thesecondary resistance must be accounted for in the design of the CT. There are seven voltage ratings: 10, 20, 50, 100,200, 400, and 800. If a CT comes close to a higher rating, but does not meet or exceed it, then the CT must be rated tothe lower value.

In order to determine how much current CTs can output, the secondary resistance of the CT is required. This resistance willbe part of the equation as far as limiting the current flow. This is determined by the maximum voltage that may be devel-oped by the CT secondary divided by the entire secondary resistance, CT secondary resistance included.

7.4.2 CT SELECTION

The 369 phase CT should be chosen such that the FLA (FLC) of the motor falls within 50 to 100% of the CT primary rating.For example, if the FLA of the motor is 173 A, a primary CT rating of 200, 250, or 300 can be chosen (200 being the betterchoice). This provides maximum protection of the motor.

The CT selected must then be checked to ensure that it can drive the attached burden (relay and wiring and any auxiliarydevices) at maximum fault current levels without saturating. There are essentially two ways of determining if the CT is beingdriven into saturation:

NOTE


7.4 CT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION 7 APPLICATIONS

7

1. Use CT secondary resistance.

Burden = CT secondary resistance + Wire resistance + Relay burden resistance

CT secondary voltage =

Example:

Maximum fault level = 6 kA369 burden = 0.003 ΩCT = 300:5CT secondary resistance = 0.088 ΩWire length (1 lead) = 50 mWire Size = 4.00 mm2

Ohms/km = 4.73 Ω

∴ Burden = 0.088 + (2 × 50)(4.73 / 1000) + 0.003 = 0.564 Ω

∴ CT secondary voltage = 0.564 × (6000 / (300 / 5)) = 56.4 V

Using the excitation curves for the 300:5 CT we see that the knee voltage is at 70 V, therefore this CT is acceptable forthis application.

2. Use CT class.

Burden = Wire resistance + Relay burden resistance

CT secondary voltage =

Example:

Maximum fault level = 6 kA, 369 burden = 0.003 Ω, CT = 300:5, CT class = C20,Wire length (1 lead) = 50 m, Wire Size = 4.00 mm2, Ohms/km = 4.73 Ω

∴ Burden = (2 × 50) × (4.73/1000) + 0.003 = 0.476 Ω

∴ CT secondary voltage = 0.476 × (6000 / (300 / 5)) = 47.6 V

From the CT class (C20): The amount of secondary voltage the CT can deliver to the load burden at 20 × CT withoutexceeding the 10% ratio error is 20 V. This application calls for 6000/300 = 20 × CT (Fault current / CT primary). Thusthe 10% ratio error may be exceeded.

The number in the CT class code refers to the guaranteed secondary voltage of the CT. Therefore, the maximum cur-rent that the CT can deliver can be calculated as follows:

maximum secondary current = CT class / Burden = 20 / 0.476 = 42.02 A

Figure 7–1: EQUIVALENT CT CIRCUIT

BurdenIfault maximum

CT ratio-----------------------------------×

BurdenIfault maximum

CT ratio-----------------------------------×

CT secondary resistance

Wireresistance

Wireresistance

Relayburden resistance

{ CT class voltage


7 APPLICATIONS 7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE

7

7.5PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE 7.5.1 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE

Information provided by a motor manufacturer can vary from nameplate information to a vast amount of data related toevery parameter of the motor. The table below shows selected information from a typical motor data sheet and Figure 7–2:Motor Thermal Limits shows the related motor thermal limit curves. This information is required to set the 369 for a properprotection scheme.

The following is a example of how to determine the 369 setpoints. It is only a example and the setpoints should bedetermined based on the application and specific design of the motor.

Figure 7–2: MOTOR THERMAL LIMITS

Table 7–2: SELECTED INFORMATION FROM A TYPICAL MOTOR DATA SHEETDriven equipment Reciprocating CompressorAmbient Temperature min. –20°C; max. 41°CType or Motor SynchronousVoltage 6000 VNameplate power 2300 kWService Factor 1Insulation class FTemperature rise stator / rotor 79 / 79 KMax. locked rotor current 550% FLCLocked rotor current% FLC 500% at 100% Voltage / 425% at 85% VoltageStarting time 4 seconds at 100% Voltage / 6.5 seconds at 85% VoltageMax. permissible starts cold / hot 3 / 2Rated Load Current 229A at 100% Load

1

10

100

1000

9876543210 10

CURRENT P.U.

TIM

E(S

)

840736A2.CDR

1

2

3

4

369 OVERLOADCURVE #4

Current vs. Time Diagram1) at V=100% rated voltage2) at V=85% rated voltage

Thermal Limit3) from hot condition4) from cold condition


7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE 7 APPLICATIONS

7

Phase CT

The phase CT should be chosen such that the FLC is 50% to 100% of CT primary. Since the FLC is 229 A a 250:5, 300:5,or 400:5 CT may be chosen (a 250:5 is the better choice).

229 / 0.50 = 458 or 229 / 1.00 = 229

Motor FLC

Set the Motor Full Load Current to 229A, as per data sheets.

Ground CT

For high resistive grounded systems, sensitive ground detection is possible with the 50:0.025 CT. On solidly grounded orlow resistive grounded systems where the fault current is much higher, a 1A or 5A CT should be used. If residual groundfault connection is to be used, the ground fault CT ratio most equal the phase CT ratio. The zero sequence CT chosenneeds to be able to handle all potential fault levels without saturating.

VT Settings

The motor is going to be connected in Wye, hence, the VT connection type will be programmed as Wye. Since the motorvoltage is 6000V, the VT being used will be 6000:120. The VT ratio to be programmed into the 369 will then be 50:1 (6000/120) and the Motor Rated Voltage will be programmed to 6000V, as per the motor data sheets.

Overload Pickup

The overload pickup is set to the same as the service factor of the motor. In this case, it would be set to the lowest settingof 1.01 x FLC for the service factor of 1.

Unbalance Bias Of Thermal Capacity

Enable the Unbalance Bias of Thermal Capacity so that the heating effect of unbalance currents is added to the ThermalCapacity Used.

Unbalance Bias K Factor

The K value is used to calculate the contribution of the negative sequence current flowing in the rotor due to unbalance. Itis defined as:

, where: Rr2 = rotor negative sequence resistance, Rr1 = rotor positive sequence resistance

where: LRA = Locked Rotor Current

The above formula is based on empirical data.

The 369 has the ability to learn the K value after five successful starts. After 5 starts, turn this setpoint off so that the 369uses the learned value

Hot/Cold Curve Ratio

The hot/cold curve ratio is calculated by simply dividing the hot safe stall time by the cold safe stall time. This informationcan be extracted from the Thermal Limit curves. From Figure 7–2: Motor Thermal Limits, we can determine that the hotsafe stall time is approximately 18 seconds and the cold safe stall time is approximately 24 seconds. Therefore, the Hot/Cold curve ratio should be programmed as 0.75 (18 / 24) for this example.

Running and Stopped Cool Time Constant

The running cool time is the time required for the motor to cool while running. This information is usually supplied by themotor manufacturer but is not part of the given data. The motor manufacturer should be contacted to find out what the cooltimes are.

Rr2Rr1--------

K 175LRA

2---------- 175

5.52----------- 6@= =

NOTE


7 APPLICATIONS 7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE

7

The Thermal Capacity Used quantity decays exponentially to simulate the cooling of the motor. The rate of cooling is basedupon the running cool time constant when the motor is running, or the stopped cool time constant when the motor isstopped. The entered cool time constant is one fifth the total cool time from 100% thermal capacity used down to 0% ther-mal capacity used.

The 369 has a unique capability of learning the cool time constant. This learned parameter is only functional if the StatorRTDs are connected to the 369. The learned cool time algorithm observes the temperature of the motor as it cools, thusdetermining the length of time required for cooling. If the cool times can not be retrieved from the motor manufacturer, thenthe Learned Cool Time must be enabled (if the stator RTDs are connected).

Motors have a fanning action when running due to the rotation of the rotor. For this reason, the running cool time is typicallyhalf of the stopped cool time.

Refer to the Selection of Cool Time application note for more details on how to determine the cool time constants when notprovided with the motor.

RTD Biasing

This will enable the temperature from the Stator RTD sensors to be included in the calculations of Thermal Capacity. Thismodel determines the Thermal Capacity Used based on the temperature of the Stators and is a separate calculation fromthe overload model for calculating Thermal Capacity Used. RTD biasing is a back up protection element which accounts forsuch things as loss of cooling or unusually high ambient temperature. There are three parameters to set: RTD Bias Min,RTD Bias Mid, RTD Bias Max.

RTD Bias Minimum

Set to 40°C which is the ambient temperature (obtained from data sheets).

RTD Bias Mid Point

The center point temperature is set to the motor’s hot running temperature and is calculated as follows:

Temperature Rise of Stator + Ambient Temperature.

The temperature rise of the stator is 79°K, obtained from the data sheets. Therefore, the RTD Center point temperature isset to 120°C (79 + 40).

RTD Bias Maximum

This setpoint is set to the rating of the insulation or slightly less. A class F insulation is used in this motor which is rated at155°C.

Overload Curve

If only one thermal limit curve is provided, the chosen overload curve should fit below it. When a hot and cold thermal limitcurve is provided, the chosen overload curve should fit between the two curves and the programmed Hot/Cold ratio is usedin the Thermal Capacity algorithm to take into account the thermal state of the motor. The best fitting 369 standard curve iscurve # 4, as seen in Figure 7–2: Motor Thermal Limits on page 7–9.

Short Circuit Trip

The short circuit trip should be set above the maximum locked rotor current but below the short circuit current of the fuses.The data sheets indicate a maximum locked rotor current of 550% FLC or 5.5 × FLC. A setting of 6 × FLC with a instanta-neous time delay will be ideal but nuisance tripping may result due to unusually high demanding starts or starts while theload is coupled. If need be, set the S/C level higher to a maximum of 8 × FLC to override these conditions.

Mechanical Jam

If the process causes the motor to be prone to mechanical jams, set the Mechanical Jam Trip and Alarm accordingly. Inmost cases, the overload trip will become active before the Mechanical Trip, however, if a high overload curve is chosen,the Mechanical Jam level and time delay become more critical. The setting should then be set to below the overload curvebut above any normal overload conditions of the motor. The main purpose of the mechanical jam element is to protect thedriven equipment due to jammed, or broken equipment.

Undercurrent

If detection of loss of load is required for the specific application, set the undercurrent element according to the current thatwill indicate loss of load. For example, this could be programmed for a pump application to detect loss of fluid in the pipe.


7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE 7 APPLICATIONS

7

Unbalance Alarm and Trip

The unbalance settings are determined by examining the motor application and motor design. In this case, the motor beingprotected is a reciprocating compressor, in which unbalance will be a normal running condition, thus this setting should beset high. A setting of 20% for the Unbalance Alarm with a delay of 10 seconds would be appropriate and the trip may be setto 25% with a delay of 10 seconds

Ground Fault

Unfortunately, there is not enough information to determine a ground fault setting. These settings depend on the followinginformation:

1. The Ground Fault current available.

2. System Grounding - high resistive grounding, solidly grounded, etc.

3. Ground Fault CT used.

4. Ground Fault connection - zero sequence or Residual connection.

Acceleration Trip

This setpoint should be set higher than the maximum starting time to avoid nuisance tripping when the voltage is lower orfor varying loads during starting. If reduced voltage starting is used, a setting of 8 seconds would be appropriate, or if directacross the line starting is used, a setting of 5 seconds could be used.

Start Inhibit

This function should always be enabled after five successful starts to protect the motor during starting while it is already hot.The 369 learns the amount of thermal capacity used at start. If the motor is hot, thus having some thermal capacity, the 369will not allow a start if the available thermal capacity is less than the required thermal capacity for a start. For more informa-tion regarding start inhibit refer to application note in section 7.6.6.

Starts/Hour

Starts/Hour can be set to the # of cold starts as per the data sheet. For this example, the starts/hour would be set to 3.

Time Between Starts

In some cases, the motor manufacturer will specify the time between motor starts. In this example, this information is notgiven so this feature can be turned “Off”. However, if the information is given, the time provided on the motor data sheetsshould be programmed.

Stator RTDs

RTD trip level should be set at or below the maximum temperature rating of the insulation. This example has a class F insu-lation which has a temperature rating of 155°C, therefore the Stator RTD Trip level should be set to between 140°C to155°C. The RTD alarm level should be set to a level to provide a warning that the motor temperature is rising. For thisexample, 120°C or 130°C would be appropriate.

Bearing RTDs

The Bearing RTD alarm and trip settings will be determined by evaluating the temperature specification from the bearingmanufacturer.


7 APPLICATIONS 7.6 APPLICATIONS

7

7.6APPLICATIONS 7.6.1 MOTOR STATUS DETECTION

The 369 detects a stopped motor condition when the phase current falls below 5% of CT, and detects a starting motor con-dition when phase current is sensed after a stopped motor condition. If the motor idles at 5% of CT, several starts and stopscan be detected causing nuisance lockouts if Starts/Hour, Time Between Starts, Restart Block, Start Inhibit, or BackspinTimer are programmed. As well, the learned values, such as the Learned Starting Thermal Capacity, Learned Starting Cur-rent and Learned Acceleration time can be incorrectly calculated.

To overcome this potential problem, the Spare Digital Input can be configured to read the status of the breaker and deter-mine whether the motor is stopped or simply idling. With the spare input configured as Starter Status and the breaker auxil-iary contacts wired across the spare input terminals, the 369 senses a stopped motor condition only when the phasecurrent is below 5% of CT (or zero) AND the breaker is open. If both of these conditions are not met, the 369 will continueto operate as if the motor is running and the starting elements remain unchanged. Refer to the flowchart below for details ofhow the 369 detects motor status and how the starter status element further defines the condition of the motor.

When the Starter Status is programmed, the type of breaker contact being used for monitoring must be set. The followingare the states of the breaker auxiliary contacts in relation to the breaker:

• 52a, 52aa - open when the breaker contacts are open and closed when the breaker contacts are closed

• 52b, 52bb - closed when the breaker contacts are open and open when the breaker contacts are closed

Figure 7–3: FLOWCHART SHOWING HOW MOTOR STATUS IS DETERMINED

GET PREVIOUSM O T O R M O D E

MODE = STOP I > FLA START

I > 0

BREAKERCLOSED?

I > FLA

MODE = START

MODE = RUN

R U N

S T O P P E D

RUN IN OVERLOAD

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

ACTIVE ORLATCHED TRIP

IS TRIPRESETABLE

RESETR E Q U E S T

RESET TRIP

TRIP

Y Y Y

N N N

PREVIOUS MODEMUST = RUN IN

O V E R L O A D

Y

Y

N


7.6 APPLICATIONS 7 APPLICATIONS

7

7.6.2 SELECTION OF COOL TIME CONSTANTS

Thermal limits are not a black and white science and there is some art to setting a protective relay thermal model. The def-inition of thermal limits mean different things to different manufacturers and quite often, information is not available. There-fore, it is important to remember what the goal of the motor protection thermal modeling is: to thermally protect the motor(rotor and stator) without impeding the normal and expected operating conditions that the motor will be subject to.

The thermal model of the 369 provides integrated rotor and stator heating protection. If cooling time constants are suppliedwith the motor data they should be used. Since the rotor and stator heating and cooling is integrated into a single model,use the longer of the cooling time constants (rotor or stator).

If however, no cooling time constants are provided, settings will have to be determined. Before determining the cool timeconstant settings, the duty cycle of the motor should be considered. If the motor is typically started and run continuously forvery long periods of time with no overload duty requirements, the cooling time constants can be large. This would make thethermal model conservative. If the normal duty cycle of the motor involves frequent starts and stops with a periodic overloadduty requirement, the cooling time constants will need to be shorter and closer to the actual thermal limit of the motor.

Normally motors are rotor limited during starting. Thus RTDs in the stator do not provide the best method of determiningcool times. Determination of reasonable settings for the running and stopped cool time constants can be accomplished inone of the following manners listed in order of preference.

1. The motor running and stopped cool times or constants may be provided on the motor data sheets or by the manufac-turer if requested. Remember that the cooling is exponential and the time constants are one fifth the total time to gofrom 100% thermal capacity used to 0%.

2. Attempt to determine a conservative value from available data on the motor. See the following example for details.

3. If no data is available an educated guess must be made. Perhaps the motor data could be estimated from other motorsof a similar size or use. Note that conservative protection is better as a first choice until a better understanding of themotor requirements is developed. Remember that the goal is to protect the motor without impeding the operating dutythat is desired.

EXAMPLE:

Motor data sheets state that the starting sequence allowed is 2 cold or 1 hot after which you must wait 5 hours beforeattempting another start.

• This implies that under a normal start condition the motor is using between 34 and 50% thermal capacity. Hence, twoconsecutive starts are allowed, but not three (i.e. 34 × 3 > 100).

• If the hot and cold curves or a hot/cold safe stall ratio are not available program 0.5 (1 hot / 2 cold starts) in as the hot/cold ratio.

• Programming Start Inhibit ‘On’ makes a restart possible as soon as 62.5% (50 × 1.25) thermal capacity is available.

• After 2 cold or 1 hot start, close to 100% thermal capacity will be used. Thermal capacity used decays exponentially(see 369 manual section on motor cooling for calculation). There will be only 37% thermal capacity used after 1 timeconstant which means there is enough thermal capacity available for another start. Program 60 minutes (5 hours) asthe stopped cool time constant. Thus after 2 cold or 1 hot start, a stopped motor will be blocked from starting for 5hours.

Since the rotor cools faster when the motor is running, a reasonable setting for the running cool time constant might be halfthe stopped cool time constant or 150 minutes.



7

7.6.3 THERMAL MODEL

Figure 7–4: THERMAL MODEL BLOCK DIAGRAM

UB, U/B...................UnbalanceI/P ...........................InputIavg.........................Average Three Phase CurrentIeq...........................Equivalent Average Three Phase CurrentIp.............................Positive Sequence CurrentIn.............................Negative Sequence CurrentK .............................Constant Multiplier that Equates In to IpFLC.........................Full Load CurrentFLC TCR ................FLC Thermal Capacity Reduction setpointTC...........................Thermal Capacity usedRTD BIAS TC .........TC Value looked up from RTD Bias Curve

If Unbalance input to thermal memory is enabled, the increase in heating is reflected in the thermal model.If RTD Input to Thermal Memory is enabled, the feed-back from the RTDs will correct the thermal model.

start

U/B I/P to

Thermal Memory

Enabled?

Ieq = Iavg

Ieq >

FLC x O/L

Pickup ?

Ieq > FLC

TC <

FLC TCR X

(Iavg/FLC)

Decrement TC to

FLC TCR x (Iavg/FLC) as per

the rate defined by User's Cool

Rate or Learned Cool Rate

RTD BIAS

ENABLED?

end

Add to TC as per Ieq

and O/L Curve

TC >

FLC TCR x

(Iavg/FLC)

Add 6% TC per Minute until

TC = FLC TCR x (Iavg/FLC)

RTD BIAS TC >

TC ?TC = RTD BIAS TC

Y

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

N

Y Y

N N

2UB1 ⋅+⋅= kIavgIeq

NOTE



7

7.6.4 RTD BIAS FEATURE

Figure 7–5: RTD BIAS FEATURE

LEGEND

Tmax.......................RTD Bias Maximum Temperature ValueTmin........................RTD Bias Minimum Temperature ValueHottest RTD ............Hottest Stator RTD measuredTC ...........................Thermal Capacity UsedTC RTD...................Thermal Capacity Looked up on RTD Bias Curve.TC Model ................Thermal Capacity based on the Thermal Model

START

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

RTD BIASENABLED ?

HOTTESTSTATOR RTD

> Tmax

HOTTESTSTATOR RTD

<Tmin

T.C. RTD >T.C. THERMAL

MODEL

T.C. = T.C. RTD T.C. = T.C. MODEL

T.C. = T.C. RTD =100%

OVERLOAD ?

T.C. MODEL =100%

END

Tmin < HOTTESTSTATOR RTD < Tmax(T.C. LOOKED UP ON

RTD BIAS CURVE)

840739A1.CDR

TRIP



7

7.6.5 THERMAL CAPACITY USED CALCULATION

The overload element uses a Thermal Capacity algorithm to determine an overload trip condition. The extent of overloadcurrent determines how fast the Thermal Memory is filled, i.e. if the current is just over FLC × O/L Pickup, Thermal Capacityslowly increases; versus if the current far exceeds the FLC pickup level, the Thermal Capacity rapidly increases. An over-load trip occurs when the Thermal Capacity Used reaches 100%.

The overload current does not necessarily have to pass the overload curve for a trip to take place. If there is ThermalCapacity already built up, the overload trip will occur much faster. In other words, the overload trip will occur at the specifiedtime on the curve only when the Thermal Capacity is equal to zero and the current is applied at a stable rate. Otherwise, theThermal Capacity increases from the value prior to overload, until a 100% Thermal Capacity is reached and an overloadtrip occurs.

It is important to chose the overload curve correctly for proper protection. In some cases it is necessary to calculate theamount of Thermal Capacity developed after a start. This is done to ensure that the 369 does not trip the motor prior to thecompletion of a start. The actual filling of the Thermal Capacity is the area under the overload current curve. Therefore, tocalculate the amount of Thermal Capacity after a start, the integral of the overload current most be calculated. Below is anexample of how to calculate the Thermal Capacity during a start:

Thermal Capacity Calculation:

1. Draw lines intersecting the acceleration curve and the overload curve. This is illustrated in Figure 7–6: Thermal LimitCurves on page 7–18.

2. Determine the time at which the drawn line intersect, the acceleration curve and the time at which the drawn line inter-sects the chosen overload curve.

3. Integrate the values that have been determined.

Therefore, after this motor has completed a successful start, the Thermal Capacity would have reached approximately40%.

Table 7–3: THERMAL CAPACITY CALCULATIONSTime Period(seconds)

Motor Starting Current(% of FLC)

Custom Curve TripTime (seconds)

Total Accumulated ThermalCapacity Used (%)

0 to 3 580 38 3 / 38 × 100 = 7.8%3 to 6 560 41 (3 / 41 × 100) + 7.8% = 15.1%6 to 9 540 44 (3 / 44 × 100) + 15.1% = 21.9%

9 to 12 520 47 (3 / 47 × 100) + 21.9% = 28.3%12 to 14 500 51 (2 / 51 × 100) + 28.3% = 32.2%14 to 15 480 56 (1 / 56 × 100) + 32.2% = 34.0%15 to 16 460 61 (1 / 61 × 100) + 34.0% = 35.6%16 to 17 440 67 (1 / 67 × 100) + 35.6% = 37.1%17 to 18 380 90 (1 / 90 × 100) + 37.1% = 38.2%18 to 19 300 149 (1 / 149 × 100) + 38.2% = 38.9%19 to 20 160 670 (1 / 670 × 100) + 38.9% = 39.0%



7

Figure 7–6: THERMAL LIMIT CURVES

Thermal limit curves illustrate thermal capacity used calculation during a start.

7.6.6 START INHIBIT

The Start Inhibit element of the 369 provides an accurate and reliable start protection without unnecessary prolonged lock-out times causing production down time. The lockout time is based on the actual performance and application of the motorand not on the worst case scenario, as other start protection elements.

The 369 Thermal Capacity algorithm is used to establish the lockout time of the Start Inhibit element. Thermal Capacity is apercentage value that gives an indication of how hot the motor is and is derived from the overload currents (as well asUnbalance currents and RTDs if the respective biasing functions are enabled). The easiest way to understand the ThermalModeling function of the 369 is to image a bucket that holds Thermal Capacity. Once this imaginary bucket is full, an over-load trip occurs. The bucket is filled by the amount of overload current integrated over time and is compared to the pro-grammed overload curve to obtain a percentage value. The thermal capacity bucket is emptied based on the programmedrunning cool time when the current has fallen below the Full Load Current (FLC) and is running normally.

1

10

100

1000

10000

100000

Percent Full Load

Motor Manufacturer's Thermal LimitCurve

369 Custom Overload Curve

MotorAccelerationCurve

44 sec.

38 sec.

9 sec.

3 sec.

Tim

e(S

eco

nd

s)

20 18010160 260220 300 340 380 420 460 500140605580540



7

Upon a start, the inrush current is very high, causing the thermal capacity to rapidly increase. The Thermal Capacity Usedvariable is compared to the amount of the Thermal Capacity required to start the motor. If there is not enough thermalcapacity available to start the motor, the 369 blocks the operator from starting until the motor has cooled to a level of ther-mal capacity to successfully start.

Assume that a motor requires 40% Thermal Capacity to start. If the motor was running in overload prior to stopping, thethermal capacity would be some value; say 80%. Under such conditions the 369 (with Start Inhibit enabled) will lockout orprevent the operator from starting the motor until the thermal capacity has decreased to 60% so that a successful motorstart can be achieved. This example is illustrated in Figure 7–7: Illustration of the Start Inhibit Functionality on page 7–19.

The lockout time is calculated as follows:

(EQ 7.1)

where:

The learned start capacity is updated every four starts. A safe margin is built into the calculation of the LEARNED STARTCAPACITY REQUIRED to ensure successful completion of the longest and most demanding starts. The Learned StartCapacity is calculated as follows:

(EQ 7.2)

where: Start_TC1 = the thermal capacity required for the first startStart_TC2 = the thermal capacity required for the second start, etc.

Figure 7–7: ILLUSTRATION OF THE START INHIBIT FUNCTIONALITY

TC_used = Thermal Capacity Used TC_learned = Learned Thermal Capacity required to start

stopped_cool_time = one of two variables will be used:1. Learned cool time is enabled, or2. Programmed stopped cool time

lockout time stopped_cool_time_constant TCused100 TClearned–--------------------------------------------⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞ln×=

LEARNED START CAPACITY Start_TC1 Start_TC2 Start_TC3 Start_TC4 Start_TC5+ + + +4

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------=

Thermal Capacityrequired to start

40%

Thermal Capacity Useddue to Overload

80%

20%80%

60%{

Thermal Capacity mustdecay by 20% to 60%in order to start the motor



7

7.6.7 TWO-PHASE CT CONFIGURATION

This section illustrates how to use two CTs to sense three phase currents.

The proper configuration for using two CTs rather than three to detect phase current is shown below. Each of the two CTsacts as a current source. The current from the CT on phase ‘A’ flows into the interposing CT on the relay marked ‘A’. Fromthere, the it sums with the current flowing from the CT on phase ‘C’ which has just passed through the interposing CT onthe relay marked ‘C’. This ‘summed’ current flows through the interposing CT marked ‘B’ and splits from there to return to itsrespective source (CT). Polarity is very important since the value of phase ‘B’ must be the negative equivalent of 'A'+ 'C' for the sum of all the vectors to equate to zero. Note that there is only one ground connection. Making two groundconnections creates a parallel path for the current

Figure 7–8: TWO PHASE WIRING

In the two CT configuration, the currents sum vectorially at the common point of the two CTs. The following diagram illus-trates the two possible configurations. If one phase is reading high by a factor of 1.73 on a system that is known to be bal-anced, simply reverse the polarity of the leads at one of the two phase CTs (taking care that the CTs are still tied to groundat some point). Polarity is important.

Figure 7–9: VECTORS SHOWING REVERSE POLARITY

To illustrate the point further, the diagram here shows how the current in phases 'A' and 'C' sum up to create phase 'B'.

Figure 7–10: RESULTANT PHASE CURRENT, CORRECTLY WIRED TWO-PHASE CT SYSTEM

A

B

C

A B C

:5

:5

:5

:COM

:COM

:COM



7

Once again, if the polarity of one of the phases is out by 180°, the magnitude of the resulting vector on a balanced systemwill be out by a factor of 1.73.

Figure 7–11: RESULTANT PHASE CURRENT, INCORRECTLY WIRED TWO-PHASE CT SYSTEM

On a three wire supply, this configuration will always work and unbalance will be detected properly. In the event of a singlephase, there will always be a large unbalance present at the interposing CTs of the relay. If for example phase ‘A’ was lost,phase ‘A’ would read zero while phases ‘B’ and ‘C’ would both read the magnitude of phase ‘C’. If on the other hand, phase‘B’ was lost, at the supply, ‘A’ would be 180× out of phase with phase ‘C’ and the vector addition would be zero at phase ‘B’.

7.6.8 GROUND FAULT DETECTION ON UNGROUNDED SYSTEMS

The 50:0.025 ground fault input is designed for sensitive detection of faults on a high resistance grounded system. Detec-tion of ground currents from 1 to 10 A primary translates to an input of 0.5 mA to 5 mA into the 50:0.025 tap. Understandingthis allows the use of this input in a simple manner for the detection of ground faults on ungrounded systems.

The following diagram illustrates how to use a wye-open delta voltage transformer configuration to detect phase grounding.Under normal conditions, the net voltage of the three phases that appears across the 50:0.025 input and the resistor isclose to zero. Under a fault condition, assuming the secondaries of the VTs to be 69 V, the net voltage seen by the relayand the resistor is 3Vo or 3 × 69 V = 207 V.

Figure 7–12: GROUND FAULT DETECTION ON UNGROUNDED SYSTEMS

Since the wire resistance should be relatively small in comparison to the resistor chosen, the current flow will be a functionof the fault voltage seen on the open delta transformer divided by the chosen resistor value plus the burden of the 50:0.025input (1200 Ω).

EXAMPLE:

If a pickup range of 10 to 100 V is desired, the resistor should be chosen as follows:

101 104

36950:0.025INPUT

101 104

36950:0.025INPUT

RESISTOR

abc



7

1. 1 to 10 A pickup on the 2000:1 tap = 0.5 mA – 5 mA.

2. 10 V / 0.5 mA = 20 kΩ.

3. If the resistor chosen is 20 kΩ – 1.2 kΩ = 18.8 kΩ, the wattage should be greater than E2/R, approximately (207 V)2 /18.8 kΩ = 2.28 W. Therefore, a 5 W resistor will suffice.

The VTs must have a primary rating equal or greater than the line to line voltage, as this is the voltagethat will be seen by the unfaulted inputs in the event of a fault.

7.6.9 RTD CIRCUITRY

This section illustrates the functionality of the RTD circuitry in the 369 Motor Protection Relay.

Figure 7–13: RTD CIRCUITRY

A constant current source sends 3 mA DC down legs A and C. A 6 mA DC current returns down leg B. It may be seen that:

(EQ 7.3)

or

(EQ 7.4)

The above holds true providing that all three leads are the same length, gauge, and material, hence the same resistance.

(EQ 7.5)

or

(EQ 7.6)

Electronically, subtracting VAB from VBC leaves only the voltage across the RTD. In this manner lead length is effectivelynegated:

(EQ 7.7)

NOTE

RTD

COMPENSATION3 mA

RETURN6 mA

HOT

840733A1.CDRC

B

A

3 mA

VAB VLeadA VLeadB+=( ) and VCB VLeadC VRTD VLeadB+ +=

VAB Vcomp Vreturn+=( ) and VCB Vhot VRTD Vreturn+ +=

RLeadA RLeadB RLeadC RLead= = =

Rcomp Rreturn Rhot RLead= = =

VCB VAB– VLead VRTD VLead+ +( ) VLead VLead+( )–=

VCB VAB– VRTD=



7

7.6.10 REDUCED RTD LEAD NUMBER APPLICATION

The 369 requires three leads to be brought back from each RTD: Hot, Return, and Compensation. In certain situations thiscan be quite expensive. However, it is possible to reduce the number of leads so that three are required for the first RTDand only one for each successive RTD. Refer to the following diagram for wiring configuration.

Figure 7–14: REDUCED WIRING RTDS

The Hot line for each RTD is run as usual for each RTD. However, the Compensation and Return leads need only be run forthe first RTD. At the motor RTD terminal box, connect the RTD Return leads together with as short as possible jumpers. Atthe 369 relay, the Compensation leads must be jumpered together.

Note that an error is produced on each RTD equal to the voltage drop across the RTD return jumper. This error increasesfor each successive RTD added as:

VRTD1 = VRTD1

VRTD2 = VRTD2 + VJ3

VRTD3 = VRTD3 + VJ3 + VJ4

VRTD4 = VRTD4 + VJ3+ VJ4 + VJ5, etc....

This error is directly dependent on the length and gauge of the jumper wires and any error introduced by a poor connection.For RTD types other than 10C, the error introduced by the jumpers is negligible.

Although this RTD wiring technique reduces the cost of wiring, the following disadvantages must be noted:

1. There is an error in temperature readings due to lead and connection resistances. Not recommended for 10C RTDs.

2. If the RTD Return lead to the 369 or one of the jumpers breaks, all RTDs from the point of the break onwards will readopen.

3. If the Compensation lead breaks or one of the jumpers breaks, all RTDs from the point of the break onwards will func-tion without any lead compensation.

RTD #1RTD #1

369

RTD #2RTD #2

RTD #3RTD #3

RTD #4RTD #4

RTD #5RTD #5

RTD #6RTD #6

HOT

HOT

HOT

HOT

HOT

HOT

RETURN

RETURN

RETURN

RETURN

RETURN

RETURN

COMPENSATION

COMPENSATION

COMPENSATION

COMPENSATION

COMPENSATION

COMPENSATION

SHIELD

MOTORSHIELD

840732A2.CDR

1

5

9

13

17

21

2

6

10

14

18

22

3

7

11

15

19

23

24



7

7.6.11 TWO WIRE RTD LEAD COMPENSATION

An example of how to add lead compensation to a two wire RTD is shown below.

Figure 7–15: 2 WIRE RTD LEAD COMPENSATION

The compensation lead would be added and it would compensate for the Hot and the Return assuming they are all of equallength and gauge. To compensate for resistance of the Hot and Compensation leads, a resistor equal to the resistance ofthe Hot lead could be added to the compensation lead, though in many cases this is unnecessary.

7.6.12 AUTO TRANSFORMER STARTER WIRING

Figure 7–16: AUTO TRANSFORMER, REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING CIRCUIT

RTD #6COMPENSATION

RETURN

TERMINAL

369COMPENSATIONRESISTOR

MOTORRETURN

HOTHOT

840734A1.CDR

22

24

21

23


8 TESTING 8.1 TEST SETUP

8

8 TESTING 8.1TEST SETUP 8.1.1 INTRODUCTION

This chapter demonstrates the procedures necessary to perform a complete functional test of all the 369 hardware whilealso testing firmware/hardware interaction in the process. Testing of the relay during commissioning using a primary injec-tion test set will ensure that CTs and wiring are correct and complete.

8.1.2 SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP

Figure 8–1: SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP

GROUNDBUS

840726B6.CDR

DB-9(front)

500 ohm

RTD1

PC

RTD12

RG TIMER

STOPTRIGGER

STARTTRIGGER

START

G

RG

AA

AA

R

G

LN

C(B)

A

VA VB VC VN IA IAN IB IBN IC ICN+

+

-

-

B(C)

VA VN VB VN VC VN

VOLTAGE INPUTS

105 108106 109107 110

1A 1ACOM

CURRENT INPUTS

Phase A

WITH METERING OPTION (M)

MULTILIN50:.025

FREQUENCYGENERATOR

3 PHASE VARIABLE AC TEST SET

Neut/Gnd Back Spin

Option (B)

Phase CPhase B

5A COM 50:0.025ACOM 5A 1A 5A 5A VNCOM 1A

93 94 92 96 97 95 99 100 98 102 104 103 101 9091

CHANNEL 1

OP

TIO

N ( R

)

CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 3

REMOTERTD

MODULE


71 74 7773 76 7972 75 78

80

82

8485

81

83

4

12

16

20

24

28

32

36

40

44

48

8

3

11

15

19

23

27

31

35

39

43

47

7

2

10

14

18

22

26

30

34

38

42

46

6

1

9

13

17

21

25

29

33

37

41

45

5

Com-

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

Com

shld.

shld.

shld.shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

shld.

5

9

4 3 2 1

8 7 6

shld.


1

2

3

4

AN

ALO

GO

UT

PU

TS

OP

TIO

N(M

,B)

RTD1

RTD3

RTD4

RTD5

RTD6

RTD7

RTD8

RTD9

RTD10

RTD11

RTD12

RTD2

SPARE

DIFFERENTIALRELAY

SPEEDSWITCH

ACCESSSWITCH

EMERGENCYRESTART

EXTERNALRESET

DIG

ITA

L IN

PU

TS

51

59

61

52

60

62

535455565758

111

126125124123

112113114115116117118119120121122

OU

TP

UT

RE

LAY

S

TRIP

ALARM

AUX. 1

AUX. 2

FILTER GROUNDLINE +


ON

TR

OL

PO

WE

R

369 PCPROGRAM

OPTION (F)

0 0 0 0 0

369Motor ManagementRelay R

GE Multilin

Profibus (option P or P1)Modbus/TCP (option E)

V-

CA

N_

L

SH

IEL

D

CA

N_

H

V+

DeviceNetOption (D)


8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING 8 TESTING

8

8.2HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING 8.2.1 PHASE CURRENT ACCURACY TEST

The 369 specification for phase current accuracy is ±0.5% of 2 × CT when the injected current is less than 2 × CT. Performthe steps below to verify accuracy.

1. Alter the following setpoint:

S2 SYSTEM SETUP CT / VT SETUP PHASE CT PRIMARY: 1000 A

2. Measured values should be within ±10A of expected. Inject the values shown in the table below and verify accuracy ofthe measured values. View the measured values in:

A2 METERING DATA CURRENT METERING

8.2.2 VOLTAGE INPUT ACCURACY TEST

The 369 specification for voltage input accuracy is ±1.0% of full scale (240 V). Perform the steps below to verify accuracy.

1. Alter the following setpoints:

S2 SYSTEM CT/VT SETUP VT CONNECTION TYPE: WyeS2 SYSTEM SETUP CT/VT SETUP VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER RATIO: 10

2. Measured values should be within ±24 V (±1 × 240 × 10) of expected. Apply the voltage values shown in the table andverify accuracy of the measured values. View the measured values in:

A2 METERING DATA VOLTAGE METERING

INJECTED CURRENT 1 A

UNIT

INJECTED CURRENT 5 A

UNIT

EXPECTED CURRENT READING

MEASURED CURRENT PHASE

A


B


C0.1 A 0.5 A 100 A0.2 A 1.0 A 200 A0.5 A 2.5 A 500 A1 A 5 A 1000 A

1.5 A 7.5 A 1500 A2 A 10 A 2000 A

APPLIED LINE-NEUTRALVOLTAGE

EXPECTED VOLTAGE READING

MEASURED VOLTAGE A-N

MEASURED VOLTAGE B-N

MEASURED VOLTAGE C-N

30 V 300 V50 V 500 V

100 V 1000 V150 V 1500 V200 V 2000 V240 V 2400 V


8 TESTING 8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING

8

8.2.3 GROUND (1 A / 5 A) ACCURACY TEST

The 369 specification for the 1 A/5 A ground current input accuracy is ±0.5% of 1 × CT for the 5 A input and ±0.5% of5 × CT for the 1 A input. Perform the steps below to verify accuracy.

5A INPUT:


S2 SYSTEM SETUP CT/VT SETUP GROUND CT TYPE: 5A SecondaryS2 SYSTEM SETUP CT/VT SETUP GROUND CT PRIMARY: 1000 A

2. Measured values should be ±5 A. Inject the values shown in the table below into one phase only and verify accuracy ofthe measured values. View the measured values in A2 METERING DATA CURRENT METERING

1A INPUT:


S2 SYSTEM SETUP CT/VT SETUP GROUND CT TYPE: 1A SecondaryS2 SYSTEM SETUP CT/VT SETUP GROUND CT PRIMARY: 1000 A

2. Measured values should be ±25 A. Inject the values shown in the table below into one phase only and verify accuracyof the measured values. View the measured values in A2 METERING DATA CURRENT METERING

8.2.4 50:0.025 GROUND ACCURACY TEST

The 369 specification for GE Multilin 50:0.025 ground current input accuracy is ±0.5% of CT rated primary (25 A). Performthe steps below to verify accuracy.

1. Alter the following setpoint:

S2 SYSTEM SETUP CT/VT SETUP GROUND CT TYPE: MULTILIN 50:0.025

2. Measured values should be within ±0.125 A of expected. Inject the values shown below either as primary values into aGE Multilin 50:0.025 Core Balance CT or as secondary values that simulate the core balance CT. Verify accuracy ofthe measured values. View the measured values in A2 METERING DATA CURRENT METERING

INJECTED CURRENT5 A UNIT

EXPECTEDCURRENTREADING

MEASUREDGROUNDCURRENT

0.5 A 100 A1.0 A 200 A2.5 A 500 A5 A 1000 A

INJECTEDCURRENT1 A UNIT

EXPECTEDCURRENTREADING

MEASUREDGROUNDCURRENT

0.1 A 100 A0.2 A 200 A0.5 A 500 A1.0 A 1000 A

PRIMARY INJECTED CURRENT 50:0.025 CT

SECONDARY INJECTED CURRENT

EXPECTED CURRENTREADING

MEASURED GROUNDCURRENT

0.25 A 0.125 mA 0.25 A1 A 0.5 mA 1.00 A

10 A 5 mA 10.00 A25 A 12.5 mA 25.00 A



8

8.2.5 RTD ACCURACY TEST

1. The 369 specification for RTD input accuracy is ±2°. Alter the following setpoints:

S6 RTD TEMPERATURE RTD TYPE STATOR RTD TYPE: “100 ohm Platinum” (select desired type)

2. Measured values should be ±2°C or ±4°F. Alter the resistances applied to the RTD inputs as per the table below to sim-ulate RTDs and verify accuracy of the measured values. View the measured values in:

A2 METERING DATA LOCAL RTD (and/or REMOTE RTD if using the RRTD Module)

3. Select the preferred temperature units for the display. Alter the following setpoint:

S1 369 SETUP DISPLAY PREFERENCES TEMPERATURE DISPLAY: “Celsius” (or “Fahrenheit” if preferred)

4. Repeat the above measurements for the other RTD types (120 ohm Nickel, 100 ohm Nickel and 10 ohm Copper)

APPLIED RESISTANCE

100 Ohm PLATINUM

EXPECTED RTD TEMPERATURE READING

MEASURED RTD TEMPERATURE SELECT ONE: ____(°C) ____(°F)

CELSIUS FAHRENHEIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

84.27 ohms –40°C –40°F100.00 ohms 0°C 32°F119.39 ohms 50°C 122°F138.50 ohms 100°C 212°F157.32 ohms 150°C 302°F175.84 ohms 200°C 392°F

APPLIED RESISTANCE

120 Ohm NICKEL





APPLIED RESISTANCE

100 Ohm NICKEL





APPLIED RESISTANCE

10 Ohm COPPER




7.49 ohms –40°C –40°F9.04 ohms 0°C 32°F

10.97 ohms 50°C 122°F12.90 ohms 100°C 212°F14.83 ohms 150°C 302°F16.78 ohms 200°C 392°F


8 TESTING 8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING

8

8.2.6 DIGITAL INPUTS

The digital inputs can be verified easily with a simple switch or pushbutton. Perform the steps below to verify functionality ofthe digital inputs.

1. Open switches of all of the digital inputs.

2. View the status of the digital inputs in A1 STATUS DIGITAL INPUT STATUS

3. Close switches of all of the digital inputs.

4. View the status of the digital inputs in A1 STATUS DIGITAL INPUT STATUS

8.2.7 ANALOG INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

The 369 specification for analog input and analog output accuracy is ±1% of full scale. Perform the steps below to verifyaccuracy.

4 to 20mA ANALOG INPUT:


S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS ANALOG OUTPUT 1 ANALOG RANGE: 4-20 mA (repeat for analog inputs 2 to 4)

2. Analog output values should be ±0.2 mA on the ammeter. Force the analog outputs using the following setpoints:

S11 TESTING TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS FORCE ANALOG OUTPUT 1: 0% (enter desired percent, repeat for analog outputs 2 to 4)

3. Verify the ammeter readings for all the analog outputs

4. Repeat 1 to 3 for the other forced output settings



S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS ANALOG OUTPUT 1 ANALOG RANGE: “0-1 mA” (repeat for analog inputs 2 to 4)


S11 TESTING TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS FORCE ANALOG OUTPUT 1: “0%”(enter desired percent, repeat for analog outputs 2 to 4)


4. Repeat 1 to 3 for the other forced output settings.

INPUT EXPECTED STATUS

(SWITCH OPEN)

PASS FAIL

EXPECTED STATUS(SWITCH CLOSED)

PASS FAIL

SPARE Open ShortedDIFFERENTIAL RELAY Open ShortedSPEED SWITCH Open ShortedACCESS SWITCH Open ShortedEMERGENCY RESTART Open ShortedEXTERNAL RESET Open Shorted

ANALOG OUTPUT FORCE VALUE

EXPECTED AMMETER READING

MEASURED AMMETER READING (mA)1 2 3 4

0 4 mA25 8 mA50 12 mA75 16 mA

100 20 mA



8



S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS ANALOG OUTPUT 1 ANALOG RANGE: “0-20 mA” (repeat for analog inputs 2 to 4)


S11 TESTING TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS FORCE ANALOG OUTPUT 1: “0%”(enter desired percent, repeat for analog outputs 2 to 4)


4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for the other forced output settings.

8.2.8 OUTPUT RELAYS

To verify the functionality of the output relays, perform the following steps:

1. Use the following setpoints:

S11 TESTING TEST OUTPUT RELAYS FORCE TRIP RELAY: “Energized”S11 TESTING TEST OUTPUT RELAYS FORCE TRIP RELAY DURATION: “Static”

2. Using the above setpoints, individually select each of the other output relays (AUX 1, AUX 2 and ALARM) and verifyoperation.




0 0 mA25 0.25 mA50 0.5 mA75 0.75 mA

100 1.0 mA




0 0 mA25 5 mA50 10 mA75 15 mA

100 20 mA

FORCE OPERATION SETPOINT

EXPECTED MEASUREMENT ( for SHORT) ACTUAL MEASUREMENT ( for SHORT)R1 R2 R3 R4 R1 R2 R3 R4

no nc no nc no nc no nc no nc no nc no nc no ncR1 TripR2 AuxiliaryR3 AuxiliaryR4 Alarm


8 TESTING 8.3 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING

8

8.3ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING 8.3.1 OVERLOAD CURVE TEST

The 369 specification for overload curve timing accuracy is ±100 ms or ±2% of time to trip. Pickup accuracy is as per cur-rent inputs (±0.5% of 2 × CT when the injected current is < 2 × CT; ±1% of 20 × CT when the injected current is ≥ 2 × CT).

1. Perform the steps below to verify accuracy. Alter the following setpoints:

S2 SYSTEM SETUP CT/VT SETUP PHASE CT PRIMARY: “1000”S2 SYSTEM SETUP CT/VT SETUP MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS FLA: “1000”S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION OVERLOAD CURVES SELECT CURVE STYLE: “Standard”S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION OVERLOAD CURVES STANDARD OVELOAD CURVE NUMBER: “4”S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION THERMAL MODEL OVERLOAD PICKUP LEVEL: “1.10”S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION THERMAL MODEL UNBALANCE BIAS K FACTOR: “0”S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION THERMAL MODEL HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO: “1.00”S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION THERMAL MODEL ENABLE RTD BIASING: “No”

2. Any trip must be reset prior to each test. Short the emergency restart terminals momentarily immediately prior to eachoverload curve test to ensure that the thermal capacity used is zero. Failure to do so will result in shorter trip times.Inject the current of the proper amplitude to obtain the values as shown and verify the trip times. Motor load may beviewed in A2 METERING DATA CURRENT METERING

Thermal capacity used and estimated time to trip may be viewed in A1 STATUS MOTOR STATUS

8.3.2 POWER MEASUREMENT TEST

The 369 specification for reactive and apparent power is ±1.5% of 2 × CT × VT full scale at Iavg < 2 × CT. Perform the stepsbelow to verify accuracy.


S2 SYSTEM SETUP CT/VT SETUP PHASE CT PRIMARY: “1000”S2 SYSTEM SETUP CT/VT SETUP VT CONNECTION TYPE: “Wye”S2 SYSTEM SETUP CT/VT SETUP VT RATIO: “10.00:1”

2. Inject current and apply voltage as per the table below. Verify accuracy of the measured values. View the measuredvalues in A2 METERING DATA POWER METERING

AVERAGE PHASE CURRENT

DISPLAYED

INJECTED CURRENT1 A UNIT

PICKUP LEVEL

EXPECTED TIME TO TRIP

TOLERANCE RANGE MEASURED TIME TO TRIP

1050 A 1.05 A 1.05 never N/A1200 A 1.20 A 1.20 795.44 s 779.53 to 811.35 s1750 A 1.75 A 1.75 169.66 s 166.27 to 173.05 s3000 A 3.0 A 3.00 43.73 s 42.86 to 44.60 s6000 A 6.0 A 6.00 9.99 s 9.79 to 10.19 s

10000 A 10.0 A 10.00 5.55 s 5.44 to 5.66 s

INJECTED CURRENT / APPLIED VOLTAGE (Ia is reference vector)

POWER QUANTITY POWER FACTOR

1 A UNIT 5 A UNIT EXPECTED TOLERANCE RANGE

MEASURED EXPECTED MEASURED

Ia = 1 A∠0°Ib = 1 A∠120°Ic = 1 A∠240°

Va = 120 V∠342°Vb = 120 V∠102°Vc = 120 V∠222°

Ia = 5 A∠0°Ib = 5 A∠120°Ic = 5 A∠240°

Va = 120 V∠342°Vb = 120 V∠102°Vc = 120 V∠222°

+3424 kW 3352 to 3496 kW

0.95 lag

Ia = 1 A∠0°Ib = 1 A∠120°Ic = 1 A∠240°

Va = 120 V∠288°Vb = 120 V∠48°Vc = 120 V∠168°

Ia = 5 A∠0°Ib = 5 A∠120°Ic = 5 A∠240°

Va = 120 V∠288°Vb = 120 V∠48°Vc = 120 V∠168°

+3424 kvar 3352 to 3496 kvar

0.31 lag


8.3 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING 8 TESTING

8

8.3.3 VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL TEST

The 369 can detect voltage phase rotation and protect against phase reversal. To test the phase reversal element, performthe following steps:


S2 SYSTEM SETUP CT/VT SETUP VT CONNECTION TYPE: “Wye” or “Open Delta”S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS PHASE REVERSAL PHASE REVERSAL TRIP: “On”S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS PHASE REVERSAL ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: “Trip”S2 SYSTEM SETUP CT/VT SETUP SYSTEM PHASE SEQUENCE: “ABC”

2. Apply voltages as per the table below. Verify the 369 operation on voltage phase reversal.

8.3.4 SHORT CIRCUIT TEST

The 369 specification for short circuit timing is +40 ms or ±0.5% of total time. The pickup accuracy is as per the phase cur-rent inputs. Perform the steps below to verify the performance of the short circuit element.


S2 SYSTEM SETUP CT/VT SETUP PHASE CT PRIMARY: “1000”S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS SHORT CIRCUIT SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP: “On”S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS SHORT CIRCUIT ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: “Trip”S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS SHORT CIRCUIT SHORT CIRCUIT PICKUP LEVEL: “5.0 x CT”S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS SHORT CIRCUIT ADD S/C DELAY: “0”

2. Inject current as per the table below, resetting the unit after each trip by pressing the [RESET] key, and verify timingaccuracy. Pre-trip values may be viewed in

A1 STATUS LAST TRIP DATA

APPLIED VOLTAGE EXPECTED RESULT NO TRIP PHASE REVERSAL TRIP

OBSERVED RESULT NO TRIP PHASE REVERSAL TRIP

Va = 120 V∠0°Vb = 120 V∠120°Vc = 120 V∠240°

Va = 120 V∠0°Vb = 120 V∠240°Vc = 120 V∠120°

INJECTED CURRENT TIME TO TRIP (ms)5 A UNIT 1 A UNIT EXPECTED MEASURED

30 A 6 A < 40 ms40 A 8 A < 40 ms50 A 10 A < 40 ms


9 COMMUNICATIONS 9.1 OVERVIEW

9

9 COMMUNICATIONS 9.1OVERVIEW 9.1.1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE

The hardware or electrical interface is one of the following:

• one of three 2-wire RS485 ports from the rear terminal connector,

• the RS232 from the front panel connector

• a fibre optic connection.

In a 2-wire RS485 link, data flow is bidirectional. Data flow is half-duplex for both the RS485 and the RS232 ports. That is,data is never transmitted and received at the same time. RS485 lines should be connected in a daisy chain configuration(avoid star connections) with a terminating network installed at each end of the link, i.e. at the master end and at the slavefarthest from the master. The terminating network should consist of a 120 ohm resistor in series with a 1 nF ceramic capac-itor when used with Belden 9841 RS485 wire. The value of the terminating resistors should be equal to the characteristicimpedance of the line. This is approximately 120 ohms for standard #22 AWG twisted pair wire. Shielded wire shouldalways be used to minimize noise. Polarity is important in RS485 communications. Each '+' terminal of every 369 must beconnected together for the system to operate. See Section 3.3.14: RS485 Communications on page 3–13 for details oncorrect serial port wiring.

When using a fibre optic link the Tx from the 369 should be connected to the Rx of the Master device and the Rx from the369 should be connected to the Tx of the Master device.

9.1.2 PROFIBUS COMMUNICATIONS

The 369 Motor Management Relay supports both Profibus-DP (order code P) and Profibus-DPV1 (order code P1) commu-nication interfaces as slave that can be read and written to/from a Profibus-DP/V1 master. The Profibus-DP/V1 Mastermust read the GSD (Device Master Data) file of the 369 for the purposes of configuration and parameterization.

• The GSD file for the Profibus-DP option is 369_090C.gse.

• The GSD file for the Profibus-DPV1 option is 369_09E6.gse.

The relay supports the following configurations and indications:

• Fieldbus type: PROFIBUS-DP (IEC 61158 Type 3, and IEC 61784)

• Auto baud rate detection 9.6Kbit - 12Mbit.

• Address range: 1-126, setting via EnerVista 369 Setup software or front keypad.

• Input data: 220 bytes - cyclical.

• Extended Diagnostic data: 26 bytes - non-cyclical.

Sections 9.2.2 to 9.2.4 pertain to the Profibus-DP option.

In addition to the above, the Profibus-DPV1 (P1) option supports:

• Fieldbus type: Profibus-DPV1 (IEC 61158 Type 3, and IEC 61784)

• Acyclic read/write between a Master (Class1/Class2) and the 369 slave according to the DPV1 extensions of IEC61158.

• Output Data: 2 bytes - cyclical.

Sections 9.3.1 through to 9.3.6 of this manual pertain to the Profibus-DPV1 option.

9.1.3 DEVICENET COMMUNICATIONS

The 369 Motor Management Relay supports the optional DeviceNet protocol as slave that can be read by a DeviceNetmaster. The device can be added to a DeviceNet list by adding the 369.eds file in the scanner list.

The relay supports following configuration.

• Field bus type: DeviceNet

• Functions supported: Explicit, Polled, COS and Cyclic IO messaging

• Baud Rate: 125, 250 and 500 kbps, programmable through software or relay front keypad


9.1 OVERVIEW 9 COMMUNICATIONS

9

• Mac ID: 0 to 63, programmable through software or relay front keypad

See Section 9.4.1: DeviceNet Communications on page 9–15 for complete details.

9.1.4 MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

The 369 implements a subset of the AEG Modicon Modbus RTU serial communication standard. Many popular program-mable controllers support this protocol directly with a suitable interface card allowing direct connection of relays. Althoughthe Modbus protocol is hardware independent, the 369 interfaces include three 2-wire RS485 ports and one RS232 port.Modbus is a single master, multiple slave protocol suitable for a multi-drop configuration as provided by RS485 hardware.In this configuration up to 32 slaves can be daisy-chained together on a single communication channel.

The 369 is always a slave. It cannot be programmed as a master. Computers or PLCs are commonly programmed as mas-ters. The Modbus protocol exists in two versions: Remote Terminal Unit (RTU, binary) and ASCII. Only the RTU version issupported by the 369. Monitoring, programming and control functions are possible using read and write register com-mands. See Section 9.5: Modbus RTU Protocol on page 9–30 for complete details.

9.1.5 MODBUS/TCP COMMUNICATIONS

MODBUS/TCP OPTION:

When configured with the “E” Option, the 369 can connect to Ethernet networks via the DB9 connection or the suppliedDB9 to RJ45 adapter connection, using the Modbus/TCP protocol as detailed in the document “Open Modbus / TCP Spec-ification” by Andy Swales, Release 1.0, 29 March 1999 (a search via the internet can produce a free copy of this docu-ment).

This description contains information to the location of Setting registers for configuring the 369 for a LAN connection, andthe physical connection of the 369 with, or without, the supplied DB9 to RJ45 adaptor. Information pertaining to the applica-tion of an IED over Ethernet is beyond the scope of this manual and the user should consult their Network Administrator forconfiguration details.

The implementation of this option is for the intention of data retrieval and device configuration. The 369does not support firmware upgrade via this connection.

SETPOINTS CONFIGURATION:

The user needs to configure the following settings for interface to a LAN: IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK, and GATEWAYADDRESS. Each setting contains 4 octets. The user configures the octets as shown in the following example:

IP ADDRESS: “127.0.0.1”SUBNET MASK: “255.255.255.252”GATEWAY ADDRESS: “127.0.0.1”

These settings can also be configured via the keypad under the S1 369 SETUP 369 COMMUNICATIONS path.

SETPOINT MEMORY MAPADDRESS

DATA VALUE(DEC)

IP ADDRESS OCTET1 0x101C 127IP ADDRESS OCTET2 0x101D 0IP ADDRESS OCTET3 0x101E 0IP ADDRESS OCTET4 0x101F 1SUBNET MASK OCTET1 0x1020 255SUBNET MASK OCTET2 0x1021 255SUBNET MASK OCTET3 0x1022 255SUBNET MASK OCTET4 0x1023 252GATEWAY ADDRESS OCTET1 0x1024 127GATEWAY ADDRESS OCTET2 0x1025 0GATEWAY ADDRESS OCTET3 0x1026 0GATEWAY ADDRESS OCTET4 0x1027 1

NOTE


9 COMMUNICATIONS 9.1 OVERVIEW

9

PHYSICAL CONNECTION:

The 369 can be connected to an Ethernet LAN via the supplied RJ45 adaptor, or directly from the DB9 connector at theback of the 369 using the following connections:

Figure 9–1: MODBUS/TCP WIRING


9.2 PROFIBUS-DP COMMUNICATIONS 9 COMMUNICATIONS

9

9.2PROFIBUS-DP COMMUNICATIONS 9.2.1 PROFIBUS COMMUNICATION OPTIONS

The 369 Motor Management Relay supports either Profibus-DP (order code P) or Profibus-DPV1 (order code P1) commu-nication interfaces as slave that can be read and written to/from a Profibus-DP/V1 master. The Profibus-DP/V1 Mastermust read the GSD (Device Master Data) file of the 369 for the purposes of configuration and parameterization.

• The GSD file for the Profibus-DP option is 369_090C.GSE.

• The GSD file for the Profibus-DPV1 option is 369_09E6.GSE.

Sections 9.2.2 to 9.2.4 pertain to the Profibus-DP option.

Sections 9.3.1 through to 9.3.6 of this manual pertain to the Profibus-DPV1 option.

9.2.2 369 PROFIBUS-DP PARAMETERIZATION

The 369 Motor Management Relay supports mandatory parametrization. The relay keeps its user parameter data / set-points in a non-volatile memory and does not need device related parametrization during startup of the DP master. TheEnerVista 369 Setup software is the best tool for user parametrization of the 369 device.

9.2.3 369 PROFIBUS-DP CONFIGURATION

The Profibus-DP basic configuration has one DP master and one DP slave. In a typical bus segment up to 32 stations canbe connected (a repeater has to be used if more then 32 stations operate on a bus). The end nodes on a Profibus-DP net-work must be terminated to avoid reflections on the bus line.

The bus address for the relay as Profibus-DP node can be set using the S1 369 SETUP 369 COMMUNICATIONS PROFI-BUS ADDRESS setpoint or via the EnerVista 369 Setup software, which extends address range from 1 to 126. Address 126is used only for commissioning purposes and should not be used to exchange user data.

The media for the fieldbus is a twisted pair copper cable along with 9-pin SUB-D connector, which connects the bus to the369 socket on the back of the relay. The 369 Motor Management Relay has autobaud support. The baud rates and otherslave specific information needed for configuration are contained in 369_090C.gs* which is used by a network configura-tion program.

The 369 Motor Management Relay as a DP slave transfers fast process data to the DP master according to master-slaveprinciple. The 369 Motor Management Relay is a modular device, supporting up to 8 input modules.

During the configuration session, all modules have to be selected in order to get the entire area of 110 words of input data.There are no output data for processing. The following diagram shows the possible DP Master Class 2 configuration menu:


9 COMMUNICATIONS 9.2 PROFIBUS-DP COMMUNICATIONS

9

Figure 9–2: SLAVE CONFIGURATION

Table 9–1: PROFIBUS INPUT DATA (Sheet 1 of 3)OFFSET CYCLIC DATA

(ACTUAL VALUES)LENGTH (BYTES)

MINIMUM MAXIMUM STEP VALUE

UNITS FORMAT CODE

DEFAULTVALUE HEX VALUE HEX

0 MotorStatus 2 0 0000 4 0004 1 – F133 0

2 TC_Used 2 0 0000 100 0064 1 % F1 0

4 Time_to_Trip 2 –1 FFFF 65500 FFDC 1 s F20 –1

6 OverloadLT 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 s F1 0

8 StartsHourLT[5] 2 0 0000 60 003C 1 min F1 0

10 TimeBetween StartsLT 2 0 0000 500 01F4 1 min F1 0

12 RestartBlock LT 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 s F1 0

14 StartInhibitLT 2 0 0000 60 003C 1 min F1 0

16 AccessSwitch Status 2 0 0000 1 0001 1 – F131 0

18 SpeedSwitch Status 2 0 0000 1 0001 1 – F131 0

20 SpareSwitch Status 2 0 0000 1 0001 1 – F131 0

22 DiffSwitch Status 2 0 0000 1 0001 1 – F131 0

24 EmergencySwitch status 2 0 0000 1 0001 1 – F131 0

26 ResetSwitch Status 2 0 0000 1 0001 1 – F131 0

28 TripRelayStatus 2 0 0000 1 0001 1 N/A F150 2

30 AlarmRelayStatus 2 0 0000 1 0001 1 N/A F150 2

32 Aux1RelayStatus 2 0 0000 1 0001 1 N/A F150 2

34 Aux2RelayStatus 2 0 0000 1 0001 1 N/A F150 2

36 Ia 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 A F1 0

38 Ib 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 A F1 0

40 Ic 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 A F1 0

42 AveragePhaseCurrent 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 A F1 0

44 MotorLoad 2 0 0000 2000 07D0 1 xFLA F3 0

46 CurrentUnbalance 2 0 0000 100 0064 1 % F1 0

48 U/B Biased Motor Load 2 0 0000 2000 07D0 1 xFLC F3 0

50 GroundCurrent 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 A F23 0



9

52 Vab 2 0 0000 65000 FDE8 1 V F1 0

54 Vbc 2 0 0000 65000 FDE8 1 V F1 0

56 Vca 2 0 0000 65000 FDE8 1 V F1 0

58 Van 2 0 0000 65000 FDE8 1 V F1 0

60 Vbn 2 0 0000 65000 FDE8 1 V F1 0

62 Vcn 2 0 0000 65000 FDE8 1 V F1 0

64 AvgLineVoltage 2 0 0000 65000 FDE8 1 V F1 0

66 AvgPhaseVoltage 2 0 0000 65000 FDE8 1 V F1 0

68 Frequency 2 0 0000 12000 2EE0 1 Hz F3 0

70 BackSpinFrequency 2 1 0001 12000 2EE0 1 Hz F3 0

72 PowerFactor 2 –99 FF9D 100 0064 1 – F21 0

74 RealPower–kW 2 –32000 8300 32000 7D00 1 kW F4 0

76 RealPower–hp 2 0 0000 65000 FDE8 1 hp F1 0

78 ReactivePower 2 –32000 8300 32000 7D00 1 kvar F4 0

80 ApparentPower 2 0 0000 65000 FDE8 1 kVA F1 0

82 MWh 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 MWh F1 0

84 PositiveMvarh 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 Mvarh F1 0

86 NegativeMvarh 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 Mvarh F1 0

88 HottestStatorRtd 2 0 0000 12 000C 1 F2 0

90 HottestStatorRtdTemp 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42

92 LocalRtd1 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42

94 LocalRtd2 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42

96 LocalRtd3 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42

98 LocalRtd4 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42

100 LocalRtd5 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42

102 LocalRtd6 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42

104 LocalRtd7 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42

106 LocalRtd8 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42

108 LocalRtd9 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42

110 LocalRtd10 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42

112 LocalRtd11 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42

114 LocalRtd12 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 –42

116 CurrentDemand 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 A F1 0

118 RealPowerDemand 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 kW F1 0

120 ReactivePowerDemand 2 –32000 8300 32000 7D00 1 kvar F4 0

122 ApparentPowerDemand 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 kVA F1 0

124 PeakCurrent 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 A F1 0

126 PeakRealPower 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 kW F1 0

128 PeakReactivePower 2 –32000 8300 32000 7D00 1 kvar F4 0

130 PeakApparentPower 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 kVA F1 0

132 Va angle 2 0 0000 359 0167 1 o F1 0

134 Vb angle 2 0 0000 359 0167 1 o F1 0

136 Vc angle 2 0 0000 359 0167 1 o F1 0

138 Ia angle 2 0 0000 359 0167 1 o F1 0

140 Ib angle 2 0 0000 359 0167 1 o F1 0

142 Ic angle 2 0 0000 359 0167 1 o F1 0

144 Learned AccelerationTime 2 1 0001 2500 09C4 1 s F2 0

146 Learned StartingCurrent 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 A F1 0




UNITS FORMAT CODE




9

148 Learned StartingCapacity 2 0 0000 100 0064 1 % F1 0

150 Learned RunningCoolTime Constant

2 0 0000 500 01F4 1 min F1 0

152 LearnedStoppedCoolTime Constant

2 0 0000 500 01F4 1 min F1 0

154 Last StartingCapacity 2 0 0000 100 0064 1 % F1 0

156 Learned UnbalanceKfactor 2 0 0000 29 001D 1 – F1 0

158 BSDState 2 0 0000 6 0006 1 – F27 0

160 RawPredictionTimer 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 s F2 0

162 NumberOfStarts 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 – F1 0

164 NumberOfRestarts 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 – F1 0

166 DigitalCounter 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 – F1 0

168 MotorRunningHours 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 hr F1 0

170 RelayOperatingHours 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 hr F1 0

172 Last trip Cause 2 0 0000 169 00A9 1 – F134 0

174 Last trip Date 4 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 N/A

178 Last trip Time 4 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A F19 N/A

182 Last pre-trip Ia 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 A F1 0

184 Last pre-trip Ib 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 A F1 0

186 Last pre-trip Ic 2 0 0000 65535 FFFF 1 A F1 0

188 Last pre-trip MotorLoad 2 0 0000 2000 07D0 1 FLA F3 0

190 Last pre-trip Unbalance 2 0 0000 100 0064 1 % F1 0

192 Last pre-trip Ig 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 A F23 0

194 Last trip HottestStatorRtd 2 0 0000 12 000C 1 – F1 0

196 Last trip HottestStatorTemp 2 –40 FFD8 200 00C8 1 °C F4 0

198 Last pre–trip Vab 2 0 0000 65000 FDE8 1 V F1 0

200 Last pre–trip Vbc 2 0 0000 65000 FDE8 1 V F1 0

202 Last pre–trip Vca 2 0 0000 65000 FDE8 1 V F1 0

204 Last pre–trip Van 2 0 0000 65000 FDE8 1 V F1 0

206 Last pre–trip Vbn 2 0 0000 65000 FDE8 1 V F1 0

208 Last pre–trip Vcn 2 0 0000 65000 FDE8 1 V F1 0

210 Last pre–trip Frequency 2 0 0000 12000 2EE0 1 Hz F3 0

212 Last pre–trip KiloWatts 2 –32000 8300 32000 7D00 1 kW F4 0

214 Last pre–trip KiloVAR 2 –32000 8300 32000 7D00 1 kvar F4 0

216 Last pre–trip KiloVA 2 0 0000 50000 C350 1 kVA F1 0

218 Last pre–trip PowerFactor 2 –99 FF9D 100 0064 1 – F21 0




UNITS FORMAT CODE




9

9.2.4 369 PROFIBUS-DP DIAGNOSTICS

The 369 Motor Management Relay supports both slave mandatory (6 bytes system-wide standardized) and slave specificdiagnostic data. If the diagnostics are considered high priority, the PLC/host program will be informed of the fault (alarm ortrip) and can call a special error routine.

Diagnostic bytes 1 through 6 represent standard diagnostic data and are formatted as follows.

The extended diagnosis for the relay is composed of 26 bytes (bytes 7 to 32) and contains diagnostic information accordingto the following table.

Table 9–2: DIAGNOSTIC BITS 1 THROUGH 7BYTE DESCRIPTION1 Station Status 12 Station Status 23 Station Status 34 Diagnostic Master Address5 Identification Number (High Byte)6 Identification Number (Low Byte)

Table 9–3: PROFIBUS DIAGNOSTICS (Sheet 1 of 5)BIT BYTE FUNCTION

0 to 7 7 Number of Diagnostic Bytes

0 8 SinglePhasingTrip

1 8 SpareSwitchTrip

2 8 EmergencySwitchTrip

3 8 DifferentialSwitchTrip

4 8 SpeedSwitchTrip

5 8 ResetSwitchTrip

6 8 Reserved

7 8 OverloadTrip

8 9 ShortCircuitTrip

9 9 ShortCircuitBackupTrip

10 9 MechanicalJamTrip

11 9 UndercurrentTrip

12 9 CurrentUnbalanceTrip

13 9 GroundFaultTrip

14 9 GroundFaultBackupTrip

15 9 Reserved

16 10 AccelerationTimerTrip

17 10 Rtd1Trip

18 10 Rtd2Trip

19 10 Rtd3Trip

20 10 Rtd4Trip

21 10 Rtd5Trip

22 10 Rtd6Trip

23 10 Rtd7Trip

24 11 Rtd8Trip

25 11 Rtd9Trip

26 11 Rtd10Trip

27 11 Rtd11Trip

28 11 Rtd12Trip

29 11 UnderVoltageTrip

30 11 OverVoltageTrip

31 11 VoltagePhaseReversalTrip

32 12 UnderfrequencyTrip

33 12 OverfrequencyTrip

34 12 LeadPowerFactorTrip

35 12 LagPowerFactorTrip

36 12 PositivekvarTrip

37 12 NegativekvarTrip

38 12 UnderpowerTrip

39 12 ReversePowerTrip

40 13 IncompleteSequenceTrip

41 13 SpareSwitchAlarm

42 13 EmergencySwitchAlarm

43 13 DifferentialSwitchAlarm

44 13 SpeedSwitchAlarm

45 13 ResetSwitchAlarm

46 13 Reserved

47 13 ThermalCapacityAlarm

48 14 OverloadAlarm

49 14 MechanicalJamAlarm

50 14 UndercurrentAlarm

51 14 CurrentUnbalanceAlarm

52 14 GroundFaultAlarm

53 14 UndervoltageAlarm

54 14 OvervoltageAlarm

55 14 OverfrequencyAlarm

56 15 UnderfrequencyAlarm

57 15 LeadPowerFactorAlarm

58 15 LagPowerFactorAlarm




9

59 15 PositivekvarAlarm

60 15 NegativekvarAlarm

61 15 UnderpowerAlarm

62 15 ReversePowerAlarm

63 15 Rtd1Alarm

64 16 Rtd2Alarm

65 16 Rtd3Alarm

66 16 Rtd4Alarm

67 16 Rtd5Alarm

68 16 Rtd6Alarm

69 16 Rtd7Alarm

70 16 Rtd8Alarm

71 16 Rtd9Alarm

72 17 Rtd10Alarm

73 17 Rtd11Alarm

74 17 Rtd12Alarm

75 17 Rtd1HighAlarm

76 17 Rtd2HighAlarm

77 17 Rtd3HighAlarm

78 17 Rtd4HighAlarm

79 17 Rtd5HighAlarm

80 18 Rtd6HighAlarm

81 18 Rtd7HighAlarm

82 18 Rtd8HighAlarm

83 18 Rtd9HighAlarm

84 18 Rtd10HighAlarm



87 18 OpenRTDSensorAlarm

88 19 ShortRTDAlarm

89 19 TripCountersAlarm

90 19 StarterFailureAlarm

91 19 CurrentDemandAlarm

92 19 KWDemandAlarm

93 19 KVARDemandAlarm

94 19 KVADemandAlarm

95 19 DigitalCounterAlarm

96 20 OverloadLockoutBlock

97 20 StartInhibitBlock

98 20 StartsHourBlock

99 20 TimeBetweenStartsBlock

100 20 RestartBlock

101 20 Reserved

102 20 BackSpinBlock

103 20 LossofRemoteRTDCommunication

104 21 RemoteRTD1Rtd1Trip

















































152 27 RemoteRTD1Rtd1Alarm








9














































9 COMMUNICATIONS 9.3 PROFIBUS-DPV1 COMMUNICATIONS

9

9.3PROFIBUS-DPV1 COMMUNICATIONS 9.3.1 369 PROFIBUS-DPV1 PARAMETERIZATION

The 369 Motor Management Relay supports mandatory parametrization as well as three bytes of user parameter data nec-essary for DPV1 devices. The relay keeps its user parameter data/setpoints in a non-volatile memory and does not requiredevice related parametrization during startup of the DP/V1 master, with the exception of the DPV1 Enable parameter. Toenable the DPV1 acyclical functionality, the DPV1 parameter must be set to “Enable” when configuring the device in yourmaster using the GSD file.

The EnerVista 369 Setup software is the best tool for editing user parametrization (setpoints) of the 369 device.

Figure 9–3: USER PARAMETER SETUP – ENABLE DPV1

9.3.2 369 PROFIBUS CONFIGURATION

The Profibus-DPV1 basic configuration has one DP/V1 master and one DPV1 slave. In a typical bus segment up to 32 sta-tions can be connected (a repeater has to be used if more then 32 stations operate on a bus). The end nodes on a Profi-bus-DPV1 network must be terminated to avoid reflections on the bus line.

The bus address for the relay as Profibus-DPV1 node can be set using the S1 369 SETUP 369 COMMUNICATIONS PROFIBUS ADDRESS setpoint or via the EnerVista 369 Setup software, which extends address range from 1 to 126.Address 126 is used only for commissioning purposes and should not be used to exchange user data.

The Profibus media is a twisted-pair copper cable along with 9-pin Sub-D connector, which connects the bus to the 369socket on the back of the relay. The 369 Motor Management Relay has autobaud support. The baud rates and other slavespecific information needed for configuration are contained in the 369_09E6.gse file, which is used by a network configura-tion program.

The 369 Motor Management Relay as a DPV1 slave transfers fast process data to the DP/V1 master according to master-slave principle. The 369 is a modular device, supporting up to 111 input modules.

Modules define a block size of input data to be read by the master, starting from offset zero. Adding modules in your Masterconfiguration increases the size of the total block of data that the Master will read, making it easy to choose a total blocksize of data that matches the user's requirements.


9.3 PROFIBUS-DPV1 COMMUNICATIONS 9 COMMUNICATIONS

9

9.3.3 369 PROFIBUS INPUT DATA

There are two options for configuring what data is made available through Profibus Input Data, based on the value of thePROFIBUS CYCLIC IN DATA setpoint (see Section 5.2.3: 369 Communications on page 5–5 for details). If the PROFIBUSCYCLIC IN DATA setpoint is set to “0” (default map), then the data available to be read matches Table 9–1: Profibus InputData on page 9–5.

The user can also exactly define the data provided and the order of that data. The Modbus User Definable Memory Maparea (refer to Section 9.6.2: User Definable Memory Map Area on page 9–34) and the PROFIBUS CYCLIC IN DATA setpointare used to define this data. The PROFIBUS CYCLIC IN DATA setpoint determines the number of 16-bit registers available tobe read through Profibus Input Data and the Modbus User Definable Memory Map is used to determine the data providedand the order of the data.

For example, if the user only wishes to read two 16-bit registers of data (4 bytes), the user selects a number of Input Mod-ules from the GSD file that add up to a total of 4 bytes. When the Profibus Master is reading the Input data, only 4 bytes ofInput data will be sent in the communication packet. The number of words should match the PROFIBUS CYCLIC IN DATA set-point, but it's not necessary. If the number of Input data bytes read from the master is greater than the user has defined withthe PROFIBUS CYCLIC IN DATA setpoint, the balance of the data will return zero values.

Figure 9–4: SLAVE CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE 1 – 4 BYTES OF INPUT DATA

Figure 9–5: SLAVE CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE 2 – 220 BYTES OF INPUT DATA


9 COMMUNICATIONS 9.3 PROFIBUS-DPV1 COMMUNICATIONS

9

9.3.4 369 PROFIBUS OUTPUT DATA

The capability to force the output relays states has been implemented in cyclic output data. As cyclic data is continuouslywritten, the 369 looks for a change in the value to execute the force relays command. Refer to Section 5.3.6e): Force Out-put Relays on page 5–23 more information about the force output relays feature.

A slave configuration example for 4 bytes of input data and 2 bytes of output data is shown below.

Figure 9–6: SLAVE CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE – 4 BYTES OF INPUT DATA, 2 BYTES OF OUTPUT DATA

9.3.5 369 PROFIBUS DIAGNOSTICS

The diagnostic data available for the Profibus-DPV1 option matches Table 9–3: Profibus Diagnostics on page 9–8. Whenno diagnostic information is available and the master initiates a diagnostics read, the six slave mandatory bytes are read.

Table 9–4: PROFIBUS OUTPUT DATAOFFSET CYCLIC DATA


MINIMUM MAXIMUM FORMAT CODEVALUE HEX VALUE HEX

0 Force Output Relays 2 0 0 15 F F141


9.3 PROFIBUS-DPV1 COMMUNICATIONS 9 COMMUNICATIONS

9

9.3.6 369 PROFIBUS-DPV1 ACYCLICAL COMMUNICATION

The following items have been made available through Profibus-DPV1 acyclical communication. Data is addressed throughthe use of “slot and index” addressing. Three parameters are required to read or write data from the 369 using a Profibus-DPV1 master:

1. Slot number

2. Index number

3. Data length (number of 16-bit words)

The value that is written acyclically to either FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS or BLOCK PROTECTION FUNCTIONS must bea 16-bit value. The lower byte contains the bitmask data (as per format codes noted) and the upper byte writtenmust always contain a value of zero.

Refer to Section 5.3.6e): Force Output Relays on page 5–23 for additional information about the force output relays feature.Refer to Section 5.3.4: Block Functions on page 5–16 for additional information about the protection function blocking fea-ture.

Table 9–5: PROFIBUS-DPV1 ACYCLIC WRITE DATAOBJECT SLOT INDEX LENGTH DESCRIPTION FORMAT

0 0 0 2 bytes Force Output Relays F1412 2 bytes Block Protection Functions F180

Table 9–6: PROFIBUS-DPV1 ACYCLIC READ DATAOBJECT SLOT INDEX LENGTH DATA ITEM FORMAT

0 0 0 2 bytes Trip Relay Status F1502 2 bytes Alarm Relay Status F1504 2 bytes Aux1 Relay Status F1506 2 bytes Aux2 Relay Status F1508 2 bytes Functions Currently Blocked F141

NOTE


9 COMMUNICATIONS 9.4 DEVICENET PROTOCOL

9

9.4DEVICENET PROTOCOL 9.4.1 DEVICENET COMMUNICATIONS

The device profile is an extension of the Generic Device Profile (0x00). It is a group 2 only server. The MAC ID and baudrate are programmable through relay front panel or the EnerVista 369 Setup software. The Poll function will return sevenbytes of the status and metering data and consumes one byte of control data. The COS\CYC operation is not supported.

The seven bytes of polling data are described in assembly object class 04, instance 64h. The single byte of control data isdescribed under assembly object class 04, instance 96h.

The 369 Motor Management Relay supports following DeviceNet object classes.

9.4.2 IDENTITY OBJECT (CLASS CODE 01H)

Identity object, Class code 01h, Services.

Identity object, Class code 01h, Attributes.

Identity object, Class code 01h, Instance 01h, Attributes.

The USINT and UINT data types are defined as follows: USINT = Unsigned integer byte (range 0 to 255); UINT = Unsignedinteger word (range 0 to 65535).

9.4.3 MESSAGE ROUTER (CLASS CODE 02H)

The message router (class code 2) object provides a messaging connection point through which a client may address aservice to any object or instance residing in the physical device. There is no external visible interface to the message routerobject.

Table 9–7: DEVICENET OBJECT CLASSESCLASS Object01h Identity02h Message Router03h DeviceNet04h Assembly05h Connection2Bh Acknowledge HandlerA0h IO data Input MappingA1h IO data Output MappingB0h Parameter Data input Mapping

CODE SERVICES AVAILABLE TO THIS OBJECTNAME DESCRIPTION

0x05 Reset Reset the device to power up configuration0x0E Get_Attribute_Single Returns the contents of the given attribute

ATTRIBUTE ACCESS NAME/DESCRIPTION DATA TYPE VALUE01h Get Revision of Identity object UINT 1

ATTRIBUTE ACCESS NAME/DESCRIPTION DATA TYPE VALUE01h Get Vendor ID UINT 92802h Get Device Type UINT 003h Get Product Code UINT 5304h Get Revision (Major, Minor) USINT (2) 2.2005h Get Status F178 ---07h Get Product Name Short-String 369 Motor Management Relay


9.4 DEVICENET PROTOCOL 9 COMMUNICATIONS

9

9.4.4 DEVICENET OBJECT (CLASS CODE 03H)

DeviceNet object, Class code 03h, Services:

DeviceNet object, Class Code 03h, Attributes:

DeviceNet object, Class Code 03h, Instance 01h, Attributes:

The USINT and UINT data types are defined as follows: USINT = Unsigned integer byte (range 0 to 255); UINT = Unsignedinteger word (range 0 to 65535).

9.4.5 ASSEMBLY OBJECT (CLASS CODE 04H)

The assembly objects bind attributes of multiple objects to allow data to or from each object to be sent or received over asingle connection. There are 6 instances of the assembly object for the device.

Assembly object, Class code 04h, Services:

Assembly object, Class code 04h, Attributes.

Assembly object, Class code 04h, Instance 64h, Attributes.


0x0E Get_Attribute_Single Returns the contents of the given attribute

ATTRIBUTE ACCESS NAME/DESCRIPTION DATA TYPE VALUE01h Get Revision of DeviceNet object USINT 2

ATTRIBUTE ACCESS NAME/DESCRIPTION DATA TYPE VALUE01h Get MAC ID USINT 0 to 6302h Get Baud Rate USINT 0 = 125 kbps, 1 = 250 kbps,

2 = 500 kbps05h Get Allocation choice BYTE Bit 0: explicit messaging

Bit 1: polled I/OBit 4: COS I/OBit 5: cyclic I/OBit 6: acknowledge suppression

Master’s MAC ID USINT 0 to 63: address;255 = unallocated


0x0E Get_Attribute_Single Returns the contents of the given attribute0X10 Set_Attribute_Single Sets the contents of the given attribute

ATTRIBUTE ACCESS NAME/DESCRIPTION DATA TYPE VALUE01h Get Revision of Assembly object UINT 202h Get Maximum instance number UINT 150

ATTRIBUTE ACCESS NAME/DESCRIPTION DATA TYPE VALUE03h Get Motor data bytes (7) see below

DATA FORMATS, MOTOR DATABYTE DESCRIPTION LENGTH UNITS FORMAT DEFAULT1 Motor status 1 byte - F172 02 Digital input status 1 byte - F173 03 Digital output status 1 byte - F174 04 Flag change state 1 byte - F175 05 Thermal capacity used 1 byte % USINT 06 (lo), 7 (hi) Time to trip 2 bytes seconds F20 –1



9






For execution of DeviceNet control commands, one of the switch assignments should be set to “DeviceNet Control” and beclosed.

The motor start command energizes the output relay set with the START CONTROL RELAY setpoint. The motor stop com-mand energizes the trip relay. The fault reset command resets the latched trip and alarm conditions, provided the cause ofalarm/trip is removed. The commands are executed continuously as long as the control bits are high. When two or morecommands are executed simultaneously, only one will be executed. The command hierarchy for execution is given below.

1. Motor stop2. Fault reset3. Motor start

The corresponding command bit should be high for more than 500 ms to execute the command.

ATTRIBUTE ACCESS NAME/DESCRIPTION DATA TYPE VALUE03h Get Flag change state byte see below

DATA FORMATS, FLAG CHANGE STATEBIT POSITION NAME VALUES0 Trip/alarm flag 0 = no change; 1 = trip or alarm1 to 7 Reserved ---

ATTRIBUTE ACCESS NAME/DESCRIPTION DATA TYPE VALUE03h Get Digital data bytes (4) see below

DATA FORMATS, DIGITAL DATABYTE DESCRIPTION LENGTH UNITS FORMAT DEFUALT1 Motor status 1 byte --- F172 02 Digital input status 1 byte --- F173 03 Digital output status 1 byte --- F174 04 Flag change state 1 byte --- F175 0

ATTRIBUTE ACCESS NAME/DESCRIPTION DATA TYPE VALUE03h Get Thermal capacity used USINT %

ATTRIBUTE ACCESS NAME/DESCRIPTION DATA TYPE DATA FORMAT VALUE03h Get Time to trip Word F20 –1 second

ATTRIBUTE ACCESS NAME/DESCRIPTION DATA TYPE VALUE03h Set Control byte 1 byte see below

DATA FORMATS, CONTROL BYTEBIT POSITION NAME VALUE0 Motor start 0, 11 Motor stop 0, 12 Fault reset 0, 13 Reserved ---4 Reserved ---5 Reserved ---6 Reserved ---7 Reserved ---



9

9.4.6 DEVICENET CONNECTION OBJECT (CLASS CODE 05H)

The connection objects manage the characteristics of each communication connection. There are two instances of the con-nection object in the device: explicit connection (<50 ms response) and input/output connection poll (<10 ms response).

Connection Object, Class Code 05h, Services:

Connection Object, Class Code 05h, Instance 01h (explicit message connection):

Connection Object, Class Code 05h, Instance 02h (polled input/output connection):

CODE NAME AND DESCRIPTION OF SERVICES AVAILABLE TO THIS OBJECT0x05 Reset the connection - restart timer0x0E Get_Attribute_Single: Returns the contents of the given attribute.0x10 Set_Attribute_Single: Sets the contents of the given attribute

ATTRIBUTE ACCESS NAME/DESCRIPTION DATA TYPE VALUE01h Get State BYTE 0x0302h Get Instance_type BYTE 0x00, 0x0103h Get Export class trigger BYTE 0x8304h Get Produced connection ID UINT 10xxxxxx011, xxxxxx = MAC ID05h Get Consumed connection ID UINT 10xxxxxx011, xxxxxx = MAC ID06h Get Initial comm. characteristics UINT 0x2107h Get Produced connection size UINT 0x1208h Get Consumed connection size UINT 0x1209h Get/Set Expected package rate UINT 0x000Ch Get/Set Watchdog timeout action USINT 0 = transition to time-out

1 = auto delete, 2 = auto reset3 = deferred delete

0Dh Get Produced path length UINT 0x00000Eh Get Produced path BYTE [6] <null>0Fh Get Consumed path length UINT 0x000010h Get Consumed path BYTE [6] <null>11h Get Production inhibit timer UINT 0x0000

ATTRIBUTE ACCESS NAME/DESCRIPTION DATA TYPE VALUE01h Get State BYTE 0x0302h Get Instance_type BYTE 0x0103h Get Export class trigger BYTE 0x80, 0x8204h Get Produced connection ID UINT MAC ID05h Get Consumed connection ID UINT MAC ID06h Get Initial comm. characteristics UINT 0x01, 0xF107h Get Produced connection size UINT 0x0108h Get Consumed connection size UINT 0x0109h Get/Set Expected package rate UINT 0x000Ch Get/Set Watchdog timeout action UINT 0x000Dh Get Produced path length UINT 0x00060Eh Get Produced path BYTE [6] <null>0Fh Get Consumed path length UINT 0x000610h Get Consumed path BYTE [6] <null>11h Get Production inhibit timer UINT 0x0000



9

9.4.7 ACKNOWLEDGE HANDLER OBJECT (CLASS CODE 2BH)

Acknowledge Handler Object, Class Code 2Bh, Services:

Acknowledge Handler object, Class code 2Bh, Attributes.

Acknowledge Handler object, Class code 2Bh, Instance 01h, Attributes:

9.4.8 I/O DATA INPUT MAPPING OBJECT (CLASS CODE A0H)

I/O Data Input Mapping Object, Class code A0h, Services:

Input/Output Data Input Mapping object, Class code A0h, Attributes.

I/O Data Input Mapping object, Class code A0h, Instance 01h, Attributes:

CODE NAME DESCRIPTION0x0E Get_Attribute_Single Returns the contents of the given attribute0x10 Set_Attribute_Single Sets the contents of the given attribute

ATTRIBUTE ACCESS NAME/DESCRIPTION DATA TYPE VALUE01h Get Revision of Acknowledge Handler

objectUINT 1

02h Get Maximum instance number UINT 1

ATTRIBUTE ACCESS NAME/DESCRIPTION DATA TYPE VALUE01h Get Acknowledge timer UINT 16 ms02h Get Retry limit USINT 1

CODE NAME DESCRIPTION0x0E Get_Attribute_Single Returns the contents of the given attribute

ATTRIBUTE ACCESS NAME/DESCRIPTION DATA TYPE VALUE01h Get Revision of I/O Data Input Mapping object UINT 1

ATTRIBUTE ACCESS NAME/DESCRIPTION DATA TYPE DATA FORMAT01h Get Motor data bytes (7) see below02h Get Flag change state byte F17503h Get Digital data bytes (4) see below04h Get Thermal capacity used USINT %05h Get Time to trip Word F20

DATA FORMATS, MOTOR DATABYTE DESCRIPTION LENGTH UNITS FORMAT DEFAULT1 Motor status 1 byte --- F172 02 Digital input status 1 byte --- F173 03 Digital output status 1 byte --- F174 04 Flag change state 1 byte --- F175 05 Thermal capacity used 1 byte % USINT 06 (lo) Time to trip 2 bytes seconds INT –17 (hi)

DATA FORMATS, DIGITAL DATABYTE DESCRIPTION LENGTH UNITS FORMAT DEFAULT1 Motor status 1 byte --- F172 02 Digital input status 1 byte --- F173 03 Digital output status 1 byte --- F174 04 Flag change state 1 byte --- F175 0



9

9.4.9 I/O DATA OUTPUT MAPPING OBJECT (CLASS CODE A1H)

I/O Data Output Mapping Object, Class code A1h, Services:

I/O Data Input Mapping object, Class code A0h, Instance 01h, Attributes:

CODE NAME DESCRIPTION0x0E Get_Attribute_Single Returns the contents of the given attribute0x10 Set_Attribute_Single Sets the contents of the given attribute

ATTRIBUTE ACCESS NAME/DESCRIPTION DATA TYPE DATA FORMAT01h Set Control byte 1 byte see below

DATA FORMATS, CONTROL BYTEBIT POSITION NAME VALUES0 Motor start 0, 11 Motor stop 0, 12 Fault reset 0, 13 Reserved ---4 Reserved ---5 Reserved ---6 Reserved ---7 Reserved ---



9

9.4.10 PARAMETER DATA INPUT MAPPING OBJECT (CLASS CODE B0H)

Parameter Data Input Mapping object, Class code B0h, Services:

Parameter Data Input Mapping object, Class code B0h, Attributes.

Parameter Data Input Mapping object, Class code B0h, Instance 01h, Attributes:

CODE NAME DESCRIPTION0x0E Get_Attribute_Single Returns the contents of the given attribute

ATTRIBUTE ACCESS NAME/DESCRIPTION DATA TYPE VALUE01h Get Revision of Identity object UINT 1

ATTRIBUTE ACCESS NAME/DESCRIPTION DATA TYPE VALUE01h Get Currents bytes (10) see below02h Get Current angles bytes (6) see below03h Get Motor load bytes (6) see below04h Get Line voltages bytes (8) see below05h Get Phase voltages bytes (8) see below06h Get Phase voltage angles bytes (6) see below07h Get Frequency bytes (2) see below08h Get BSD state and frequency bytes (4) see below09h Get Power bytes (10) see below0Ah Get Energy bytes (6) see below0Bh Get Local hottest stator RTD and temperature bytes (4) see below0Ch Get Local RTD temperatures bytes (24) see below0Dh Get Demand bytes (8) see below0Eh Get Peak values bytes (8) see below0Fh Get Learned data bytes (14) see below10h Get Motor statistics bytes (12) see below11h Get Cause of trip bytes (2) see below12h Get Last trip date and time bytes (16) see below13h Get Last pre-trip currents bytes (8) see below14h Get Last pre-trip motor load bytes (4) see below15h Get Pre-trip local hottest stator RTD and temperature bytes (4) see below16h Get Last pre-trip line voltages bytes (6) see below17h Get Last pre-trip phase voltages bytes (6) see below18h Get Last pre-trip frequency bytes (2) see below19h Get Last pre-trip power bytes (8) see below1Ah Get Trip diagnostic data bytes (6) see below1Bh Get Alarm diagnostic data bytes (8) see below1Ch Get Start block status data bytes (10) see below1Dh Get Actual values bytes (202) see below



9

DATA FORMATS FOR CLASS CODE B0H, INSTANCE 1 (Sheet 1 of 5)ATTRIBUTE BYTES DESCRIPTION LENGTH FORMAT VALUE/UNIT01hCURRENTS

1,2 (low, high) Phase Current Ia 16 bits UINT A3,4 (low, high) Phase Current Ib 16 bits UINT A5,6 (low, high) Phase Current Ic 16 bits UINT A7,8 (low, high) Average phase current Iav 16 bits UINT A9,10 (low, high) Ground current Ig 16 bits F23 0.1 × A or 0.01 × A

02hCURRENT ANGLES

1,2 (low, high) Ia angle 16 bits UINT degrees3,4 (low, high) Ib angle 16 bits UINT degrees5,6 (low, high) Ic angle 16 bits UINT degrees

03hMOTOR LOAD

1,2 (low, high) Motor load 16 bits F3 0.01 × FLA3,4 (low, high) Current unbalance 16 bits UINT %5,6 (low, high) Unbalanced biased motor load (Ieq) 16 bits F3 0.01 × FLA

04hLINE VOLTAGES

1,2 (low, high) Voltage Vab 16 bits UINT V3,4 (low, high) Voltage Vbc 16 bits UINT V5,6 (low, high) Voltage Vca 16 bits UINT V7,8 (low, high) Average line voltage 16 bits UINT V

05hPHASE VOLTAGES

1,2 (low, high) Voltage Van 16 bits UINT V3,4 (low, high) Voltage Vbn 16 bits UINT V5,6 (low, high) Voltage Vcn 16 bits UINT V7,8 (low, high) Average phase voltage 16 bits UINT V

06hPHASE VOLTAGE ANGLES

1,2 (low, high) Va angle 16 bits UINT degrees3,4 (low, high) Vb angle 16 bits UINT degrees5,6 (low, high) Vc angle 16 bits UINT degrees

07hFREQUENCY

1,2 (low, high) Frequency 16 bits F3 × 0.01 Hz

08hBSD STATE AND FREQ.

1,2 (low, high) BSD state 16 bits F27 --3,4 (low, high) Backspin frequency 16 bits F3 × 0.01 Hz5,6 (low, high) Backspin prediction timer 16 bits F1 s

09hPOWER

1,2 (low, high) Power factor 16 bits F21 × 0.01 PF3,4 (low, high) Real power (kW) 16 bits F4 kW5,6 (low, high) Real power (hp) 16 bits UINT hp7,8 (low, high) Reactive power 16 bits F4 kvar9,10 (low, high) Apparent power 16 bits UINT kVA

0AhENERGY

1,2 (low, high) MWh 16 bits UINT MWh3,4 (low, high) Positive Mvarh 16 bits UINT Mvarh5,6 (low, high) Negative Mvarh 16 bits UINT Mvarh

0BhRTD TEMP-ERATURE

1,2 (low, high) Local hottest stator RTD 16 bits UINT ---3,4 (low, high) Local hottest stator RTD temperature 16 bits F4 °C



9

0ChLOCAL RTD TEMP-ERATURE

1,2 (low, high) Local RTD 1 temperature 16 bits F4 °C3,4 (low, high) Local RTD 2 temperature 16 bits F4 °C5,6 (low, high) Local RTD 3 temperature 16 bits F4 °C7,8 (low, high) Local RTD 4 temperature 16 bits F4 °C9,10 (low, high) Local RTD 5 temperature 16 bits F4 °C11,12 (low, high) Local RTD 6 temperature 16 bits F4 °C13,14 (low, high) Local RTD 7 temperature 16 bits F4 °C15,16 (low, high) Local RTD 8 temperature 16 bits F4 °C17,18 (low, high) Local RTD 9 temperature 16 bits F4 °C19,20 (low, high) Local RTD 10 temperature 16 bits F4 °C21,22 (low, high) Local RTD 11 temperature 16 bits F4 °C23,24 (low, high) Local RTD 12 temperature 16 bits F4 °C

0DhDEMAND

1,2 (low, high) Current demand 16 bits UINT A3,4 (low, high) Real power demand 16 bits UINT kW5,6 (low, high) Reactive power demand 16 bits UINT kvar7,8 (low, high) Apparent power demand 16 bits UINT kVA

0EhPEAK DEMAND

1,2 (low, high) Peak current demand 16 bits UINT A3,4 (low, high) Peak real power demand 16 bits UINT kW5,6 (low, high) Peak reactive power demand 16 bits UINT kvar7,8 (low, high) Peak apparent power demand 16 bits UINT kVA

0FhLEARNED DATA

1,2 (low, high) Learned acceleration time 16 bits F2 x 0.1 seconds3,4 (low, high) Learned starting current 16 bits UINT A5,6 (low, high) Learned starting capacity 16 bits UINT %7,8 (low, high) Learned running cool time constant 16 bits UINT minutes9,10 (low, high) Learned stopped cool time constant 16 bits UINT minutes11,12 (low, high) Last starting capacity 16 bits UINT %13,14 (low, high) Learned unbalance k-factor 16 bits UINT --

10hMOTOR STATISTICS

1,2 (low, high) Number of starts 16 bits UINT --3,4 (low, high) Number of restarts 16 bits UINT --5,6 (low, high) Digital counter 16 bits UINT --7,8 (low, high) Motor running hours 16 bits UINT hours

11hCAUSE OF LAST TRIP

1,2 (low, high) Cause of last trip 16 bits F134 --

12hLAST PRE-TRIP DATE AND TIME.

1 to 4(low, high) Last trip date 32 bits F18 --5 to 8(low, high) Last trip time 32 bits F19 --

13hLAST PRE-TRIP CURRENTS

1,2 (low, high) Last pre-trip Ia 16 bits UINT A3,4 (low, high) Last pre-trip Ib 16 bits UINT A5,6 (low, high) Last pre-trip Ic 16 bits UINT A7,8 (low, high) Last pre-trip Ig 16 bits F2 0.1 × A

14hLAST PRE-TRIP MOTOR LOAD

1,2 (low, high) Last pre-trip motor load 16 bits F3 × 0.01 FLA3,4 (low, high) Last pre-trip unbalance 16 bits UINT %

15hPRE-TRIP STATOR RTD TEMP.

1,2 (low, high) Local pre-trip hottest stator RTD 16 bits UINT ---3,4 (low, high) Local pre-trip hottest stator RTD

temperature16 bits F4 °C

DATA FORMATS FOR CLASS CODE B0H, INSTANCE 1 (Sheet 2 of 5)ATTRIBUTE BYTES DESCRIPTION LENGTH FORMAT VALUE/UNIT



9

16hLAST PRE-TRIP LINE VOLTAGES

1,2 (low, high) Last pre-trip Vab 16 bits UINT volts3,4 (low, high) Last pre-trip Vbc 16 bits UINT volts5,6 (low, high) Last pre-trip Vca 16 bits UINT volts

17hLAST PRE-TRIP PHASE VOLTAGES

1,2 (low, high) Last pre-trip Van 16 bits UINT volts3,4 (low, high) Last pre-trip Vbn 16 bits UINT volts5,6 (low, high) Last pre-trip Vcn 16 bits UINT volts

18hLAST PRE-TRIP FREQ.

1,2 (low, high) Last pre-trip frequency 16 bits F3 × 0.01 Hz

19hLAST PRE-TRIP POWER

1,2 (low, high) Last pre-trip kilowatts 16 bits F4 kW3,4 (low, high) Last pre-trip kvar 16 bits F4 kvar5,6 (low, high) Last pre-trip KVA 16 bits UINT kVA7,8 (low, high) Last pre-trip power factor 16 bits F21 × 0.01 PF

1AhTRIP DIAG.

6 bytes Trip diagnostic data 48 bits F176

1BhALARM DIAG.

8 bytes Alarm diagnostic data 64 bits F177

1ChSTART BLOCK STATUS

1,2 (low, high) Overload lockout timer 16 bits UINT minutes3,4 (low, high) Starts timer [1] 16 bits UINT minutes5,6 (low, high) Starts timer [2] 16 bits UINT minutes7,8 (low, high) Starts timer [3] 16 bits UINT minutes9,10 (low, high) Starts timer [4] 16 bits UINT minutes11,12 (low, high) Starts timer [5] 16 bits UINT minutes13,14 (low, high) Time between starts timer 16 bits UINT minutes15,16 (low, high) Restart block timer 16 bits UINT seconds17,16 (low, high) Start inhibit timer 16 bits UINT minutes

1DhACTUAL VALUES

1,2 (low, high) Phase current Ia 16 bits UINT A3,4 (low, high) Phase current Ib 16 bits UINT A5,6 (low, high) Phase current Ic 16 bits UINT A7,8 (low, high) Average phase current Iav 16 bits UINT A9,10 (low, high) Ground current Ig 16 bits F23 0.1 × A or 0.01 × A11,12 (low, high) Ia angle 16 bits UINT degrees13,14 (low, high) Ib angle 16 bits UINT degrees15,16 (low, high) Ic angle 16 bits UINT degrees17,18 (low, high) Motor load 16 bits F3 × 0.01 FLA19,20 (low, high) Current unbalance 16 bits UINT %21,22 (low, high) Unbalanced biased motor load (Ieq) 16 bits F3 0.01 × FLA23,24 (low, high) Voltage Vab 16 bits UINT V25,26 (low, high) Voltage Vbc 16 bits UINT V27,28 (low, high) Voltage Vca 16 bits UINT V29,30 (low, high) Average line voltage 16 bits UINT V31,32 (low, high) Voltage Van 16 bits UINT V33,34 (low, high) Voltage Vbn 16 bits UINT V35,36 (low, high) Voltage Vcn 16 bits UINT V37,38 (low, high) Average phase voltage 16 bits UINT V39,40 (low, high) Va angle 16 bits UINT degrees41,42 (low, high) Vb angle 16 bits UINT degrees43,44 (low, high) Vc angle 16 bits UINT degrees45,46 (low, high) Frequency 16 bits F3 × 0.01 Hz




9

1DhACTUAL VALUEScontinued

47,48 (low, high) BSD state 16 bits F27 --49,50 (low, high) Backspin frequency 16 bits F3 × 0.01 Hz51,52 (low, high) Backspin prediction timer 16 bits F1 seconds53,54 (low, high) Power factor 16 bits F21 × 0.01 PF55,56 (low, high) Real power (kW) 16 bits F4 kW57,58 (low, high) Real power (hp) 16 bits UINT hp59,60 (low, high) Reactive power 16 bits F4 kvar61,62 (low, high) Apparent power 16 bits UINT kVA63,64 (low, high) MWh 16 bits UINT MWh65,66 (low, high) Positive Mvarh 16 bits UINT Mvarh67,68 (low, high) Negative Mvarh 16 bits UINT Mvarh69,70 (low, high) Local Hottest stator RTD 16 bits UINT ---71,72 (low, high) Local Hottest stator RTD temperature 16 bits F4 °C73,74 (low, high) Local RTD 1 temperature 16 bits F4 °C75,76 (low, high) Local RTD 2 temperature 16 bits F4 °C77,78 (low, high) Local RTD 3 temperature 16 bits F4 °C79,80 (low, high) Local RTD 4 temperature 16 bits F4 °C81,82 (low, high) Local RTD 5 temperature 16 bits F4 °C83,84 (low, high) Local RTD 6 temperature 16 bits F4 °C85,86 (low, high) Local RTD 7 temperature 16 bits F4 °C87,88 (low, high) Local RTD 8 temperature 16 bits F4 °C89,90 (low, high) Local RTD 9 temperature 16 bits F4 °C91,92 (low, high) Local RTD 10 temperature 16 bits F4 °C93,94 (low, high) Local RTD 11 temperature 16 bits F4 °C95,96 (low, high) Local RTD 12 temperature 16 bits F4 °C97,98 (low, high) Current demand 16 bits UINT A99,100 (low, high) Real power demand 16 bits UINT kW101,102 (low, high) Reactive power demand 16 bits F4 kvar103, 104 (low, high) Apparent power demand 16 bits UINT kVA105, 106 (low, high) Peak current demand 16 bits UINT A107, 108 (low, high) Peak real power demand 16 bits UINT kW109, 110 (low, high) Peak reactive power demand 16 bits F4 kvar111,112 (low, high) Peak apparent power demand 16 bits UINT kVA113,114 (low, high) Learned acceleration time 16 bits F2 × 0.1 seconds115,116 (low, high) Learned starting current 16 bits UINT A117,118 (low, high) Learned starting capacity 16 bits UINT %119,120 (low, high) Learned running cool time constant 16 bits UINT minutes121,122 (low, high) Learned stopped cool time constant 16 bits UINT minutes123,124 (low, high) Last starting capacity 16 bits UINT %125,126 (low, high) Learned unbalance k-factor 16 bits UINT --127,128 (low, high) Number of starts 16 bits UINT --129,130 (low, high) Number of restarts 16 bits UINT --131,132 (low, high) Digital counter 16 bits UINT --133,134 (low, high) Motor running Hours 16 bits UINT hours135,136 (low, high) Cause of last trip 16 bits F134 --137 to 140 (low, high) Last trip date 32 bits F18 --141 to 144 (low, high) Last trip time 32 bits F19 --




9

1DhACTUAL VALUEScontinued

145, 146 (low, high) Last pre-trip Ia 16 bits UINT A147, 148 (low, high) Last pre-trip Ib 16 bits UINT A149, 150 (low, high) Last Pre-trip Ic 16 bits UINT A151, 152 (low, high) Last Pre-trip Ig 16 bits F2 × 0.1 A153, 154 (low, high) Last pre-trip motor load 16 bits F3 × 0.01 FLA155, 156 (low, high) Last pre-trip unbalance 16 bits UINT %157, 158 (low, high) Last pre-trip local hottest stator RTD 16 bits UINT ---159, 160 (low, high) Last pre-trip local hottest stator RTD

temperature16 bits F4 °C

161, 162 (low, high) Last pre-trip Vab 16 bits UINT volts163, 164 (low, high) Last pre-trip Vbc 16 bits UINT volts165, 166 (low, high) Last pre-trip Vca 16 bits UINT volts167, 168 (low, high) Last pre-trip Van 16 bits UINT volts169, 170 (low, high) Last pre-trip Vbn 16 bits UINT volts171, 172 (low, high) Last pre-trip Vcn 16 bits UINT volts173, 174 (low, high) Last pre-trip frequency 16 bits F3 × 0.01 Hz175, 176 (low, high) Last pre-trip kilowatts 16 bits F4 kW177, 178 (low, high) Last pre-trip kvar 16 bits F4 kvar179, 180 (low, high) Last pre-trip KVA 16 bits UINT kVA181, 182 (low, high) Last pre-trip power factor 16 bits F21 × 0.01 PF183 to 188 Trip diagnostic data 48 bits F176189 to 196 Alarm diagnostic data 64 bits F177197, 198 (low, high) Overload lockout timer 16 bits UINT minutes199, 200 (low, high) Starts timer [1] 16 bits UINT minutes201, 202 (low, high) Starts timer [2] 16 bits UINT minutes203, 204 (low, high) Starts timer [3] 16 bits UINT minutes205, 206 (low, high) Starts timer [4] 16 bits UINT minutes207, 208 (low, high) Starts timer [5] 16 bits UINT minutes209, 210 (low, high) Time between starts timer 16 bits UINT minutes211, 212 (low, high) Restart block timer 16 bits UINT seconds213, 214 (low, high) Start inhibit timer 16 bits UINT minutes




9

9.4.11 DEVICENET DATA FORMATS

FORMAT VALUE NAME/DESCRIPTIONF167 Network status: unsigned 16 bit integer

0 Power off / Not online1 Online, Connected2 Link failure3 Not defined

F168 Connection status: unsigned 16 bit integer0 Nonexistent1 Configuring2 (Not used)3 Established4 Timed out5 Deferred delete

F170 DeviceNet baud rate: unsigned 16 bit integer0 125 kbps1 250 kbps2 500 kbps

F172 Motor status: Unsigned 8 bit integerBit 0 StoppedBit 1 StartingBit 2 RunningBit 3 OverloadedBit 4 Tripped

Bits 5 to 7 ReservedF173 Digital input status: unsigned 8 bit integer

Bit 0 Access Switch Status0 = Open, 1= Closed

Bit 1 Speed Switch Status0 = Open, 1= Closed

Bit 2 Spare Switch Status0 = Open, 1= Closed

Bit 3 Differential Switch Status0 = Open, 1= Closed

Bit 4 Emergency Switch status0 = Open, 1= Closed

Bit 5 Reset Switch Status0 = Open, 1= Closed

Bit 6 ReservedBit 7 Reserved

F174 Output relay status: unsigned 8 bit integerBit 0 Trip Relay Status

0 = De-energized, 1 = EnergizedBit 1 Alarm Relay Status

0 = De-energized, 1 = EnergizedBit 2 Aux1 Relay Status

0 = De-energized, 1 = EnergizedBit 3 Aux2 Relay Status

0 = De-energized, 1 = EnergizedBits 4 to 7 Reserved

F175 Flag change state: unsigned 8 bit integerBit 0 Trip/Alarm status; 1= operated

Bits 1 to 7 ReservedF176 Relay trips: bitmask

Byte 1 Bit 0 Single Phasing TripBit 1 Spare Switch TripBit 2 Emergency Switch TripBit 3 Differential Switch TripBit 4 Speed Switch TripBit 5 Reset Switch TripBit 6 ReservedBit 7 Overload Trip

Byte 2 Bit 0 Short Circuit TripBit 1 Short Circuit Backup TripBit 2 Mechanical Jam TripBit 3 Undercurrent TripBit 4 Current Unbalance TripBit 5 Ground Fault TripBit 6 Ground Fault Backup TripBit 7 Reserved

Byte 3 Bit 0 Acceleration Timer TripBit 1 RTD 1 TripBit 2 RTD 2 TripBit 3 RTD 3 TripBit 4 RTD 4 TripBit 5 RTD 5 TripBit 6 RTD 6 TripBit 7 RTD 7 Trip

Byte 4 Bit 0 RTD 8 TripBit 1 RTD 9 TripBit 2 RTD 10 TripBit 3 RTD 11 TripBit 4 RTD 12 TripBit 5 Undervoltage TripBit 6 Overvoltage TripBit 7 Voltage Phase Reversal Trip

FORMAT VALUE NAME/DESCRIPTION



9

F176ctd.

Byte 5 Bit 0 Underfrequency TripBit 1 Overfrequency TripBit 2 Lead Power Factor TripBit 3 Lag Power Factor TripBit 4 Positive kvar TripBit 5 Negative kvar TripBit 6 Underpower TripBit 7 Reverse Power Trip

Byte 6 Bit 0 Incomplete Sequence TripBit 1 ReservedBit 2 ReservedBit 3 ReservedBit 4 ReservedBit 5 ReservedBit 6 ReservedBit 7 Reserved

F177 Relay alarms: bitmaskByte 1 Bit 0 Spare Switch Alarm

Bit 1 Emergency Switch AlarmBit 2 Differential Switch AlarmBit 3 Speed Switch AlarmBit 4 Reset Switch AlarmBit 5 ReservedBit 6 Thermal Capacity AlarmBit 7 Overload Alarm

Byte 2 Bit 0 Mechanical Jam AlarmBit 1 Undercurrent AlarmBit 2 Current Unbalance AlarmBit 3 Ground Fault AlarmBit 4 Undervoltage AlarmBit 5 Overvoltage AlarmBit 6 Overfrequency AlarmBit 7 Underfrequency Alarm

Byte 3 Bit 0 Lead Power Factor AlarmBit 1 Lag Power Factor AlarmBit 2 Positive kvar AlarmBit 3 Negative kvar AlarmBit 4 Underpower AlarmBit 5 Reverse Power AlarmBit 6 RTD 1 AlarmBit 7 RTD 2 Alarm

FORMAT VALUE NAME/DESCRIPTIONF177ctd.

Byte 4 Bit 0 RTD 3 AlarmBit 1 RTD 4 AlarmBit 2 RTD 5 AlarmBit 3 RTD 6 AlarmBit 4 RTD 7 AlarmBit 5 RTD 8 AlarmBit 6 RTD 9 AlarmBit 7 RTD 10 Alarm

Byte 5 Bit 0 RTD 11 AlarmBit 1 RTD 12 AlarmBit 2 RTD 1 High AlarmBit 3 RTD 2 High AlarmBit 4 RTD 3 High AlarmBit 5 RTD 4 High AlarmBit 6 RTD 5 High AlarmBit 7 RTD 6 High Alarm

Byte 6 Bit 0 RTD 7 High AlarmBit 1 RTD 8 High AlarmBit 2 RTD 9 High AlarmBit 3 RTD 10 High AlarmBit 4 RTD 11 High AlarmBit 5 RTD 12 High AlarmBit 6 Open RTD Sensor AlarmBit 7 Short RTD Alarm

Byte 7 Bit 0 Trip Counters AlarmBit 1 Starter Failure AlarmBit 2 Current Demand AlarmBit 3 kW Demand AlarmBit 4 kvar Demand AlarmBit 5 kVA Demand AlarmBit 6 Digital Counter AlarmBit 7 Overload Lockout Block

Byte 8 Bit 0 Start Inhibit BlockBit 1 Starts Hour BlockBit 2 Time Between Starts BlockBit 3 Restart BlockBit 4 ReservedBit 5 Back-Spin BlockBit 6 Loss of Remote RTD

CommunicationBit 7 Spare Switch Alarm




9

F178 DeviceNet Communication status: unsigned 16 bit integer

Bit 0 0 = not owned,1 = owned by master

Bit 1 ReservedBit 2 0 = factory default, 1= configured

Bits 3 to 7 ReservedBit 8 1 = Minor recoverable faultBit 9 1 = Minor unrecoverable fault

Bit 10 1 = Major recoverable faultBit 11 1 = Major unrecoverable fault

Bits 12 to 15 Reserved



9.5 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL 9 COMMUNICATIONS

9

9.5MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL 9.5.1 DATA FRAME FORMAT AND DATA RATE

One data frame of an asynchronous transmission to or from an 369 is default to 1 start bit, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit. Thisproduces a 10 bit data frame. This is important for transmission through modems at high bit rates (11 bit data frames arenot supported by Hayes modems at bit rates of greater than 300 bps). The parity bit is optional as odd or even. If it is pro-grammed as odd or even, the data frame consists of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit, and 1 stop bit.

Modbus protocol can be implemented at any standard communication speed. The 369 RS485, fiber optic and RS232 portssupport operation at 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200 baud.

9.5.2 DATA PACKET FORMAT

A complete request/response sequence consists of the following bytes (transmitted as separate data frames):

Master Request Transmission:

SLAVE ADDRESS - 1 byteFUNCTION CODE - 1 byteDATA - variable number of bytes depending on FUNCTION CODECRC - 2 bytes

Slave Response Transmission:

SLAVE ADDRESS - 1 byteFUNCTION CODE - 1 byteDATA - variable number of bytes depending on FUNCTION CODECRC - 2 bytes

SLAVE ADDRESS: This is the first byte of every transmission. It represents the user-assigned address of the slave devicethat is to receive the message sent by the master. Each slave device must be assigned a unique address and only theaddressed slave will respond to a transmission that starts with its address. In a master request transmission the SLAVEADDRESS represents the address of the slave to which the request is being sent. In a slave response transmission theSLAVE ADDRESS represents the address of the slave that is sending the response. Note: A master transmission with aSLAVE ADDRESS of 0 indicates a broadcast command. Broadcast commands can be used for specific functions.

FUNCTION CODE: This is the second byte of every transmission. The modbus protocol defines function codes of 1 to 127.The 369 implements some of these functions. In a master request transmission the FUNCTION CODE tells the slave whataction to perform. In a slave response transmission if the FUNCTION CODE sent from the slave is the same as the FUNC-TION CODE sent from the master indicating the slave performed the function as requested. If the high order bit of theFUNCTION CODE sent from the slave is a 1 (i.e. if the FUNCTION CODE is > 127) then the slave did not perform the func-tion as requested and is sending an error or exception response.

DATA: This will be a variable number of bytes depending on the FUNCTION CODE. This may be actual values, setpoints,or addresses sent by the master to the slave or by the slave to the master. Data is sent MSByte first followed by the LSByte.

CRC: This is a two byte error checking code. CRC is sent LSByte first followed by the MSByte.

9.5.3 ERROR CHECKING

The RTU version of Modbus includes a two byte CRC-16 (16 bit cyclic redundancy check) with every transmission. TheCRC-16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream (data bits only; start, stop and parity ignored) as one continuousbinary number. This number is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a characteristic polynomial(11000000000000101B). The 16 bit remainder of the division is appended to the end of the transmission, LSByte first. Theresulting message including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial at the receiver will give a zero remainder if notransmission errors have occurred.

If an 369 Modbus slave device receives a transmission in which an error is indicated by the CRC-16 calculation, the slavedevice will not respond to the transmission. A CRC-16 error indicates than one or more bytes of the transmission werereceived incorrectly and thus the entire transmission should be ignored in order to avoid the 369 performing any incorrectoperation.

The CRC-16 calculation is an industry standard method used for error detection. An algorithm is included here to assistprogrammers in situations where no standard CRC-16 calculation routines are available.


9 COMMUNICATIONS 9.5 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

9

9.5.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM

Once the following algorithm is complete, the working register "A" will contain the CRC value to be transmitted. Note thatthis algorithm requires the characteristic polynomial to be reverse bit ordered. The MSbit of the characteristic polynomial isdropped since it does not affect the value of the remainder. The following symbols are used in the algorithm:

--> data transferA 16 bit working registerAL low order byte of AAH high order byte of ACRC 16 bit CRC-16 valuei, j loop counters(+) logical exclusive or operatorDi i-th data byte (i = 0 to N-1)G 16 bit characteristic polynomial = 1010000000000001 with MSbit dropped and bit order

reversedshr(x) shift right (the LSbit of the low order byte of x shifts into a carry flag, a '0' is shifted into the

MSbit of the high order byte of x, all other bits shift right one location

The algorithm is as follows:

1. FFFF hex --> A

2. 0 --> i

3. 0 --> j

4. Di (+) AL --> AL

5. j+1 --> j

6. shr(A)

7. is there a carry? No: go to 8.Yes: G (+) A --> A

8. is j = 8? No: go to 5.Yes: go to 9.

9. i+1 --> i

10. is i = N? No: go to 3.Yes: go to 11.

11. A --> CRC

9.5.5 TIMING

Data packet synchronization is maintained by timing constraints. The receiving device must measure the time between thereception of characters. If three and one half character times elapse without a new character or completion of the packet,then the communication link must be reset (i.e. all slaves start listening for a new transmission from the master). Thus at9600 baud a delay of greater than 3.5 × 1 / 9600 × 10 = 3.65 ms will cause the communication link to be reset.

9.5.6 SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS

The following Modbus functions are supported by the 369:

• 03 - Read Setpoints and Actual Values• 04 - Read Setpoints and Actual Values• 05 - Execute Operation• 06 - Store Single Setpoint• 07 - Read Device Status• 08 - Loopback Test• 16 - Store Multiple Setpoints

For detailed Modbus function code descriptions, refer to the Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference guide.


9.5 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL 9 COMMUNICATIONS

9

9.5.7 ERROR RESPONSES

When an 369 detects an error other than a CRC error, a response will be sent to the master. The MSbit of the FUNCTIONCODE byte will be set to 1 (i.e. the function code sent from the slave will be equal to the function code sent from the masterplus 128). The following byte will be an exception code indicating the type of error that occurred.

Transmissions received from the master with CRC errors will be ignored by the 369. The slave response to an error (otherthan CRC error) will be:

SLAVE ADDRESS - 1 byteFUNCTION CODE - 1 byte (with MSbit set to 1)EXCEPTION CODE - 1 byteCRC - 2 bytes

The 369 implements the following exception response codes.

• 01 - ILLEGAL FUNCTION:

The function code transmitted is not one of the functions supported by the 369.

• 02 - ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS:

The address referenced in the data field transmitted by the master is not an allowable address for the 369.

• 03 - ILLEGAL DATA VALUE:

The value referenced in the data field transmitted by the master is not within range for the selected data address.


9 COMMUNICATIONS 9.5 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

9

9.5.8 MODBUS COMMANDS

The following commands can be sent to Modbus address 0x0080 (format code F31). Commands 1 to 4 can also be sentusing Modbus function code 5 (Execute Operation).

• Command 1 (Remote Reset 369): Modbus Command 1 will attempt to clear the status of protection elements andoutput relay states.

• Command 2 (Motor Start): Modbus Command 2 will activate the programmed start relay, as long as it is not currentlyactive and the stop relay is not currently active.

• Command 3 (Motor Stop): Modbus Command 3 will activate the trip relay as long as it is not currently active and thestart relay is not currently active.

• Command 4 (Waveform Trigger): Modbus Command 4 will trigger the waveform capture trace memory.

• Command 6 (Clear Trip Counters): Modbus Command 6 will clear all trip counters.

• Command 7 (Clear Last Trip Data): Modbus Command 7 will clear the last trip data.

• Command 10 (Clear RTD Maximums): Modbus Command 10 will initialize all RTD (and Remote RTD, if applicable)maximum data to default values.

• Command 11 (Reset Motor Info): Modbus Command 11 will clear the number of motor starts, number of motorrestarts, motor running hours, and number of restart attempts. It will also clear all learned motor statistics data.

• Command 12 (Clear/Reset All Data): Modbus Command 12 will clear all event data, trip counters, last trip data, peakdemand data, RTD maximums data, motor statistics data, and all energy data.

• Command 20 (Protection Function Blocking): This command must be sent using Modbus function code 10h (StoreMultiple Setpoints). This allows the 369 to accept the two required 16-bit values in one transmission. The first dataword is the command number (20). The 2nd data word contains the bitmask information for which functions to block/unblock as per format code F180.

When this command is sent to the 369, the protection function blocking setpoints (Modbus addresses 1520 to 1528)are updated accordingly. For example, for Bit 0 in the 2nd data word, the setpoint value for Block Undercurrent/Under-power at address 1521 will be modified to contain either a “1” or “0”, depending on the bit value.

Refer to Section 5.3.4 Block Functions on page 5–16 for additional information about the protection function blockingfeature.

• Command 21 (Force Output Relays): Modbus Command 20 must be sent using Modbus function code 10h (StoreMultiple Setpoints). This allows the 369 to accept the two required 16-bit values in one transmission. The first dataword is the command number (21). The 2nd data word contains the bitmask information for which relays to energize/de-energize as per format code F141.

The purpose of this command is to allow the control of the output relay status, regardless of the motor status (running,stopped, etc.). Only relays that have been programmed under the ASSIGN COMMS FORCE RELAYS setpoint can beforced using this command.

Refer to Section e) Force Output Relays on page 5–23 more information about the force output relays feature.


9.6 MEMORY MAP 9 COMMUNICATIONS

9

9.6MEMORY MAP 9.6.1 MEMORY MAP INFORMATION

The data stored in the 369 is grouped as setpoints and actual values. Setpoints can be read and written by a master com-puter. Actual Values are read-only. All setpoints and actual values are stored as two-byte values. That is, each registeraddress is the address of a two-byte value. Addresses are listed in hexadecimal. Data values (setpoint ranges, increments,factory values) are in decimal.

Many Modbus communications drivers add 40001d to the actual address of the register addresses. Forexample: if address 0h was to be read, 40001d would be the address required by the Modbus communica-tions driver; if address 320h (800d) was to be read, 40801d would be the address required by the Modbuscommunications driver.

9.6.2 USER DEFINABLE MEMORY MAP AREA

The 369 has a powerful feature, called the User Definable Memory Map, which allows a computer to read up to 125 non-consecutive data registers (setpoints or actual values) by using one Modbus packet. It is often necessary for a master com-puter to continuously poll various values in each of the connected slave relays. If these values are scattered throughout thememory map, reading them would require numerous transmissions and would burden the communication link. The UserDefinable Memory Map can be programmed to join any memory map address to one in the block of consecutive User Maplocations, so that they can be accessed by reading these consecutive locations.

The User Definable area has two sections:

1. A Register Index area (memory map addresses 0180h-01FCh) that contains 125 Actual Values or Setpoints registers.

2. A Register area (memory map addresses 0100h-017Ch) that contains the data at the addresses in the Register Index.

Register data that is separated in the rest of the memory map may be remapped to adjacent register addresses in the UserDefinable Registers area. This is accomplished by writing to register addresses in the User Definable Register Index area.This allows for improved through-put of data and can eliminate the need for multiple read command sequences. For exam-ple, if the values of Average Phase Current (register address 0306h) and Hottest Stator RTD Temperature (register address0320h) are required to be read from an 369, their addresses may be remapped as follows:

1. Write 0306h to address 0180h (User Definable Register Index 0000) using function code 06 or 16.

2. Write 0320h to address 0181h (User Definable Register Index 0001) using function code 06 or 16.

A read (function code 03 or 04) of registers 0100h (User Definable Register 0000) will return the Phase A Current and reg-ister 0101h (User Definable Register 0001) will return Hottest Stator RTD Temperature.

9.6.3 EVENT RECORDER

The 369 event recorder data starts at address 3000h. Address 3003h is a pointer to the event of interest (1 representing theoldest event and 250 representing the latest event. To retrieve event 1, write ‘1’ to the Event Record Selector (3003h) andread the data from 3004h to 3022h. To retrieve event 2, write ‘2’ to the Event Record Selector (3003h) and read the datafrom 3004h to 3022h. All 250 events may be retrieved in this manner. The time and date stamp of each event may be usedto ensure that all events have been retrieved in order without new events corrupting the sequence of events (event 1 shouldbe more recent than event 2, event 2 should be more recent than event 3, etc.).

9.6.4 WAVEFORM CAPTURE

The 369 stores 16 cycles of A/D samples each time a trip occurs in a trace buffer. The Trace Memory Trigger is set up in S1Preferences and determines how many pre-trip and post-trip cycles are stored. The trace buffer is time and date stampedand may be correlated to a trip in the event record. 7 waveforms are captured this way when a trip occurs. These are the 3phase currents, ground current and 3 voltage waveforms. The last three captured records are retained by the 369. Thisinformation is stored in volatile memory and will be lost if power is cycled to the relay.

To access the captured waveforms, select the captured record by writing to the Trace Memory Buffer Selector (address30F5h), then select waveform of interest by writing its trace memory channel (see following table) to the Trace MemoryChannel Selector (address 30F6h). Then read the trace memory data from address 3100h to 31FFh. The values read arein actual amperes or volts.

NOTE


9 COMMUNICATIONS 9.6 MEMORY MAP

9

9.6.5 MODBUS MEMORY MAP

TRACE MEMORYCHANNEL

WAVEFORM TRACE MEMORYCHANNEL

WAVEFORM

0 Phase A current 4 Phase A voltage1 Phase B current 5 Phase B voltage2 Phase C current 6 Phase C voltage3 Ground current

Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 1 of 53)ADDR (hex)

DESCRIPTION MIN. MAX. STEP VALUE

UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT

PRODUCT ID (ADDRESSES 0000 TO 007F)PRODUCT ID

0000 GE Multilin Product Code - - - - F1 530001 Product Hardware Revision 1 26 1 N/A F15 A0002 Firmware Revision N/A N/A N/A N/A F16 N/A0003 Installed Modifications 0 65535 1 N/A F14 00004 Boot Revision 0 999 1 - F1 00005 Boot Modification Number - - - - - -0006 Reserved - - - - - -0007 Reserved - - - - - -0008 Order Code 0 65535 1 N/A F13 0

↓ ↓ - - - - - -000F Modify Options 0 N/A - N/A N/A -0010 Modify Options Passcode Characters 1 and 2 32 127 1 - F1 " "

↓ ↓ - - - - - -0017 Modify Options Passcode Characters 15 and 16 32 127 1 - F1 " "

--- --- - - - - - -0020 Serial Number character 1 and 2 N/A N/A N/A ASCII F22 N/A0021 Serial Number character 3 and 4 N/A N/A N/A ASCII F22 N/A0022 Serial Number character 5 and 6 N/A N/A N/A ASCII F22 N/A0023 Serial Number character 7 and 8 N/A N/A N/A ASCII F22 N/A0024 Serial Number character 9 and 10 N/A N/A N/A ASCII F22 N/A0025 Serial Number character 11 and 12 N/A N/A N/A ASCII F22 N/A0026 Main Firmware Build Date N/A N/A N/A - F18 N/A0028 Main Firmware Build Time N/A N/A N/A - F19 N/A

... Reserved - - - - - -0040 Manufacturing Date 1995 2094 1 - F18 Jan.1,1999

... Reserved - - - - - -SETPOINT ACCESS

0050 Keypad Access Level 0 1 1 N/A F162 00051 Comm Access Level 0 1 1 N/A F162 00052 Access Password Character 1 and 2 32 127 1 - F1 " "0053 Access Password Character 3 and 4 32 127 1 - F1 " "0054 Access Password Character 5 and 6 32 127 1 - F1 " "0055 Access Password Character 7 and 8 32 127 1 - F10056 Encrypted Access Password 1 and 2 32 127 1 - F1 “AI”0057 Encrypted Access Password 3 and 4 32 127 1 - F1 “KF”0058 Encrypted Access Password 5 and 6 32 127 1 - F1 “BA”0059 Encrypted Access Password 7 and 8 32 127 1 - F1 IK”

... Reserved - - - - - -COMMANDS (ADDRESSES 0080 TO 00FE)

0080 Command Function Code 0 21 1 - F31 00081 Reserved0082 RRTD 1 Command Function Code 0 4 1 - F31 00083 RRTD 2 Command Function Code 0 4 1 - F31 00084 RRTD 3 Command Function Code 0 4 1 - F31 00085 RRTD 4 Command Function Code 0 4 1 - F31 0



9

... ReservedREAL TIME CLOCK

00F0 Time (2 words) valid time N/A - F19 -00F2 Date (2 words) valid date N/A - F18 -

... ReservedPROFIBUS COMMUNICATIONS

00FF Profibus Cyclic Input Data Configuration 0 110 1 - F1 0USER MAP (ADDRESSES 0100 TO 017F)

0100 User Map Value # 1 --- --- --- --- --- ---↓ ↓

017C User Map Value # 125 --- --- --- --- --- ---... Reserved

0180 User Map Address # 1 0 3FFF 1 hex F1 0↓ ↓

01FC User Map Address # 125 0 3FFF 1 hex F1 0... Reserved

ACTUAL VALUES (ADDRESSES 0200 TO 0FFF)MOTOR STATUS

0200 Motor Status 0 4 1 - F133 00201 Motor Thermal Capacity Used 0 100 1 % F1 00202 Estimated Time to Trip on Overload -1 65500 1 s F20 -1

AUTORESTART0203 Restart Attempts 0 20000 1 - F1 -0204 Restart Total Delay 0 65535 1 sec. F1 -0205 Restart In Progress 0 1 1 Y/N F1 -

... ReservedLAST TRIP DATA

0220 Cause of Last Trip 0 276 1 - F134 00221 Last Trip Time (2 words) N/A N/A N/A N/A F19 -0223 Last Trip Date (2 words) N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 -0225 Reserved0226 Phase A Pre-Trip Current 0 65535 1 A F1 00228 Phase B Pre-Trip Current 0 65535 1 A F1 0022A Phase C Pre-Trip Current 0 65535 1 A F1 0022C Motor Load Pre - Trip 0 2000 1 FLA F3 0022D Current Unbalance Pre - Trip 0 100 1 % F1 0022E Ground Current Pre - Trip 0 50000 1 A F2 0

... Reserved - - - - - -0234 Hottest Stator RTD During Trip 0 12 1 - F1 00235 Pre-Trip Temperature of Hottest Stator RTD -40 200 1 °C F4 00236 Pre-Trip Voltage Vab 0 65000 1 V F1 00237 Pre-Trip Voltage Vbc 0 65000 1 V F1 00238 Pre-Trip Voltage Vca 0 65000 1 V F1 00239 Pre-Trip Voltage Van 0 65000 1 V F1 0023A Pre-Trip Voltage Vbn 0 65000 1 V F1 0023B Pre-Trip Voltage Vcn 0 65000 1 V F1 0023C Pre-Trip System Frequency 0 12000 1 Hz F3 0023D Pre-Trip Real Power -32000 32000 1 kW F4 0023E Pre-Trip Reactive Power -32000 32000 1 kvar F4 0023F Pre-Trip Apparent Power 0 50000 1 kVA F1 00240 Pre-Trip Power Factor -99 100 1 - F21 0

... Reserved - - - - - -ALARM STATUS

0260 General Spare Switch Alarm Status orStarter Monitor Alarm/Trip Status

0 4 1 - F123 0

0261 General Emergency Restart Switch Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00262 General Differential Switch Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00263 General Speed Switch Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00264 General Reset Switch Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0

... Reserved



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

0267 Thermal Capacity Alarm 0 4 1 - F123 00268 Overload Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00269 Mechanical Jam Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0026A Undercurrent Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0026B Current Unbalance Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0026C Ground Fault Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0

... Reserved026F Undervoltage Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00270 Overvoltage Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00271 Overfrequency Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00272 Underfrequency Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0

... Reserved0275 Lead Power Factor Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00276 Lag Power Factor Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00277 Positive kvar Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00278 Negative kvar Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00279 Underpower Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0027A Reverse Power Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0

... Reserved027D Local RTD #1 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0027E Local RTD #2 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0027F Local RTD #3 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00280 Local RTD #4 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00281 Local RTD #5 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00282 Local RTD #6 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00283 Local RTD #7 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00284 Local RTD #8 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00285 Local RTD #9 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00286 Local RTD #10 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00287 Local RTD #11 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00288 Local RTD #12 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00289 Local RTD #1 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0028A Local RTD #2 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0028B Local RTD #3 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0028C Local RTD #4 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0028D Local RTD #5 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0028E Local RTD #6 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0028F Local RTD #7 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00290 Local RTD #8 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00291 Local RTD #9 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00292 Local RTD #10 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00293 Local RTD #11 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00294 Local RTD #12 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00295 Broken / Open RTD Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F1230296 Short / Low Temp Alarm Status 0 1 1 - F1230297 Reserved0298 Trip Counter Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00299 Starter Failure Alarm 0 4 1 - F123 0029A Current Demand Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0029B kW Demand Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0029C kvar Demand Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0029D kVA Demand Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0029E Self Test Alarm 0 4 1 - F123 0

START BLOCK STATUS02C0 Overload Lockout Timer 0 9999 1 min F1 002C1 Start Timer 1 0 60 1 min F1 002C2 Start Timer 2 0 60 1 min F1 002C3 Start Timer 3 0 60 1 min F1 002C4 Start Timer 4 0 60 1 min F1 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

02C5 Start Timer 5 0 60 1 min F1 002C6 Time Between Starts Timer 0 500 1 min F1 002C7 Restart Block Timer 0 50000 1 s F1 002C8 Reserved02C9 Start Inhibit Timer 0 500 1 min F1 002CA Starts Per Hour Lockout Timer 0 60 1 min F1 0

... ReservedDIGITAL INPUT STATUS

02D0 Access 0 1 1 - F131 002D1 Speed 0 1 1 - F131 002D2 Spare 0 1 1 - F131 002D3 Differential Relay 0 1 1 - F131 002D4 Emergency Restart 0 1 1 - F131 002D5 Reset 0 1 1 - F131 0

... ReservedOUTPUT RELAY STATUS

02E0 Trip 0 1 1 N/A F150 002E1 Alarm 0 1 1 N/A F150 002E2 Aux.1 0 1 1 N/A F150 002E3 Aux.2 0 1 1 N/A F150 0


02F0 Date (Read Only) N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 N/A02F4 Time (Read Only) N/A N/A N/A N/A F19 N/A

... ReservedFIELDBUS SPECIFICATION STATUS

02F8 Explicit Connection Status 0 5 1 N/A F168 002F9 Input/Output Polled Connection Status 0 5 1 N/A F168 002FA Network Status 0 3 1 N/A F167 0

... ReservedCURRENT METERING

0300 Phase A Current 0 65535 1 A F1 00302 Phase B Current 0 65535 1 A F1 00304 Phase C Current 0 65535 1 A F1 00306 Average Phase Current 0 65535 1 A F1 00308 Motor Load 0 2000 1 × FLA F3 00309 Current Unbalance 0 100 1 % F1 0030A Unbalaced Biased Motor Load 0 9999 1 × FLA F3 0030B Ground Current 0 65535 1 A F23 0

... Reserved - - - - - -OVERALL STATOR RTD

031C Overall Hottest Stator RTD Owner 0 5 1 N/A F165 0031D Overall Hottest Stator RTD Number 0 12 1 N/A F1 0031E Overall Hottest Stator RTD Temperature –40 200 1 °C F4 -

TEMPERATURE031F Local Hottest Stator RTD Number 0 12 1 - F1 00320 Local Hottest Stator RTD Temperature –40 200 1 °C F4 400321 Local RTD #1 Temperature –40 200 1 °C F4 400322 Local RTD #2 Temperature –40 200 1 °C F4 400323 Local RTD #3 Temperature –40 200 1 °C F4 400324 Local RTD #4 Temperature –40 200 1 °C F4 400325 Local RTD #5 Temperature –40 200 1 °C F4 400326 Local RTD #6 Temperature –40 200 1 °C F4 400327 Local RTD #7 Temperature –40 200 1 °C F4 400328 Local RTD #8 Temperature –40 200 1 °C F4 400329 Local RTD #9 Temperature –40 200 1 °C F4 40032A Local RTD #10 Temperature –40 200 1 °C F4 40032B Local RTD #11 Temperature –40 200 1 °C F4 40032C Local RTD #12 Temperature –40 200 1 °C F4 40



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

... ReservedVOLTAGE METERING

0360 Vab 0 65535 1 V F1 00361 Vbc 0 65535 1 V F1 00362 Vca 0 65535 1 V F1 00363 Average Line Voltage 0 65535 1 V F1 00364 Van 0 65535 1 V F1 00365 Vbn 0 65535 1 V F1 00366 Vcn 0 65535 1 V F1 00367 Average Phase Voltage 0 65535 1 V F1 00368 System Frequency 0 12000 1 Hz F3 0

BACKSPIN METERING0369 Backspin Frequency (a value of “0” represents ‘low signal’) 0 12000 1 Hz F3 0036A Backspin Detection State 0 6 1 - F27 0036B Backspin Prediction Timer 0 50000 1 s F1 0

... ReservedPOWER METERING

0370 Power Factor –99 100 1 - F21 00371 Real Power –32000 32000 1 kW F4 00373 Real Power 0 42912 1 hp F1 00374 Reactive Power –32000 32000 1 kvar F4 00376 Apparent Power 0 65000 1 kVA F1 00377 Positive MegaWatthours 0 65535 1 MWh F1 00379 Positive Megavarhours 0 65535 1 Mvarh F1 0037B Negative Megavarhours 0 65535 1 Mvarh F1 0037D Positive KiloWatthours 0 999 1 kWh F1 0037F Positive Kilovarhours 0 999 1 kvarh F1 00381 Negative Kilovarhours 0 999 1 kvarh F1 0

... ReservedDEMAND METERING

0390 Current Demand 0 65535 1 A F1 00392 Real Power Demand 0 32000 1 kW F1 00394 Reactive Power Demand 0 32000 1 kvar F1 00396 Apparent Power Demand 0 65000 1 kVA F1 00397 Peak Current Demand 0 65535 1 A F1 00399 Peak Real Power Demand 0 32000 1 kW F1 0039B Peak Reactive Power Demand 0 32000 1 kvar F1 0039D Peak Apparent Power Demand 0 65000 1 kVA F1 0

... ReservedMOTOR DATA (0 = OFF)

03C0 Learned Acceleration Time 1 2500 1 s F2 003C1 Learned Starting Current 0 65535 1 A F1 003C2 Learned Starting Capacity 0 100 1 % F1 003C3 Learned Running Cool Time Constant 0 500 1 min F1 003C4 Learned Stopped Cool Time Constant 0 500 1 min F1 003C5 Last Starting Current 0 65535 1 A F1 003C6 Last Starting Capacity 0 100 1 % F1 003C7 Last Acceleration Time 1 2500 1 s F2 003C8 Average Motor Load Learned 0 2000 1 x FLA F3 003C9 Learned Unbalance k factor 0 29 1 - F1 0

... ReservedLOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS

03E0 Local RTD # 1 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 4003E1 Local RTD # 2 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 4003E2 Local RTD # 3 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 4003E3 Local RTD # 4 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 4003E4 Local RTD # 5 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 4003E5 Local RTD # 6 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 4003E6 Local RTD # 7 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

03E7 Local RTD # 8 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 4003E8 Local RTD # 9 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 4003E9 Local RTD # 10 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 4003EA Local RTD # 11 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 4003EB Local RTD # 12 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40

... ReservedTRIP COUNTERS

0430 Total Number of Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0... Reserved

0433 Switch Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0... Reserved

0436 Overload Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00437 Short Circuit Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00438 Mechanical Jam Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00439 Undercurrent Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0043A Current Unbalance Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0043B Single Phase Trips043C Ground Fault Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0043D Acceleration Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0

... Reserved043F Undervoltage Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00440 Overvoltage Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00441 Phase Reversal Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00442 Under Frequency Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00443 Over Frequency Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0

... Reserved0446 Lead Power Factor Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00447 Lag Power Factor Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00448 Positive Reactive Power Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00449 Negative Reactive Power Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0044A Underpower Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0044B Reverse Power Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0

... Reserved044E Stator RTD Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0044F Bearing RTD Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00450 Other RTD Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00451 Ambient RTD Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0

... Reserved0454 Incomplete Sequence Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0

... Reserved0457 Trip Counters Last Cleared N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 N/A

... ReservedMOTOR STATISTICS

0470 Number of Motor Starts 0 50000 1 - F1 00471 Number of Emergency Restarts 0 50000 1 - F1 00472 Reserved - - - - - -0473 Digital Counter 0 65535 1 - F1 0

... Reserved04A0 Motor Running Hours 0 65535 1 hr. F1 0

... ReservedPHASORS

0500 Va Angle 0 359 1 degrees F1 00501 Vb Angle 0 359 1 degrees F1 00502 Vc Angle 0 359 1 degrees F1 00503 Ia Angle 0 359 1 degrees F1 00504 Ib Angle 0 359 1 degrees F1 00505 Ic Angle 0 359 1 degrees F1 0

... Reserved



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

REMOTE RTD ACTUAL VALUES (ADDRESSES 0600 TO 1FFF)RRTD 1 TEMPERATURES

0600 RRTD 1 - Hottest Stator Number 0 12 1 - F1 00601 RRTD 1 - Hottest Stator Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400602 RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400603 RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400604 RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400605 RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400606 RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400607 RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400608 RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400609 RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40060A RRTD 1 - RTD #9 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40060B RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40060C RRTD 1 - RTD #11 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40060D RRTD 1 - RTD #12 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40

... ReservedRRTD 2 TEMPERATURES

0610 RRTD 2 - RTD - Hottest Stator Number 0 12 1 - F1 00611 RRTD 2 - RTD - Hottest Stator Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400612 RRTD 2 - RTD #1Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400613 RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400614 RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400615 RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400616 RRTD 2 - RTD #5 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400617 RRTD 2 - RTD #6 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400618 RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400619 RRTD 2 - RTD #8 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40061A RRTD 2 - RTD #9 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40061B RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40061C RRTD 2 - RTD #11 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40061D RRTD 2 - RTD #12 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40


0620 RRTD 3 - RTD - Hottest Stator Number 0 12 1 - F1 00621 RRTD 3 - RTD - Hottest Stator Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400622 RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400623 RRTD 3 - RTD #2 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400624 RRTD 3 - RTD #3 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400625 RRTD 3 - RTD #4 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400626 RRTD 3 - RTD #5 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400627 RRTD 3 - RTD #6 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400628 RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400629 RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40062A RRTD 3 - RTD #9 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40062B RRTD 3 - RTD #10 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40062C RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40062D RRTD 3 - RTD #12 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40


0630 RRTD 4 - RTD- Hottest Stator Number 0 12 1 - F1 00631 RRTD 4 - RTD- Hottest Stator Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400632 RRTD 4 - RTD#1 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400633 RRTD 4 - RTD#2 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400634 RRTD 4 - RTD#3 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400635 RRTD 4 - RTD#4 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400636 RRTD 4 - RTD#5 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400637 RRTD 4 - RTD#6 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400638 RRTD 4 - RTD#7 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

0639 RRTD 4 - RTD#8 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40063A RRTD 4 - RTD#9 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40063B RRTD 4 - RTD#10 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40063C RRTD 4 - RTD#11 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40063D RRTD 4 - RTD#12 Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40

LOSS OF RRTD COMMUNICATIONS063E Lost RRTD Communications alarm 0 4 1 - F123 0

... ReservedRRTD 1 ALARM STATUS

0650 RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00651 RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00652 RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00653 RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00654 RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00655 RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00656 RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00657 RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00658 RRTD 1 - RTD #9 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00659 RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0065A RRTD 1 - RTD #11 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0065B RRTD 1 - RTD #12 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0065C RRTD 1 - RTD #1 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0065D RRTD 1 - RTD #2 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0065E RRTD 1 - RTD #3 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0065F RRTD 1 - RTD #4 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00660 RRTD 1 - RTD #5 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00661 RRTD 1 - RTD #6 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00662 RRTD 1 - RTD #7 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00663 RRTD 1 - RTD #8 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00664 RRTD 1 - RTD #9 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00665 RRTD 1 - RTD #10 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00666 RRTD 1 - RTD #11 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00667 RRTD 1 - RTD #12 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00668 RRTD 1 - Broken / Open RTD Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00669 RRTD 1 - Short / Low Temp Alarm Status 0 1 1 - F123 0066A RRTD 1 - Digital Input 6 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0066B RRTD 1 - Digital Input 2 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0066C RRTD 1 - Digital Input 5 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0066D RRTD 1 - Digital Input 4 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0066E RRTD 1 - Digital Input 1 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0066F RRTD 1 - Digital Input 3 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0

RRTD 2 ALARM STATUS0670 RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00671 RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00672 RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00673 RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00674 RRTD 2 - RTD #5 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00675 RRTD 2 - RTD #6 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00676 RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00677 RRTD 2 - RTD #8 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00678 RRTD 2 - RTD #9 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00679 RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0067A RRTD 2 - RTD #11 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0067B RRTD 2 - RTD #12 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0067C RRTD 2 - RTD #1 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0067D RRTD 2 - RTD #2 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0067E RRTD 2 - RTD #3 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0067F RRTD 2 - RTD #4 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00680 RRTD 2 - RTD #5 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

0681 RRTD 2 - RTD #6 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00682 RRTD 2 - RTD #7 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00683 RRTD 2 - RTD #8 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00684 RRTD 2 - RTD #9 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00685 RRTD 2 - RTD #10 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00686 RRTD 2 - RTD #11 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00687 RRTD 2 - RTD #12 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00688 RRTD 2 - Broken / Open RTD Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00689 RRTD 2 - Short / Low Temp Alarm Status 0 1 1 - F123 0068A RRTD 2 - Digital Input 6 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0068B RRTD 2 - Digital Input 2 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0068C RRTD 2 - Digital Input 5 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0068D RRTD 2 - Digital Input 4 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0068E RRTD 2 - Digital Input 1 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0068F RRTD 2 - Digital Input 3 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0

RRTD 3 ALARM STATUS0690 RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00691 RRTD 3 - RTD #2 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00692 RRTD 3 - RTD #3 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00693 RRTD 3 - RTD #4 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00694 RRTD 3 - RTD #5 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00695 RRTD 3 - RTD #6 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00696 RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00697 RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00698 RRTD 3 - RTD #9 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 00699 RRTD 3 - RTD #10 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0069A RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0069B RRTD 3 - RTD #12 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0069C RRTD 3 - RTD #1 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0069D RRTD 3 - RTD #2 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0069E RRTD 3 - RTD #3 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0069F RRTD 3 - RTD #4 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006A0 RRTD 3 - RTD #5 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006A1 RRTD 3 - RTD #6 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006A2 RRTD 3 - RTD #7 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006A3 RRTD 3 - RTD #8 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006A4 RRTD 3 - RTD #9 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006A5 RRTD 3 - RTD #10 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006A6 RRTD 3 - RTD #11 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006A7 RRTD 3 - RTD #12 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006A8 RRTD 3 - Broken / Open RTD Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006A9 RRTD 3 - Short / Low Temp Alarm Status 0 1 1 - F123 006AA RRTD 3 - Digital Input 6 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006AB RRTD 3 - Digital Input 2 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006AC RRTD 3 - Digital Input 5 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006AD RRTD 3 - Digital Input 4 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006AE RRTD 3 - Digital Input 1 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006AF RRTD 3 - Digital Input 3 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0

RRTD 4 ALARM STATUS06B0 RRTD 4 - RTD #1 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006B1 RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006B2 RRTD 4 - RTD #3 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006B3 RRTD 4 - RTD #4 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006B4 RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006B5 RRTD 4 - RTD #6 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006B6 RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006B7 RRTD 4 - RTD #8 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006B8 RRTD 4 - RTD #9 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006B9 RRTD 4 - RTD #10 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

06BA RRTD 4 - RTD #11 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006BB RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006BC RRTD 4 - RTD #1 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006BD RRTD 4 - RTD #2 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006BE RRTD 4 - RTD #3 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006BF RRTD 4 - RTD #4 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006C0 RRTD 4 - RTD #5 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006C1 RRTD 4 - RTD #6 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006C2 RRTD 4 - RTD #7 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006C3 RRTD 4 - RTD #8 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006C4 RRTD 4 - RTD #9 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006C5 RRTD 4 - RTD #10 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006C6 RRTD 4 - RTD #11 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006C7 RRTD 4 - RTD #12 High Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006C8 RRTD 4 - Broken / Open RTD Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006C9 RRTD 4 - Short / Low Temp Alarm Status 0 1 1 - F123 006CA RRTD 4 - Digital Input 6 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006CB RRTD 4 - Digital Input 2 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006CC RRTD 4 - Digital Input 5 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006CD RRTD 4 - Digital Input 4 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006CE RRTD 4 - Digital Input 1 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 006CF RRTD 4 - Digital Input 3 Alarm Status 0 4 1 - F123 0

RRTD 1 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURES0700 RRTD 1 - RTD # 1 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400701 RRTD 1 - RTD # 2 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400702 RRTD 1 - RTD # 3 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400703 RRTD 1 - RTD # 4 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400704 RRTD 1 - RTD # 5 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400705 RRTD 1 - RTD # 6 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400706 RRTD 1 - RTD # 7 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400707 RRTD 1 - RTD # 8 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400708 RRTD 1 - RTD # 9 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400709 RRTD 1 - RTD # 10 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40070A RRTD 1 - RTD # 11 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40070B RRTD 1 - RTD # 12 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40

... ReservedRRTD 2 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURES

0710 RRTD 2 - RTD # 1 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400711 RRTD 2 - RTD # 2 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400712 RRTD 2 - RTD # 3 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400713 RRTD 2 - RTD # 4 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400714 RRTD 2 - RTD # 5 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400715 RRTD 2 - RTD # 6 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400716 RRTD 2 - RTD # 7 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400717 RRTD 2 - RTD # 8 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400718 RRTD 2 - RTD # 9 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400719 RRTD 2 - RTD # 10 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40071A RRTD 2 - RTD # 11 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40071B RRTD 2 - RTD # 12 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40


0720 RRTD 3 - RTD # 1 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400721 RRTD 3 - RTD # 2 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400722 RRTD 3 - RTD # 3 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400723 RRTD 3 - RTD # 4 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400724 RRTD 3 - RTD # 5 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400725 RRTD 3 - RTD # 6 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400726 RRTD 3 - RTD # 7 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400727 RRTD 3 - RTD # 8 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

0728 RRTD 3 - RTD # 9 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400729 RRTD 3 - RTD # 10 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40072A RRTD 3 - RTD # 11 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40072B RRTD 3 - RTD # 12 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40


0730 RRTD 4 - RTD # 1 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400731 RRTD 4 - RTD # 2 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400732 RRTD 4 - RTD # 3 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400733 RRTD 4 - RTD # 4 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400734 RRTD 4 - RTD # 5 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400735 RRTD 4 - RTD # 6 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400736 RRTD 4 - RTD # 7 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400737 RRTD 4 - RTD # 8 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400738 RRTD 4 - RTD # 9 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 400739 RRTD 4 - RTD # 10 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40073A RRTD 4 - RTD # 11 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40073B RRTD 4 - RTD # 12 Max. Temperature -40 200 1 °C F4 40

... ReservedRRTD 1 TRIP COUNTER

0800 RRTD 1 - Stator RTD Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00801 RRTD 1 - Bearing RTD Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00802 RRTD 1 - Other RTD Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00803 RRTD 1 - Ambient RTD Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 00804 RRTD 1 - Digital Input Trips 0 50000 1 - F1 0







... ReservedRRTD 1 DIGITAL INPUT STATUS

0840 Digital Input 3 0 1 1 - F131 00841 Digital Input 4 0 1 1 - F131 00842 Digital Input 6 0 1 1 - F131 00843 Digital Input 5 0 1 1 - F131 00844 Digital Input 2 0 1 1 - F131 00845 Digital Input 1 0 1 1 - F131 0


0850 Digital Input 3 0 1 1 - F131 00851 Digital Input 4 0 1 1 - F131 00852 Digital Input 6 0 1 1 - F131 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

0853 Digital Input 5 0 1 1 - F131 00854 Digital Input 2 0 1 1 - F131 00855 Digital Input 1 0 1 1 - F131 0





... ReservedRRTD 1 OUTPUT RELAY STATUS

0880 RRTD 1 - Trip 0 2 1 N/A F150 20881 RRTD 1 - Alarm 0 2 1 N/A F150 20882 RRTD 1 - Aux. 1 0 2 1 N/A F150 20883 RRTD 1 - Aux. 2 0 2 1 N/A F150 2


0890 RRTD 2 - Trip 0 2 1 N/A F150 20891 RRTD 2 - Alarm 0 2 1 N/A F150 20892 RRTD 2 - Aux. 1 0 2 1 N/A F150 20893 RRTD 2 - Aux. 2 0 2 1 N/A F150 2


08A0 RRTD 3 - Trip 0 2 1 N/A F150 208A1 RRTD 3 - Alarm 0 2 1 N/A F150 208A2 RRTD 3 - Aux. 1 0 2 1 N/A F150 208A3 RRTD 3 - Aux. 2 0 2 1 N/A F150 2


08B0 RRTD 4 - Trip 0 2 1 N/A F150 208B1 RRTD 4 - Alarm 0 2 1 N/A F150 208B2 RRTD 4 - Aux. 1 0 2 1 N/A F150 208B3 RRTD 4 - Aux. 2 0 2 1 N/A F150 2

... ReservedCOMMUNICATIONS MODULE

08C0 Ethernet Module Status 0 65535 1 N/A F164 -08C1 Anybus Module Software Revision - - - - F16 -

... ReservedPROTECTION FUNCTION BLOCKING

08D0 Protection Functions Currently Blocked 0 256 1 N/A F180 0... Reserved

SETPOINTS (ADDRESSES 1000 TO 1FFF)DISPLAY PREFERENCES

1000 Default Message Cycle Time 5 100 1 s F1 201001 Default Message Timeout 10 900 1 s F1 3001002 Contrast Adjustment 1 254 1 - F1 1451003 Flash Message 1 10 1 s F1 21004 Temperature Display Units 0 1 1 - F100 01005 Energy Unit Display 0 1 1 - F166 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

... ReservedEVENT RECORDS

1006 Motor Running Events 0 1 1 - F103 01007 Motor Stopped Events 0 1 1 - F103 0

WAVEFORM CAPTURE1008 Trigger Position 0 100 1 % F1 20

... Reserved369 COMMUNICATIONS

100F Reset Profibus Interface 0 1 1 - F103 01010 Slave Address 1 254 1 - F1 2541011 Computer RS232 Baud Rate 0 4 1 - F101 41012 Computer RS232 Parity 0 2 1 - F102 01013 Channel 1 Parity 0 2 1 - F102 01014 Channel 1 Baud Rate 0 4 1 - F101 41015 Channel 2 Parity 0 2 1 - F102 01016 Channel 2 Baud Rate 0 4 1 - F101 41017 Channel 3 Parity 0 2 1 - F102 01018 Channel 3 Baud Rate 0 4 1 - F101 41019 Channel 3 Connection 0 1 1 - F151 0101A Channel 3 Application 0 1 1 - F149 0101B Profibus Slave Address 1 126 1 - F1 125101C IP Address Octet 1 0 255 1 - F1 127101D IP Address Octet 2 0 255 1 - F1 0101E IP Address Octet 3 0 255 1 - F1 0101F IP Address Octet 4 0 255 1 - F1 11020 Subnet Mask Octet 1 0 255 1 - F1 2551021 Subnet Mask Octet 2 0 255 1 - F1 2551022 Subnet Mask Octet 3 0 255 1 - F1 2551023 Subnet Mask Octet 4 0 255 1 - F1 01024 Gateway Address Octet 1 0 255 1 - F1 1271025 Gateway Address Octet 2 0 255 1 - F1 01026 Gateway Address Octet 3 0 255 1 - F1 01027 Gateway Address Octet 4 0 255 1 - F1 11028 DeviceNet MAC ID 0 63 1 - F1 631029 DeviceNet Baud Rate 0 2 1 - F170 0


1030 Date (2 words) valid date N/A - F18 -1034 Time (2 words) valid time N/A - F19 -

... ReservedDEFAULT MESSAGES

1041 Default to Current Metering 0 1 1 - F103 01042 Default to Motor Load 0 1 1 - F103 01043 Default to Delta Voltage Metering 0 1 1 - F103 01044 Default to Power Factor 0 1 1 - F103 01045 Default to Positive Watthours 0 1 1 - F103 01046 Default to Real Power 0 1 1 - F103 01047 Default to Reactive Power 0 1 1 - F103 01048 Default to Hottest Stator RTD 0 1 1 - F103 01049 Default to Text Message 1 0 1 1 - F103 0104A Default to Text Message 2 0 1 1 - F103 0104B Default to Text Message 3 0 1 1 - F103 0104C Default to Text Message 4 0 1 1 - F103 0104D Default to Text Message 5 0 1 1 - F103 0104E Default to Hottest Stator RTD Temperature 0 1 1 - F103 0104F Default to Unbalace Biased Motor Load 0 1 1 - F103 0

... Reserved - - - - - -MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD

1060 1st & 2nd Character of 1st Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’T’



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

↓ ↓1073 39th & 40th Character of 1st Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 " "1074 1st & 2nd Character of 2nd Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’T’

↓ ↓1087 39th & 40th Character of 2nd Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 " "1088 1st & 2nd Character of 3rd Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’T’

↓ ↓109B 39th & 40th Character of 3rd Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 " "109C 1st & 2nd Character of 4th Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’T’

↓ ↓10AF 39th & 40th Character of 4th Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 " "10B0 1st & 2nd Character of 5th Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 ’T’

↓ ↓10C3 39th & 40th Character of 5th Scratchpad Message 32 127 1 - F1 " "

... ReservedCLEAR PRESET DATA

1130 Clear Last Trip Data 0 1 1 - F103 01131 Clear Peak Demand Data 0 1 1 - F103 01132 Clear RTD Maximums 0 1 1 - F103 01133 Preset Positive MWh 0 65535 1 MWh F1 01134 Clear Trip Counters 0 1 1 - F103 01135 Preset Digital Counter 0 65535 1 - F1 01136 Clear Event Records 0 1 1 - F103 01137 Preset Positive Mvarh 0 65535 1 Mvarh F1 01138 Preset Negative Mvarh 0 65535 1 Mvarh F1 0

... Reserved1140 Clear Motor Data 0 1 1 - F103 01141 Reserved - - - - - -1142 Clear All Data 0 1 1 - F103 01143 RRTD 1 - Preset Digital Counter 0 65535 1 - F1 01144 RRTD 2 - Preset Digital Counter 0 65535 1 - F1 01145 RRTD 3 - Preset Digital Counter 0 65535 1 - F1 01146 RRTD 4 - Preset Digital Counter 0 65535 1 - F1 01147 Clear Energy Data 0 1 1 - F103 0

... ReservedCT/VT SETUP

1180 Phase CT Primary 1 5000 1 A F1 5001181 Motor Full Load Amps 1 5000 1 A F1 101182 Ground CT Type 0 3 1 - F104 21183 Ground CT Primary 1 5000 1 A F1 100

... Reserved11A0 Voltage Transformer Connection Type 0 2 1 - F106 011A1 Voltage Transformer Ratio 100 24000 1 - F3 3511A2 Motor Rated Voltage 100 20000 1 V F1 4160

... Reserved11C0 Nominal Frequency 0 2 1 - F107 011C1 System Phase Sequence 0 1 1 - F124 0

... ReservedSERIAL COMM CONTROL

11C8 Serial Communication Control 0 1 1 - F103 011C9 Assign Start Control Relays 0 7 1 - F113 2

... ReservedREDUCED VOLTAGE

11CF Start Control Relay Timer 10 100 5 s F2 1011D0 Reduced Voltage Starting 0 1 1 - F103 011D1 Assign Start Control Relays 0 7 1 - F113 411D2 Transition On 0 2 1 - F108 011D3 Incomplete Sequence Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 011D4 Reduced Voltage Start Level 25 300 1 % FLA F1 100



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

11D5 Reduced Voltage Start Timer 1 500 1 s F1 200AUTORESTART

11D6 Autorestart 0 1 1 - F103 011D7 Total Restarts 0 65000 1 starts F1 111D8 Restart Delay 0 20000 1 sec. F1 6011D9 Progressive Delay 0 20000 1 sec. F1 011DA Hold Delay 0 20000 1 sec. F1 011DB Bus Valid 0 1 1 - F103 011DC Bus Valid Level 15 100 1 %VT F1 10011DD Reserved - - - - - -11DE Autorestart Attempt Events 0 1 1 - F103 011DF Autorestart Success Events 0 1 1 - F103 011E0 Autorestart Aborted Events 0 1 1 - F103 0

... ReservedDIGITAL COUNTER

12E6 First Character of Counter Name 32 127 1 - F1 “G”12F2 First Character of Counter Unit Name 32 127 1 - F1 ‘U’12F8 Counter Type 0 1 1 - F114 012F9 Digital Counter Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 012FA Assign Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 012FB Counter Alarm Level 0 65535 1 - F1 10012FD Reserved - - - - - -12FE Record Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 0

EMERGENCY1330 1st & 2nd Character of Emergency Switch Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’G’1340 General Emergency Switch Type 0 1 1 - F116 01341 General Emergency Switch Block Input From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 01342 General Emergency Switch Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01343 General Emergency Switch Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 01344 General Emergency Switch Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 501345 General Emergency Switch Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 01346 General Emergency Switch Trip 0 2 1 - F115 01347 General Emergency Switch Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 01348 General Emergency Switch Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 501349 Emergency Switch Assignable Function 0 7 1 - F110 0

... ReservedDIFFERENTIAL

1370 1st & 2nd Character of Differential Switch Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’G’1380 General Differential Switch Type 0 1 1 - F116 01381 General Differential Switch Block Input From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 01382 General Differential Switch Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01383 General Differential Switch Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11384 General Differential Switch Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 501385 General Differential Switch Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 01386 General Differential Switch Trip 0 2 1 - F115 01387 General Differential Switch Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 11388 General Differential Switch Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 501389 Differential Switch Assignable Function 0 7 1 - F157 0138A Assign Differential Switch Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1

... ReservedSPEED

13A0 1st & 2nd Character of Speed Switch Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’G’13B0 General Speed Switch Type 0 1 1 - F116 013B1 General Speed Switch Block Input from Start 0 5000 1 s F1 013B2 General Speed Switch Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 013B3 General Speed Switch Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 113B4 General Speed Switch Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 5013B5 General Speed Switch Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 013B6 General Speed Switch Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

13B7 General Speed Switch Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 113B8 General Speed Switch Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 5013B9 Speed Switch Assignable Function 0 7 1 - F158 013BA Speed Switch Delay 5 1000 5 100ms F2 2013BB Assign Speed Switch Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1

... ReservedRESET

13D0 1st & 2nd Character of Reset Switch Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’G’13E0 General Reset Switch Type 0 1 1 - F116 013E1 General Reset Switch Block Input From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 013E2 General Reset Switch Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 013E3 General Reset Switch Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 113E4 General Reset Switch Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 5013E5 General Reset Switch Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 013E6 General Reset Switch Trip 0 2 1 - F115 013E7 General Reset Switch Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 113E8 General Reset Switch Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 5013E9 Reset Switch Assignable Function 0 7 1 - F160 0

... ReservedSPARE

1400 1st & 2nd Character of Spare Switch Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’G’1410 General Spare Switch Type 0 1 1 - F116 01411 General Spare Switch Block Input From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 01412 General Spare Switch Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01413 General Spare Switch Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11414 General Spare Switch Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 501415 General Spare Switch Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 01416 General Spare Switch Trip 0 1 1 - F115 01417 General Spare Switch Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 11418 General Spare Switch Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100 ms F2 501419 Spare Switch Assignable Function 0 7 1 - F159 0141A Starter Aux Contact Type 0 1 1 - F109 0141B Starter Operation Monitor Delay Time 0 60 1 seconds F1 0 (Off)141C Starter Operation Monitor Type 0 2 1 - F115 0 (Off)141D Starter Operation Monitor Relays 0 15 1 - F169 0 (None)

... ReservedOUTPUT RELAY SETUP

1500 Trip Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 01501 Alarm Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 01502 Aux 1 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 01503 Aux 2 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 01504 Trip Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 01505 Alarm Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 11506 Aux1 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 11507 Aux2 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 0

... ReservedFORCE OUTPUT RELAYS

1510 Assign Communications Force Relays 0 15 1 N/A F169 01511 Trip Communications Force Relay Output Type 0 1 1 - F181 01512 Trip Pulsed Output Dwell Time 5 50000 1 100 ms F2 51513 Alarm Communications Force Relay Output Type 0 1 1 - F181 01514 Alarm Pulsed Output Dwell Time 5 50000 1 100 ms F2 51515 Aux1 Communications Force Relay Output Type 0 1 1 - F181 01516 Aux1 Pulsed Output Dwell Time 5 50000 1 100 ms F2 51517 Aux2 Communications Force Relay Output Type 0 1 1 - F181 01518 Aux2 Pulsed Output Dwell Time 5 50000 1 100 ms F2 5

... ReservedPROTECTION FUNCTION BLOCKING

1520 Log Blocking Events 0 1 1 N/A F30 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

1521 Block Undercurrent/Underpower 0 1 1 N/A F30 01522 Block Current Unbalance 0 1 1 N/A F30 01523 Block Incomplete Sequence 0 1 1 N/A F30 01524 Block Thermal Model 0 1 1 N/A F30 01525 Block Short Circuit and Backup 0 1 1 N/A F30 01526 Block Overload Alarm 0 1 1 N/A F30 01527 Block Ground Fault 0 1 1 N/A F30 01528 Block Starts Per Hour and Time Between Starts 0 1 1 N/A F30 0

... ReservedTHERMAL MODEL (0 = Off)

1581 Overload Pickup Level 101 125 1 0.01xFLA F3 1011582 Assign Thermal Capacity Trip Relay 0 7 1 - F111 11583 Unbalance k Factor (0=Learned) 0 29 1 - F1 01584 Running Cool Time Constant 1 500 1 min F1 151585 Stopped Cool Time Constant 1 500 1 min F1 301586 Hot/Cold Safe Stall Ratio 1 100 1 - F3 1001587 RTD Biasing 0 1 1 - F103 01588 RTD Bias Minimum 0 198 1 °C F1 401589 RTD Bias Mid Point 0 199 1 °C F1 120158A RTD Bias Maximum 0 200 1 °C F1 155158B Thermal Capacity Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0158C Assign Thermal Capacity Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1158D Thermal Capacity Alarm Level 1 100 1 % used F1 75158E Thermal Capacity Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0158F Enable Learned Cool Time 0 1 1 - F103 01590 Enable Unbalance Biasing 0 1 1 - F103 01591 Motor Load Averaging Interval 3 60 3 cycles F1 3

... Reserved15AE Select Curve Style 0 1 1 - F128 0

O/L CURVE SETUP15AF Standard Overload Curve Number 1 15 1 - F1 415B0 Time to Trip at 1.01 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 1741515B2 Time to Trip at 1.05 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 341515B4 Time to Trip at 1.10 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 166715B6 Time to Trip at 1.20 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 79515B8 Time to Trip at 1.30 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 50715BA Time to Trip at 1.40 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 36515BC Time to Trip at 1.50 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 28015BE Time to Trip at 1.75 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 17015C0 Time to Trip at 2.00 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 11715C2 Time to Trip at 2.25 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 8615C4 Time to Trip at 2.50 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 6715C6 Time to Trip at 2.75 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 5315C8 Time to Trip at 3.00 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 4415CA Time to Trip at 3.25 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 3715CC Time to Trip at 3.50 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 3115CE Time to Trip at 3.75 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 2715D0 Time to Trip at 4.00 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 2315D2 Time to Trip at 4.25 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 2115D4 Time to Trip at 4.50 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 1815D6 Time to Trip at 4.75 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 1615D8 Time to Trip at 5.00 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 1515DA Time to Trip at 5.50 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 1215DC Time to Trip at 6.00 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 1015DE Time to Trip at 6.50 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 915E0 Time to Trip at 7.00 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 715E2 Time to Trip at 7.50 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 615E4 Time to Trip at 8.00 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 615E6 Time to Trip at 10.0 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 6



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

15E8 Time to Trip at 15.0 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 615EA Time to Trip at 20.0 x FLA 0 65534 1 s F1 6

... ReservedSHORT CIRCUIT TRIP (0 = INSTANTANEOUS TIME DELAY)

1640 Short Circuit Trip 0 1 1 - F115 01641 Reserved1642 Assign Short Circuit Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 11643 Short Circuit Trip Level 20 200 1 × CT F2 1001644 Short Circuit Trip Delay 0 255.00 0.01 s F3 01645 Short Circuit Trip Backup 0 2 1 - F115 01646 Assign Short Circuit Backup Relays 0 3 1 - F119 11647 Add Short Circuit Trip Backup Delay 0 25500 0.01 s F3 20

... ReservedOVERLOAD ALARM

1650 Overload Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01651 Overload Alarm Level 101 150 1 0.01 × FLA F3 1011652 Assign Overload Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11653 Overload Alarm Delay 0 600 1 s F2 101654 Overload Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0

... ReservedMECHANICAL JAM

1660 Mechanical Jam Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01661 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11662 Mechanical Jam Alarm Level 101 600 1 0.01 × FLA F3 1501663 Mechanical Jam Alarm Delay 5 1250 5 s F2 101664 Mechanical Jam Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 01665 Mechanical Jam Trip 0 2 1 - F115 01666 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 11667 Mechanical Jam Trip Level 101 600 1 0.01 × FLA F3 1501668 Mechanical Jam Trip Delay 5 1250 5 s F2 10

... Reserved - - - - - -UNDERCURRENT

1670 Block Undercurrent from Start 0 15000 1 s F1 01671 Undercurrent Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01672 Assign Undercurrent Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11673 Undercurrent Alarm Level 10 99 1 0.01 × FLA F3 701674 Undercurrent Alarm Delay 1 255 1 s F1 11675 Undercurrent Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 01676 Undercurrent Trip 0 2 1 - F115 01677 Assign Undercurrent Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 11678 Undercurrent Trip Level 10 99 1 0.01 × FLA F3 701679 Undercurrent Trip Delay 1 255 1 s F1 1

... ReservedCURRENT UNBALANCE

1680 Block Unbalance From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 01681 Current Unbalance Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01682 Assign Unbalance Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11683 Unbalance Alarm Level 4 30 1 % F1 151684 Unbalance Alarm Delay 1 255 1 s F1 11685 Unbalance Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 01686 Current Unbalance Trip 0 2 1 - F115 01687 Assign Unbalance Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 11688 Unbalance Trip Level 4 30 1 % F1 201689 Unbalance Trip Delay 1 255 1 s F1 1

... ReservedGROUND FAULT

16A1 Ground Fault Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 016A2 Assign Ground Fault Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 116A3 Ground Fault Alarm Pickup 10 100 1 0.1 × CT F3 10



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

16A4 GF Alarm Pickup for GE Multilin 50:0.025 CT 25 2500 1 Amps F3 2516A5 Ground Fault Alarm Delay 0 255.00 0.01 s F3 016A6 Ground Fault Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 016A7 Ground Fault Trip 0 2 1 - F 115 016A8 Assign Ground Fault Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F 111 116A9 Ground Fault Trip Pickup 10 100 1 0.1 × CT F3 2016AA GF Trip Pickup for GE Multilin 50:0.025 CT 25 2500 1 0.1 × CT F3 2516AB Ground Fault Trip Delay 0 255.00 0.01 s F3 016AC Ground Fault Trip Backup 0 1 1 - F115 016AD Ground Fault Trip Backup Relays 0 3 1 - F119 3316AE Ground Fault Trip Backup Delay 0.10 255.00 0.01 s F3 0.20

... ReservedACCELERATION TRIP

16D0 Acceleration Trip 0 1 1 - F115 016D1 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 116D2 Acceleration Timer From Start 10 2500 1 1s F1 100

... Reserved - - - - - -16E0 Enable Single Shot Restart 0 1 1 - F103 016E1 Enable Start Inhibit 0 1 1 - F103 016E2 Maximum Starts/Hour Permissible 0 5 1 - F1 016E3 Time Between Starts 0 500 1 min F1 1016E4 Restart Block 0 50000 1 s F1 016E5 Assign Block Relays 0 7 1 - F111 3

... ReservedBACKSPIN DETECTION

1780 Enable Back-Spin Start Inhibit 0 1 1 - F103 01781 Minimum Permissible Frequency 0 999 1 Hz F3 100

... Reserved1784 Enable Prediction Algorithm 0 1 1 - F103 11785 Assign Backspin Inhibit Relays 0 7 1 - F111 11786 Number of Motor Poles 2 16 2 - F1 2

... ReservedLOCAL RTD #1

1790 Local RTD #1 Application 0 4 1 - F121 01791 Local RTD #1 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01792 Local RTD #1 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 21793 Local RTD #1 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1301794 Local RTD #1 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01795 Local RTD #1 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11796 Local RTD #1 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1301797 Record RTD #1 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 01798 Local RTD #1 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 01799 Enable RTD #1 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1179A Local RTD #1 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1179B Local RTD #1 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130179C Local RTD #1 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 017A0 First Character of Local RTD #1 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

↓ ↓ - - - - - -17A3 8th Character of Local RTD #1 Name 32 127 1 - F1 " "


17B0 Local RTD #2 Application 0 4 1 - F121 017B1 Local RTD #2 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 017B2 Local RTD #2 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 217B3 Local RTD #2 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13017B4 Local RTD #2 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 017B5 Local RTD #2 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 117B6 Local RTD #2 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13017B7 Record RTD #2 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

17B8 Local RTD #2 Trip 0 2 1 - F 115 017B9 Enable RTD #2 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 117BA Local RTD #2 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 117BB Local RTD #2 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13017BC Local RTD #2 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 017C0 First Character of Local RTD #2 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

↓ ↓17C3 8th Character of Local RTD #2 Name 32 127 1 - F1 " "


17D0 Local RTD #3 Application 0 4 1 - F121 017D1 Local RTD #3 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 017D2 Local RTD #3 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 217D3 Local RTD #3 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13017D4 Local RTD #3 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 017D5 Local RTD #3 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 117D6 Local RTD #3 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13017D7 Record RTD #3 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 017D8 Local RTD #3 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 017D9 Enable RTD #3 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 117DA Local RTD #3 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 117DB Local RTD #3 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13017DC Local RTD #3 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 017E0 First Character of Local RTD #3 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

↓ ↓17E3 8th Character of Local RTD #3 Name 32 127 1 - F1 " "


17F0 Local RTD #4 Application 0 4 1 - F121 017F1 Local RTD #4 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 017F2 Local RTD #4 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 217F3 Local RTD #4 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13017F4 Local RTD #4 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 017F5 Local RTD #4 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 117F6 Local RTD #4 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13017F7 Enable RTD #4 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 017F8 Local RTD #4 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 017F9 Enable RTD #4 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 117FA Local RTD #4 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 117FB Local RTD #4 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13017FC Local RTD #4 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 01800 First Character of Local RTD #4 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

↓ ↓1803 8th Character of Local RTD #4 Name 32 127 1 - F1 " "


1810 Local RTD #5 Application 0 4 1 - F121 01811 Local RTD #5 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01812 Local RTD #5 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11813 Local RTD #5 High Alarm Level 1 250 1 °C / °F F1 1301814 Local RTD #5 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01815 Local RTD #5 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11816 Local RTD #5 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1301817 Record RTD #5 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 01818 Local RTD #5 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 01819 Enable RTD #5 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1181A Local RTD #5 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1181B Local RTD #5 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130181C Local RTD #5 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

1820 First Character of Local RTD #5 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’↓ ↓

1823 8th Character of Local RTD #5 Name 32 127 1 - F1 " "... Reserved

LOCAL RTD #61830 Local RTD #6 Application 0 4 1 - F121 01831 Local RTD #6 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01832 Local RTD #6 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 21833 Local RTD #6 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1301834 Local RTD #6 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01835 Local RTD #6 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11836 Local RTD #6 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1301837 Record RTD #6 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 01838 Local RTD #6 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 01839 Enable RTD #6 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1183A Local RTD #6 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1183B Local RTD #6 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130183C Local RTD #6 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 01840 First Character of Local RTD #6 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’



1850 Local RTD #7 Application 0 4 1 - F121 01851 Local RTD #7 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01852 Local RTD #7 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 21853 Local RTD #7 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1301854 Local RTD #7 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01855 Local RTD #7 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11856 Local RTD #7 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1301857 Record RTD #7 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 01858 Local RTD #7 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 01859 Enable RTD #7 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1185A Local RTD #7 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1185B Local RTD #7 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130185C Local RTD #7 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 01860 First Character of Local RTD #7 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

↓ ↓1863 8th Character of Local RTD #7 Name 32 127 1 - F1 " "1864 Reserved

LOCAL RTD #81870 Local RTD #8 Application 0 4 1 - F121 01871 Local RTD #8 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01872 Local RTD #8 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 21873 Local RTD #8 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1301874 Local RTD #8 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01875 Local RTD #8 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11876 Local RTD #8 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1301877 Record RTD #8 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 01878 Local RTD #8 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 01879 Enable RTD #8 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1187A Local RTD #8 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1187B Local RTD #8 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130187C Local RTD #8 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 01880 First Character of Local RTD #8 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

↓ ↓1883 8th Character of Local RTD #8 Name 32 127 1 - F1 " "1884 Reserved



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

LOCAL RTD #91890 Local RTD #9 Application 0 4 1 - F121 01891 Local RTD #9 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01892 Local RTD #9 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 21893 Local RTD #9 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1301894 Local RTD #9 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01895 Local RTD #9 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11896 Local RTD #9 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1301897 Record RTD #9 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 01898 Local RTD #9 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 01899 Enable RTD #9 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1189A Local RTD #9 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1189B Local RTD #9 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130189C Local RTD #9 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 018A0 First Character of Local RTD #9 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

↓ ↓18A3 8th Character of Local RTD #9 Name 32 127 1 - F1 " "18A4 Reserved

LOCAL RTD #1018B0 Local RTD #10 Application 0 4 1 - F121 018B1 Local RTD #10 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 018B2 Local RTD #10 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 218B3 Local RTD #10 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13018B4 Local RTD #10 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 018B5 Local RTD #10 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 118B6 Local RTD #10 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13018B7 Record RTD #10 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 018B8 Local RTD #10 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 018B9 Enable RTD #10 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 118BA Local RTD #10 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 118BB Local RTD #10 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13018BC Local RTD #10 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 018C0 First Character of Local RTD #10 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

↓ ↓18C3 8th Character of RTD #10 Name 32 127 1 - F1 " "


18D0 Local RTD #11 Application 0 4 1 - F121 018D1 Local RTD #11 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 018D2 Local RTD #11 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 218D3 Local RTD #11 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13018D4 Local RTD #11 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 018D5 Local RTD #11 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 118D6 Local RTD #11 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13018D7 Record RTD #11 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 018D8 Local RTD #11 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 018D9 Enable RTD #11 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 118DA Local RTD #11 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 118DB Local RTD #11 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13018DC Local RTD #11 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 018E0 First Character of Local RTD #11 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

↓ ↓18E3 8th Character of Local RTD #11 Name 32 127 1 - F1 " "


18F0 Local RTD #12 Application 0 4 1 - F121 018F1 Local RTD #12 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 018F2 Local RTD #12 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 218F3 Local RTD #12 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

18F4 Local RTD #12 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 018F5 Local RTD #12 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 118F6 Local RTD #12 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13018F7 Record RTD #12 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 018F8 Local RTD #12 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 018F9 Enable RTD #12 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 118FA Local RTD #12 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 118FB Local RTD #12 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13018FC Local RTD #12 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 01900 First Character of Local RTD #12 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’


... ReservedOPEN RTD ALARM

1B20 Open RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01B21 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11B22 Open RTD Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0

SHORT/LOW TEMPERATURE RTD ALARM1B23 Short / Low Temp RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01B24 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11B25 Short / Low Temp Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0

... Reserved - - - - - -LOSS OF REMOTE RTD COMMUNICATIONS

1B30 Loss RRTD Comm Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01B31 Loss RRTD Comm Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11B32 Loss RRTD Comm Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0

... ReservedUNDERVOLTAGE

1B60 Undervoltage Active If Motor Stopped 0 1 1 - F103 01B61 Undervoltage Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01B62 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11B63 Undervoltage Alarm Pickup 50 99 1 × Rated F3 851B64 Starting Undervoltage Alarm Pickup 50 99 1 × Rated F3 851B65 Undervoltage Alarm Delay 0 2550 1 0.1s F2 301B66 Undervoltage Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 01B67 Undervoltage Trip 0 2 1 - F115 01B68 Undervoltage Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 11B69 Undervoltage Trip Pickup 50 99 1 × Rated F3 801B6A Starting Undervoltage Trip Pickup 50 99 1 × Rated F3 801B6B Undervoltage Trip Delay 0 2550 1 0.1s F2 10

... ReservedOVERVOLTAGE

1B80 Overvoltage Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01B81 Overvoltage Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11B82 Overvoltage Alarm Pickup 101 125 1 x Rated F3 1051B83 Overvoltage Alarm Delay 0 2550 1 s F2 101B84 Overvoltage Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 01B85 Overvoltage Trip 0 1 1 - F103 01B86 Overvoltage Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 11B87 Overvoltage Trip Pickup 101 125 1 x Rated F3 1101B88 Overvoltage Trip Delay 0 2550 1 s F2 10

... ReservedPHASE REVERSAL

1BA0 Phase Reversal Trip 0 2 1 - F115 01BA1 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1

... Reserved - - - - - -OVERFREQUENCY

1BB0 Block Overfrequency on Start 0 5000 1 s F1 11BB1 Overfrequency Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

1BB2 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11BB3 Overfrequency Alarm Level 2000 7000 1 Hz F3 60501BB4 Overfrequency Alarm Delay 0 2550 1 s F2 101BB5 Overfrequency Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 01BB6 Overfrequency Trip 0 1 1 - F103 01BB7 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 11BB8 Overfrequency Trip Level 2000 7000 1 Hz F3 60501BB9 Overfrequency Trip Delay 0 2550 1 s F2 10

... Reserved - - - - - -UNDERFREQUENCY

1BC0 Block Underfrequency on Start 0 5000 1 s F1 11BC1 Underfrequency Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01BC2 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11BC3 Underfrequency Alarm Level 2000 7000 1 Hz F3 59501BC4 Underfrequency Alarm Delay 0 2550 1 s F2 101BC5 Underfrequency Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 01BC6 Underfrequency Trip 0 2 1 - F115 01BC7 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 11BC8 Underfrequency Trip Level 2000 7000 1 Hz F3 59501BC9 Underfrequency Trip Delay 0 2550 1 s F2 10

... ReservedLEAD POWER FACTOR

1BD0 Block Lead Power Factor From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 11BD1 Lead Power Factor Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01BD2 Assign Lead Power Factor Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11BD3 Lead Power Factor Alarm Level 5 99 1 - F3 301BD4 Lead Power Factor Alarm Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 101BD5 Lead Power Factor Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 01BD6 Lead Power Factor Trip 0 2 1 - F115 01BD7 Lead Power Factor Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 11BD8 Lead Power Factor Trip Level 5 99 1 - F3 101BD9 Lead Power Factor Trip Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 10

... ReservedLAG POWER FACTOR

1BE0 Block Lag Power Factor From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 11BE1 Lag Power Factor Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01BE2 Assign Lag Power Factor Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11BE3 Lag Power Factor Alarm Level 5 99 1 - F3 851BE4 Lag Power Factor Alarm Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 101BE5 Lag Power Factor Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 01BE6 Lag Power Factor Trip 0 2 1 - F115 01BE7 Assign Lag Power Factor Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 11BE8 Lag Power Factor Trip Level 5 99 1 - F3 801BE9 Lag Power Factor Trip Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 10

... ReservedPOSITIVE REACTIVE POWER

1BF0 Block Positive kvar Element From Start 0 5000 1 s F1 11BF1 Positive kvar Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01BF2 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11BF3 Positive kvar Alarm Level 1 25000 1 kvar F1 101BF4 Positive kvar Alarm Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 101BF5 Positive kvar Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 01BF6 Positive kvar Trip 0 1 1 - F103 01BF7 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 11BF8 Positive kvar Trip Level 1 25000 1 kvar F1 251BF9 Positive kvar Trip Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 10

... ReservedNEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER

1C00 Block Negative kvar Element from Start 0 5000 1 s F1 1



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

1C01 Negative kvar Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01C02 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11C03 Negative kvar Alarm Level 1 25000 1 kvar F1 101C04 Negative kvar Alarm Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 101C05 Negative kvar Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 01C06 Negative kvar Trip 0 1 1 - F103 01C07 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 11C08 Negative kvar Trip Level 1 25000 1 kvar F1 251C09 Negative kvar Trip Delay 1 2550 1 s F2 10

... ReservedUNDERPOWER

1C10 Block Underpower From Start 0 15000 1 s F1 01C11 Underpower Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01C12 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11C13 Underpower Alarm Level 1 25000 1 kW F1 21C14 Underpower Alarm Delay 5 2550 1 s F2 11C15 Underpower Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 01C16 Underpower Trip 0 2 1 - F115 01C17 Underpower Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 11C18 Underpower Trip Level 1 25000 1 kW F1 11C19 Underpower Trip Delay 5 2550 1 s F1 1

... ReservedREVERSE POWER

1C20 Block Reverse Power From Start 0 50000 1 s F1 01C21 Reverse Power Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01C22 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11C23 Reverse Power Alarm Level 1 25000 1 kW F1 21C24 Reverse Power Alarm Delay 5 300 1 s F2 11C25 Reverse Power Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 01C26 Reverse Power Trip 0 2 1 - F115 01C27 Assign Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 11C28 Reverse Power Trip Level 1 25000 1 kW F1 11C29 Reverse Power Trip Delay 5 300 1 s F2 1

... ReservedTRIP COUNTER

1C80 Trip Counter Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01C81 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11C82 Alarm Pickup Level 0 50000 1 - F1 251C83 Trip Counter Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0

... ReservedSTARTER FAILURE

1C90 Starter Failure Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01C91 Starter Type 0 1 1 - F125 01C92 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11C93 Starter Failure Delay 10 1000 10 ms F1 1001C94 Starter Failure Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0

... ReservedCURRENT DEMAND

1CD0 Current Demand Period 5 90 1 min F1 151CD1 Current Demand Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01CD2 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11CD3 Current Demand Alarm Limit 0 65000 1 A F1 1001CD5 Current Demand Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0

... ReservedKW DEMAND

1CE0 kW Demand Period 5 90 1 min F1 151CE1 kW Demand Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01CE2 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11CE3 kW Demand Alarm Limit 1 50000 1 kW F1 100



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

1CE4 kW Demand Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0... Reserved

KVAR DEMAND1CF0 kvar Demand Period 5 90 1 min F1 151CF1 kvar Demand Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01CF2 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11CF3 kvar Demand Alarm Limit 1 50000 1 kvar F1 1001CF4 kvar Demand Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0

... ReservedKVA DEMAND

1D00 kVA Demand Period 5 90 1 min F1 151D01 kVA Demand Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 01D02 Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 11D03 kVA Demand Alarm Limit 1 50000 1 kVA F1 1001D04 kVA Demand Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0

... ReservedSELF-TEST RELAY

1D06 Assign Service Relay 0 7 1 - F113 0... Reserved

ANALOG OUTPUTS1D40 Enable Analog Output 1 0 1 1 - F103 01D41 Assign Analog Output 1 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 01D42 Assign Analog Output 1 Parameter 0 35 1 - F127 01D43 Analog Output 1 Minimum TBD TBD 1 - F1 01D44 Analog Output 1 Maximum TBD TBD 1 - F1 01D45 Enable Analog Output 2 0 1 1 - F103 01D46 Assign Analog Output 2 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 01D47 Assign Analog Output 2 Parameter 0 35 1 - F127 01D48 Analog Output 2 Minimum TBD TBD 1 - F1 01D49 Analog Output 2 Maximum TBD TBD 1 - F1 01D4A Enable Analog Output 3 0 1 1 - F103 01D4B Assign Analog Output 3 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 01D4C Assign Analog Output 3 Parameter 0 35 1 - F127 01D4D Analog Output 3 Minimum TBD TBD 1 - F1 01D4E Analog Output 3 Maximum TBD TBD 1 - F1 01D4F Enable Analog Output 4 0 1 1 - F103 01D50 Assign Analog Output 4 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 01D51 Assign Analog Output 4 Parameter 0 35 1 - F127 01D52 Analog Output 4 Minimum TBD TBD 1 - F1 01D53 Analog Output 4 Maximum TBD TBD 1 - F1 0

... ReservedTEST OUTPUT RELAYS

1F80 Force Trip Relay 0 2 1 - F150 01F81 Force Trip Relay Duration 1 300 1 s F1 01F82 Force AUX1 Relay 0 2 1 - F150 01F83 Force AUX1 Relay Duration 1 300 1 s F1 01F84 Force AUX2 Relay 0 2 1 - F150 01F85 Force AUX2 Relay Duration 1 300 1 s F1 01F86 Force Alarm Relay 0 2 1 - F150 01F87 Force Alarm Relay Range 1 300 1 s F1 0

... ReservedTEST ANALOG OUTPUTS

1F90 Force Analog Outputs 0 1 1 - F126 01F91 Analog Output 1 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 01F92 Analog Output 2 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 01F93 Analog Output 3 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 01F94 Analog Output 4 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 0

... Reserved



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

REMOTE RTD SLAVE ADDRESSES1FF0 RRTD1 - Slave Address 0 254 1 - F1 01FF1 RRTD2 - Slave Address 0 254 1 - F1 01FF2 RRTD3 - Slave Address 0 254 1 - F1 01FF3 RRTD4 - Slave Address 0 254 1 - F1 0

... ReservedRRTD 1 – RTD #1

2000 RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Application 0 4 1 - F121 02001 RRTD 1 - RTD #1 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02002 RRTD 1 - RTD #1 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 22003 RRTD 1 - RTD #1 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302004 RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02005 RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12006 RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302007 Record RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 02008 RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02009 Enable RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1200A RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1200B RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130200C RRTD 1 - RTD #1 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 0

... Reserved2010 First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

↓ ↓2013 8th Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Name 32 127 1 - F1 " "2014 Reserved

RRTD 1 – RTD #22020 RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Application 0 4 1 - F121 02021 RRTD 1 - RTD #2 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02022 RRTD 1 - RTD #2 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 22023 RRTD 1 - RTD #2 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302024 RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02025 RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12026 RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302027 Record RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 02028 RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02029 Enable A Remote RTD #2 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1202A RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1202B RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130202C RRTD 1 - RTD #2 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 0

... Reserved2030 First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’


RRTD 1 – RTD #32040 RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Application 0 4 1 - F121 02041 RRTD 1 - RTD #3 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02042 RRTD 1 - RTD #3 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 22043 RRTD 1 - RTD #3 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302044 RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02045 RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12046 RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302047 Record RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 02048 RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02049 Enable RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1204A RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1204B RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130204C RRTD 1 - RTD #3 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 02050 First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD # Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

↓ ↓2053 8th Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Name 32 127 1 - F1 " "


2060 RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Application 0 4 1 - F121 02061 RRTD 1 - RTD #4 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02062 RRTD 1 - RTD #4 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 22063 RRTD 1 - RTD #4 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302064 RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02065 RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12066 RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302067 Record RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 02068 RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02069 Enable RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1206A RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1206B RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130206C RRTD 1 - RTD #4 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 02070 First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’


RRTD 1 – RTD #52080 RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Application 0 4 1 - F121 02081 RRTD 1 - RTD #5 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02082 RRTD 1 - RTD #5 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 22083 RRTD 1 - RTD #5 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302084 RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02085 RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12086 RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302087 Record RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 02088 RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02089 Enable RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1208A RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1208B RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130208C RRTD 1 - RTD #5 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 02090 First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’



20A0 RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Application 0 4 1 - F121 020A1 RRTD 1 - RTD #6 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 020A2 RRTD 1 - RTD #6 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 120A3 RRTD 1 - RTD #6 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13020A4 RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 020A5 RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 120A6 RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13020A7 Record RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 020A8 RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 020A9 Enable RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 120AA RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 120AB RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13020AC RRTD 1 - RTD #6 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 020B0 First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

↓ ↓20B3 8th Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Name 32 127 1 - F1 " "


20C0 RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Application 0 4 1 - F121 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

20C1 RRTD 1 - RTD #7 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 020C2 RRTD 1 - RTD #7 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 220C3 RRTD 1 - RTD #7 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13020C4 RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 020C5 RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 120C6 RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13020C7 Record RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 020C8 RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 020C9 Enable RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 120CA RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 120CB RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13020CC RRTD 1 - RTD #7 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 020D0 First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

↓ ↓20D3 8th Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Name 32 127 1 - F1 " "


20E0 RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Application 0 4 1 - F121 020E1 RRTD 1 - RTD #8 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 020E2 RRTD 1 - RTD #8 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 220E3 RRTD 1 - RTD #8 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13020E4 RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 020E5 RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 120E6 RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13020E7 Record RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 020E8 RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 020E9 Enable RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 120EA RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 120EB RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13020EC RRTD 1 - RTD #8 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 020F0 First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

↓ ↓20F3 8th Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Name 32 127 1 - F1 " "





2120 RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Application 0 4 1 - F121 02121 RRTD 1 - RTD #10 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02122 RRTD 1 - RTD #10 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 22123 RRTD 1 - RTD #10 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302124 RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02125 RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 1



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

2126 RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302127 Record RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 02128 RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02129 Enable RRTD 1 - RTD#10 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1212A RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1212B RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130212C RRTD 1 - RTD #10 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 02130 First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’








... ReservedRRTD 1 – OPEN RTD ALARM

2180 RRTD A - Open RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02181 RRTD A - Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12182 RRTD A - Open RTD Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0

RRTD 1 – SHORT/LOW TEMPERATURE RTD ALARM2183 RRTD A - Short / Low Temp RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02184 RRTD A - Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12185 RRTD A - Short / Low Temp Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0

... Reserved - - - - - -RRTD 2 – RTD #1

2200 RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Application 0 4 1 - F121 02201 RRTD 2 - RTD #1 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

2202 RRTD 2 - RTD #1 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 22203 RRTD 2 - RTD #1 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302204 RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02205 RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12206 RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302207 Record RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 02208 RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02209 Enable RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1220A RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1220B RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130220C RRTD 2 - RTD #1 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 02210 First Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’



2220 RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Application 0 4 1 - F121 02221 RRTD 2 - RTD #2 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02222 RRTD 2 - RTD #2 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 22223 RRTD 2 - RTD #2 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302224 RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02225 RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12226 RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302227 Record RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 02228 RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02229 Enable A Remote RTD #2 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1222A RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1222B RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130222C RRTD 2 - RTD #2 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 02230 First Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’



2240 RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Application 0 4 1 - F121 02241 RRTD 2 - RTD #3 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02242 RRTD 2 - RTD #3 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 22243 RRTD 2 - RTD #3 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302244 RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02245 RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12246 RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302247 Record RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 02248 RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02249 Enable RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1224A RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1224B RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130224C RRTD 2 - RTD #3 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 02250 First Character of RRTD 2 - RTD # Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’



2260 RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Application 0 4 1 - F121 02261 RRTD 2 - RTD #4 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02262 RRTD 2 - RTD #4 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 22263 RRTD 2 - RTD #4 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302264 RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02265 RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12266 RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

2267 Record RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 02268 RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02069 Enable RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1226A RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1226B RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130226C RRTD 2 - RTD #4 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 02270 First Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’









22C0 RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Application 0 4 1 - F121 022C1 RRTD 2 - RTD #7 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 022C2 RRTD 2 - RTD #7 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 222C3 RRTD 2 - RTD #7 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13022C4 RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 022C5 RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 122C6 RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13022C7 Record RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 022C8 RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 022C9 Enable RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 122CA RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 122CB RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

22CC RRTD 2 - RTD #7 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 022D0 First Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

↓ ↓22D3 8th Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’ ’



↓ ↓22F3 8th Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #8 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’ ’





2320 RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Application 0 4 1 - F121 02321 RRTD 2 - RTD #10 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02322 RRTD 2 - RTD #10 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 22323 RRTD 2 - RTD #10 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302324 RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02325 RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12326 RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302327 Record RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 02328 RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02329 Enable RRTD 2 - RTD#10 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1232A RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1232B RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130232C RRTD 2 - RTD #10 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 02330 First Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’


... Reserved



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9


↓ ↓2353 8th Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #11 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’’





2380 RRTD B - Open RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02381 RRTD B - Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12382 RRTD B - Open RTD Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0

RRTD 2 – SHORT/LOW TEMPERATURE RTD ALARM2383 RRTD B - Short / Low Temp RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02384 RRTD B - Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12385 RRTD B - Short / Low Temp Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0


2400 RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Application 0 4 1 - F121 02401 RRTD 3 - RTD #1 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02402 RRTD 3 - RTD #1 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 22403 RRTD 3 - RTD #1 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302404 RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02405 RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12406 RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302407 Record RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 02408 RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02409 Enable RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1240A RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1240B RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130240C RRTD 3 - RTD #1 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

2410 First Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’↓ ↓

2413 8th Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Name 32 127 1 - F1 " "2414 Reserved









... Reserved



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9







24C0 RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Application 0 4 1 - F121 024C1 RRTD 3 - RTD #7 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 024C2 RRTD 3 - RTD #7 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 224C3 RRTD 3 - RTD #7 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13024C4 RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 024C5 RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 124C6 RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13024C7 Record RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 024C8 RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 024C9 Enable RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 124CA RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 124CB RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13024CC RRTD 3 - RTD #7 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 024D0 First Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’



24E0 RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Application 0 4 1 - F121 024E1 RRTD 3 - RTD #8 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 024E2 RRTD 3 - RTD #8 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 224E3 RRTD 3 - RTD #8 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

24E4 RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 024E5 RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 124E6 RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13024E7 Record RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 024E8 RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 024E9 Enable RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 124EA RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 124EB RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13024EC RRTD 3 - RTD #8 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 024F0 First Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’

↓ ↓24F3 8th Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Name 32 127 1 - F1 " "








2540 RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Application 0 4 1 - F121 02541 RRTD 3 - RTD #11 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02542 RRTD 3 - RTD #11 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 22543 RRTD 3 - RTD #11 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302544 RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02545 RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12546 RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302547 Record RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 02548 RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

2549 Enable RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1254A RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1254B RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130254C RRTD 3 - RTD #11 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 02550 First Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’






2580 RRTD 3 - Open RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02581 RRTD 3 - Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12582 RRTD 3 - Open RTD Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0

RRTD 3 – SHORT/LOW TEMPERATURE RTD ALARM2583 RRTD 3 - Short / Low Temp RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02584 RRTD 3 - Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12585 RRTD 3 - Short / Low Temp Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0




.... ReservedRRTD 4 – RTD #2

2620 RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Application 0 4 1 - F121 02621 RRTD 4 - RTD #2 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02622 RRTD 4 - RTD #2 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 22623 RRTD 4 - RTD #2 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302624 RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

2625 RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12626 RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302627 Record RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 02628 RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02629 Enable A Remote RTD #2 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1262A RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1262B RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130262C RRTD 4 - RTD #2 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 02630 First Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’









2680 RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Application 0 4 1 - F121 02681 RRTD 4 - RTD #5 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02682 RRTD 4 - RTD #5 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 22683 RRTD 4 - RTD #5 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302684 RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02685 RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12686 RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302687 Record RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 02688 RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02689 Enable RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

268A RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1268B RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130268C RRTD 4 - RTD #5 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 02690 First Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’






26C0 RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Application 0 4 1 - F121 026C1 RRTD 4 - RTD #7 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 026C2 RRTD 4 - RTD #7 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 226C3 RRTD 4 - RTD #7 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13026C4 RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 026C5 RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 126C6 RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13026C7 Record RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 026C8 RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 026C9 Enable RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 126CA RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 126CB RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 13026CC RRTD 4 - RTD #7 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 026D0 First Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’




↓ ↓



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

26F3 8th Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #8 Name 32 127 1 - F1 " "... Reserved










2760 RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Application 0 4 1 - F121 02761 RRTD 4 - RTD #12 High Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

2762 RRTD 4 - RTD #12 High Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 22763 RRTD 4 - RTD #12 High Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302764 RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02765 RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12766 RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Alarm Level 1 200 1 °C F1 1302767 Record RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 02768 RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02769 Enable RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Trip Voting 0 13 1 - F122 1276A RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Trip Relays 0 7 1 - F111 1276B RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Trip Level 1 200 1 °C F1 130276C RRTD 4 - RTD #12 RTD Type 0 3 1 - F120 02770 First Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Name 32 127 1 - F1 ’R’



2780 RRTD 4- Open RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02781 RRTD 4 - Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12782 RRTD 4 - Open RTD Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0

RRTD 4 – SHORT/LOW TEMPERATURE RTD ALARM2783 RRTD 4 - Short / Low Temp RTD Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02784 RRTD 4 - Assign Alarm Relays 0 7 1 - F113 12785 RRTD 4 - Short / Low Temp Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0

... Reserved - - - - - -RRTD 1 – OUTPUT RELAY SETUP

27A0 Trip Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 027A1 Alarm Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 027A2 Aux 1 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 027A3 Aux 2 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 027A4 Trip Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 027A5 Alarm Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 127A6 Aux1 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 127A7 Aux2 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 0

... ReservedRRTD 2 – OUTPUT RELAY SETUP

27B0 Trip Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 027B1 Alarm Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 027B2 Aux 1 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 027B3 Aux 2 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 027B4 Trip Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 027B5 Alarm Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 127B6 Aux1 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 127B7 Aux2 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 0


27C0 Trip Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 027C1 Alarm Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 027C2 Aux 1 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 027C3 Aux 2 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 027C4 Trip Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 027C5 Alarm Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 127C6 Aux1 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 127C7 Aux2 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 0


27D0 Trip Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 027D1 Alarm Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 027D2 Aux 1 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 027D3 Aux 2 Relay Reset Mode 0 2 1 - F117 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

27D4 Trip Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 027D5 Alarm Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 127D6 Aux1 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 127D7 Aux2 Relay Operation 0 1 1 - F161 0

... ReservedRRTD 1 – ANALOG OUTPUTS

27E0 Enable Analog Output 1 0 1 1 - F103 027E1 Assign Analog Output 1 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 027E2 Assign Analog Output 1 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 1327E3 Analog Output 1 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -4027E4 Analog Output 1 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 20027E5 Enable Analog Output 2 0 1 1 - F103 027E6 Assign Analog Output 2 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 027E7 Assign Analog Output 2 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 1327E8 Analog Output 2 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -4027E9 Analog Output 2 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 20027EA Enable Analog Output 3 0 1 1 - F103 027EB Assign Analog Output 3 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 027EC Assign Analog Output 3 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 1327ED Analog Output 3 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -4027EE Analog Output 3 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 20027EF Enable Analog Output 4 0 1 1 - F103 027F0 Assign Analog Output 4 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 027F1 Assign Analog Output 4 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 1327F2 Analog Output 4 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -4027F3 Analog Output 4 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 200


2800 Enable Analog Output 1 0 1 1 - F103 02801 Assign Analog Output 1 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 02802 Assign Analog Output 1 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 132803 Analog Output 1 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -402804 Analog Output 1 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 2002805 Enable Analog Output 2 0 1 1 - F103 02806 Assign Analog Output 2 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 02807 Assign Analog Output 2 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 132808 Analog Output 2 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -402809 Analog Output 2 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 200280A Enable Analog Output 3 0 1 1 - F103 0280B Assign Analog Output 3 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 0280C Assign Analog Output 3 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 13280D Analog Output 3 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -40280E Analog Output 3 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 200280F Enable Analog Output 4 0 1 1 - F103 02810 Assign Analog Output 4 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 02811 Assign Analog Output 4 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 132812 Analog Output 4 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -402813 Analog Output 4 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 200


2820 Enable Analog Output 1 0 1 1 - F103 02821 Assign Analog Output 1 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 02822 Assign Analog Output 1 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 132823 Analog Output 1 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -402824 Analog Output 1 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 2002825 Enable Analog Output 2 0 1 1 - F103 02826 Assign Analog Output 2 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 02827 Assign Analog Output 2 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 132828 Analog Output 2 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -40



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

2829 Analog Output 2 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 200282A Enable Analog Output 3 0 1 1 - F103 0282B Assign Analog Output 3 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 0282C Assign Analog Output 3 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 13282D Analog Output 3 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -40282E Analog Output 3 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 200282F Enable Analog Output 4 0 1 1 - F103 02830 Assign Analog Output 4 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 02831 Assign Analog Output 4 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 132832 Analog Output 4 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -402833 Analog Output 4 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 200


2840 Enable Analog Output 1 0 1 1 - F103 02841 Assign Analog Output 1 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 02842 Assign Analog Output 1 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 132843 Analog Output 1 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -402844 Analog Output 1 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 2002845 Enable Analog Output 2 0 1 1 - F103 02846 Assign Analog Output 2 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 02847 Assign Analog Output 2 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 132848 Analog Output 2 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -402849 Analog Output 2 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 200284A Enable Analog Output 3 0 1 1 - F103 0284B Assign Analog Output 3 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 0284C Assign Analog Output 3 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 13284D Analog Output 3 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -40284E Analog Output 3 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 200284F Enable Analog Output 4 0 1 1 - F103 02850 Assign Analog Output 4 Output Range 0 2 1 - F26 02851 Assign Analog Output 4 Parameter 12 24 1 - F127 132852 Analog Output 4 Minimum -40 200 1 - F4 -402853 Analog Output 4 Maximum -40 200 1 - F4 2002854 Reserved

RRTD 1 – DIGITAL INPUT 22860 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 2 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’

↓ ↓2865 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 2 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’2870 Digital Input 2 Type 0 1 1 - F116 02871 Reserved2872 Digital Input 2 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02873 Digital Input 2 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 02874 Digital Input 2 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502875 Digital Input 2 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 02876 Digital Input 2 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02877 Digital Input 2 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 02878 Digital Input 2 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502879 Digital Input 2 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0

--- ReservedRRTD 1 – DIGITAL INPUT 5

2880 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 5 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’↓ ↓

2885 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 5 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’2890 Digital Input 5 Type 0 1 1 - F116 02891 Reserved2892 Digital Input 5 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02893 Digital Input 5 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 02894 Digital Input 5 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502895 Digital Input 5 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

2896 Digital Input 5 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02897 Digital Input 5 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 02898 Digital Input 5 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502899 Digital Input 5 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0

... ReservedRRTD 1 – DIGITAL INPUT 4

28A0 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 4 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’↓ ↓

28A5 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 4 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’28B0 Digital Input 4 Type 0 1 1 - F116 028B1 Reserved28B2 Digital Input 4 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 028B3 Digital Input 4 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 028B4 Digital Input 4 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 5028B5 Digital Input 4 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 028B6 Digital Input 4 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 028B7 Digital Input 4 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 028B8 Digital Input 4 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 5028B9 Digital Input 4 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0


28C0 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 1 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’↓ ↓

28C5 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 1 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’28D0 Digital Input 1 Type 0 1 1 - F116 028D1 Reserved28D2 Digital Input 1 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 028D3 Digital Input 1 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 028D4 Digital Input 1 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 5028D5 Digital Input 1 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 028D6 Digital Input 1 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 028D7 Digital Input 1 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 028D8 Digital Input 1 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 5028D9 Digital Input 1 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0


28E0 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 6 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’↓ ↓

28E5 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 6 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’28F0 Digital Input 6 Type 0 1 1 - F116 028F1 Reserved28F2 Digital Input 6 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 028F3 Digital Input 6 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 028F4 Digital Input 6 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 5028F5 Digital Input 6 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 028F6 Digital Input 6 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 028F7 Digital Input 6 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 028F8 Digital Input 6 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 5028F9 Digital Input 6 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0



2905 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 3 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’2910 Digital Input 3 Type 0 1 1 - F116 02911 Reserved2912 Digital Input 3 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02913 Digital Input 3 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 02914 Digital Input 3 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 50



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

2915 Digital Input 3 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 02916 Digital Input 3 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02917 Digital Input 3 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 02918 Digital Input 3 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502919 Digital Input 3 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0



2925 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 2 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’2930 Digital Input 2 Type 0 1 1 - F116 02931 Reserved2932 Digital Input 2 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02933 Digital Input 2 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 02934 Digital Input 2 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502935 Digital Input 2 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 02936 Digital Input 2 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02937 Digital Input 2 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 02938 Digital Input 2 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502939 Digital Input 2 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0









2985 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 1 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’2990 Digital Input 1 Type 0 1 1 - F116 02991 Reserved2992 Digital Input 1 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02993 Digital Input 1 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

2994 Digital Input 1 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502995 Digital Input 1 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 02996 Digital Input 1 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02997 Digital Input 1 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 02998 Digital Input 1 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502999 Digital Input 1 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0



29A5 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 6 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’29B0 Digital Input 6 Type 0 1 1 - F116 029B1 Reserved29B2 Digital Input 6 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 029B3 Digital Input 6 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 029B4 Digital Input 6 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 5029B5 Digital Input 6 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 029B6 Digital Input 6 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 029B7 Digital Input 6 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 029B8 Digital Input 6 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 5029B9 Digital Input 6 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0


29C0 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 3 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’↓ ↓

29C5 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 3 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’29D0 Digital Input 3 Type 0 1 1 - F116 029D1 Reserved29D2 Digital Input 3 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 029D3 Digital Input 3 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 029D4 Digital Input 3 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 5029D5 Digital Input 3 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 029D6 Digital Input 3 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 029D7 Digital Input 3 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 029D8 Digital Input 3 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 5029D9 Digital Input 3 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0


29E0 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 2 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’↓ ↓

29E5 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 2 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’29F0 Digital Input 2 Type 0 1 1 - F116 029F1 Reserved29F2 Digital Input 2 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 029F3 Digital Input 2 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 029F4 Digital Input 2 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 5029F5 Digital Input 2 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 029F6 Digital Input 2 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 029F7 Digital Input 2 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 029F8 Digital Input 2 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 5029F9 Digital Input 2 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0



2A05 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 5 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’2A10 Digital Input 5 Type 0 1 1 - F116 02A11 Reserved2A12 Digital Input 5 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

2A13 Digital Input 5 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 02A14 Digital Input 5 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502A15 Digital Input 5 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 02A16 Digital Input 5 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02A17 Digital Input 5 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 02A18 Digital Input 5 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502A19 Digital Input 5 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0



2A25 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 4 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’2A30 Digital Input 4 Type 0 1 1 - F116 02A31 Reserved2A32 Digital Input 4 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02A33 Digital Input 4 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 02A34 Digital Input 4 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502A35 Digital Input 4 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 02A36 Digital Input 4 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02A37 Digital Input 4 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 02A38 Digital Input 4 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502A39 Digital Input 4 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0









2A85 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 3 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’2A90 Digital Input 3 Type 0 1 1 - F116 02A91 Reserved



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

2A92 Digital Input 3 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02A93 Digital Input 3 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 02A94 Digital Input 3 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502A95 Digital Input 3 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 02A96 Digital Input 3 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02A97 Digital Input 3 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 02A98 Digital Input 3 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502A99 Digital Input 3 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0


2AA0 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 2 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’↓ ↓

2AA5 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 2 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’2AB0 Digital Input 2 Type 0 1 1 - F116 02AB1 Reserved2AB2 Digital Input 2 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02AB3 Digital Input 2 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 02AB4 Digital Input 2 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502AB5 Digital Input 2 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 02AB6 Digital Input 2 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02AB7 Digital Input 2 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 02AB8 Digital Input 2 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502AB9 Digital Input 2 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0


2AC0 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 5 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’↓ ↓

2AC5 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 5 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’2AD0 Digital Input 5 Type 0 1 1 - F116 02AD1 Reserved2AD2 Digital Input 5 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02AD3 Digital Input 5 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 02AD4 Digital Input 5 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502AD5 Digital Input 5 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 02AD6 Digital Input 5 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02AD7 Digital Input 5 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 02AD8 Digital Input 5 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502AD9 Digital Input 5 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0


2AE0 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 4 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’↓ ↓

2AE5 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 4 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’2AF0 Digital Input 4 Type 0 1 1 - F116 02AF1 Reserved2AF2 Digital Input 4 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02AF3 Digital Input 4 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 02AF4 Digital Input 4 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502AF5 Digital Input 4 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 02AF6 Digital Input 4 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02AF7 Digital Input 4 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 02AF8 Digital Input 4 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502AF9 Digital Input 4 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0


2B00 1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 1 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’↓ ↓

2B05 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 1 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’2B10 Digital Input 1 Type 0 1 1 - F116 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

2B11 Reserved2B12 Digital Input 1 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02B13 Digital Input 1 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 02B14 Digital Input 1 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502B15 Digital Input 1 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 02B16 Digital Input 1 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02B17 Digital Input 1 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 02B18 Digital Input 1 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502B19 Digital Input 1 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0



2B25 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 6 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’2B30 Digital Input 6 Type 0 1 1 - F116 02B31 Reserved2B32 Digital Input 6 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02B33 Digital Input 6 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 02B34 Digital Input 6 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502B35 Digital Input 6 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 02B36 Digital Input 6 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02B37 Digital Input 6 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 02B38 Digital Input 6 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502B39 Digital Input 6 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0



2B45 11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 3 Name 32 127 1 - F22 ’GE’2B50 Digital Input 3 Type 0 1 1 - F116 02B51 Reserved2B52 Digital Input 3 Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02B53 Digital Input 3 Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 02B54 Digital Input 3 Alarm Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502B55 Digital Input 3 Alarm Events 0 1 1 - F103 02B56 Digital Input 3 Trip 0 2 1 - F115 02B57 Digital Input 3 Trip Relays 0 6 1 - F111 02B58 Digital Input 3 Trip Delay 1 50000 1 100ms F2 502B59 Digital Input 3 Assignable Function 0 3 1 - F163 0

... ReservedRRTD 1 – TEST OUPUT RELAYS

2B60 Force Trip Relay 0 2 1 - F150 02B61 Force Trip Relay Duration 0 300 1 s F1 02B62 Force AUX1 Relay 0 2 1 - F150 02B63 Force AUX1 Relay Duration 0 300 1 s F1 02B64 Force AUX2 Relay 0 2 1 - F150 02B65 Force AUX2 Relay Duration 0 300 1 s F1 02B66 Force Alarm Relay 0 2 1 - F150 02B67 Force Alarm Relay Range 01 300 1 s F1 0





UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9





... ReservedRRTD 1 – TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS

2BA0 Force Analog Outputs 0 1 1 - F126 02BA1 Analog Output 1 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 02BA2 Analog Output 2 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 02BA3 Analog Output 3 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 02BA4 Analog Output 4 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 0


2BB0 Force Analog Outputs 0 1 1 - F126 02BB1 Analog Output 1 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 02BB2 Analog Output 2 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 02BB3 Analog Output 3 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 02BB4 Analog Output 4 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 0


2BC0 Force Analog Outputs 0 1 1 - F126 02BC1 Analog Output 1 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 02BC2 Analog Output 2 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 02BC3 Analog Output 3 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 02BC4 Analog Output 4 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 0


2BD0 Force Analog Outputs 0 1 1 - F126 02BD1 Analog Output 1 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 02BD2 Analog Output 2 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 02BD3 Analog Output 3 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 02BD4 Analog Output 4 Forced Value 0 100 1 % range F1 0

... ReservedRRTD 1 – DIGITAL COUNTER

2BE0 First Character of Counter Name 32 127 1 - F1 “G”2BEC First Character of Counter Unit Name 32 127 1 - F1 ‘U’2BF2 Counter Type 0 1 1 - F114 02BF3 Digital Counter Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02BF4 Assign Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 02BF5 Counter Alarm Level 0 65535 1 - F1 1002BF7 Reserved - - - - - -2BF8 Record Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 0

... Reserved



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

RRTD 2 – DIGITAL COUNTER2C00 First Character of Counter Name 32 127 1 - F1 “G”2C0C First Character of Counter Unit Name 32 127 1 - F1 ‘U’2C12 Counter Type 0 1 1 - F114 02C13 Digital Counter Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02C14 Assign Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 02C15 Counter Alarm Level 0 65535 1 - F1 1002C17 Reserved - - - - - -2C18 Record Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 0


2C20 First Character of Counter Name 32 127 1 - F1 “G”2C2C First Character of Counter Unit Name 32 127 1 - F1 ‘U’2C32 Counter Type 0 1 1 - F114 02C33 Digital Counter Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02C34 Assign Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 02C35 Counter Alarm Level 0 65535 1 - F1 1002C37 Reserved - - - - - -2C38 Record Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 0


2C40 First Character of Counter Name 32 127 1 - F1 “G”2C4C First Character of Counter Unit Name 32 127 1 - F1 ‘U’2C52 Counter Type 0 1 1 - F114 02C53 Digital Counter Alarm 0 2 1 - F115 02C54 Assign Alarm Relays 0 6 1 - F113 02C55 Counter Alarm Level 0 65535 1 - F1 1002C57 Reserved - - - - - -2C58 Record Alarms as Events 0 1 1 - F103 0

... ReservedEVENT RECORDER / TRACE MEMORY (ADDRESSES 3000 TO 3FFF)EVENT RECORDER

3000 Event Recorder Last Reset (2 words) N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 N/A3002 Total Number of Events Since Last Clear 0 65535 1 N/A F1 03003 Event Record Selector (1=oldest, 250=newest) 1 250 1 N/A F1 13004 Cause of Event 0 281 1 - F134 03005 Time of Event (2 words) N/A N/A N/A N/A F19 N/A3007 Date of Event (2 words) N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 N/A

... Reserved300B Event Phase A Current 0 65535 1 A F1 0300C Event Phase B Current 0 65535 1 A F1 0300D Event Phase C Current 0 65535 1 A F1 0300E Event Motor Load 0 2000 1 FLA F3 0300F Event Current Unbalance 0 100 1 % F1 03010 Event Ground Current 0 50000 1 A F23 03011 Reserved - - - - - -3012 Event Hottest Stator RTD 0 12 1 - F1 03013 Event Temperature of Hottest Stator RTD -40 200 1 o C F4 0

... Reserved301A Event Voltage Vab 0 20000 1 V F1 0301B Event Voltage Vbc 0 20000 1 V F1 0301C Event Voltage Vca 0 20000 1 V F1 0301D Event Voltage Van 0 20000 1 V F1 0301E Event Voltage Vbn 0 20000 1 V F1 0301F Event Voltage Vcn 0 20000 1 V F1 03020 Event System Frequency 0 12000 1 Hz F3 03021 Event Real Power -32000 32000 1 kW F4 03022 Event Reactive Power -32000 32000 1 kvar F4 03023 Event Apparent Power 0 50000 1 kVA F1 0



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

9.6.6 FORMAT CODES

3024 Event Power Factor -99 100 1 - F21 0... Reserved

WAVEFORM CAPTURE30F0 Trace Memory Clear Date N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 N/A30F2 Trace Memory Clear Time N/A N/A N/A N/A F19 N/A30F4 Trace Memory Triggers Since Last Clear 0 65535 1 - F1 030F5 Trace Memory Buffer Selector 0 3 1 - F1 030F6 Trace Memory Channel Selector 0 6 1 - F1 030F7 Trace Memory Trigger Date N/A N/A N/A N/A F18 N/A30F9 Trace Memory Trigger Time N/A N/A N/A N/A F19 N/A30FB Trace Memory Trigger Cause 0 2 1 - F85 N/A30FC Trace Memory Trigger Index 0 100 1 % F1 NA

... Reserved3100 First Trace Memory Sample -32767 32767 1 - F4 N/A

↓ ↓31FF Last Trace Memory Sample -32767 32767 1 - F4 N/A3200 Reserved

... Reserved3FFF Reserved

Table 9–9: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 1 of 15)CODE TYPE DEFINITIONF1 16 bits UNSIGNED VALUE

Example: 1234 stored as 1234F2 16 bits UNSIGNED VALUE, 1 DECIMAL PLACE

Example: 123.4 stored as 1234F3 16 bits UNSIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES

Example: 12.34 stored as 1234F4 16 bits 2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE

Example: -1234 stored as -1234 (i.e. 64302)F5 16 bits 2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE, 1 DECIMAL PLACES

Example: -123.4 stored as -1234 (i.e. 64302)F6 16 bits 2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES



Example: -0.1234 stored as -1234 (i.e. 64302)F13 16 bits INSTALLED OPTIONS

xxxx xxxx xxxx xxx1 Profibus-DP (0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed)xxxx xxxx xxxx xx1x Fiber Optic (0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed)xxxx xxxx xxxx x1xx Metering (0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed)xxxx xxxx xxxx 1xxx Backspin (0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed)xxxx xxxx xxx1 xxxx Local RTD (0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed)xxxx xxxx xx1x xxxx Power Supply Type (0 = LO, 1 = HI)xxxx xxxx 1xxx xxxx Modbus/TCP (0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed)xxxx xxx1 xxxx xxxx DeviceNet (0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed)xxxx xx1x xxxx xxxx Harsh Environment (0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed)xxxx x1xx xxxx xxxx Profibus-DPV1 (0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed)

F15 16 bits HARDWARE REVISION0000 0000 0000 0001 1 = A0000 0000 0000 0010 2 = B

--- ...0000 0000 0001 1010 26 = Z



UNITS FORMAT CODE

FACTORY DEFAULT



9

F16 16 bits SOFTWARE REVISION1111 1111 xxxx xxxx Major Revision Number, 0 to 9 in steps of 1xxxx xxxx 1111 1111 Minor Revision Number (two BCD digits), 00 to 99 in steps of 1

Example: Revision 2.30 stored as 0230 hexF18 32 bits DATE (MM/DD/YYYY)

Example: Feb. 20, 1995 stored as 34867142 (i.e. 1st word: 0214, 2nd word 07C6)1st byte Month (1 to 12)2nd byte Day (1 to 31)3rd and 4th byte Year (1998 to 2097)

F19 32 bits TIME (HH:MM:SS:hh)Example: 2:05pm stored as 235208704 (i.e. 1st word: 0E05, 2nd word 0000)

1st byte Hours (0 to 23)2nd byte Minutes (0 to 59)3rd byte Seconds (0 to 59)4th byte Hundreds of seconds (0 to 99) - Not used by 369

F20 16 bits 2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED LONG VALUEExample: 1234 stored as 1234. Note: -1 means “Never”

F21 16 bits 2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES (Power Factor)Example: Power Factor of 0.87 lag is used as 87 (i.e. 0057)

< 0 Leading Power Factor - Negative> 0 Lagging Power Factor - Positive

F22 16 bits TWO 8-BIT CHARACTERS PACKED INTO 16-BIT UNSIGNEDExample: String "AB" stored as 4142 hex.

MSB First CharacterLSB Second Character

F23 16 Bits UNSIGNED VALUE (For 1A/5 A CT, 1Decimal Place) (For 50: 0.025 A CT, 2 Decimal Places)Example: For 1A/5A CT, G/F current = 1000.0 AExample: For 50: 0.025 A CT, G/F current = 25.00

F26 16 Bits ANALOG OUTPUT SELECTION0 0 - 1mA1 0 - 20 mA2 4 - 20 mA

F27 16 Bits BACKSPIN DETECTION STATE0 Motor Running1 No Backspin2 Slowdown3 Acceleration4 ---5 Backspinning6 Prediction7 Soon to Restart

F30 16 Bits DISABLE/ENABLE SELECTION0 Disabled1 Enabled

Table 9–9: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 2 of 15)CODE TYPE DEFINITION



9

F31 16 Bits COMMAND FUNCTION CODES0 Not in use1 Reset 3692 Motor Start3 Motor Stop4 Waveform Trigger5 Reserved6 Clear Trip Counters7 Clear Last Trip Data8 Reserved9 Reserved10 Clear RTD Maximums11 Reset Motor Info12 Clear/Reset all Data20 Block/Unblock Protection Functions21 Force Output Relays

F85 Unsigned 16 bit integer WAVEFORM CAPTURE TRIGGER CAUSE0 None1 Manual2 Automatic

F100 Unsigned 16 bit integer TEMPERATURE DISPLAY UNITS0 Celsius1 Fahrenheit

F101 Unsigned 16 bit integer BAUD RATE0 1200 baud1 2400 baud2 4800 baud3 9600 baud4 19200 baud

F102 Unsigned 16 bit integer PARITY0 None1 Odd2 Even

F103 Unsigned 16 bit integer OFF/ON OR NO/YES SELECTION0 Off / No1 On / Yes

F104 Unsigned 16 bit integer GROUND CT TYPE0 None1 1 A Secondary2 5 A Secondary3 Multilin CT 50/0.025

F105 Unsigned 16 bit integer CT TYPE0 None1 1 A Secondary2 5 A Secondary

F106 Unsigned 16 bit integer VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CONNECTION TYPE0 None1 Open Delta2 Wye

F107 Unsigned 16 bit integer NOMINAL FREQUENCY0 60 Hz1 50 Hz2 Variable




9

F108 Unsigned 16 bit integer REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING TRANSITION ON0 Current Only1 Current or Timer2 Current and Timer

F109 Unsigned 16 bit integer STARTER STATUS SWITCH0 Starter Aux a (52a)1 Starter Aux b (52b)

F110 Unsigned 16 bit integer EMERGENCY RESTART SWITCH INPUT FUNCTION0 Off1 Emergency Switch2 General Switch3 Digital Counter4 Waveform Capture5 DeviceNet Control6 Reserved7 Reserved

F111 Unsigned 16 bit integer TRIP RELAYS0 none1 Trip2 Aux13 Aux24 Trip & Aux15 Trip & Aux26 Aux1 & Aux27 Trip & Aux1 & Aux2

F112 Unsigned 16 bit integer NOT DEFINED01

F113 Unsigned 16 bit integer ALARM RELAYS0 None1 Alarm2 Aux13 Aux24 Alarm & Aux15 Alarm & Aux26 Aux1 & Aux27 Alarm & Aux1 & Aux2

F114 Unsigned 16 bit integer COUNTER TYPE0 Increment1 Decrement

F115 Unsigned 16 bit integer ALARM/TRIP TYPE SELECTION0 Off1 Latched2 Unlatched

F116 Unsigned 16 bit integer SWITCH TYPE0 Normally Open1 Normally Closed

F117 Unsigned 16 bit integer RESET MODE0 All Resets1 Remote Reset Only2 Local Reset Only




9

F119 Unsigned 16 bit integer BACKUP RELAYS0 None1 Aux 12 Aux1 & Aux23 Aux2

F120 Unsigned 16 bit integer RTD TYPE0 100 Ohm Platinum1 120 Ohm Nickel2 100 Ohm Nickel3 10 Ohm Copper

F121 Unsigned 16 bit integer RTD APPLICATION0 None1 Stator2 Bearing3 Ambient4 Other

F122 Unsigned 16 bit integer LOCAL/REMOTE RTD VOTING SELECTION0 Off1 RTD #12 RTD #23 RTD #34 RTD #45 RTD #56 RTD #67 RTD #78 RTD #89 RTD #910 RTD #1011 RTD #1112 RTD #1213 All Stator

F123 Unsigned 16 bit integer ALARM STATUS0 Off1 Not Active2 Timing Out3 Active4 Latched

F124 Unsigned 16 bit integer PHASE ROTATION AT MOTOR TERMINALS0 ABC1 ACB

F125 Unsigned 16 bit integer STARTER TYPE0 Breaker1 Contactor




9

F127 Unsigned 16 bit integer ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETER SELECTION0 Phase A Current1 Phase B Current2 Phase C Current3 Average Phase Current4 AB Line Voltage5 BC Line Voltage6 CA Line Voltage7 Average Line Voltage8 Phase AN Voltage9 Phase BN Voltage10 Phase CN Voltage11 Average Phase Voltage12 Hottest Stator RTD13 Local RTD #114 Local RTD #215 Local RTD #316 Local RTD #417 Local RTD #518 Local RTD #619 Local RTD #720 Local RTD #821 Local RTD #922 Local RTD #1023 Local RTD #1124 Local RTD #1225 Power Factor

F127ctd.

26 Reactive Power (kvar)27 Real Power (kW)28 Apparent Power (KVA)29 Thermal Capacity Used30 Relay Lockout Time31 Reserved32 Reserved33 Reserved34 Reserved35 Motor Load36 MWhrs

F128 Unsigned 16 bit integer CURVE STYLE0 Standard1 Custom

F130 Unsigned 16 bit integer DIGITAL INPUT PICKUP TYPE0 Over1 Under

F131 Unsigned 16 bit integer INPUT SWITCH STATUS0 Open1 Closed

F133 Unsigned 16 bit integer MOTOR STATUS0 Stopped1 Starting2 Running3 Overloaded4 Tripped




9

F134 Unsigned 16 bit integer CAUSE OF EVENT0 No Event1 Forced Setpoints Dump2 Speed Switch Trip3 Differential Switch Trip4 Reserved5 Spare Switch Trip6 Emergency Switch Trip7 Unexpected Reset8 EEPROM Memory9 Reset Switch Trip10 Upgrade Default Dump11 Overload Trip12 Short Circuit Trip13 Short Circuit Backup Trip14 Mechanical Jam Trip15 Undercurrent Trip16 Current Unbalance Trip17 Single Phasing Trip18 Ground Fault Trip19 Ground Fault Backup Trip20 Overload Block21 Acceleration Timer Trip22 Start Inhibit Block23 Starts Hour Block24 Time Between Starts Block25 Restart Block26 Backspin Block




9

F134con’t

27 Single Shot Restart28 Undervoltage Trip29 Overvoltage Trip30 Voltage Phase Reversal Trip31 Underfrequency Trip32 Overfrequency Trip33 Lead Power Factor Trip34 Lag Power Factor Trip35 Positive Kvar Trip36 Negative Kvar Trip37 Underpower Trip38 Reverse Power Trip39 RTD1 Trip40 RTD2 Trip41 RTD3 Trip42 RTD4 Trip43 RTD5 Trip44 RTD6 Trip45 RTD7 Trip46 RTD8 Trip47 RTD9 Trip48 RTD10 Trip49 RTD11 Trip50 RTD12 Trip51 Reserved52 Reserved53 Spare Switch Alarm54 Emergency Switch Alarm55 Diff Switch Alarm56 Speed Switch Alarm57 Reset Switch Alarm58 Reserved59 Thermal Capacity Alarm60 Overload Alarm61 Mechanical Jam Alarm62 Undercurrent Alarm63 Current Unbalance Alarm64 Ground Fault Alarm65 Undervoltage Alarm66 Overvoltage Alarm67 Overfrequency Alarm68 Underfrequency Alarm69 Lead Power Factor Alarm70 Lag Power Factor Alarm71 Positive Kvar Alarm72 Negative Kvar Alarm73 Underpower Alarm74 Reverse Power Alarm75 RTD1 Alarm76 RTD2 Alarm77 RTD3 Alarm78 RTD4 Alarm79 RTD5 Alarm80 RTD6 Alarm




9

F134con’t

81 RTD7 Alarm82 RTD8 Alarm83 RTD9 Alarm84 RTD10 Alarm85 RTD11 Alarm86 RTD12 Alarm87 RTD1 Hi Alarm88 RTD2 Hi Alarm89 RTD3 Hi Alarm90 RTD4 Hi Alarm91 RTD5 Hi Alarm92 RTD6 Hi Alarm93 RTD7 Hi Alarm94 RTD8 Hi Alarm95 RTD9 Hi Alarm96 RTD10 Hi Alarm97 RTD11 Hi Alarm98 RTD12 Hi Alarm99 Open RTD Alarm100 Lost RTD Comm Alarm101 Low RTD Alarm102 Trip Counter Alarm103 Current Demand Alarm104 Kw Demand Alarm105 Kvar Demand Alarm106 Kva Demand Alarm107 Digital Counter Alarm108 Service Alarm109 Control Power Lost110 Control Power App111 Emergency Restart Closed112 Emergency Restart Open113 Start While Blocked114 Reserved115 Breaker Failure116 Welded Contactor117 Incomplete Sequence Trip118 Reserved119 Reserved120 Reserved121 RRTD1 RTD1 Trip122 RRTD1 RTD2 Trip123 RRTD1 RTD3 Trip124 RRTD1 RTD4 Trip125 RRTD1 RTD5 Trip126 RRTD1 RTD6 Trip127 RRTD1 RTD7 Trip128 RRTD1 RTD8 Trip129 RRTD1 RTD9 Trip130 RRTD1 RTD10 Trip131 RRTD1 RTD11 Trip132 RRTD1 RTD12 Trip133 RRTD2 RTD1 Trip134 RRTD2 RTD2 Trip




9

F134con’t

135 RRTD2 RTD3 Trip136 RRTD2 RTD4 Trip137 RRTD2 RTD5 Trip138 RRTD2 RTD6 Trip139 RRTD2 RTD7 Trip140 RRTD2 RTD8 Trip141 RRTD2 RTD9 Trip142 RRTD2 RTD10 Trip143 RRTD2 RTD11 Trip144 RRTD2 RTD12 Trip145 RRTD3 RTD1 Trip146 RRTD3 RTD2 Trip147 RRTD3 RTD3 Trip148 RRTD3 RTD4 Trip149 RRTD3 RTD5 Trip150 RRTD3 RTD6 Trip151 RRTD3 RTD7 Trip152 RRTD3 RTD8 Trip153 RRTD3 RTD9 Trip154 RRTD3 RTD10 Trip155 RRTD3 RTD11 Trip156 RRTD3 RTD12 Trip157 RRTD4 RTD1 Trip158 RRTD4 RTD2 Trip159 RRTD4 RTD3 Trip160 RRTD4 RTD4 Trip161 RRTD4 RTD5 Trip162 RRTD4 RTD6 Trip163 RRTD4 RTD7 Trip164 RRTD4 RTD8 Trip165 RRTD4 RTD9 Trip166 RRTD4 RTD10 Trip167 RRTD4 RTD11 Trip168 RRTD4 RTD12 Trip169 RRTD1 RTD1 Alarm170 RRTD1 RTD2 Alarm171 RRTD1 RTD3 Alarm172 RRTD1 RTD4 Alarm173 RRTD1 RTD5 Alarm174 RRTD1 RTD6 Alarm175 RRTD1 RTD7 Alarm176 RRTD1 RTD8 Alarm177 RRTD1 RTD9 Alarm178 RRTD1 RTD10 Alarm179 RRTD1 RTD11 Alarm180 RRTD1 RTD12 Alarm181 RRTD1 RTD1 Hi Alarm182 RRTD1 RTD2 Hi Alarm183 RRTD1 RTD3 Hi Alarm184 RRTD1 RTD4 Hi Alarm185 RRTD1 RTD5 Hi Alarm186 RRTD1 RTD6 Hi Alarm187 RRTD1 RTD7 Hi Alarm188 RRTD1 RTD8 Hi Alarm




9

F134con’t

189 RRTD1 RTD9 Hi Alarm190 RRTD1 RTD10 Hi Alarm191 RRTD1 RTD11 Hi Alarm192 RRTD1 RTD12 Hi Alarm193 RRTD1 Open RTD Alarm194 RRTD1 Low RTD Alarm195 RRTD2 RTD1 Alarm196 RRTD2 RTD2 Alarm197 RRTD2 RTD3 Alarm198 RRTD2 RTD4 Alarm199 RRTD2 RTD5 Alarm200 RRTD2 RTD6 Alarm201 RRTD2 RTD7 Alarm202 RRTD2 RTD8 Alarm203 RRTD2 RTD9 Alarm204 RRTD2 RTD10 Alarm205 RRTD2 RTD11 Alarm206 RRTD2 RTD12 Alarm207 RRTD2 RTD1 Hi Alarm208 RRTD2 RTD2 Hi Alarm209 RRTD2 RTD3 Hi Alarm210 RRTD2 RTD4 Hi Alarm211 RRTD2 RTD5 Hi Alarm212 RRTD2 RTD6 Hi Alarm213 RRTD2 RTD7 Hi Alarm214 RRTD2 RTD8 Hi Alarm215 RRTD2 RTD9 Hi Alarm216 RRTD2 RTD10 Hi Alarm217 RRTD2 RTD11 Hi Alarm218 RRTD2 RTD12 Hi Alarm219 RRTD2 Open RTD Alarm220 RRTD2 Low RTD Alarm221 RRTD3 RTD1 Alarm222 RRTD3 RTD2 Alarm223 RRTD3 RTD3 Alarm224 RRTD3 RTD4 Alarm225 RRTD3 RTD5 Alarm226 RRTD3 RTD6 Alarm227 RRTD3 RTD7 Alarm228 RRTD3 RTD8 Alarm229 RRTD3 RTD9 Alarm230 RRTD3 RTD10 Alarm231 RRTD3 RTD11 Alarm232 RRTD3 RTD12 Alarm233 RRTD3 RTD1 Hi Alarm234 RRTD3 RTD2 Hi Alarm235 RRTD3 RTD3 Hi Alarm236 RRTD3 RTD4 Hi Alarm237 RRTD3 RTD5 Hi Alarm238 RRTD3 RTD6 Hi Alarm239 RRTD3 RTD7 Hi Alarm240 RRTD3 RTD8 Hi Alarm241 RRTD3 RTD9 Hi Alarm242 RRTD3 RTD10 Hi Alarm




9

F134con’t

243 RRTD3 RTD11 Hi Alarm244 RRTD3 RTD12 Hi Alarm245 RRTD3 Open RTD Alarm246 RRTD3 Low RTD Alarm247 RRTD4 RTD1 Alarm248 RRTD4 RTD2 Alarm249 RRTD4 RTD3 Alarm250 RRTD4 RTD4 Alarm251 RRTD4 RTD5 Alarm252 RRTD4 RTD6 Alarm253 RRTD4 RTD7 Alarm254 RRTD4 RTD8 Alarm255 RRTD4 RTD9 Alarm256 RRTD4 RTD10 Alarm257 RRTD4 RTD11 Alarm258 RRTD4 RTD12 Alarm259 RRTD4 RTD1 Hi Alarm260 RRTD4 RTD2 Hi Alarm261 RRTD4 RTD3 Hi Alarm262 RRTD4 RTD4 Hi Alarm263 RRTD4 RTD5 Hi Alarm264 RRTD4 RTD6 Hi Alarm265 RRTD4 RTD7 Hi Alarm266 RRTD4 RTD8 Hi Alarm267 RRTD4 RTD9 Hi Alarm268 RRTD4 RTD10 Hi Alarm269 RRTD4 RTD11 Hi Alarm270 RRTD4 RTD12 Hi Alarm271 RRTD4 Open RTD Alarm272 RRTD4 Low RTD Alarm273 Power Failure274 Software Reset275 Clock Failure276 A/D Failure277 Autorestart Attempt278 Autorestart Success279 Autorestart Aborted 1280 Autorestart Aborted 2281 Autorestart Aborted 3282 Autorestart Aborted 4283 Autorestart Aborted 5284 Motor Running285 Motor Stopped286 Anybus Comms Reset287 RTD 1 Open Alarm288 RTD 2 Open Alarm289 RTD 3 Open Alarm290 RTD 4 Open Alarm291 RTD 5 Open Alarm292 RTD 6 Open Alarm293 RTD 7 Open Alarm294 RTD 8 Open Alarm295 RTD 9 Open Alarm296 RTD 10 Open Alarm




9

F134con’t

297 RTD 11 Open Alarm298 RTD 12 Open Alarm299 Starter Operation Monitor Alarm300 Starter Operation Monitor Trip301 Block Undercurrent/Underpower (37)302 Unblock Undercurrent/Underpower (37)303 Block Current Unbalance (46)304 Unblock Current Unbalance (46)305 Block Incomplete Sequence (48)306 Unblock Incomplete Sequence (48)307 Block Thermal Model (49)308 Unblock Thermal Model (49)309 Block Short Circuit and Backup (50)310 Unblock Short Circuit and Backup (50)311 Block Overload Alarm (51)312 Unblock Overload Alarm (51)313 Block Ground Fault (51G)314 Unblock Ground Fault (51G)315 Block Starts Per Hour and Time Between Starts (66)316 Unblock Starts Per Hour and Time Between Starts (66)

F135 Unsigned 16 bit integer MOTOR SPEED0 Low Speed (Speed 1)1 High Speed (Speed 2)

F138 Reserved ReservedF139 Reserved ReservedF141 Unsigned 16 bit integer OUTPUT RELAY STATUS

bit 0 Tripbit 1 Alarmbit 2 Auxiliary 1bit 3 Auxiliary 2

F149 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer CHANNEL 3 APPLICATION0 MODBUS1 Remote RTD

F150 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer OUTPUT RELAY STATUS0 De - Energized1 Energized

F151 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer CHANNEL TYPE0 RS 4851 Fiber Optic

F152 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer NUMBER OF RECORDS0 1 × 64 cycles1 2 × 32 cycles2 4 × 16 cycles3 8 × 8 cycles

F156 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer REMOTE RTD COMMUNICATION STATUS0 Remote RTD Module Communication Lost1 Remote RTD Communication on Line




9

F157 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH INPUT FUNCTION0 OFF1 Differential Switch2 General Switch3 Digital Counter4 Waveform Capture5 DeviceNet Control6 Reserved7 Reserved

F158 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer SPEED SWITCH INPUT FUNCTION0 OFF1 Speed Switch2 General Switch3 Digital Counter4 Waveform Capture5 DeviceNet Control6 Reserved7 Reserved

F159 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer SPARE SWITCH INPUT FUNCTION0 OFF1 Starter Status Switch2 General Switch3 Digital Counter4 Waveform Capture5 DeviceNet Control6 Reserved7 Reserved

F160 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer RESET SWITCH INPUT FUNCTION0 OFF1 Reset Switch2 General Switch3 Digital Counter4 Waveform Capture5 DeviceNet Control6 Reserved7 Reserved

F161 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer OUTPUT RELAY FAILSAFE CODE0 Failsafe1 Non Failsafe

F162 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer ACCESS LEVEL0 Read Only1 Read / Write2 Factory Service

F163 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer RRTD DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTION0 Off1 undefined2 General Switch3 Digital Counter

F164 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer COMMUNICATIONS MODULE STATUS0x0001 Ethernet Connection OK0x0002 IP Configuration OK0x0004 IP Address Error0x0008 Communications Module Error0x0010 Network Activity Present




9

F165 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer OVERALL HOTTEST STATOR RTD OWNER0 No RTDs programmed or available1 Remote RTD #12 Remote RTD #23 Remote RTD #34 Remote RTD #45 Local 369

F166 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer ENERGY UNIT DISPLAY0 Mega1 Kilo

F169 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer TRIP AND ALARM RELAYS0 None1 Trip2 Alarm3 Aux14 Aux25 Trip and Alarm6 Trip and Aux17 Trip and Aux28 Alarm and Aux19 Alarm and Aux210 Aux1 and Aux211 Trip and Alarm and Aux112 Trip and Alarm and Aux213 Trip and Aux1 and Aux214 Alarm and Aux1 and Aux215 All Relays

F180 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer ANSI/IEEE DEVICE0 37 - Undercurrent/Underpower1 46 - Current Unbalance2 48 - Incomplete Sequence3 49 - Thermal Model4 50 - Short Circuit and Backup5 51 - Overload Alarm6 51G - Ground Fault7 66 - Starts Per Hour / Time Between Starts

F181 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer OUTPUT RELAY TYPE0 Latched1 Pulsed

F182 Unsigned 16 Bit Integer PROTECTION FUNCTION BLOCKING STATUS0 Not Blocked1 Blocked




9

GE Multilin 369 Motor Management Relay A-1

APPENDIX A A.1 CHANGE NOTES

AAPPENDIX A REVISIONSA.1 CHANGE NOTES A.1.1 REVISION HISTORY

A.1.2 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BK

A.1.3 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BJ

Table A–1: REVISION HISTORY

MANUAL P/N 369 REVISION RELEASE DATE ECO

1601-0077-B1 53CMB105.000 07 May 1999 ---

1601-0077-B2 53CMB110.000 08 June 1999 369-082

1601-0077-B3 53CMB110.000 15 June 1999 369-085

1601-0077-B4 53CMB110.000 04 August 1999 369-094

1601-0077-B5 53CMB120.000 15 October 1999 369-116

1601-0077-B6 53CMB130.000 03 January 2000 369-123

1601-0077-B7 53CMB142.000 03 April 2000 369-130

1601-0777-B8 53CMB145.000 14 June 2000 369-146

1601-0777-B9 53CMB160.000 12 October 2000 369-158

1601-0777-BA 53CMB161.000 19 October 2000 369-161

1601-0077-BB 53CMB17x.000 09 February 2001 369-170

1601-0077-BC 53CMB18x.000 15 June 2001 369-176

1601-0077-BD 53CMB19x.000 01 August 2002 369-181

1601-0077-BE 53CMB20x.000 01 March 2004 369-221

1601-0077-BF 53CMB21x.000 05 November 2004 369-228

1601-0077-BG 53CMB22x.000 11 April 2005 369-240

1601-0077-BH 53CMB23x.000 19 September 2005 369-252

1601-0077-BJ 53CMB24x.000 21 November 2005 369-261

1601-0077-BK 53CMB25x.000 May 15, 2006 369-271

CHANGES

Added new START CONTROL RELAY TIMER setpoint under the Reduced Voltage Starting menu

Added new Modbus register for “Starts Per Hour Lockout Time” at address 0x02CA

Section 5.10.5: SPEED SWITCH modified to reflect the correct front panel display order

Table in section 8.2.3 updated to reflect correct ground fault CT range

Broadcast date and time in Modbus address corrected (0x00F0 and 0x00F2)

DeviceNet Assembly object, class code 04h, instance 68h, attribute 03 access type corrected to “GET”

Added ODVA DeviceNet CONFORMANCE TESTED™ certification to technical specifications

Updated section 2.2.10: TYPE TEST STANDARDS to reflect updates to IEC and EN test numbers

CHANGES

Updated custom curve ranges from “0 to 32767 s” to “0 to 65534 s”

A-2 369 Motor Management Relay GE Multilin

A.1 CHANGE NOTES APPENDIX A

AA.1.4 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BH

A.1.5 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BG

A.1.6 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BF

A.1.7 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BE

A.1.8 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BD

A.1.9 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BC

CHANGES

Updated manual for the Profibus-DPV1 option

Added BLOCK PROTECTION FUNCTIONS and FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS sections

Added communications sections of Chapter 9

CHANGES

Updated the 369 order code for the Harsh Environment option

Added setpoints for DeviceNet communications and Starter Operation Monitor

Added DeviceNet communications section to Chapter 9

CHANGES

Changes made to Modbus/TCP interface

Additions for variable frequency functionality

CHANGES

Added MOTOR LOAD AVERAGING INTERVAL setpoint to the Thermal Model feature.

Added starter failure and energy metering to analog output parameters

CHANGES

Added DEFAULT TO HOTTEST STATOR RTD TEMP setpoint to default messages.

Updated Section 5.3.7: AUTORESTART and Figure 5–5: AUTORESTART LOGIC.

Updated EVENT RECORDER section to reflect 250 events

Added EVENT RECORDS setpoints to S1 369 SETUP section.

Added Filter/Safety Ground question to Section 7.2.1: FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS.

Updated MEMORY MAP and MEMORY MAP FORMATS tables.

CHANGES

Updated ORDERING TABLE to reflect Modbus/TCP option

Updated Figure 1–1: FRONT AND REAR VIEW to 840702BF

Updated Figure 3–4: TYPICAL WIRING

Added new Modbus/TCP setpoints and description in Section 5.2.4: COMMUNICATIONS

Updated Figures 5–3 and 5–4, REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTER AUXILIARY INPUTS

GE Multilin 369 Motor Management Relay A-3

APPENDIX A A.1 CHANGE NOTES

A

A.1.10 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BB

A.1.11 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BA

There were no changes to the content of the manual for this release.

A.1.12 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-B9

A.1.13 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-B8

Firmware version 53CMB145.000 contains only minor software changes that do not affect the functionalityof the 369 or the 1601-0777-B8 manual contents.

Updated Section 7.2.4: CT SELECTION to fix errors in the application example

Updated Figure 8–1: SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP

Updated Table 9–1: SETPOINTS TABLE to include new Modbus/TCP setpoints

Updated MEMORY MAP and MEMORY MAP FORMATS to include new Modbus/TCP setpoints

CHANGES

Updated Figure 1–1: FRONT AND REAR VIEW

Corrected errors in Table 3–1: TERMINAL LIST

Updated Figure 3–4: TYPICAL WIRING

Removed SINGLE VT WYE/DELTA connection diagram in Chapter 3 (feature no longer supported)

Removed ENABLE SINGLE VT OPERATION setpoint from Section 5.3.2: CT/VT SETUP (feature no longer supported)

Added new Section 5.3.7: AUTORESTART

CHANGES

Updated Figure 3-4: TYPICAL WIRING

Updated Figure 3-15: REMOTE RTD MODULE

Added menu item PROFIBUS ADDRESS to the 369 Setup Communications menu

Added menu item CLEAR ENERGY DATA to the 369 Setup Clear/Preset Data menu

Added Section 10.2: PROFIBUS PROTOCOL to Communications chapter

CHANGES

NOTE

A-4 369 Motor Management Relay GE Multilin

A.2 WARRANTY APPENDIX A

AA.2 WARRANTY A.2.1 WARRANTY INFORMATION

GE MULTILIN RELAY WARRANTY

General Electric Multilin (GE Multilin) warrants each relay it manufacturesto be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal useand service for a period of 24 months from date of shipment from factory.

In the event of a failure covered by warranty, GE Multilin will undertake torepair or replace the relay providing the warrantor determined that it isdefective and it is returned with all transportation charges prepaid to anauthorized service centre or the factory. Repairs or replacement underwarranty will be made without charge.

Warranty shall not apply to any relay which has been subject to misuse,negligence, accident, incorrect installation or use not in accordance withinstructions nor any unit that has been altered outside a GE Multilin autho-rized factory outlet.

GE Multilin is not liable for special, indirect or consequential damages orfor loss of profit or for expenses sustained as a result of a relay malfunc-tion, incorrect application or adjustment.

For complete text of Warranty (including limitations and disclaimers), referto GE Multilin Standard Conditions of Sale.

GE Multilin 369 Motor Management Relay i

INDEX

INDEX

Numerics2 PHASE CT CONFIGURATION ....................................... 7-20269-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST ............................ 3-3369

pc interface ..................................................................... 4-35A

ground CT installation .................................................... 3-17input ............................................................................... 8-3

86 LOCKOUT SWITCH....................................................... 7-6

AA1 STATUS ....................................................................... 6-3A2 METERING DATA ......................................................... 6-7A3 LEARNED DATA ......................................................... 6-12A4 STATISTICAL DATA ................................................... 6-14A5 EVENT RECORD ........................................................ 6-16A6 RELAY INFORMATION ............................................... 6-17ACCELERATION TRIP .............................................5-41, 7-12ACCESS SECURITY .......................................................... 5-4ACCESS SWITCH ............................................................ 5-60ACCESSORIES ................................................................. 1-2ACTUAL VALUES .............................................................. 6-1

main menu ...................................................................... 6-1overview ......................................................................... 6-1page 6 menu ................................................................. 6-17

ADDITIONAL FEATURES ................................................... 2-3ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TING ...................................... 8-7ALARM RELAY

setpoints ....................................................................... 5-17ALARM STATUS ................................................................ 6-4AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ................................................. 2-9ANALOG

inputs and outputs ........................................................... 8-5outputs ......................................................... 3-10, 3-11, 5-62outputs (Option M) ........................................................... 2-5

APPROVALS / CERTIFICATION ......................................... 2-9AUTO TRANSFORMER STARTER WIRING ...................... 7-24AUTORESTART .......................................................5-20, 5-22AUX 1 RELAY

see AUXILIARY RELAYSAUX 2 RELAY

see AUXILIARY RELAYSAUXILIARY RELAYS

setpoints ....................................................................... 5-17

BBACK PORTS (3) ............................................................... 2-6BACKSPIN

detection ....................................................................... 5-43voltage inputs .................................................................. 3-9

BEARING RTDS .............................................................. 7-12BSD INPUTS (OPTION B) .................................................. 2-5

CCLEAR/PRESET DATA ...................................................... 5-9COMMUNICATIONS ................................................... 2-6, 9-1

control .......................................................................... 5-18Modbus/TCP ................................................................... 5-5RS232...................................................................... 4-5, 4-6RS485...................................................................... 4-5, 4-6

CONTRAST ....................................................................... 5-4

CONTROLfunctions........................................................................ 5-18power ..................................................................... 3-7, 3-12

COOL TIME CONSTANTS ................................................ 7-14CORE BALANCE CONNECTION .........................................7-2CRC-16 ALGORITHM ....................................................... 9-31CT

burden .............................................................................7-8circuit ..............................................................................7-8ground CT primary ......................................................... 5-11phase CT primary .......................................................... 5-11secondary resistance .......................................................7-8selection ..........................................................................7-7setpoints........................................................................ 5-11size and saturation ...........................................................7-7withstand .........................................................................7-7

CT AND VTpolarity ............................................................................7-5

CT/VT SETUP .................................................................. 5-11CURRENT

metering ..........................................................................6-7unbalance ...................................................................... 5-38

CURRENT DEMAND ........................................................ 5-14CURRENT TRANSFORMER

see CTCUSTOM OVERLOAD CURVE .......................................... 5-30

DDATA

frame format and data rate ............................................. 9-30packet format ................................................................. 9-30

DATE .................................................................................5-7DEFAULT MESSAGES

cycle time ........................................................................5-4setpoints..........................................................................5-9timeout ............................................................................5-4

DEMANDcalculation ..................................................................... 5-14metering ........................................................................ 6-10setpoints........................................................................ 5-14

DEVICENETcommunications ............................................................. 9-15object classes ................................................................ 9-15settings ...........................................................................5-6specifications ...................................................................2-6

DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES ..................................................6-4DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ................................................. 2-10DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH .................................................. 5-61DIGITAL COUNTER ......................................................... 5-59DIGITAL INPUT ..................................................................7-6

status ..............................................................................6-5trip coil supervision ..........................................................8-5

DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTIONdigital counter ................................................................ 5-59general switch ............................................................... 5-58waveform capture .......................................................... 5-59

DISPLAY............................................................................4-1preferences .....................................................................5-4

DO’S AND DON’TS ............................................................7-5DUST/MOISTURE ..................................................... 2-9, 2-10

EELECTRICAL INSTALLATION .............................................3-6ELECTRICAL INTERFACE..................................................9-1

ii 369 Motor Management Relay GE Multilin

INDEX

EMERGENCY RESTART .................................................. 5-60EMI ................................................................................. 2-10ENABLE

start inhibit .................................................................... 7-12ENERVISTA VIEWPOINT WITH THE 369 .......................... 4-23ENVIRONMENATAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................. 2-9ENVIRONMENT ............................................................... 2-10ERROR

checking ........................................................................ 9-30responses ..................................................................... 9-32

ETHERNETspecifications................................................................... 2-6

EVENT RECORDER ......................................................... 9-34

FFACEPLATE

interface .......................................................................... 4-1FACTORY DATA .............................................................. 5-10FAQ ................................................................................... 7-2FAST TRANSIENTS ......................................................... 2-10FIBER OPTIC PORT (OPTION F)........................................ 2-6FIRMWARE

history ............................................................................. 1-2upgrading via EnerVista 369 setup software.................... 4-15version .......................................................................... 6-17

FLA ................................................................................. 5-11FLASH MESSAGES

duration ........................................................................... 5-4FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS

Modbus registers ........................................................... 9-50settings ......................................................................... 5-23

FREQUENCY ................................................................... 5-12FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS ................................... 7-2FRONT PORT .................................................................... 2-6

communicating ................................................................ 7-2FULL LOAD AMPS ........................................................... 5-11

GGATEWAY ADDRESS ........................................................ 5-6GENERAL SWITCH .......................................................... 5-58GROUND

(1A/5A) ACCURACY TEST ............................................... 8-3accuracy test ................................................................... 8-3bus .................................................................................. 7-5CT........................................................................ 5-11, 7-10current input .................................................................... 3-8fault ..................................................................... 5-39, 7-12fault detection

ungrounded systems ............................................ 7-21filter ................................................................................ 7-5safety .............................................................................. 7-5

GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS ......................................... 2-1

HHARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING ................................. 8-2HGF GROUND CT INSTALLATION

3” and 5” window ........................................................... 3-188” window ...................................................................... 3-18

HOT/COLD CURVE RATIO ...................................... 5-32, 7-10HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO ....................................... 5-25HUMIDITY ................................................................ 2-9, 2-10

IIED SETUP ....................................................................... 4-3IMPULSE TEST ................................................................2-10INPUTS ............................................................................. 2-4INSTALLATION ................................................................. 3-1

electrical ......................................................................... 3-6mechanical ..................................................................... 3-1upgrade .......................................................................... 4-3

INSULATION RESISTANCE ..............................................2-10INTRODUCTION AND ORDERING ..................................... 1-1IP ADDRESS ..................................................................... 5-5

KKEYPAD............................................................................ 4-2

LLAG POWER FACTOR......................................................5-54LAST TRIP DATA .............................................................. 6-3LEAD POWER FACTOR....................................................5-54LEARNED START CAPACITY ...........................................7-19LOCAL / REMOTE RTD OPERATION ................................5-46LOCAL RTD ...................................................................... 6-9

maximums .....................................................................6-13protection ......................................................................5-44

MMECHANICAL INSTALLATION ........................................... 3-1MECHANICAL JAM .................................................. 5-36, 7-11MEMORY MAP .................................................................9-34

information .....................................................................9-34MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD ................................................. 5-8METERED QUANTITIES .................................................... 2-1METERING........................................................................ 2-6MODBUS

serial communications control .........................................5-18setpoints .................................................................. 5-5, 5-6

MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS ........................................... 9-2MODBUS/TCP COMMUNICATIONS ................................... 5-5MODEL INFORMATION ....................................................6-17MODIFY OPTIONS ...........................................................5-10MONITORING SETUP.......................................................5-12MOTOR

cooling ...........................................................................5-32data ...............................................................................6-12FLA ...............................................................................5-11FLC ...............................................................................7-10rated voltage ..................................................................5-11statistics ........................................................................6-15status ...................................................................... 6-3, 6-4status detection ..............................................................7-13thermal limits .................................................................. 7-9

MOTOR FLA .....................................................................5-11MPM-369

conversion terminal list .................................................... 3-4MTM-369

conversion terminal list .................................................... 3-4

NNEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER ........................................5-56NOMINAL FREQUENCY ...................................................5-12

GE Multilin 369 Motor Management Relay iii

INDEX

OOPEN RTD ALARM .......................................................... 5-48OPERATION .................................................................... 5-17OPTIONS, MODIFYING.................................................... 5-10ORDERING ....................................................................... 1-1OUTPUT RELAYS ...............................................2-5, 3-12, 8-6

forcing .......................................................................... 5-23setpoints ...............................................................5-16, 5-17

OUTPUTS ......................................................................... 2-5OVERFREQUENCY ......................................................... 5-52OVERLOAD

alarm ............................................................................ 5-34curve ............................................................................ 7-11curve test ........................................................................ 8-7pickup ........................................................................... 7-10

OVERLOAD CURVEScustom .......................................................................... 5-30setpoints ...............................................................5-26, 5-27standard....................................................... 5-27, 5-28, 5-29

OVERLOAD/STALL/THERMAL MODEL............................... 2-7OVERVOLTAGE .............................................................. 5-50

PPARITY ............................................................................. 5-5PASSWORDS

comm password .............................................................. 5-4PC PROGRAM

software history ............................................................... 1-3PC SOFTWARE

obtaining ......................................................................... 7-2PHASE

CT ........................................................................5-11, 7-10CT installation ............................................................... 3-16current (CT) inputs .......................................................... 3-7current accuracy test ....................................................... 8-2line voltage input, VT (Option M) ...................................... 2-4reversal ......................................................................... 5-50voltage (VT/PT) inputs ..................................................... 3-9VT ................................................................................ 5-11

PHASE SEQUENCY ......................................................... 5-12PHASORS ....................................................................... 6-10POLARITY

CT and VT ...................................................................... 7-5POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER ......................................... 5-55POWER

measurement test ............................................................ 8-7metering.......................................................................... 6-8metering (option m) ......................................................... 2-6

POWER DEMAND ............................................................ 5-14PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ................................................. 2-1PRODUCTION TESTS ..................................................... 2-10PROFIBUS

setpoints ......................................................................... 5-6PROFIBUS ADDRESS ....................................................... 5-5PROFIBUS COMMUNICATIONS ......................................... 9-4PROFIBUS PORT (OPTION P) ........................................... 2-6PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE ............................................... 7-9PROTECTION ELEMENTS ................................................. 2-7PROTOCOL ..................................................................... 9-30

RREAL TIME CLOCK ........................................................... 6-5

setpoints ......................................................................... 5-7

REDUCED RTD LEAD NUMBER ....................................... 7-23REDUCED VOLTAGE START .................................. 5-18, 5-19RELAY LABEL DEFINITION ................................................1-6REMOTE RESET .............................................................. 5-61REMOTE RTD ....................................................................6-9

address ...........................................................................5-5maximums ..................................................................... 6-13module electrical installation .......................................... 3-15module mechanical installation ....................................... 3-14protection ...................................................................... 5-45

RESET............................................................................. 5-17RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT CONNECTION .......................7-2REVERSE POWER........................................................... 5-57REVISION HISTORY ......................................................... A-1RFI .................................................................................. 2-10ROLLING DEMAND WINDOW ........................................... 5-14RRTD ADDRESS ................................................................5-5RS232

communicating .................................................................7-2program port ....................................................................4-1setpoints..........................................................................5-5

RS232 COMMUNICATIONSconfiguring with EnerVista 369 Setup ................................4-5configuring with EnerVista 369 setup ................................4-6

RS4854 wire ..............................................................................7-2cable ...............................................................................7-6communication difficulties ................................................7-2communications ............................................................. 3-13communications port ........................................................7-5converter .........................................................................7-5distances .........................................................................7-6full duplex ........................................................................7-2interfacing master device .................................................7-6repeater...........................................................................7-6setpoints..........................................................................5-5

RS485 COMMUNICATIONSconfiguring with EnerVista 369 setup ......................... 4-5, 4-6

RTD .......................................................................... 3-10, 7-52 wire lead compensation ............................................... 7-24accuracy test ...................................................................8-4bias ............................................................. 5-25, 5-33, 5-34bias maximum................................................................ 7-11bias mid point ................................................................ 7-11bias minimum ................................................................ 7-11circuitry ......................................................................... 7-22grounding ........................................................................7-6inputs ............................................................................ 3-10inputs (Option r) ...............................................................2-5stator ............................................................................. 7-12

RUNNING COOL TIME ..................................................... 7-10

SS10 ANALOG OUTPUTS .................................................. 5-62S11 369 TESTING ............................................................ 5-63S2 SYSTEM SETUP ......................................................... 5-11S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION .......................................... 5-24S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS ................................................ 5-35S5 MOTOR START / INHIBITS.......................................... 5-41S6 RTD TEMPERATURE .................................................. 5-44S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ................................................ 5-49S8 POWER ELEMENTS.................................................... 5-53S9 DIGITAL INPUTS ........................................................ 5-58SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP .............................8-1SECURITY .........................................................................5-4SELF-TEST MODE ........................................................... 5-15

iv 369 Motor Management Relay GE Multilin

INDEX

SELF-TEST RELAY .......................................................... 5-15SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONTROL ............................. 5-18SETPOINTS ....................................................................... 5-1

access............................................................................. 5-4entering with EnerVista 369 Setup software ...................... 4-9entry ............................................................................... 4-2loading from a file .......................................................... 4-14main menu ...................................................................... 5-1page 1 menu ................................................................... 5-4saving to a file ............................................................... 4-15

SHORT CIRCUIT.............................................................. 5-35test ................................................................................. 8-8trip ................................................................................ 7-11

SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM ..................................... 5-48SOFTWARE

entering setpoints ............................................................ 4-9installation ....................................................................... 4-3loading setpoints ........................................................... 4-14saving setpoints ............................................................. 4-15serial communications ............................................... 4-5, 4-6

SPARE SWITCH .............................................................. 5-60SPEED SWITCH .............................................................. 5-61START INHIBIT ...............................................5-41, 7-14, 7-18

enabled ......................................................................... 7-19starter

status switch.................................................................. 5-19STARTER FAILURE ......................................................... 5-13STARTS/HOUR ................................................................ 7-12STATOR RTDS ................................................................ 7-12STOPPED COOL TIME..................................................... 7-11STOPPED COOL TIME CONSTANT.................................. 7-14SUBNET MASK .................................................................. 5-6SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS................................ 9-31SYSTEM .......................................................................... 5-12SYSTEM FREQUENCY .................................................... 5-12

TTECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .......................................... 2-4TEMPERATURE ............................................................... 2-10TEMPERATURE DISPLAY .................................................. 5-4TERMINAL

identification .................................................................... 3-2layout .............................................................................. 3-5list ................................................................................... 3-2

TESTburn in ........................................................................... 2-10calibration and functionality ............................................ 2-10dielectric strength .......................................................... 2-10ground accuracy .............................................................. 8-3hardware functional ......................................................... 8-2input accuracy ................................................................. 8-2overload curve ................................................................. 8-7phase current accuracy .................................................... 8-2power measurement ......................................................... 8-7production ..................................................................... 2-10RTD accuracy .................................................................. 8-4secondary injection .......................................................... 8-1setup ............................................................................... 8-1short circuit ..................................................................... 8-8type test standards ........................................................ 2-10unbalance ....................................................................... 8-8voltage

metering ............................................................... 6-7phase reversal ....................................................... 8-8

TESTINGanalog outputs ............................................................... 5-63

output relays ..................................................................5-63setpoints ........................................................................5-63

THERMALcapacity calculation ........................................................7-17capacity used .................................................................7-17limit ...............................................................................7-14limit curves ....................................................................7-18

THERMAL CAPACITY USED .............................................5-25THERMAL MODEL

cooling ...........................................................................5-33description .....................................................................5-25limit curves ....................................................................5-24setpoints ........................................................................5-25

TIME ................................................................................. 5-7TIME BETWEEN STARTS .................................................7-12TIMING ............................................................................9-31TRENDING .......................................................................4-17TRIP COUNTER ............................................... 5-13, 6-9, 6-14TRIP RELAY.....................................................................3-12

setpoints ........................................................................5-17TWO PHASE WIRING .......................................................7-20TWO WIRE RTD LEAD COMPENSATION ..........................7-24TYPE TEST STANDARDS .................................................2-10

UUNBALANCE

alarm and trip .................................................................7-12bias ...............................................................................5-31bias k factor ...................................................................7-10bias of thermal capacity ..................................................7-10setpoints ........................................................................5-25test ................................................................................. 8-8

UNDERCURRENT ................................................... 5-37, 7-11UNDERFREQUENCY ........................................................5-51UNDERPOWER ................................................................5-56UNDERVOLTAGE .............................................................5-49UPGRADING FIRMWARE .................................................4-15USER DEFINABLE MEMORY MAP AREA ..........................9-34

VVIBRATION ....................................................................... 2-9VOLTAGE

input accuracy test .......................................................... 8-2metering ......................................................................... 6-7phase reversal test .......................................................... 8-8

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERsee VT

VTconnection type ..............................................................5-11ratio ...............................................................................5-11

VT RATIO.........................................................................5-11VT SETTINGS ..................................................................7-10

WWARRANTY ...................................................................... A-4WAVEFORM CAPTURE ............................. 2-6, 5-7, 5-59, 9-34

setpoints .................................................................. 5-7, 5-8WIRING DIAGRAM ............................................................ 3-6

ZZERO SEQUENCE

ground CT placement ...................................................... 3-8

369 motor management relay - ingersoll rand...

Documents